SM Topaz Xii Opal Xii

Service Manual
Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII
Volume 1/2
DOCUMENT DATA
0$18$/7,7/( 0$18$/180%(5 3$180%(56

Service Manual Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII 4022 591 92064 (03.04) PA 1314/01, Topaz-XII with FNC head
PA 1314/02, Topaz-XII with SF head
PA 1314/10, Topaz-XiII with FNC head
PA 1314/11, Topaz-XiII with SF head
PA 1314/03, Opal-XII
+,6725<
,668( '$7( 25'(5180%(5 5(9,6,21&2'( 67$786 5(/($6('2&80(17
First Issue Nov. 2001 4022 591 92061 01.01 Replaced DI-CSM-146
Second Issue May 2002 4022 591 92062 02.02 Replaced DI-CSM-168
Update October 2002 4022 591 92541 02.01 Replaced DI-CSM-173
Third Issue October 2002 4022 591 92063 02.03 Replaced DI-CSM-173
)RXUWK,VVXH $SULO &XUUHQW ',&60
Assembléon Customer Services maintains a Subscribe first to access this information. So

customer site on the internet This site provides complete the Support Request Form on the
the latest information such as bulletins, surveys Assembléon website in its entirety.
about spare parts, manuals and software The Assembléon website:
updates. The status of this document can also
be checked. www.assembleon.com
$ V V H P E O p R Q 1 H W K H U O D Q G V % 9
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced in any form, by print, photoprint, microfilm or any other
means without the written permission from Assembléon.
CONTENTS
Service Manual
VOLUME 1
CHAPTER 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
CHAPTER 2 Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
CHAPTER 3 System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
CHAPTER 4 System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
CHAPTER 5 System Trouble Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
VOLUME 2
CHAPTER 6 Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
CHAPTER 7 Required Tools and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
CHAPTER 8 Spare Parts List Topaz-XII/Opal-XII Series . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
CHAPTER 9 Abbreviations and Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
CHAPTER 10 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
CHAPTER 11 Base and Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
CHAPTER 12 Feeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
CHAPTER 13 Robots X-Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
CHAPTER 14 Vision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
CHAPTER 15 Placement Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
CHAPTER 16 Machine Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
4022 591 92064 Service Manual Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII

03.04
HOW TO REPORT DOCUMENT IRREGULARITIES
We have endeavoured to ensure that the information in this document was correct when published. If, when
using this document, errors, omissions or anomalies are discovered, please inform us using the reply-form
attached. We thank you for this service, in advance, as it will help us to ensure that you, the customer,
receive the highest possible quality of information and service.
Manual Title: Service Manual Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII
Manual Number: 4022 591 92064 Please, don’t forget to fill-in this!
PA Number: PA 1314/xx Update Code Manual: . ✍
FROM:
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DOCUMENT IRREGULARITIES:
Page/Paragraph Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erroneous Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..........................................................................
..........................................................................
..........................................................................
Consequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..........................................................................
..........................................................................
..........................................................................
Suggestion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..........................................................................
..........................................................................
..........................................................................
TO:
Document irregularities can also be
Assembléon
reported via the Assembléon website:
Supply Centre Customer Support
P.O. Box 80067 www.assembleon.com
Building BAF 2
5600 KA Eindhoven Subscribed persons only.
The Netherlands
Service Manual
Table of Contents
VOLUME 1/2
1.1 General Introduction of the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 General Introduction of the Service Manual . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 Chapter Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.4 Option Manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
CHAPTER 2 Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 Basic Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.3 Safety Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.4 Cautionary Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.5 Warning Stickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.6 ESD Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.7 Noise Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.8 Liability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.9 Hazard Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.9.1 Oil and Greases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.9.2 Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
4022 591 92064 Service Manual

03.04 Topaz-X,, Series/Opal-X,, 1
2.9.3 NSK Grease No 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.9.4 Fomblin Y VAC 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.9.5 Alcopad Cleaning Tissue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.9.6 Molykote 6169 Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.9.7 Daphne Super Multi Oil 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
3.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Ordering Sheet Topaz-XII (FNC) PA 1314/01. . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.1 Standard this Configuration Includes:. . . . . . 3-1
3.2.2 Options Factory Built-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.3 Options Field Retrofit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.5 Additional Nozzles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.6 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3 Ordering Sheet Topaz-XII (SF) PA 1314/02. . . . . . . . 3-12
3.3.1 Standard this Configuration Includes:. . . . . 3-12
3.3.2 Options Factory Built-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.3.3 Options Field Retrofit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.3.4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.3.5 Additional Nozzles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.3.6 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.4 Ordering Sheet Topaz-XiII (FNC) PA 1314/10 . . . . . . 3-22
3.4.4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.4.6 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.5 Ordering Sheet Topaz-XiII (SF) PA 1314/11 . . . . . . . 3-32
3.5.4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3.5.6 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3.6 Ordering Sheet Opal-XII PA 1314/03. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Service Manual 4022 591 92064

2 Topaz-X,, Series/Opal-X,, 03.04
3.6.4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.6.6 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2.1 General Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2.2 Electrical Overall Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2.3 Camera Positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3 Power & Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.3.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.3.2 Power Circuits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.3.3 5/12 Volt Power Supply MCX Box . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.3.3.1 Replacing the 5/12 Volt Power
Supply MCX Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.3.4 24 Volt I/O and Emergency Power
Supply (GS21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.3.5 12 Volt Power Supply for Topaz-XiII (GS22) . 4-10
4.3.6 D(river) - Power Assembly (282VDC Power) . 4-10
4.3.7 Measuring and Adjusting Data . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.3.7.1 MCX Controller Box . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.3.7.2 GS21 – 24V Power Supply . . . . . 4-12
4.3.8 Performance Check and Trouble Shooting . . 4-13
4.3.9 Maintenance Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.3.10 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.3.11 Safety Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.4 Vacuum & Pneumatic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4.4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4.4.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4.4.3 Air Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.4.4 Air Pressure Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.4.5 Pressure-drop Detection Level . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.4.6 Measurement and Adjusting Vacuum Levels . 4-18
4.4.9 Pneumatic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

4.4.9.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.4.9.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . 4-18
4.4.9.3 Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII . . . . . 4-19
4.4.9.4 Tray Changer (TC or LCS). . . . . . 4-19
4.4.9.5 Auto Tray Stacker (ATS)
(for Topaz-XII Series only) . . . . 4-19
4.4.9.6 Pneumatical Tape Feeders . . . . . 4-19
4.4.9.7 Air Supply of FES20/LCS,
Reject Station and ATS . . . . . . . 4-19
4.4.9.8 Measuring and Adjusting . . . . . 4-19
4.4.9.9 Performance Checks and
Trouble Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.4.9.10 Maintenance Actions . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.5 Control Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.5.1 MCX-controller Lay-out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.5.2 System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.5.2.1 Fourth Generation System Board 4-21
4.5.3 Application Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.5.4 Flash Board Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.5.5 Servo Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.5.6 Vision Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4.5.7 Mother Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.5.8 Floppy-drive and the Flash Disk . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.5.8.1 Floppy-disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.5.8.2 Flash-disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.5.9 Driver Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.5.10 D(river) - Power Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.5.11 5V / 12V Power Supply Assy’s . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.5.12 LED Driver Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.5.13 I/O Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4.5.13.1 Conveyor I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.5.13.2 Head I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4.5.14 Connection Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4.5.15 Switcher Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4.5.15.1 Old Version Switcher Board
Topaz-XII Series Only . . . . . . . . 4-41
4.5.15.2 Current Version Switcher Board
Topaz-XII Series and Opal-XII. . . 4-42
4.5.16 Operating Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
4.5.16.1 PC Keyboard + Mouse . . . . . . . . 4-43

4.5.16.2 Maintenance Support Pendant
(MSP) (Only Topaz-XII). . . . . . . 4-43
4.5.16.3 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4.5.16.4 Touch Screen (Optional) . . . . . . 4-46
4.5.17 Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
4.6 Servo Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4.6.1 Machine Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4.6.2 Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4.7 Vision Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4.7.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4.7.2 Moving Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4.7.3 Single Vision Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4.7.4 Line Array Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4.8 VGOS Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4.8.1 VGOS, Main Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4.8.2 Machine Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4.8.3 Utilities Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4.8.4 Unit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4.8.5 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4.8.6 Operator Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4.8.6.1 Create Operator. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4.8.6.2 Remove Operator. . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
4.8.6.3 Set/Change Password . . . . . . . . 4-59
4.8.6.4 Level Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
4.9 Installation and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4.9.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4.9.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4.9.3 Installation Position (Work-area Condition). 4-61
4.9.4 Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
4.9.5 Removing the Transportation Locks . . . . . . 4-62
4.9.6 Leveling of the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
4.9.7 Monitor and Keyboard Installation . . . . . . . 4-64
4.9.8 Installation of the Warning Light Tower . . . 4-64
4.9.9 Air and Mains Power Connections. . . . . . . . 4-64
4.9.9.1 Connecting Mains Power. . . . . . 4-64
4.9.9.2 Installing Air Connection . . . . . 4-65
4.9.10 First Time Switch on of a System . . . . . . . . 4-66
4.9.10.1 Change Password. . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4.9.11 Calibration Flowchart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66

4.9.12 Levelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
4.9.12.1 Level the Machine . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
4.9.13 Power and Air Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4.9.14 Back Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4.9.14.1 System Data Back Up . . . . . . . . 4-68
4.9.14.2 Back Up of Component and
Mark Database . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4.9.14.3 Backup of PCB Data . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4.9.15 Origin Machine (Reference). . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4.9.16 Check Conveyor Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
4.9.17 Pre-adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
4.9.17.1 Switch On the Machine . . . . . . 4-72
4.9.17.2 Machine Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
4.9.17.3 Warm - Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4.9.17.4 Machine Coordinates . . . . . . . . 4-75
4.9.18 Additional Pre-adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
4.9.18.1 Teach Nozzle Station Positions
and Init. R Position . . . . . . . . . 4-81
4.9.18.2 Checking the Head Vacuum
Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
4.9.19 Camera Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
4.9.20 R-axis Accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
4.9.21 Introduction to FAMF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4.9.22 Machine Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4.9.23 FAMF Correction Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
4.9.24 Flowchart of the FAMF Procedure . . . . . . . . 4-85
4.9.25 Required Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
4.9.26 General FAMF Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
4.9.26.1 Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
4.9.26.2 Adjust Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
4.9.26.3 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
4.9.26.4 Option Multi MACS. . . . . . . . . . 4-88
4.9.26.5 Option Coord MACS . . . . . . . . . 4-88
4.9.26.6 Multi MACS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
4.9.26.7 Save the data by pressing the
“ floppy“ button and exit the
VmSpec program. The changed
settings will be active only after
reloading a program. . . . . . . . . 4-89
4.9.26.8 Start up the FAMF utility . . . . . 4-89
4.9.27 Saving and Storing Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

4.9.28 FAMF (Full Auto Mount Feedback) Procedure 4-91
4.9.28.1 STEP A1: Head 1 to 8 for Front Line
Array Camera Topaz-XII Series. . . 4-98
4.9.28.2 STEP B1: Head 1 for Front Line
Array Camera Topaz-XII Series. . 4-102
4.9.28.6 STEP C1: Head 1 to 8 for REAR Line
Array Camera Topaz-XII Series . . 4-107
4.9.28.7 STEP D1: Head 1 for REAR Line
Array Camera Topaz-XII Series . 4-108
4.9.28.11 STEP E1: Head 1 for Single
Vision Camera Topaz-XII Series 4-109
4.9.28.15 STEP A1: Head 1 to 4 for Front
Line Array Camera Opal-XII . . . 4-114
Array Camera Opal-XII using
Nozzle Type 77 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Nozzle Type 77 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Nozzle Type 77 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Nozzle Type 77 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122

4.9.28.20 STEP C1 - C4: Head 1 - 4 for
Front Line Array Camera
Opal-XII using Nozzle Type 75 . 4-122
4.9.28.21 STEP D1: Head 1 for Single
Vision Camera Opal-XII using
Nozzle Type 77 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Nozzle Type 77 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
Nozzle Type 77 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
Nozzle Type 77 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
4.9.28.25 STEP E1 - E4: Head 1 - 4 for
Single Vision Camera Opal-XII
using Nozzle Type 75 . . . . . . . 4-127
4.9.29 Restore Materials Topaz-XII Series and
Opal-XII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
4.9.30 Reset FAMF Settings Topaz-XII Series and
Opal-XII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
4.10 Fine Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.10.1 Fine Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.10.2 Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.10.3 Back-up machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.11 Standard System Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.11.1 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.11.2 Bus Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.11.2.1 ISA-bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.11.2.2 HDLC Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.11.3 Serial Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
4.11.4 Input and Output Signals Between
Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
4.11.4.1 Previous Interface Circuit . . . . 4-132
4.11.4.2 Next Interface Circuit. . . . . . . 4-133
4.11.5 SMEMA Interface and GATE IN / GATE OUT
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
4.11.5.1 SMEMA Interface . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
4.11.5.2 Gate-in/Gate-out Interface . . . 4-136
4.11.5.3 Relation between Gate-in/Gate-
out and SMEMA. . . . . . . . . . . 4-138

5.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2.1 Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2.2 Pick Up Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
5.2.2.1 Chip Components . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
5.2.2.2 QFP Components . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
5.2.3 Mounting Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
5.2.3.1 Chip Components . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
5.2.3.2 QFP Components . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
5.2.4 Recognition Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
5.2.4.1 Chip Components . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
5.2.4.2 QFP Components . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
5.2.4.3 Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
5.2.5 Conveyor Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
5.2.6 Feeder Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
5.2.7 Nozzle Station Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
5.2.8 Other Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
5.3 Electrical Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
5.4 I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167
5.4.1 Conveyor Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167
5.4.2 Conveyor Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-171
5.4.3 Head Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-179
5.4.4 Head Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-183
5.4.5 Double Shuttle Tray Changer / ATS Input
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-186
5.4.6 Double Shuttle Tray Changer / ATS Output
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-189
VOLUME 2/2
6.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 Oils and Greases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2.2 Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.3 Torque Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.4 Contents of the Spare Part Kit and Service Tools. . . . . 6-4
6.4.1 First Aid Spare Part Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

6.4.2 Service Tool Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.5 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.5.1 Nozzle and Nozzle Holder Inspection . . . . . . 6-5
6.5.1.1 Nozzle Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.5.1.2 Scheduled Specification Check. . . 6-7
6.5.1.3 Nozzle Leaf Spring. . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.5.1.4 Nozzle Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.5.1.5 FNC Nozzle Holder . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.5.1.6 FNC Lock Pin Cleaning . . . . . . . 6-11
6.5.1.7 FNC Nozzle Assembly Cleaning . . 6-18
6.5.2 Head Area Checkpoints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.5.3 X Axis Checkpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.5.4 Y Axis Checkpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.5.5 Conveyer Checkpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.5.6 Feeder Plate Checkpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6.5.7 General Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
7.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 Vision Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.3 Calibration Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.4 Feeder Bar Adjustment Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.5 Feeder Lock Verifier Adjustment Tool (not for
Xi Machines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.6 Head Adjustment Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
CHAPTER 8 Spare Parts List Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.1.1 Ordering Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.1.1.1 Regional Center Europe . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.1.1.2 Regional Center Americas . . . . . . . 8-4
8.1.2 Regional Stock Keeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2 Module 1: System Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.2.1 MCX Control Unit, Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII . . 8-6
8.2.2 Maintenance Support Pendant (MSP) . . . . . . 8-8
8.2.3 Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.2.4 Cover Assembly Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII . . 8-12
8.2.5 General Machine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.3 Power and Safety Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

8.3.1 Fuse Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.3.2 Power Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8.4 Base Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8.5 PCB Transport System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8.5.1 Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8.5.2 Main-stopper and Locate-pin Assy . . . . . . . 8-24
8.5.3 Edge Clamp and Push-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
8.5.4 Sub-stopper and Push-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
8.6 Component Transport System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
8.6.1 Nozzle Station Topaz-XII Series . . . . . . . . . 8-30
8.6.2 Head Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
8.6.3 Head Assy SF, Continue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
8.6.4 Nozzle Types (FNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
8.6.5 Nozzle Types (SF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
8.6.6 Feeder Holder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
8.6.7 ITF Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
8.6.8 Reject Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
8.7 X, Y, Z, R (ϕ) ,W and PU Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
8.7.1 X- axis Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
8.7.2 Y- axis Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
8.7.3 R (ϕ) - axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
8.7.4 Z - axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
8.7.5 W- axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
8.7.6 PU - axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
8.8 Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
8.8.1.1 Line Array Camera Assy . . . . . . . 8-54
8.8.1.2 Light Assy for Line Array Camera . 8-54
8.8.2 Single Camera Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
8.8.2.1 Single Camera Assy . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
8.8.2.2 Light Assy for Single Vision
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
8.9 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8.9.1 Traychanger LCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8.9.2 Tape Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8.9.3 Tray Changer (ATS-20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8.9.4 FES20XII/XiII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8.9.5 ITF Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58

8.10 Maintenance Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8.10.1 Adjustment Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8.10.2 Special Tools and Wrenches. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
8.10.3 Grease Gun and Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
8.11 Fixation Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
8.11.1 Bolt Hexagon Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
8.11.2 Set Screw. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
8.11.3 Screw Pan Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
8.11.4 Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66
8.11.5 Screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66
8.11.6 Bolts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
9.1 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2 Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
CHAPTER 10 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
11.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.2 Conveyor Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.2.1 Adjusting the Conveyor Belt Tension . . . . . 11-2
11.2.2 Adjusting the Carry-in Conveyor Speed . . . . 11-3
11.3 Main Stopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11.3.1 Adjusting the Ascent/Descent Speeds of
the Main Stopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.3.2 Adjusting the PCB Contact Point on
Main Stopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11.4 Push-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11.5 Locate Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
11.6 Edge Clamp (Not for Opal-XII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
11.7 Push-up Plate (PU Axis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
11.7.1 Machine Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
11.7.2 Software Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
11.8 Board Clamp (Not for Opal-XII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
11.9 PCB Detection Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
11.9.1 Position and Function of PCB Detection
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
11.9.2 Adjusting the PCB Detection Sensors . . . . 11-21

11.9.3 Adjusting the Intermediate Exit Sensor. . . 11-23
11.10Conveyor Section (W-axis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
11.10.1 Checking Conveyor Parallelism. . . . . . . . . 11-24
11.10.2.1 Check the Machine Reference
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
11.10.2.2 Adjusting the Machine
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
11.10.3 Software Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
11.10.3.1 Setting the W-axis Software
Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
11.10.4 Setting W-axis Initial Position . . . . . . . . 11-29
11.11Vacuum and Pneumatics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
11.11.1 Air Specification and Connection . . . . . . . 11-31
11.11.1.1 Air Connection . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
11.11.2 Vacuum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32
11.11.2.1 Measuring the Vacuum . . . . . . 11-33
11.11.2.2 Performance Check and Trouble
Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
11.11.3 Pneumatic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
11.11.4 Double Shuttle Tray Changer (LCS) . . . . . . 11-33
11.11.5 ATS (Not for Opal-XII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
11.11.6 Tape Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
11.11.7 Measuring and Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
11.11.8 Performance Check and Trouble Shooting . 11-34
CHAPTER 12 Feeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1 Feeder Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1.1 Feeder Plate Parallel Adjustment . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1.2 Feeder Plate Spec Information . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12.1.3 Feeder Block Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.1.3.1 Teaching the Feeder Block
Reference Position . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.1.4 Feeder Spec Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
12.1.4.1 Feeder Size and Feeder Drive
Sequence Information . . . . . . . 12-9
12.1.4.2 Feeder Drive Time Information 12-10
12.1.5 Adjusting the Feeder Floating Sensor . . . . 12-12
12.1.5.1 Adjusting the Feeder Floating
Detection, Fibre Sensor type . . 12-12

12.1.6 Component Pick Up Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12.1.7 Feeder Plate Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
12.2 Component Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
12.2.1 Preparing the Mounter for Pneumatic Tape
Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
12.3 ITF Feeders (Not for Opal-XII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
12.4 Double Shuttle Tray Changer (LCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
12.4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
12.4.2 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
12.5 Auto Tray Stacker (ATS 20) (Not for Opal-XII). . . . . 12-23
12.5.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
12.5.2 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
12.6 Reject Station PA2906/10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
12.6.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
12.6.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
12.6.2.1 Hardware Installation . . . . . . 12-26
12.6.2.2 Software Settings . . . . . . . . . 12-27
12.6.2.3 Feeding Pitch and Speed . . . . 12-30
12.7 Operation and Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31
12.8 Manual Tray Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32
12.8.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32
12.8.2 Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32
12.9 Software Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-35
13.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.2 Machine Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.2.1 Check the Machine Reference Settings . . . . 13-2
13.2.2 X Axis Machine Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.2.3 Y Axis Machine Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.3 Secondary Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.3.1 X Axis Secondary Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.3.2 Y Axis Secondary Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.4 Software Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.4.1 X Axis Software Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.4.2 Y Axis Software Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13.5 Dual Drive Y-axis Offset Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.6 Adjusting the X and Y Axis Tension . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

13.6.1 Adjusting the X Axis Tension. . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13.6.2 Adjusting the Y Axis Tension. . . . . . . . . . 13-12
CHAPTER 14 Vision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.2 Vision Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.3 Moving Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.3.1 Adjusting the Rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.3.2 Focus (and Field of View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14.3.3 Black Level and Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14.3.4 Moving Camera Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14.4 Single Vision Camera Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
14.4.1 Software Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
14.4.2 Focus (and Field of View) . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
14.4.3 Lighting Level Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
14.4.4 Scale Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
14.5 Line Array Camera Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
14.5.2 Recognition Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
14.5.3 Focus Adjustment (and FOV (Field Of View))14-23
14.5.4 Brightness Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26
14.5.5 Scale Adjustment (Including Dual
Recognition Offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29
14.5.6 Camera Position Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
15.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
15.2 Head Assembly (FNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
15.3 Pickup/Mount Vacuum Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
15.3.1 Pick Up Vacuum Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
15.3.2 Mount Vacuum Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
15.4 FNC Head Adjustment and Maintenance (Topaz-XII
FNC Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
15.4.1 Nozzle Change Action (FNC Head) . . . . . . 15-11
15.4.2 Clutch Detection (FNC Head). . . . . . . . . . 15-13
15.4.3 Nozzle Position Sensor (FNC Head). . . . . . 15-13
15.4.4 Head Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15
15.4.4.1 The Proximity Detection Sensor 15-15
15.4.4.2 The Laser Beam Detection
Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15

15.4.4.3 Positions of the Sensors . . . . . 15-16
15.4.4.4 Action Overview and Timing
Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
15.4.4.5 Laser Beam Sensors . . . . . . . . 15-18
15.5 Z Axis Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
15.5.1 Z Axis Machine Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
15.5.2 Z Axis Software Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25
15.5.3 Init Z Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25
15.5.5 Moving Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25
15.6 R Axis Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
15.6.1 Machine R Reference Adjustment . . . . . . . 15-26
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
15.6.1.2 Adjustment of Origin Dog . . . . 15-27
15.6.2 R Axis Soft Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-28
15.6.3 Init R Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-28
15.6.4 Adjustment of the R Init Position and
Nozzle Position of the FNC Heads. . . . . . . 15-28
15.6.4.1 Checking the F.N. Clutch Sensors
and the F.N. Position Sensors . 15-29
15.6.4.2 Adjustment of the Initial
Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-32
15.6.4.3 Checking the Detection Area of
the Nozzle Position Sensors . . 15-34
15.6.4.4 Checking the FNC Nozzle
Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-34
15.6.5 R Axis Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-35
15.6.6 R Axis Accuracy Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 15-39
15.7 Setting the Nozzle Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-40
15.7.1 Nozzle Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-40
15.7.2 FNC Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-40
15.7.2.1 Nozzles for Precision Head . . . 15-41
15.7.3 Setting the Nozzle Specification . . . . . . . 15-42
15.7.3.1 Flying Nozzle Information. . . . 15-42
15.7.3.2 Head Specification . . . . . . . . 15-43
15.7.3.3 Mount Nozzle Specification . . . 15-44
15.7.3.4 Pickup Component Type
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-45
15.8 Head Specific Settings in ‘VmSpec’. . . . . . . . . . . . 15-46

15.8.1 Head Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-46
15.8.2 Head Down Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-48
15.8.3 Nozzle Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-49
15.8.4 Measure Height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-50
15.9 Assembling and Disassembling of the FNC Head Assy 15-51
15.9.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-51
15.9.2 Disassembling & Assembling of FNC
Spline Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-51
15.9.3 Disassembling & Assembling of Precision
(SF) Nozzle Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-52
15.10Mechanical Check Head Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-52
15.10.1 Checking the Vacuum Sensor Function . . . 15-54
15.11Head Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-55
15.11.1 Machine Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-56
15.11.2 Settings During Running . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-57
15.12Nozzle Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-58
15.12.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-58
15.12.2 Installing the Nozzle Station. . . . . . . . . . 15-60
15.12.3 Adjusting the Nozzle Sensor Sensitivity . . 15-62
15.12.4 Adjusting the Nozzle Clamp Plate Position 15-65
15.12.5 Adjusting the Nozzle Station Coordinates . 15-65
15.12.6 Nozzle Station Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 15-68
16.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
16.2 System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
16.2.1 Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
16.2.2 Disk Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
16.2.3 Installation Disk Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
16.2.4 Installation of a New Version VGOS
Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
16.2.5 Backup Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
16.2.6 Restore System Data Backup . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
16.2.7 VGOS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
16.2.8 Floppy Disk Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
16.2.9 CD-rom Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
16.2.10 Flash Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
16.2.10.1 Flash Disk Problems (NT Initial
Installation). . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11

16.2.10.2 Windows NT Upgrade . . . . . . . 16-19
16.2.11 Windows Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20
16.2.11.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20
16.2.11.2 Differences between User
Login and Administrator Login 16-20
16.2.11.3 User Login Restrictions . . . . . 16-20
16.2.11.4 Administrator Login. . . . . . . . 16-21
16.2.11.5 Procedure to Boot Up as
“Administrator Login” . . . . . . 16-21
16.2.12 Disable “ Write Filter” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
16.2.12.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
16.2.12.2 Drive Structure of VGOS . . . . . 16-22
16.2.12.3 When do we Need to Disable
the “ Write Filter” . . . . . . . . . 16-22
16.2.12.4 Procedure to Disable the
“ Write Filter” . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22
16.2.13 Change System.time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
16.2.13.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
16.2.13.2 Changing the “ Regional
Settings” Setting . . . . . . . . . 16-23
16.2.13.3 Change the “ Time Zone”
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
16.2.14 Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-24
16.2.14.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-24
16.2.14.2 The Network Connections . . . . 16-24
16.2.14.3 Machine Setting . . . . . . . . . . 16-27
16.2.14.4 Network Drive Setting . . . . . . 16-27
16.2.14.5 How to Use Network . . . . . . . 16-28
16.2.14.6 Network Connection
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . 16-29
16.2.15 Login Recovery Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . 16-29
16.3 PCB File Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-31
16.4 Machine Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-33
16.4.1 Machine Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-33
16.4.1.1 Option Setting:. . . . . . . . . . . 16-34
16.4.1.2 Installation Setting: . . . . . . . 16-35
16.4.1.3 Communication Setting . . . . . 16-38
16.4.1.4 Special Settings . . . . . . . . . . 16-38
16.4.1.5 Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . 16-38

Introduction
CHAPTER 1 Introduction
1.1 General Introduction of the Machine
The GEM Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII is positioned as a High Speed Flexible SMD
placement system, capable to place chips (down to 0201), SOIC’s, QFP’s, BGAs,
µBGAs, and CSP's. The improved capabilities in terms of speed, accuracy and
component range with respect to the Topaz-X that enable the Topaz-XII Series/
Opal-XII to face the challenge of newly introduced competitor’s systems.
The main difference with the Topaz-X Series/Opal-XII machines is the Graphical
User Interface (GUI) based on a Windows NT operating system. This (GUI), called
VGOS (Visual Graphical Operating System), can be operated by using the keyboard,
mouse and/or LCD touch screen (option).
The Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII component range enables it to be used as a stand-
alone system, furthermore, the Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII is equally suitable in
combination with other kind of SMD placers.
For instance, in-line combination with fine-pitch mounters (i.e. Emerald-XII, ACM),
the Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII will provide the chip mounting speed required by the
total line.
The Topaz-XiII has the same features as the Topaz-XII but the main difference is
that it picks components from an ITF feeder. This feeder is also used on the FCM and
ACM.
In combination with (very) high volume placers (which lack the required
component range or flexibility), the Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII is ideal as a line-
balancing system.
The Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII has the following main features:
1. Improvement of the actual speed:
• Dual drive Y-axis.
• New developed machine controller.
• New Windows NT(™) based operating system (VGOS).
2. Overhead time reduction:
• Flying Nozzle Exchange (4 heads each equipped with 3 nozzles) on the Topaz-
XII (FNC) only.
• Improved High Resolution Digital Camera.
• Double LCS shuttle which decrease waiting time.
• Dual tray feeder with tray replenishment during production.
3. Decreased change over time:
• Automatically adjustable board conveyor width.
• Automatically adjustable board thickness by servo motor.

03.04 Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII 1-1
Introduction
1.2 General Introduction of the Service Manual

The service manual describes electrical, mechanical, software and pneumatic
aspects of the GEM Topaz-XII series/Opal-XII; the Topaz-XII, XiII, the SF and the FNC
head. When the information is for all machines it will be indicated as Topaz-XII
series/Opal-XII. When the information is for a typical machine type only this will be
indicated as such. This manual is for the following PA numbers
■ PA 1314/01 Topaz-XII with FNC head
■ PA 1314/02 Topaz-XII with SF head
■ PA 1314/10 Topaz-XiII with FNC head
■ PA 1314/11 Topaz-XiII with SF head
■ PA 1314/03 Opal-XII
The repair philosophy of the electric part of the machine is based on PCB swapping
and not on component level replacement, Therefore only a functional description of
each PCB will be given in this manual.
!
WARNING: ONLY TECHNICAL PERSONNEL WHICH IS TRAINED ON TOPAZ-XII SERIES/
OPAL-XII EQUIPMENT IS ALLOWED TO CARRY OUT SERVICE ACTIONS
1.3 Chapter Overview

This chapter provides a brief description of the contents of each chapter of this
manual.
&KDSWHU 7LWOH &RQWHQWV
,QWURGXFWLRQ This chapter gives a small introduction of the
machine and the manual chapters
6DIHW\ This chapter gives specific information on all

safety aspects of the system and contains the
Material Safety Data Sheets of all oil and
greases used in the system.
6\VWHPFRQILJXUDWLRQ This chapter shows the tree of the machine

with all the options that can be installed.
6\VWHPGHVFULSWLRQ This chapter gives an explanatory system

description of all modules in the system.
6\VWHPWURXEOHVKRRWLQJ This chapter deals with all information availa-

ble for system level trouble shooting like error
messages and electrical diagrams.

1-2 Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII 03.04
Introduction
&KDSWHU 7LWOH &RQWHQWV

3UHYHQWLYHPDLQWHQDQFH This chapter describes procedures for daily
and periodic maintenance that should be per-
formed. The inspection lists are explained
according to each inspection location and
period.
5HTXLUHGWRROVDQGPDWHULDOV This chapter lists all tools and materials

needed for maintenance, repair, calibration
and adjustment for the entire system.
6SDUHSDUWVOLVW This chapter shows an overview of all spare

parts from the various modules.
$EEUHYLDWLRQVDQGFRQYHQWLRQV

,QGH[

0RGXOHGHVFULSWLRQV These chapters give an overview of the different

modules of the Topaz-XII Series.
%DVHDQGWUDQVSRUW

)HHGLQJ

5RERWV;<

9LVLRQ

3ODFHPHQWKHDG

0DFKLQHVRIWZDUH

TABLE 1-1

Introduction
1.4 Option Manuals

Information about, how to use and calibrate all options, please look in the relevant
option manual.
■ Double Shuttle Tray Feeder LCS-XII 4022 591 93961
■ ATS-20 (Topaz-XII Series only) 4022 591 92531
■ CSM/FV GEM Feeder Manual 5322 871 61605
■ FES 20 XII/XiII (Topaz-XII Series only) 4022 591 92521

Safety
CHAPTER 2 Safety
2.1 General Safety
Please observe all safety rules and cautionary remarks to ensure that the machine is
used in a safe and correct matter. Also please bear in mind that not all safety items
can be listed in detail, so that an accurate judgment by the service engineer is
essential in servicing the machine safely.
2.2 Basic Rules

The following basic safety rules must be observed:
1. When the Topaz-XII Series machine is switched off by the main switch, this
switch must always be locked by a padlock!
2. Make sure to keep the MSP (Maintenance Support Pendant) in your hand
whenever servicing inside the machine, so it can be stopped at any time
3. Do not use the machine in an environment where flammable gasses are present
or where it is extremely dirty
2.3 Safety Standard

The safety of the GEM systems is in accordance with following CE directives:
■ Machine Safety Directive 89/392/EEC, amended by the directives 91/368/EEC,
93/44/EEC and 93/68/EEC
■ Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, amended by the directives: 93/68/EEC
■ Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive 89/336/EEC, amended by the
directives 93/68/EEC
The used harmonized standards are:
6WDQGDUG 'HVFULSWLRQ 'DWH
EN 292-1 Sept. 1991
Basic concepts, general principles for design
EN 292-2 1991/A1: 1995
EN 294 Safety distances June 1992/A1: 1995
EN 1050 Principles for risk assessment Nov. 1996
EN 614-1 Ergonomic design principles Feb. 1995
EN 349 Minimum gaps Apr. 1993
EN 60204-1 Electrical equipment of machines Oct. 1997
IEC 61000-6-2 EMC Generic immunity standard 1999
EN 50081-2 EMC Generic emission standard Aug. 1993
EN 50082-2 EMC Generic immunity standard March 1995
TABLE 2-1

Safety
Other applicable or relevant electrical safety standards e.g. for introduction to other
markets than Europe
6WDQGDUG 'HVFULSWLRQ
ETL Under Certification
TABLE 2-2 Other applicable electrical safety standards
2.4 Cautionary Remarks

This Manual uses the following cautionary remarks:
REFERENCE: Gives useful information related to the machine operation.
NOTE: Explains the machine operations and procedures in a simple and clear
manner.
CAUTION
CAUTION: GIVES IMPORTANT INFORMATION TO PREVENT ANY DAMAGE TO THE MACHINE

OR DATA.
!
WARNING: GIVES INFORMATION OF UTMOST IMPORTANCE IN ENSURING THE SAFETY OF
THE OPERATOR OR SERVICE PERSONNEL.
E
ERG NCY
EM
STOP
EMERGENCY: Indicates to press first the emergency button before continuing.

Safety
2.5 Warning Stickers

This paragraph gives an overview of warning stickers that are used to warn the
operators and service people for dangerous situations. With every picture a short
description is given of that dangerous situation.
'DQJHU High voltage!
'DQJHU Class I laser

product, risk of laser radiation.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
'RQ·WWRXFK Very sensitive part, do not touch.
'DQJHU Do not enter because of moving parts.
TABLE 2-3
2.6 ESD Precaution

All printed circuit boards that are part of the CSM/GEM machines must be trans-
ported and stored in ESD-protected bags.
Any person handling a CSM/GEM printed circuit board must be earthed adequately -
e.g. by means of a bracelet with earth cable - to prevent destructive electrostatic
discharge through the printed circuit board.
Make sure the cable has a 1 MOhm series resistor implemented for safety.
In areas that are not ESD protected, the removable protective covers must be
mounted on all placement modules.
Handling of printed circuit boards should be restricted as much as possible.
2.7 Noise Level

The average noise level of the Topaz-X II Series system during production is
< 78 dBA.

Safety
2.8 Liability
Assembléon shall not be liable for any costs, damages or personal injuries if
the CSM/GEM system is not used according to the safety rules given in this
manual.
2.9 Hazard Materials

2.9.1 Oil and Greases
This encloses all available MSD Sheets of the hazard material (oils and greases) used
in this machine.
In chapter 6 there is a compatibility list with a number of greases that can be used
is given.
Following greases and oils are covered:
&RGHQXPEHU 6XSSOLHU 7UDGHQDPH $SSOLFDWLRQ 06'6QR
5322 390 20159 NSK NSK1 or Multi- Linear guides, ball screws 10138
temp LRL 03
- ACC Tech HP-Alco pad Cleaning tissues 806H-806
9965 000 11066 Dow Corning Molykote 6169 Rubber packing and O-rings of 16371
Co. head (moving) parts, pistons/
plugs
5322 390 10144 Aussimont Fomblin Only on static parts like valve 12298
Y-VAC3 seals and O-rings. Not on moving
parts
9965 000 10365 Idemitsu Turbine oil VG32 For spline shaft and FNC parts 32280246
9965 000 16803 NSK NSA or NSL Linear guide, ball screws 07-597
X/XII-Series production after
sept. 2002 only, See SI-CSM-576
TABLE 2-4
NOTE: Assembléon will not be responsible for any damage to the machine if other
greases and/or oils are used than mentioned above.
2.9.2 Lead
According CE regulations lead must be treated according local environmental
guidelines when disposing it. Be aware that on the printed circuit boards, used in
the machine, lead is used as a part of the solder paste. So when disposing these
boards, the local environmental guidelines must be followed.

Safety
2.9.3 NSK Grease No 1

1 of 4
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET

According EC 91/155
1. Identification of the substance/preparation

MSDS : 10138
Code number : 5322 390 20159
Supplier : PHILIPS CONSUMER SERVICE
Tradename : NSK GREASE NO.1
General description : GREASE
Emergency phonenumber +31 40 2755555
2. Composition/information on ingredients
Component CAS- Percentage EC-label
number
1 SYNTHETIC ESTER OIL 73.0-
78.0%
2 LITHIUM SOAP 21.0-
23.0%
3 METHYLENEBIS[N-SEC-BUTYLANILINE], 5285-60-9 1.0-3.0%
4,4’-
4 BARIUM DINONYL NAPHTHALENE 25619-56-1 0.5-1.5% Xn; R:
SULFONATE 20/22
5 BENZOTRIAZOLE 95-14-7 <= 0.1% Xn; R: 22-
36
3. Hazards identification
l Harmful by inhalation and if swallowed.
4. First-aid measures
Skin : Remove contaminated clothes as soon as possible. Remove residue

substance as soon as possible (f.i. rinse with much water). In case of a
serious exposure call for a doctor.
Ingestion : Let drink 1 or 2 glasses of water. In case of general disorders call for a
doctor.
Inhalation : Bring victim into the fresh air as soon as possible and let rest. In case of
severe exposure call for a doctor. In case of breathing problems, loose
squeezing clothes and if victim is conscious bring victim in high sitting
position. In case of stagnation of breathing give IMMEDIATELY oxygen
and transport to hospital as soon as possible.
10-4-01

Safety
Page 2 of 4
Eyes : Rinse for a long time with much water. In case of eye-sight disturbances
consult a doctor.
Remarks first aid : none
5. Fire fighting measures
Fire-extinguisher : carbon dioxide, extinguishing powder, water spray,

alcohol resistant foam.
Hazardous decomposition : carbon monoxide, lithium oxide, nitrous oxides, barium
products in fire oxide, sulphur oxides.
6. Accidental release measures
Procedure by spillage : Dependent on quantity spilt paste, one has the choice between: -
remove with cleaning rag or paper, or - cover paste with Powersorb,
sand, diatomite, vermiculite and suchlike. Shovel the material into
plastic bag or other suitable packaging and remove to the central
depot for hazardous waste.
7. Handling and storage
Local exhausting : Depends on processing circumstances, but at least good room

ventilation.
Storage conditions : Do not store product close to ignition sources.
Avoid direct sunlight.
Store produkt in a cool, dry and well ventilated area.
8. Exposure controls/personal protection

Exposure limits (20 Cel. and 1013 mbar) :
not determined
Remarks exposure limits :
none
Odeur threshold (20 Cel. and 1013 mbar) :
not tracable
Advised personal protection
skin : butyl rubber gloves.
eyes : safety goggles.
inhalation : none (when used normally).
9. Physical and chemical properties
10-4-01

Safety
Page 3 of 4
Physical state : paste
Colour : white
Odour : allmost odourless
Boiling point/range (Cel.) : not tracable
Melting point/range (Cel.) : 205
Flash point/range (Cel.) : 225
Explosive limits : not tracable
Dust explosions possible in air : not applicable
Density at 20 Cel. : 980 kg/m3
Vapour pressure in kPa : not tracable
Solubility in water : none
pH : not applicable
Viscosity : not tracable
Autoignition temperature (Cel.) : not tracable
Electrostatic chargement : no
Log Po/w : : not tracable
10. Stability and reactivity

Conditions to avoid : none
Reaction with water : no
Hazardous reactions with : strong oxidizers.
Hazardous decomposition products at heating : none.
11. Toxicological information
Symptoms
Skin local : With intensive skin contact risk of skin affection.
general : Not applicable.
Ingestion local : No symptoms under normal working conditions.
general : No absorbtion worth mentioning under normal working conditions.
Inhalation local : Not applicable.
Eyes local : The substance is prickling: redness, pain.
Remarks symptoms : None
Toxicity : LD-50: 700 mg/kg (ORL-RAT) BENZOTRIAZOLE
12. Ecotoxicological information

Biochemical oxygen demand : not tracable
Chemical oxygen demand : not tracable
Ecotoxicity : none
Remarks on ecotoxicity : none
13. Disposal considerations
10-4-01

Safety
Page 4 of 4
Remainder material or uncleaned empty packagings have to be incinerated in a proper

installation or dumped on an approved landfill, in accordance with local and national legislation.
Consider also return delivery to supplier.
14. Transport information

Class/figure RID/ADR : none
Class IMO : none
Class ICAO : none
UN-number : none
15. Regulatory information

Hazard symbol
Xn (HARMFUL)
R-phrases
20/22 Harmful by inhalation and if swallowed.
S-phrases
Notes :
Hazardous components : BARIUM DINONYL NAPHTHALENE SULFONATE
Remarks on EC-labeling : none
16. Other information

Remarks on MSDS : none
Inner company references : none
Date last update : 2001-02-07
Date last update but one : 1998-12-02
The information provided in this Material Safety Data Sheet is correct to the best of the
knowledge, information and belief of Philips Electronics Nederland B.V. at the date of its
printing.
10-4-01

Safety
1 of 4

According EC 91/155

MSDS : 10137
Code number : 5322 390 20161
Supplier : NSK
Tradename : NSK GREASE NO.2.
General description : GREASE
Component CAS- Percentage EC-
number label
1 DISTILLATES (PETR), SOLVENT-REFINED 64741-88-4 23.0-
(C6H6 <0.1%) 25.0%
2 ETHYLHEXYL)-SEBACATE, BIS(2- 122-62-3 53.0-
59.0%
3 LITHIUM STEARATE 4485-12-5 17.0-
19.0%
4 METHYLENEBIS[N-SEC-BUTYLANILINE], 4,4’- 5285-60-9 1.0-3.0%
Skin : Remove residue substance as soon as possible from the skin (f.i. rinse
with much water).
doctor.
Inhalation : Not applicable.
consult a doctor.
Fire-extinguisher : carbon dioxide, extinguishing powder, water spray,

alcohol resistant foam.
Hazardous decomposition : carbon monoxide, nitrous oxides, lithium oxide.
products in fire
10-4-01

Safety
Page 2 of 4
Local exhausting : Under normal circumstances not applicable.

Storage conditions : Do not store product close to ignition sources.

TLV : 5 DISTILLATES (PETR), SOLVENT-REFINED (C6H6 <0.1%) (as oil
mg/m3 aerosol)
none
not tracable

Colour : white
Odour : allmost odourless
Boiling point/range (Cel.) : not tracable
Melting point/range (Cel.) : not tracable
Flash point/range (Cel.) : 200
Explosive limits : not tracable
Dust explosions possible in : not applicable
air
Vapour pressure in kPa : not tracable
pH : not applicable
Autoignition temperature : not tracable
(Cel.)
Log Po/w : : 3,9 - 6 DISTILLATES (PETR), SOLVENT-REFINED (C6H6
<0.1%)
10-4-01

Safety
Page 3 of 4

Hazardous reactions with : oxidizing substances, strong acids.
Hazardous decomposition products at heating : none.
Symptoms
Ingestion local : No symptoms under normal working conditions.
general : No absorbtion worth mentioning under normal working conditions.
Inhalation local : Not applicable.
Eyes local : The substance is prickling: redness.
Toxicity : LD-50: 12,8 g/kg (ORL-RAT) ETHYLHEXYL)-SEBACATE, BIS(2-
LD-50: 15 g/kg (ORL-RAT) LITHIUM STEARATE

Ecotoxicity : LC-50: >1000 mg/l/96h (Fish) DISTILLATES (PETR),
SOLVENT-REFINED (C6H6 <0.1%)
EC-50: >1000 mg/l/48h (Daphnia) DISTILLATES (PETR),
SOLVENT-REFINED (C6H6 <0.1%)


Class IMO : none
Class ICAO : none
UN-number : none

not applicable
10-4-01

Safety
Page 4 of 4

Remarks on MSDS : The components, as mentioned in section 2, are registrated in the
Toxic Substances Control Act Inventory (USA).
Inner company : none
references
printing.
10-4-01

Safety
2.9.4 Fomblin Y VAC 3

1 1 of 4

According EC 91/155

MSDS : 12298
Code number : 5322 390 10144
Supplier : AUSIMONT
Tradename : FOMBLIN Y VAC 3, 100 G, PCS
General description : VACUUM GREASE
Component CAS-number Percentage EC-label
1 PERFLUOROPOLYETHER 69991-67-9
2 TEFLON 9002-84-0
Skin : Remove residue substance as soon as possible from the skin (f.i. rinse
with much water).
doctor.
Inhalation : Not applicable.
consult a doctor.
Fire-extinguisher : carbon dioxide, extinguishing powder, foam, water

spray.
Hazardous decomposition products in : carbon monoxide, hydrogen fluoride.
fire
10-4-01

Safety
Page 2 of 4

Storage conditions : Keep packing closed.

not determined
none
not applicable

Colour : white
Odour : odourless
Boiling point/range (Cel.) : >=270
Melting point/range (Cel.) : not tracable
Flash point/range (Cel.) : not applicable
Explosive limits : not applicable
Vapour pressure in kPa : negligible
pH : not applicable
Autoignition temperature (Cel.) : not applicable
Log Po/w : : not tracable

Hazardous reactions with : strong alkaline solutions, Lewis-acids, oxidizing
substances.
Hazardous decomposition products at : hydrogen fluoride, carbonyl fluoride.
heating
10-4-01

Safety
Page 3 of 4
Symptoms
Ingestion local : The substance is prickling. Large quantities may cause: abdominal
pain, diarrhoea.
Inhalation local : The decompositon products are irritating: coughing, shortness of
breath.
Chance of pulmonary oedema: coughing and tightness of the chest,
possibly after several hours.
general : The decomposition products cause: headache, fever, feeling of
weakness, chest pain.
Eyes local : The substance is prickling: redness.
Remarks : None
symptoms
Toxicity : LD-50: > 2 g/kg (ORL-RAT) PERFLUOROPOLYETHER

Ecotoxicity : none


Class IMO : none
Class ICAO : none
UN-number : none

not applicable
10-4-01

Safety
Page 4 of 4
Remarks on MSDS : The product decomposes at a temperature > 290 degrees Celsius. The
components, as mentioned in section 2, are registrated in the Toxic
Substances Control Act Inventory (USA).
Inner company : none
references
printing.
10-4-01

Safety
2.9.5 Alcopad Cleaning Tissue

Safety

Safety

Safety
2.9.6 Molykote 6169 Grease

According EC 91/155
MSDS : 16371
Code number :
Supplier : DOW CORNING
Tradename : MOLYKOTE 6169 GREASE
General description : LUBRICANT
Emergency phonenumber: +31 40 2755555
Component CAS-number Percentage EC-label
1 TEFLON 9002-84-0 >=1.0% - <=10.0%
3. Hazard identification
Skin : Remove residue substance as soon as possible from the skin (f.i. rinse with much water).
Ingestion : Let drink 1 or 2 glasses of water. In case of general disorders call for a doctor.
Inhalation : Bring the victim into the fresh air as soon as possible, let rest and if necessary call for a doctor.
Eyes : Rinse for a long time with much water. In case of eye-sight disturbances consult a doctor.
Fire-extinguisher : determined by surrounding
Hazardous decomposition products in fire : carbon monoxide, hydrogen fluoride
6. Accidental_release measures
Spillage procedure : Absorb the liquid in appropriate absorbent (e.g. Powersorb, dry sand, diatomite, vermiculite etc.)
shovel the mixture into plastic bags and remove to the central depot for hazardous waste.
Emergency procedure : not applicable
Storage conditions : no special precautions
Exposure limits:
not determined TEFLON
C=Ceiling; S=Skin
Remarks exposure limits:
none
Odour threshold (20ºC;1013mBar):
not traceable
Advised personal protection:
skin : butyl rubber gloves
eyes : safety goggles
inhalation : none (when used normally)
Creation Date 10-09-2001 1/3

Safety

Physical state : liquid
Colour : white
Odour : specific
Boiling point/range : not traceable
Melting point/range : not traceable
Flash point/range : not applicable
Explosive limits : not applicable
Relative density : 2,00000 (water=1; 20ºC)
Vapour pressure : not traceable
Solubility in water : little
pH : not traceable
Viscosity : not traceable
Autoignition temperature : not applicable
Decomposition temperature : >200ºC
Electrostatic chargement : not traceable
Reactions with water : no
Hazardous reactions with : oxidizing substances
Hazardous decomposition products at heating : perfluoroisobutylene
Symptoms
Skin local : will be completed
general : will be completed
Ingestion local : will be completed
Inhalation local : will be completed
Eyes local : will be completed
Toxicity : not traceable
Biological oxygen demand : not traceable
Chemical oxygen demand : not traceable
Biological/chemical oxygen demand ratio : not traceable
Biochemical factor : not traceable
Log Po/w : not traceable
Ecotoxicity : not traceable
Remainder material or uncleaned empty packagings have to be incinerated in a proper installation or dumped on an approved landfill,
accordance with local and national legislation. Consider also return delivery to supplier.
Not subject to Transport-regulation Dangerous Substances

Safety
not applicable
Hazardous components : not applicable

Remarks on EC-labeling : The supplier may give a different EC-label (Userlabel).
Remarks on MSDS : The components, as mentioned in section 2, are registrated in the Toxic Substances Control Act
Inventory (USA).
Inner company references : none
The information provided in this Material Safety Data Sheet is correct to the best of the knowledge, information and
belief of Philips Electronics Nederland B.V. at the date of its printing.

Safety
2.9.7 Daphne Super Multi Oil 32

Safety

Safety

Safety

Safety

Safety

Safety

Safety

Safety

Safety

System Configuration
CHAPTER 3 System Configuration

3.1 Introduction
This chapter gives an overview of the contents of the basic system, the factory built
in options, the retrofit options, the additional nozzles and the applicable manuals
for the Topaz-XII Series. This overview is also called ordering sheets. Contact your
local sales organizations about pricing and availability.
3.2 Ordering Sheet Topaz-XII (FNC) PA 1314/01

3.2.1 Standard this Configuration Includes:
■ basic machine
■ controller + flash disk (256Mb) and 3.5" FDD, CD Rom
■ placement beam with four standard and four FNC heads
■ 1 line array camera with fore and side light system for component alignment
■ 1 moving area CCD camera for fiducial alignment equipped with automatic
lighting adjustment
■ vision processing system VICS 3200
■ dual Y drive
■ 12 nozzles (4× nozzle 71F, 4× nozzle 72F, 4× nozzle 73F) for the FNC heads
■ 4 × nozzle 72 for the standard heads
■ PCB transfer system
■ PCB locate pin system
■ PCB servo Push-up system including 12 liftpins
■ edge clamp system
■ exit Sub-stopper
■ auto width conveyor system
■ two 20 position feederbars with valves
■ one 50 position feederbar with valves
■ feeder lock verification systems
■ component dump box
■ operating monitor VGA
■ operation panel front
■ PC keyboard, mouse, maintenance support panel
■ two empty tape bins
■ toolset
■ first aid spare parts kit
■ 10 dummy feeders
■ user reference, operating and service manual in English language
■ CD-ROM with Helpfiles

■ feeder manual
■ CE safety
■ ESD safety
■ SMEMA set
3.2.2 Options Factory Built-in

PA 2505/25 Board Clamping system for Topaz-X(i)II or Emerald-X(i)II
PA 2505/57 Feederbar exchange system front side of the machine, included
FES 20 position cart for FV/GEMII series
PA 2505/58 Feederbar exchange system rear side of the machine, included
PA 2506/30 Rear side CRT monitor, keyboard, mouse
PA 2506/31 Flat/touch screen monitor front side
PA 2506/33 Flat/touch screen monitor front and rear side
PA 2506/35 Operation panel rear side
PA 2506/40 Maintenance lamp
PA 2696/24 ATS 20 Tray Feeder portrait for GEM
PA 2696/25 Double ATS 20 Tray Feeder portrait for GEM
PA 2696/26 ATS 20 Tray Feeder landscape for GEM
PA 2963/16 Nozzle Exchange System Topaz-X (18 positions/no nozzles
included)
PA 2969/49 Second Line array camera 32mm for Topaz-XII
PA 2969/59 Second Line array camera 45mm for Topaz-XII and Emerald-XII
PA 2969/85 Area CCD camera 32 mm (including fore and side lighting) for
X(i)II series
X(i)II series
3.2.3 Options Field Retrofit

PA 2505/62 Modification kit Feederbar exchange system FES 20 for XII serie
machines (one side of machine no carts included)
machines (one side of machine no carts included) Version 2 (for
systems with production date after Jan. 2003)
PA 2963/24 Nozzle exchange station for Topaz-X(i)II
PA 2969/47 Second line array camera 32mm Topaz-X(i)II
PA 2969/48 Second line array camera 45mm Topaz-X(i)II and Emerald-X(i)II
PA 2969/96 Area CCD camera 32mm (including fore and side lighting) for
X(i)II series
X(i)II series

3.2.4 Options
PA 2209/00 Multi language XII series (German, Spanish, French)
PA 2505/59 FES (feederbar exchange) cart 20 position for II series
PA 2695/12 Manual Tray Feeder Topaz-X /Emerald-X
PA 2699/23 Double shuttle Tray Feeder (LCS) for II series
PA 2903/27 16 mm Tape Feeder, 15 inch reelholder CL
PA 2903/41 32 mm Tape Feeder, 15 inch reelholder FV/GEM (PSA)
PA 2903/77 8 mm Tape Feeder for 0201, 2 mm pitch, 15 inch reelholder CL
PA 2903/79 8 mm Tape Feeder, 4 mm pitch, 15 inch reelholder CL
PA 2904/51 Gem bulk cassette feeder C0603 long
PA 2908/11 Tape connector 8/12/16 mm tape
PA 2923/00 Set of 20 dummy feeders
PA 2981/15 Pallet for LCS Tray Feeder FV/GEM (PA 2699/23)
PA 2981/35 Pallet for PA 2696/24 and PA 2696/25 (ATS 20 portrait)
PA 2981/36 Pallet for PA 2696/26 (ATS 20 landscape)
9466 920 10921 Reject Belt Feeder GEM
3.2.5 Additional Nozzles

PA 2962/38 Nozzle Type 71 FNC
PA 2962/44 Nozzle Type 74A
PA 2962/45 Nozzle Type 73
PA 2962/46 Nozzle Type 76A (melf)
PA 2962/47 Nozzle Type 71 (0201)

3.2.6 Documentation
4022 591 92002 Pre-Installation Manual Topaz-XII / Opal-XII series (English)
4022 591 92014 User Reference Manual Topaz-XII / Opal-XII series (English)1
4022 591 92024 User Reference Manual Topaz-XII / Opal-XII series (German)2
4022 591 92034 User Reference Manual Topaz-XII / Opal-XII series (Italian)2
4022 591 92044 User Reference Manual Topaz-XII / Opal-XII series (French)2
4022 591 92054 User Reference Manual Topaz-XII / Opal-XII series (Spanish)2
4022 591 92064 Service Manual Topaz-XII / Opal-XII series (English)1
4022 591 92073 Operating Manual Topaz-XII / Opal-XII series (English)1
4022 591 92083 Operating Manual Topaz-XII / Opal-XII series (French)2
4022 591 92093 Operating Manual Topaz-XII / Opal-XII series (German)2
4022 591 92103 Operating Manual Topaz-XII / Opal-XII series (Italian)2
4022 591 92113 Operating Manual Topaz-XII / Opal-XII series (Spanish)2
4022 591 92123 Operating Manual Topaz-XII / Opal-XII series (Portuguese)2
4022 591 92133 Operating Manual Topaz-XII / Opal-XII series (Dutch)2
4022 591 92143 Operating Manual Topaz-XII / Opal-XII series (Danish)2
4022 591 92153 Operating Manual Topaz-XII / Opal-XII series (Swedish)2
4022 591 92163 Operating Manual Topaz-XII / Opal-XII series (Finnish)2
4022 591 93432 GEM-XII serie service documentation CD-ROM
5322 871 61605 Option Manual CSM/GEM feeders1
NOTE: User reference, Operating and Service manual in English together

with an option Manual CSM/GEM feeders are part of the standard
configuration
1. Part of the standard configuration

2. Available as from 1 Oct. 2001

6WDUW
6WDQGDUGWKLVFRQILJXUDWLRQLQFOXGHV
EDVLFPDFKLQH
FRQWUROOHUIODVKGLVN0EDQG)''&'5RP
SODFHPHQWEHDPZLWKIRXUVWDQGDUGDQGIRXU)1&KHDGV
OLQHDUUD\FDPHUDZLWKIRUHDQGVLGHOLJKWV\VWHPIRUFRPSRQHQWDOLJQPHQW
PRYLQJDUHD&&'FDPHUDIRUILGXFLDODOLJQPHQWHTXLSSHGZLWKDXWRPDWLFOLJKWLQJDGMXVWPHQW
YLVLRQSURFHVVLQJV\VWHP9,&6
GXDO<GULYH
QR]]OHV[QR]]OH)[QR]]OH)[QR]]OH)IRUWKH)1&KHDGV
[QR]]OHIRUWKHVWDQGDUGKHDGV
3&%WUDQVIHUV\VWHP
3&%ORFDWHSLQV\VWHP
3&%VHUYR3XVKXSV\VWHPLQFOXGLQJOLIWSLQV
HGJHFODPSV\VWHP
H[LW6XEVWRSSHU
DXWRZLGWKFRQYH\RUV\VWHP
WZRSRVLWLRQIHHGHUEDUVZLWKYDOYHV
RQHSRVLWLRQIHHGHUEDUZLWKYDOYHV
IHHGHUORFNYHULILFDWLRQV\VWHPV
FRPSRQHQWGXPSER[
RSHUDWLQJPRQLWRU9*$
RSHUDWLRQSDQHOIURQW
3&NH\ERDUGPRXVHPDLQWHQDQFHVXSSRUWSDQHO
WZRHPSW\WDSHELQV
WRROVHW
ILUVWDLGVSDUHSDUWVNLW
GXPP\IHHGHUV
XVHUUHIHUHQFHRSHUDWLQJDQGVHUYLFHPDQXDOLQ(QJOLVKODQJXDJH
&'520ZLWK+HOSILOHV
IHHGHUPDQXDO
&(VDIHW\
(6'VDIHW\
60(0$VHW

3$
%RDUG&ODPSLQJ6\VWHP
2QO\IDFWRU\EXLOWLQ1RORFDWH
SLQDQGHGJHFODPSLQJDYDLODEOH
3$
)HHGHUEDUH[FKDQJHV\VWHPUHDUVLGHRIWKHPDFKLQHLQFOXGHG)(6
,,
SRVLWLRQFDUWIRU)9*(0 VHULHV
3$
)HHGHUEDUH[FKDQJHV\VWHPIURQWVLGHRIWKHPDFKLQHLQFOXGHG)(6
,,
3$
,,
)(6IHHGHUEDUH[FKDQJHV\VWHPFDUWSRVLWLRQVIRU VHULHV
3$ 3$ 3$

5HDUVLGH&57PRQLWRU )ODWWRXFKVFUHHQPRQLWRU )ODWWRXFKVFUHHQPRQLWRU
NH\ERDUGPRXVH IURQWVLGH IURQWDQGUHDUVLGH
3$
2SHUDWLRQSDQHOUHDUVLGH
3$
0DLQWHQDQFHODPS

3$
0DQXDO7UD\)HHGHU7RSD];(PHUDOG;
2FFXSLHVIHHGHUSRVLWLRQV2SWLRQDOSRVVLEOHQR]]OHH[FKDQJHVWDWLRQVHFRQG
/LQHDUUD\FDPHUDRUVLQJOHDUHD&&'FDPHUD
3$
3$ 3$ 3$
$767UD\IHHGHUODQGVFDSH
$767UD\IHHGHUSRUWUDLW 'RXEOH$767UD\IHHGHU 'RXEOHVKXWWOH7UD\IHHGHU
IRU*(0
IRU*(0 SRUWUDLWIRU*(0 /&6
2QO\IDFWRU\EXLOWLQDW
2QO\IDFWRU\EXLOWLQDW 2QO\IDFWRU\EXLOWLQDW LQFOXGHVSDOOHWV1R
UHDUULJKWVLGHLQFOXGHV
UHDUULJKWVLGHLQFOXGHV UHDUVLGHLQFOXGHV[ FRPSRQHQWEULQJEDFN
SDOOHWVPD[ERDUGZLGWK
SDOOHWVPD[ERDUGZLGWK SDOOHWVPD[ERDUGZLGWK IXQFWLRQ5HMHFWVWDWLRQ3$
PP[
PP[ PP[ LVUHTXLUHGIRUWKLV
SRVLWLRQ[IHHGHUEDU
SRVLWLRQIHHGHUEDU2SWLRQDO SRVLWLRQIHHGHUEDU IXQFWLRQ
2SWLRQDOSRVVLEOHQR]]OH
SRVVLEOHVHFRQG/LQHDUUD\ 2SWLRQDOSRVVLEOH6HFRQG
H[FKDQJHVWDWLRQVHFRQG
FDPHUDQR]]OHH[FKDQJH /LQHDUUD\FDPHUDQR]]OH
/LQHDUUD\FDPHUDRU6LQJOH
VWDWLRQDQG6LQJOHDUHD H[FKDQJHVWDWLRQDQGVLQJOH
DUHD&&'FDPHUD
&&'FDPHUD DUHD&&'FDPHUD
3$
3DOOHWIRUGRXEOHVKXWWOHWUD\IHHGHU3$
3$
3DOOHWIRU3$DQG3$$76SRUWUDLW
3$
3DOOHWIRU3$$76ODQGVFDSH

3$
PP7DSHIHHGHUIRUPPSLWFK
LQFKUHHOKROGHU&/
3$
PP7DSHIHHGHUPPSLWFKIRULQFK
UHHOKROGHU&/
3$
PP7DSHIHHGHUPPSLWFKUHHOKROGHU&/
3$
PP7DSHIHHGHUUHHOKROGHU&/
3$
3$
3$
PP7DSHIHHGHUUHHOKROGHU)9*(036$
3$

3$
3$
*HPEXONFDVVHWWHIHHGHU&ORQJ

5HMHFW%HOW)HHGHU*(0
3$
1R]]OHW\SH)1&
3$
1R]]OHW\SH)1&

3$
1R]]OHW\SH)1&
3$
1R]]OHW\SH$
3$
1R]]OHW\SH
3$
1R]]OHW\SH$
3$
1R]]OHW\SH
3$
1R]]OHW\SH
3$
1R]]OHH[FKDQJHV\VWHP7RSD];SRVLWLRQQR
QR]]OHVLQFO)DFWRU\EXLOWLQ

3$ 3$
6HFRQG/LQHDUUD\FDPHUDPPIRU 6HFRQG/LQHDUUD\FDPHUDPPIRU
,, ,,
7RSD]; )DFWRU\EXLOWLQ 7RSD]; )DFWRU\EXLOWLQ
3$
$UHD&&'FDPHUDPPLQFOXGLQJ6LGH,OOXPLQDWLRQIRU,,VHULHV
)DFWRU\EXLOWLQ
3$
$UHD&&'FDPHUDPPLQFOXGLQJ6LGH,OOXPLQDWLRQIRU,,VHULHV
)DFWRU\EXLOWLQ
3$
7KHVHWZRRSWLRQVDUHRQO\UHTXLUHGLQWKH $GGLWLRQDOVHWRIGXPP\IHHGHUV
(XURSHDQUHJLRQWRFRPSO\ZLWKWKH&(UHJXODWLRQV
'XPP\IHHGHUVDUHQHFHVVDU\LQFDVHWKHIHHGHUEDUV
DUHQRWIXOO\ORDGHGZLWKIHHGHUVGXULQJRSHUDWLRQ
2SHUDWRUDQG8VHUPDQXDO
3OHDVHVHOHFWUHTXLUHGODQJXDJH
(1'

3.3 Ordering Sheet Topaz-XII (SF) PA 1314/02

■ basic machine
■ placement beam with 8 Super Fine heads
lighting adjustment
■ dual Y drive
■ 8 nozzles (2× nozzle 71, 2× nozzle 72, 2× nozzle 73, 1× nozzle 74A, 1× nozzle 76A)
■ two 20 position feederbars with valves
■ one 50 position feederbar with valves
■ feeder lock verification systems
■ toolset
■ first aid spare parts kit
■ feeder manual
■ CE safety
■ ESD safety
■ SMEMA set


PA 2505/58 Feederbar exchange system rear side of the machine, included

PA 2696/26 ATS 20 Tray Feeder landscape for GEM
included)
X(i)II series
X(i)II series

X(i)II series
X(i)II series
3.3.4 Options
PA 2903/78 8 mm Tape Feeder for 0402, 2 mm pitch, 15 inch reelholder FV/
GEM CL
PA 2903/79 8 mm Tape Feeder, 4 mm pitch, 15 inch reelholder FV/GEM CL
PA 2903/88 12 mm Tape Feeder, 15 inch reelholder FV/GEM CL


PA 2906/10 Reject Belt Feeder GEM
PA 2981/36 Pallet for PA 2696/26 (ATS 20 landscape)

PA 2962/47 Nozzle Type 71 (0201)
3.3.6 Documentation
NOTE: User reference, Operating and Service manual in English together with an
option Manual CSM/GEM feeders are part of the standard configuration


EDVLFPDFKLQH
SODFHPHQWEHDPZLWK6XSHU)LQHKHDGV
GXDO<GULYH
QR]]OHV[QR]]OH[QR]]OH[QR]]OH[QR]]OH$[QR]]OH$
3&%WUDQVIHUV\VWHP
3&%ORFDWHSLQV\VWHP
HGJHFODPSV\VWHP
H[LW6XEVWRSSHU
WZRSRVLWLRQIHHGHUEDUVZLWKYDOYHV
RQHSRVLWLRQIHHGHUEDUZLWKYDOYHV
IHHGHUORFNYHULILFDWLRQV\VWHPV
FRPSRQHQWGXPSER[
RSHUDWLQJPRQLWRU9*$
RSHUDWLRQSDQHOIURQW
WZRHPSW\WDSHELQV
WRROVHW
ILUVWDLGVSDUHSDUWVNLW
GXPP\IHHGHUV
&'520ZLWK+HOSILOHV
IHHGHUPDQXDO
&(VDIHW\
(6'VDIHW\
60(0$VHW

3$
%RDUGFODPSLQJV\VWHP
2QO\IDFWRU\EXLOWLQ1RORFDWHSLQ
DQGHGJHFODPSLQJDYDLODEOH
3$
)HHGHUEDUH[FKDQJHV\VWHPUHDUVLGHRIWKHPDFKLQHLQFOXGHG)(6
,,
3$
,,
3$
,,
3$ 3$ 3$
3$
3$
0DLQWHQDQFHODPS

3$
3$
3$ 3$ 3$
$767UD\IHHGHUODQGVFDSH
$767UD\IHHGHUSRUWUDLW 'RXEOH$767UD\IHHGHU 'RXEOHVKXWWOH7UD\IHHGHU
IRU*(0
IRU*(0 SRUWUDLWIRU*(0 /&6
2QO\IDFWRU\EXLOWLQDW
2QO\IDFWRU\EXLOWLQDW 2QO\IDFWRU\EXLOWLQDW LQFOXGHVSDOOHWV1R
UHDUULJKWVLGHLQFOXGHV
SDOOHWVPD[ERDUGZLGWK
PP[
SRVLWLRQ[IHHGHUEDU
SRVLWLRQIHHGHUEDU2SWLRQDO SRVLWLRQIHHGHUEDU IXQFWLRQ
2SWLRQDOSRVVLEOHQR]]OH
H[FKDQJHVWDWLRQVHFRQG
/LQHDUUD\FDPHUDRU6LQJOH
DUHD&&'FDPHUD
3$
3$
3$
3DOOHWIRU3$$76ODQGVFDSH

3$
LQFKUHHOKROGHU&/
3$
UHHOKROGHU&/
3$
3$
3$
3$
3$
3$

3$
3$

5HMHFW%HOW)HHGHU*(0
3$
1R]]OHW\SH$
3$
1R]]OHW\SH

3$
1R]]OHW\SH$
3$
1R]]OHW\SH
3$
1R]]OHW\SH
3$
1R]]OHH[FKDQJHV\VWHP7RSD];SRVLWLRQ
QRQR]]OHVLQFO)DFWRU\EXLOWLQ
3$ 3$
,, ,,
3$
,,
$UHD&&'FDPHUDPPLQFOXGLQJ6LGH,OOXPLQDWLRQIRU VHULHV
)DFWRU\EXLOWLQ
3$
,,
)DFWRU\EXLOWLQ
(1'

3$
2SHUDWRUDQG8VHUPD QXDO
(1'

3.4 Ordering Sheet Topaz-XiII (FNC) PA 1314/10

■ basic machine
■ placement beam with four standard and four FNC heads
lighting adjustment
■ dual Y drive
■ 12 nozzles (4× nozzle 71F, 4× nozzle 72F, 4× nozzle 73F) for the FNC heads
■ 4× nozzle 72 for the standard heads
■ four 20 position ITF fixed feederbars
■ feeder lock verification systems (ITF type)
■ component dump box (ITF type)
■ flat/touch screen monitor
■ toolset
■ first aid spare parts kit (ITF type)
■ 10 dummy feeders (ITF type)
■ feeder manual
■ CE safety
■ ESD safety
■ SMEMA set

PA 2505/53 Feederbar exchange system front side, included FES 20 position
cart for ITF

PA 2505/56 Feederbar exchange system rear side, included FES 20 position

cart for ITF
PA 2506/32 Flat/touch screen monitor rear side
included)
X(i)II series
X(i)II series

PA 2505/61 Modification kit Feederbar exchange system FES 20 for XiII serie
X(i)II series
X(i)II series
3.4.4 Options
PA 2505/52 FES (Feederbar Exchange) cart 20 position for ITF
PA 2601/00 Tape Loading Unit
PA 2602/00 Feeder Storage Cart
PA 2654/05 Intelligent Tapefeeder 8mm
PA 2908/11 Tape connector 8/12/16mm tape
PA 2923/10 Set of 10 dummy feeders ITF


9466 920 10911 Reject Belt Feeder GEM (ITF)

PA 2962/47 Nozzle Type 71 (0201)
3.4.6 Documentation


6WDUW
EDVLFPDFKLQH
SODFHPHQWEHDPZLWKIRXUVWDQGDUGDQGIRXU)1&KHDGV
GXDO<GULYH
QR]]OHV[QR]]OH)[QR]]OH)[QR]]OH)IRUWKH)1&KHDGV
[QR]]OHIRUWKHVWDQGDUGKHDGV
3&%WUDQVIHUV\VWHP
3&%ORFDWHSLQV\VWHP
HGJHFODPSV\VWHP
H[LW6XEVWRSSHU
IRXUSRVLWLRQ,7)IL[HGIHHGHUEDUV
IHHGHUORFNYHULILFDWLRQV\VWHPV,7)W\SH
FRPSRQHQWGXPSER[,7)W\SH
IODWWRXFKVFUHHQPRQLWRU
RSHUDWLRQSDQHOIURQW
WZRHPSW\WDSHELQV
WRROVHW
ILUVWDLGVSDUHSDUWVNLW,7)W\SH
GXPP\IHHGHUV,7)W\SH
&'520ZLWK+HOSILOHV
IHHGHUPDQXDO
&(VDIHW\
(6'VDIHW\
60(0$VHW

3$
%RDUG&ODPSLQJV\VWHP
2QO\IDFWRU\EXLOWLQ1RORFDWHSLQDQGHGJH
FODPSLQJDYDLODEOH
3$
)(6)HHGHUEDUH[FKDQJHFDUWSRVLWLRQVIRU,7)
3$
)HHGHUEDUH[FKDQJHV\VWHPIURQWVLGHLQFO)(6
SRVLWLRQFDUWIRU,7)
3$
)HHGHUEDUH[FKDQJHV\VWHPUHDUVLGHLQFO)(6
SRVLWLRQFDUWIRU,7)
3$
)ODWWRXFKVFUHHQPRQLWRUUHDUVLGH
3$
3$
0DLQWHQDQFHODPS

3$ 3$
3$
$767UD\IHHGHUSRUWUDLW 'RXEOH$767UD\IHHGHU
'RXEOHVKXWWOH7UD\IHHGHU
IRU*(0 SRUWUDLWIRU*(0
/&6
2QO\IDFWRU\EXLOWLQDW 2QO\IDFWRU\EXLOWLQDW
LQFOXGHVSDOOHWV1R
UHDUULJKWVLGHLQFOXGHV UHDUVLGHLQFOXGHV[
FRPSRQHQWEULQJEDFN
SRVLWLRQIHHGHUEDU2SWLRQDO SRVLWLRQIHHGHUEDU
IXQFWLRQ
3$
3$
3$
7DSH/RDGLQJ8QLW

3$
)HHGHU6WRUDJH&DUW
3$
,QWHOOLJHQW7DSHIHHGHUPP
3$
3$
3$
3$
3$
3$


5HMHFW%HOW)HHGHU*(0,7)
3$
1R]]OHW\SH)1&
3$
1R]]OHW\SH)1&
3$
1R]]OHW\SH)1&
3$
1R]]OHW\SH$
3$
1R]]OHW\SH
3$
1R]]OHW\SH$

3$
1R]]OHW\SH
3$
1R]]OHW\SH
3$
3$ 3$
,, ,,
3$
,,
)DFWRU\EXLOWLQ
3$
,,
)DFWRU\EXLOWLQ

3$
$GGLWLRQDOVHWRIGXPP\IHHGHUV
7KHVHWZRRSWLRQVDUHRQO\UHTXLUHGLQWKH
,7)
(1'

3.5 Ordering Sheet Topaz-XiII (SF) PA 1314/11

■ basic machine
lighting adjustment
■ dual Y drive
■ 8 nozzles (2× nozzle 71, 2× nozzle 72, 2× nozzle 73, 1× nozzle 74A, 1× nozzle
76A)
■ four 20 position ITF fixed feederbars
■ feeder lock verification systems (ITF type)
■ component dump box (ITF type)
■ flat/touch screen monitor
■ toolset
■ first aid spare parts kit (ITF type)
■ 10 dummy feeders (ITF type)
■ feeder manual
■ CE safety
■ ESD safety
■ SMEMA set

PA 2505/25 Board Clamping system for Topaz-X(i) II or Emerald-X(i) II
PA 2505/53 Feederbar Exchange system front side, included FES 20 position
cart for ITF

PA 2505/56 Feederbar Exchange system rear side, included FES 20 position

cart for ITF
PA 2506/32 Flat/touch screen monitor rear side
included)
X(i)II series
X(i)II series

X(i)II series
X(i)II series
3.5.4 Options
PA 2505/52 FES (Feederbar Exchange) cart 20 position for ITF
PA 2601/00 Tape Loading Unit
PA 2602/00 Feeder Storage Cart

PA 2908/11 Tape connector 8/12/16mm tape

PA 2923/10 Set of 10 dummy feeders ITF
9466 920 10911 Reject Belt Feeder GEM (ITF)

PA 2962/47 Nozzle Type 71 (0201)
3.5.6 Documentation


6WDUW
EDVLFPDFKLQH
GXDO<GULYH
QR]]OHV[QR]]OH[QR]]OH[QR]]OH[QR]]OH$[QR]]OH$
3&%WUDQVIHUV\VWHP
3&%ORFDWHSLQV\VWHP
HGJHFODPSV\VWHP
H[LW6XEVWRSSHU
IRXUSRVLWLRQ,7)IL[HGIHHGHUEDUV
IHHGHUORFNYHULILFDWLRQV\VWHPV,7)W\SH
FRPSRQHQWGXPSER[,7)W\SH
IODWWRXFKVFUHHQPRQLWRU
RSHUDWLRQSDQHOIURQW
WZRHPSW\WDSHELQV
WRROVHW
ILUVWDLGVSDUHSDUWVNLW,7)W\SH
GXPP\IHHGHUV,7)W\SH
&'520ZLWK+HOSILOHV
IHHGHUPDQXDO
&(VDIHW\
(6'VDIHW\
60(0$VHW

3$
%RDUG&ODPSLQJV\VWHP
2QO\IDFWRU\EXLOWLQ1RORFDWHSLQDQGHGJH
FODPSLQJDYDLODEOH
3$
)(6)HHGHUEDUH[FKDQJHFDUWSRVLWLRQVIRU,7)
3$
)HHGHUEDUH[FKDQJHV\VWHPIURQWVLGHLQFO)(6
SRVLWLRQFDUWIRU,7)
3$
)HHGHUEDUH[FKDQJHV\VWHPUHDUVLGHLQFO)(6
SRVLWLRQFDUWIRU,7)
3$
)ODWWRXFKVFUHHQPRQLWRUUHDUVLGH
3$
3$
0DLQWHQDQFHODPS

3$ 3$
3$
$767UD\IHHGHUSRUWUDLW 'RXEOH$767UD\IHHGHU
IRU*(0 SRUWUDLWIRU*(0
/&6
2QO\IDFWRU\EXLOWLQDW 2QO\IDFWRU\EXLOWLQDW
LQFOXGHVSDOOHWV1R
SDOOHWVPD[ERDUGZLGWK SDOOHWVPD[ERDUGZLGWK
IXQFWLRQ5HMHFWVWDWLRQ3$
SRVLWLRQIHHGHUEDU2SWLRQDO SRVLWLRQIHHGHUEDU
IXQFWLRQ
3$
3$
3$
7DSH/RDGLQJ8QLW

3$
)HHGHU6WRUDJH&DUW
3$
3$
3$
3$
3$
3$
3$


5HMHFW%HOW)HHGHU*(0,7)
3$
1R]]OHW\SH$
3$
1R]]OHW\SH
3$
1R]]OHW\SH$
3$
1R]]OHW\SH
3$
1R]]OHW\SH
3$

3$ 3$
,, ,,
3$
,,
)DFWRU\EXLOWLQ
3$
,,
)DFWRU\EXLOWLQ
3$
$GGLWLRQDOVHWRIGXPP\IHHGHUV
7KHVHWZRRSWLRQVDUHRQO\UHTXLUHGLQWKH
,7)
(1'

3.6 Ordering Sheet Opal-XII PA 1314/03

■ basic machine
■ 1 line array camera 45mm with fore and side light system for component
alignment
lighting adjustment
■ dual Y drive
■ 4 nozzles ( 1× nozzle 72, 1× nozzle 73, 1× nozzle 77, 1× nozzle 76A)
■ 50 position feederbar with valves front side
■ 50 position feederbar with valves rear side
■ PC keyboard, mouse,
■ toolset
■ first aid spare parts kit (with 1× nozzle 71, 1× nozzle 72, 1× nozzle 73, 1× nozzle
type 75, 1× nozzle 76A)
■ feeder manual
■ CE safety
■ ESD safety
■ SMEMA set

PA 2505/26 Board Clamping system for Opal-XII


PA 2930/15 Empty Tape waste bin (2 pieces)
PA 2932/40 Feeder Lock Verification for Opal-XII front and rear for 50
position fixed feederbar
PA 2932/41 Feeder Lock Verification for Opal-XII front for FES 20 and rear 50
position fixed feederbar
PA 2963/27 Nozzle Exchange System Opal-XII (20 positions/no nozzles
included)
X(i)II series

X(i)II series
3.6.4 Options
PA 1912/00 CSM/GEM glass adjustment kit
PA 2699/24 Double shuttle Tray Feeder (LCS) for Opal-XII
PA 2903/79 8 mm Tape Feeder, 4 mm pitch, 15 inch reelholder CL
PA 2981/15 Pallet for LCS Tray Feeder FV/GEM (PA 2699/23/24)
9466 920 10921 Reject belt feeder for GEM


PA 2962/47 Nozzle Type 71 (0201)

3.6.6 Documentation


6WDUW
EDVLFPDFKLQH
OLQHDUUD\FDPHUDPPZLWKIRUHDQGVLGHOLJKWV\VWHPIRUFRPSRQHQWDOLJQPHQW
GXDO<GULYH
QR]]OHV[QR]]OH[QR]]OH[QR]]OH[QR]]OH$
3&%WUDQVIHUV\VWHP
3&%ORFDWHSLQV\VWHP
H[LW6XEVWRSSHU
SRVLWLRQIHHGHUEDUZLWKYDOYHVIURQWVLGH
SRVLWLRQIHHGHUEDUZLWKYDOYHVUHDUVLGH
FRPSRQHQWGXPSER[
RSHUDWLQJPRQLWRU9*$
RSHUDWLRQSDQHOIURQW
3&NH\ERDUGPRXVH
WRROVHW
ILUVWDLGVSDUHSDUWVNLWZLWK[QR]]OH[QR]]OH[QR]]OH[QR]]OHW\SH[
QR]]OH$
GXPP\IHHGHUV
&'520ZLWK+HOSILOHV
IHHGHUPDQXDO
&(VDIHW\
(6'VDIHW\
60(0$VHW

3$
%RDUGFODPSLQJV\VWHP2SDO;,,
1RORFDWHSLQDQGHGJHFODPSLQJ
DYDLODEOH
3$
,,
3$
,,
3$ 3$ 3$
3$
3$
0DLQWHQDQFHODPS

3$
3$
/&6
LQFOXGHVSDOOHWV1R
FRPSRQHQWEULQJEDFN
IXQFWLRQ5HMHFWEHOWIHHGHU
LVUHTXLUHGIRUWKLVIXQFWLRQ

3$

3$
LQFKUHHOKROGHU&/
3$
UHHOKROGHU&/
3$
3$
3$
3$
3$

3$
3$
3$
3$
(PSW\WDSHZDVWHELQVSLHFHV
3$ 3$
)HHGHU/RFNYHULILFDWLRQIRU2SDO;,,IURQW )HHGHU/RFNYHULILFDWLRQIRU2SDO;,,IURQW
DQGUHDUSRVIL[HG DQGUHDUSRVILH[HGUHDU)(6IURQW
3$
1R]]OHW\SH
3$
1R]]OHW\SH$

3$
1R]]OHW\SH
3$
1R]]OHW\SH
3$
1R]]OHW\SH
3$
1R]]OHW\SH
3$
1R]]OHH[FKDQJHV\VWHP2SDO;,,SRVLWLRQVQRQR]]OHVLQFO
)DFWRU\EXLOWLQ
3$
,,
)DFWRU\EXLOWLQ

5HMHFWEHOWIHHGHUIRU*(0

3$
2SHUDWRUDQG8VHUPDQXD O
(1'

System Description
CHAPTER 4 System Description

4.1 Introduction
This chapter gives an explanatory system description of all functional blocks (see
general block diagram in figure 4-1 of the machine).
A more detailed explanation is given in the module chapters 11 through 16.
Chapter 4.9 is the calibration chapter in which all steps are explained from instal-
lation till site acceptance test and, if needed, calibration.
4.2 Block Diagrams

This chapter shows both general and electrical block diagrams of the Topaz-XII
Series/Opal-XII.
The general block diagram, figure 4-1, shows the main sections of the Topaz-XII
Series/Opal-XII.
The electrical block diagram, figure 4-2, shows an overview of the main electrical
parts of the system.
4.2.1 General Block Diagram
VISION SYSTEM
COMPONENT TRANSPORT SYSTEM
AXES SYSTEM
PCB TRANSPORT SYSTEM
MCX CONTROLLER USER INTERFACE

Fig. 2.1. Block diagram Topaz
SOFTWARE
AIR SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY
FIGURE 4-1 General block diagram Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII

System Description
4.2.2 Electrical Overall Block Diagram
FIGURE 4-2 Electrical overall block diagram

System Description
4.2.3 Camera Positions

The camera positions of the main machine are shown in the figure below. The
connections on the vision board (VICS3200) and settings in the software corre-
sponds to those cameras.
9300140t
FIGURE 4-3 Topaz-X(i)II Series
Analog camera 1 is the moving camera. It is located upon the head assy (not
shown in the figure). It is connected with the A-CAM 1 connector on the vision
board.
Analog camera 2 is the single vision camera. It is connected with the A-CAM 2
connector on the vision board.
Digital camera 1 is the first line array camera (front side) available in the standard
machine. It is connected with the ‘D-CAM 1’ connector on the vision board.
Digital camera 2 is the second line array camera (rear side) Topaz-XII Series only. It
is connected with the ‘D-CAM 2’ connector on the vision board.

System Description
4.3 Power & Safety

4.3.1 Introduction
The Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII has a number of safety circuits and power supplies.
Detailed schematics can be found in “Chapter 5 Trouble Shooting” of this manual.
The procedure how to connect the main power cable is explained in chapter 4.9
“Installation and Calibration”.
4.3.2 Power Circuits

The Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII must be connected to a three phase mains power
system. The Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII has the following specifications:
AC Voltage selection: 200/208/220/240/380/400/416 V AC ± 10%,
Frequency: 50/60Hz.
Power rating 4.4 KVA max.
Voltage interruptions Not longer then 6 mS.
Voltage drops less than 15% and not longer then 0.5 Sec.
The mains have to be connected with 3 cables with 2.5 mm2 to the terminal block
XB11. Always connect a ground wire of 2.5 mm2 to the ground terminal M4 (PE).
The Mains transformers must be configured according to the supplied Mains voltage
level. The tap settings on the two transformers TC11 and TM11 must be configured
according to the schedule. In every system the transformer tap-setting schedule can
be found at the inside of the power-box door.
!
WARNING: WHEN CONNECTING THE MAINS POWER, MAKE SURE TO CONFIGURE THE MAINS
TRANSFORMERS BEFORE. WHEN CHANGING THE MAINS INPUT VOLTAGE,
ALWAYS CHECK FIRST WITH THE ASSEMBLÉON SERVICE CENTER. MAKE SURE
TO TAKE ALL NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID DANGEROUS SITUATIONS.
!
WARNING: ONLY TRAINED TECHNICAL PERSONNEL IS ALLOWED TO WORK IN THE POWER
SECTION OF THE MACHINE. TAKE CARE TO TAKE THE NECESSARY ACTIONS TO
AVOID DANGEROUS SITUATIONS. SWITCH OFF THE MAINS POWER WHEN
WORKING IN THE MAINS POWER BOX.
Transformer TC11 is used for the logic circuits and converts the 1-phase input 380V
voltage to a 1-phase 100 supply voltage. TC11 uses following tap:
Tap U10: 100 volts; this voltage is used for the two monitors via QF21 (5A) and/or QF24
(2A). Make sure to set the correct tap (100V) when installing the monitors!
Transformer TM11 supplies the motor driver boards and converts the voltage level but
keeps it a 3-phase supply voltage. The output of the TM11 transformer is 3- phase 220V

System Description
AC and is fed, via QF31 (10A) and the emergency power relays KM11 and KM12, to the
282V D(river)-power supply in the MCX controller. Also the conveyor belt motors and
the connection board are fed, via QF32 (2A), by this transformer via KM11A and KM12A.
In figure 2 the circuit breaker box is shown (with removed front cover). This box
locates all the circuit breakers of the Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII system. Below a list
is given of all the circuit breakers functions.
QF11:. . . . . . 10 A ... Mains circuit breaker
QF11A:. . . . . 6.3A ... Mains circuit breaker
QF21:. . . . . . .5 A ... Monitor (VGA at the front) and controller box
QF24:. . . . . . .2 A ... Monitor (VGA at the rear, option)
QF22:. . . . . . .7 A ... Power supply GS21
QF31:. . . . . . 10 A ... Motor drivers
QF32:. . . . . . .2 A ... Conveyor motors and connection box
XB11: . . . . . . . . ... Mains input terminal.
QF11 10A QF11A 6.3A
QF21 QF22 QF24

5A 7A 2A
QF31 QF32
10A 2A
L1 L2 L3 PE
XB11
FIGURE 4-4 Fuse box

System Description
4.3.3 5/12 Volt Power Supply MCX Box

In the MCX controller two TDK power supplies are used to supply +5V, +12V and –
12V. These power supply is located at the left side of the MCX controller box, please
refer to figure 4-5. The layout of this power supply is shown in figure 4-6.
MCX-2 controller box
5 volt power supply
12 volt power supply
FIGURE 4-5 +5/+12/-12V power supply location
+V / Ou tpu t Te rm inal LED
-V / Ou tpu t Te rm inal
Fr ame Ground Terminal
Inpu t Terminal
Trimmer to Adjust
O u tput Voltage
YAM AHA Parts
numbe r Printed
FIGURE 4-6 Power supply PCB layout
These power supply units in the controller convert 100V AC into 5V DC and 12V DC.
One unit provides each of +5V and +12V. The DC-DC converter on the mother board
provides the -12V DC. The following connection points are on the power supply.
1. Input terminal (AC-L, AC-N). It is connected to single phase line of AC 100V.
2. Frame ground terminal (earth marking). It is connected to the controller panel
by earth wiring.

System Description
3. Output terminal (+V/ -V). It is connected to the loading harness.

4. Trimmer to adjust the output voltage. This trimmer is used to adjust the output
voltage. The variable range of voltage is ± 10%.
4.3.3.1 Replacing the 5/12 Volt Power Supply MCX Box
1. Remove all connectors, slide out the controller and remove the cover.
FIGURE 4-7 MCX controller
2. Remove connector (CN19) from motherboard.
FIGURE 4-8 MCX controller

System Description
3. Disconnect “AC100V” connector
FIGURE 4-9 Connector SW power supply
4. Loosen (if present) the three screws, that fix the plate of the SW power supply,
(see Note) and remove it.
FIGURE 4-10 SW power supply
NOTE: The SW power supply can also be mounted in the MCX controller with a
support.

System Description
FIGURE 4-11 Mounting support SW power supply
Installing is done in reverse order.
4.3.4 24 Volt I/O and Emergency Power Supply (GS21)

The 24V-power supply GS21 is of the type PAA 600F-24 that can deliver an output
current of max. 27A. The AC input voltage of this power supply is factory set to 100VAC.
At the rear side of this power supply the output voltage can be adjusted by means
of a potentiometer (V.adj), please refer to figure 4-12. Adjust the voltage to
24V±0.50.
FIGURE 4-12 Location GS21 and GS22 power supply.
The power supply is located in the power box at the rear side of the system next to
the two mains transformers TM11 and TC11.

System Description
4.3.5 12 Volt Power Supply for Topaz-XiII (GS22)

The 12 volt power supply is needed to supply 12 volt to the ITF feeders. The power
supply is of the type JWS300-12 that can deliver an output of max. 25A. The AC
input voltage of this power supply is set to 100 VAC. At the rear side of this power
supply the output voltage can be adjusted by means of a potentiometer (V.adj)
adjust to 12V±0.50. The layout of this power supply is the same as figure 4-12 and
is at the rear of the machine and next to the transformer above the 24 volt power
supply (GS21).
4.3.6 D(river) - Power Assembly (282VDC Power)

The D-power assy rectifies the 3-phase 220VAC power and supplies 282VDC to the
driver boards. The assembly consists of the D-power-board itself and the capacitor
CAP1 and CAP2 which are located at the right-side back corner of the MCX-2
controller box, see figure 4-13 below.
Fuse 1
220V AC (U) IN
220V AC (V) IN
220V AC (W) IN
LED 5
LED 4
LED 3
Fuse LED 2
FU2 LED 1
282V to Driver-boards Jumper 1
Cap 1 Cap2
18V in from
trafo CN1 Interlock
CN3 EMG
CN2
FIGURE 4-13 D(river) power assy

System Description
The following circuits can be distinguished:

■ 12V reference circuit:
The reference circuit receives a 18VAC voltage (CN2) from a separate transformer
inside the MCX-2 box. The 18VAC is protected by a fuse FU2 of 0.3 Amp. After
rectifying a 12VDC voltage is generated which is used for the controlling
circuitry. The LED-1 (green) will be lit, as long as the temperature is OK.
■ Inrush protection circuit:
This circuit inhibits a high inrush current when the 220VAC is switched on. After some
time (measured via the input voltage period) the serial resistors R1-R3 are shorted.
■ Phase check circuit:
This circuit checks the 3 phases of the input voltage. If not OK, a signal will be
sent to the Servo card, via the INTLCK-connector CN3 and the LED-2 (green) will
be OFF. There is a jumper selection on the board to select 1-phase (jumper on
position (2-3)) or 3-phase (jumper on position 1-2) input voltage. In the GEM-
line systems we always use the 3-phase input voltage, so the jumper is always set
to 1-2. (part of the phase-check circuit), the jumper image is shown in table 1.
■ Under voltage detection:
This circuit checks if the Input voltage is active AND if the output voltage is
lower then 186VDC. If this is the case then LED-3 (orange) will be ON and the
servo- board will be informed via the INTLCK-connector CN3. The LED is OFF
under normal conditions.
■ Over voltage detection:
This circuit checks if the output is over 414VDC. If this is the case LED-4 (red)
will lit as long as the 12V of the ref. circuit is on. The servo-board will be
informed AND a EMG signal will be generated (Not used).
■ Temperature sensing:
The temperature inside the controller is continuously sensed. If the temperature is
more than 65°C, LED-1 (green) will be OFF while a signal is sent to the servo-board.
■ Drive power charging:
An indication, LED-5, is made to see when the capacitor is charging-up.
As mentioned before the INTERLOCK connector which is going to the servo-board
(to switch off the D-power and stops the motors) has the following 4 signals:
,QWHUORFN&1 (IIHFW /(' &RQGLWLRQVIRUFORVH
INT1 pos.1-2 Voltage low 3 Output over 186V DC
3-phase AC input is active (JP1:1-2) OR
INT2 pos.3-4 Phase loss 2
only 1-phase AC input is active (JP1:2-3)
INT3 pos.5-6 Temp./voltage 4 Temp. is under 65 degrees Celcius AND the
EMG CN2 pos.1-2 Over flow 1 ouput is under 414V DC.
TABLE 4-1

System Description
Please refer to Chapter 5 for the circuit diagram of the D-power assy.
4.3.7 Measuring and Adjusting Data

4.3.7.1 MCX Controller Box
The voltages inside the MCX controller box can be measured at the mother-board
connectors CN5,6 and 9 near the LED indicators, follow the next procedure to do so.
■ Loosen the MCX-2 box so it can slide out of the machine.
■ Loosen the two top-cover screws.
■ Remove the left front cover (at the motherboard LED’s)
■ Some connectors can now be seen, see mother board (Chapter 4.5.7)
■ Measure at the testpoints (behind the LED’s) the following voltages:
• TP1: +5V ± 0.1V pins 1,2
• TP2: +12V ± 0.25V pins 3,4
• TP3: -12V ± 0.5V pin 3
• TP5: GND pins 5,6,7
■ If the measured voltage is not within the specification given above they can be
adjusted with the potentiometers as is indicated in figure 4-6.
■ Reinstall the front and top-cover after the adjustment is done
■ Push the MCX controller box back into the machine and secure it.
!
WARNING: MAKE SURE TO CHECK THE +5, +12, AND -12 VOLT POWER SUPPLIES INSIDE
THE MCX CONTROLLER AT REGULAR INTERVALS (EACH 3 MONTHS). ESPE-
CIALLY THE +12 AND -12 VOLTS ARE IMPORTANT FOR THE SERVO SYSTEMS
BECAUSE THEY ARE USED FOR THE IC’S IN THE SERVO CONTROL CIRCUITRY
4.3.7.2 GS21 – 24V Power Supply
The voltage of the GS21 power supply can be measured at the power supply
terminals. Carry out following actions:
■ Open the power-box doors at the rear side of the system.
■ Locate the GS21 power-supply and measure at the terminals the following
voltage: +24V ± 0.50V.
■ If the voltage is not OK, adjust the level with the potentiometer (figure 4-12).
■ Close the power-box doors.

System Description
4.3.8 Performance Check and Trouble Shooting

No performance check is needed for the power supplies of the system. All power
supplies have a LED indication (green light) when the voltage is ok. This can be
handy in case of trouble shooting some problems. Make sure that the NOT GOOD-
signal (POWER NG) is not activated. All servo boards are interconnected with an
EMG- signal, this signal gives and EMERGENCY error when active.
4.3.9 Maintenance Instructions

■ Check the voltages of all power supplies each 3 months and adjust if necessary.
■ Check and clean the two fans inside the MCX-2 controller box.
■ Check all cabling and harnesses from and to the power-supply’s (check for bad
connections and discoloured wires).
■ Check all emergencies switches and harnesses (e.g. EMG-cabling) on their func-
tionality.
■ Check all fuses in the mains circuit.
4.3.10 Safety
The safety interlock circuit of the Topaz-XII Series consists out of a number of
switches and relays contacts. These switches or contacts are activated during an
unsafe situation of the machine. Examples are open covers, over-travel, low
voltages, low air, over-current, and activation of the EMG switches. Figure 5-3 shows
the safety circuit diagram with the various safety switches and relays contacts. On
the next page a simplified drawing is made of this circuit.
The following situations should activate an emergency situation that causes an
immediate stop of all movements inside the machine:
■ Opening of one of the covers during running of the machine
■ The over-travel (OT) signal indicates a movement of one of the axes beyond the
soft limit range.
■ Low air pressure.
■ Activation of one of the EMG switches which are located at the front and the
rear side of the machine and at the hand-held keyboard.
■ Feeder floating signal, indicating a wrongly installed feeder.
■ Low voltages.
■ Over-current in one of the motor driver boards.
In most cases the controller will display an ERROR code with a short description of
the emergency cause on the VGOS monitor. In paragraph 5.1.2 a list of possible
causes is given. If the Tray Changer or Auto Tray Stacker are installed, also
emergency conditions from those devices can stop the machine.

System Description
Re-activation of the system is only possible after resolving the emergency cause and
pressing the READY-switch on the operation panel.
!
WARNING: WHEN WORKING AT THE SYSTEMS SAFETY CIRCUIT MAKE SURE TO TAKE ALL
THE NECESSARY SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID POSSIBLE DANGER.
4.3.11 Safety Circuit

The detailed safety diagram of the system can be found in Chapter 5. A more
simplified diagram is shown in figure 4-14. All signals from and to the various
switches and sensors are going via the connection-board. On this connection-board
various LED’s are mounted which indicate the status of the Over Travel (OT) and
emergency (EMG) signals, see table 2. Also the 24VDC from the GS21 power supply is
distributed via this board.
FIGURE 4-14 Safety circuit Topaz-XII Series

System Description
/HGQR &RORXU 0DUN &RQGLWLRQ

1 Yellow LED 1 X-I over travel OK
2 Yellow LED 2 X-2 over travel OK
3 Yellow LED 3 Y-1 over travel OK
4 Yellow LED 4 Y-2 over travel OK (Sapphire only)
5 Yellow LED 5 Optional emergency circuit OK
6 Yellow LED 6 MSP emergency circuit OK
7 Yellow LED 7 EMG switch right OK (Sapphire)
8 Yellow LED 8 EMG switch rear OK
9 Yellow LED 9 EMG switch front OK
10 Yellow LED 10 Controller OK
11 Yellow LED 11 EMG switch tray changer OK
12 Yellow LED 12 EMG switch tray changer OK
13 Yellow LED 13 Cover on front side OK
14 Yellow LED 14 Cover tray changer front1 side OK
15 Yellow LED 15 Cover tray changer front 2 side OK
16 Yellow LED 16 Front area sensor OK (Not applicable Assembléon machine)
17 Yellow LED 17 Cover on rear side OK
18 Yellow LED 18 Cover tray changer rear1 side OK
19 Yellow LED 19 Cover tray changer rear2 side OK
20 Yellow LED 20 Rear area sensor OK (not applicable Assembléon machine)
21 Yellow LED 21 Spare 1 EMG circuit OK (FES20)
22 Yellow LED 22 Spare 2 EMG circuit OK (FES20)
23 Yellow LED 23 Spare 3 EMG circuit OK
TABLE 4-2 Meaning of LED’s on the connection board.
NOTE: When LED1 to LED5 are ON, and the LED6 to LED23 are OFF, then the MSP
EMG STOP (LED6) is NOT GOOD (NG). This means that there is something
wrong with the MSP circuitry.
NOTE: As can be seen from figure 4-14, it is only possible to have a cover open
at one side at the time. It is also needed to press the dead man push-
button continuously in order to keep the servo system active.

System Description
4.4 Vacuum & Pneumatic Systems

4.4.1 Introduction
This section describes the vacuum systems used in the Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII.
How to set vacuum levels of the machine like pickup vacuum, mount vacuum etc. is
described in chapter 15 “Placement head”.
4.4.2 Functional Description

The vacuum pumps of the Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII are based on the use of ejectors.
An ejector uses compressed air to create a vacuum. Each head of the Topaz-XII
Series/Opal-XII has its own ejector which can be switched on and off via an air-
valve inside the ejector pump. As can be seen in the total overview airflow diagram
in chapter 5, the compressed air for the vacuum section is fed from the regulator
and is sent via a hose and a coupling to the ejectors of the head assy.
The vacuum level is measured at the head I/O board, see interconnect diagram of
the head I/O assy (see chapter 5). The ejectors can be switched on/off via the in/
output monitor in the VGOS software.
The Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII has two separate air pressure regulators. One is used
for the ejectors and one is used for the air solenoids of the system. The air pressure
regulator for the vacuum-line is located behind the lower left panel at the left side
of the machine.
Main stopper
Locate pin
Edge clamp
Push-in unit
Entrance stopper
Exit stopper
Nozzle station
Air valves for conveyor unit

operation
3C043 30
FIGURE 4-15 Valves

System Description
4.4.3 Air Supply Unit

The air supply unit is located outside the lower left panel on the front side of the
machine, along with a pressure regulator. The air pressure regulator must be set
correctly in order to provide optimum air pressure for the vacuum ejector and
pneumatic devices. Before making the setting, be sure that the pressure from the
primary air supply is between 0.6 and 0.7 MPa.
4.4.4 Air Pressure Regulator

The air pressure regulator can be adjusted with the valve control knob as follows:
■ Open the lower left panel on the front side of the machine.
The pressure regulator (valve control knob) and pressure meter are located inside
the panel.
■ Adjust the air pressure. Turn the valve control knob so that the air pressure
(black needle) is set to 0.55MPa.
Pressure indicator
5
4 6
0.5
0.4 0.6
3 7
0.3 0.7
2 0.2 0.8 8
Pressure drop detection level (red)
0.1 MPa 0.9
1 (kgf/cm2) 9 Pressure indicator needle (black)
0.0 1.0
0 10
Adjustment screw
(for pressure drop detection level setting)
Pressure regulator
Air filters
Residual pressure bleed off knob
3C043 60
FIGURE 4-16 Pressure meter.
!
WARNING: IF THIS PRESSURE SETTING IS NOT CORRECT, THE VACUUM EJECTOR CANNOT
FUNCTION ADEQUATELY AND AIR CYLINDERS BECOME UNSTABLE. BE SURE
THAT THE PRESSURE IS SET WITHIN THE SPECIFIED VALUE.

System Description
4.4.5 Pressure-drop Detection Level

If the air supply pressure drops below this adjustable level, the pressure-drop
detection switch triggers an emergency stop and prohibits the movement of all
axes. At the same time, a message appears on the operation monitor.
To adjust the setting for pressure-drop detection, proceed as follows:
Turn the adjustment-screw in the meter (see figure 4-16) with a small screwdriver
so that the needle (red) is set to 0.4 MPa.
!
WARNING: IF THIS PRESSURE SETTING IS INCORRECT, THE MACHINE CANNOT DETECT
LOW PRESSURE (PRESSURE DROP). BE SURE TO SET THIS LEVEL TO THE
CORRECT VALUE.
4.4.6 Measurement and Adjusting Vacuum Levels

The measurement of the vacuum level is done via vacuum sensors (transducer)
which are located on the I/O-1 head assy boards. Each head has its own sensor and
can be adjusted and calibrated independent from each other. For the Adjustment of
the sensing circuit please refer to the placement head chapter 15.

In order to get a correct vacuum level for each ejector, make sure that the air-
pressure is at a correct level (>5.5 bar). Make also sure that the hoses to and from
the ejector are not contaminated.
4.4.8 Maintenance Instructions

Each ejector has its own air-filter that needs to be checked at regular intervals (500
Hours). If the filter is contaminated it is advisable to replace it by a new one.
4.4.9 Pneumatic Systems

4.4.9.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the electrical interface of the pneumatic system in the main
machine and the Tray Changer.
4.4.9.2 Functional Description
The Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII contains a number of pneumatic solenoid valves and
cylinders. The air solenoid valves control the airflow to certain air pressure lines. The
pneumatic all driven cylinders are used for the locate-pin, push-up, push-in, edge
clamps and head-down movement. The air solenoid valves are controlled electrically
by a 24V signal coming from the I/O boards. The air cylinders are activated by air
pressure, which are controlled by electrical solenoids. Air solenoid valves control the
pneumatic cylinders. Chapter 5 shows the interconnections schematically.

System Description
4.4.9.3 Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII

The I/O boards inside the machine control the air solenoid valves.
In chapter 5 the interconnections are shown between the conveyor I/O boards and
the various valves.
4.4.9.4 Tray Changer (TC or LCS)
The air solenoid valves of the Tray Changer are controlled by the I/O-conveyor
board inside the Tray changer. For the connections between the I/O-board and the
various solenoids please refer to the overall TC interconnect diagram in chapter 5.
The air pressure for the TC air valves is supplied via the main machine.
4.4.9.5 Auto Tray Stacker (ATS) (for Topaz-XII Series only)
The air solenoid valves of the Auto Tay Stacker are controlled by the I/O-conveyor
board inside the ATS. For the connections between the I/O-board and the various
solenoids please refer to the overall ATS interconnect diagram in chapter 5.
The air pressure for the ATS air valves is supplied via the main machine.
4.4.9.6 Pneumatical Tape Feeders
The tape feeders do not have air solenoids valves so they do not contain electrical
connections.
4.4.9.7 Air Supply of FES20/LCS, Reject Station and ATS
The compressed air used in the FES20, LCS, Reject station and ATS systems are
supplied via the machine.
4.4.9.8 Measuring and Adjusting
Check and if necessary adjust the 24 volts, at regular intervals (quarterly) which is
used to control the various valves of the pneumatic system.
The power supply GS21 is located at the left lower side of the system.
4.4.9.9 Performance Checks and Trouble Shooting
No specific actions are done for the performance check. If some valves are not
working please first check the 24 volt power supply, then check if the I/O signal is
ok, check this by activating the I/O signal manually via the manual I/O setting
screen.
4.4.9.10 Maintenance Actions
No specific maintenance actions, besides the 24V checking, are necessary.

System Description
4.5 Control Circuits

4.5.1 MCX-controller Lay-out
11/12
1
5
6
7
13 8
9
13
10
10a
FIGURE 4-17 MCX controller box
In FIGURE 4-17 the MCX-controller box is shown.

System Description
Table 4-3 shows the components of the controller. In chapter 5 the interconnect
diagram can be found for all the internal connections in the MCX-control unit.
3DUWQR 'HVFULSWLRQ 5HPDUNV
1 Driver power board 1x 282V power supply
2 Driver board 1x driver board (X,Y,R,Z, W )
3 Driver board 1x driver board for the optional trayfeeder (LCS, ATS)
4 X Not used in Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII
5 Servo assy 1x servo board
6 Servo assy 1x servo board for the optional trayfeeder (LCS, ATS)
7 X Not used in Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII
8 Application board 1x application board
9 VICS3200 1x Vision board
10a Flash board assy Equipped with 1x flash disk (256Mb)
10 System board 1x system board equipped with a 586DX133 CPU
11 5V power supply 5V power supply
12 12 V power supply 12 V power supply
13 Mother board Mother board
TABLE 4-3 Controller parts
4.5.2 System Board

4.5.2.1 Fourth Generation System Board
The system board is the single board computer of the AT interchange that was based
on the PICMG standard.
It is the CPU card that complies with Socket 370 of all-in-one type of carrying CPU,
SVGA, Ether-net, and a function such as multi-I/O on the PICMG full size. This card
is equipped with the 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ether-net function, the video function
complying with the CRT/LCD indication in others of the standard interface (a
keyboard, a mouse, serial port, parallel port, E-IDE, FDD, USB).
Connections:
The system board has several connections:
■ Inside Connectors: CPU, DIMM, USB inside cable, FDD inside cable (These four
points have usually been set up at the time of shipping), IDE cable 1/2, Parallel
cable, Serial 2 cable and FDD-Power Cable.

System Description
■ Outside Connectors: Serial 1 cable, VGA Cable, Keyboard & Mouse divergence
cable and LAN Cable.
Jumper Setting:
The jumper settings on the system board have to be set as follows (these are already
set before shipment):
3DUWV1R .:0;
P1 None
P2 4-5SHORT 1-8,2-7,3-6OPEN
P3 ALL OPEN
P4 ALL OPEN
P5 ALL OPEN
P6 None
P7 ALL OPEN
TABLE 4-4
BIOS Setting
The BIOS setting can be checked as follows:
■ Press the Del-key during booting up the machine, and go into the BIOS estab-
lishment screen, and check the following items (these are already set before
shipment):
*URXS ,WHP 6HWWLQJ
DATE, TIME Set up at present time.
STANDARD CMOS SETUP Drive A 1.44M, 3.5in.
HALT-ON ALL Errors
BIOS FEATURES SETUP Boot Sequence C Only
IRQ-5 assigned to Legacy ISA
PNP/PCI CONFIGURATION IRQ-9 assigned to Legacy ISA
IRQ-11 assigned to Legacy ISA
TABLE 4-5

System Description
FDD
MEMORY F128MB DIMM

USB 1, 2
DE1 DE2 FDD

PARALLEL
SERI AL 2
SERI AL 1
LAN
VGA
KEY MS
CPU IF INTEL CELERON 566MHz
FIGURE 4-18 System board
4.5.3 Application Board

In the Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII there is a separate application board (in the Topaz-
X Series this was on the system board).
The application board is a master board of serial communication with several I/O
Boards (Head I/O board or Conveyor I/O board), and the function becomes active by
connecting Serial Communication-Line to I/O 1 and I/O 2. When this board is set
into the MCX controller, you have to connect the Good Signal Line to CN6-GOOD.
/(' &2/25 5(0$5.6
Light on when the system is normal,
GOOD GREEN
Light off when some troubles happen in the system.
Flashing when the APPL BOARD keeps in the communication with I/O boards.
I/O1 YELLOW
Light on in case of communication error.
Flashing when the APPL BOARD keeps in the communication with I/O boards.
I/O2 YELLOW
Light on in case of communication error.
TABLE 4-6

System Description
A P PL
ON6 GOOD EMG
GOOD LED GOOD
/ 1
IO IO1
/ 2
IO IO2
FIGURE 4-19 Application board
4.5.4 Flash Board Assy

All programs and data will be saved on the flash disk. The flashboard assy has a slot
for a flash disk. Standard a 256Mb flash disk is inserted on the flashboard. When a
new flash disk is ordered at PCS, standard the operating system Windows NT has
already been installed on it. Only the VGOS operating software has to be installed
again, after which the backups have to be restored again.
The interface for the flash disk is the IDE interface.
NOTE: When you insert or remove the flash disk, make sure that the main switch is off.
4.5.5 Servo Board

This board (figure 4-20), controls the AC-motor driver-circuitry. The servo-1B board
always controls the driver-1B board; both boards are dedicated for the main
machine. The servo-2 board is optional and controls the driver-2 board; both boards
are dedicated for options such as traychangers and auto tray stackers.

System Description
The servo board receives its power (+5V, +12V, and -12V) via the ISA bus (CN4) of
the motherboard. This power is forwarded to the driver-board via connector CN10 to
feed the logic circuitry on the driver-board.
The power fail signal is connected to the D(river)-power board via connector CN9.
The Good-2 signal is connected to the servo-board via connector CN5
To Vision To Driver Power To Driver 1 (2)
To Driver 1 (2)
To System unit
To Vision
CN3
CN7
CN9
CN10
Sticker 1
LED (green)
CN5
LED (yellow)
LED (red)
CN8
Sticker 2
Sticker 3
S1
FIGURE 4-20 Servo board

System Description
The servo-board receives commands from the system board via the ISA-bus
connector CN4 on the motherboard.
The pulse width modulation and feedback signals (power failure, over current etc.),
which control the drivers on the driver-board are sent to the driver-board via
connector CN3. Positional feedback is obtained from the motor encoders who are
connected to the front side of the servo-board via connectors CN1 and CN2.
The servo-board is linked to the vision board by means of connectors CN7 (posi-
tional information) and CN8 (encoder information).
If an error occurs in this unit the display LED GOOD (green) will go off, and the
system will enter the emergency stop state (servo off).
The jumper S1 on this board must have the following settings:
%LW 7RSD]; 6HULHV2SDO;
,, ,,
/&6$76
1 ON OFF
2 OFF ON
TABLE 4-7
With the servo board a couple of stickers are delivered. These stickers should be
mounted at the positions as indicated in figure 4-20 and according the following
table:
6WLFNHU 7RSD]; 6HULHV2SDO;
,, ,,
/&6$76
Sticker 1 “Servo” 1B 2
Sticker 2 “PI.” PI 1B PI 3
Sticker 3 “PI.” PI 2B PI 4
TABLE 4-8
The table below shows if the connectors indicated in figure 4-20 has a cable attached
to another board (“C”), a short connector (“S”) or a left unconnected (“NC”).
&RQQHFWRU 7RSD]; 6HULHV2SDO;
,, ,,
/&6$76
CN3 C C
CN5 C C
CN7 C NC
CN8 C NC
CN9 C S
CN10 C C
TABLE 4-9

System Description
4.5.6 Vision Board

The vision board is the VICS3200 and handles all vision related operations. The
board layout is shown in figure 4-21 below:
CN8 à SERVO
(CN9 àSERVO) V
I
S
O
I
N
Connect only two X-Axis
M
_ CA 1
machines (e.g. Sapphire-XII)
AC
A_
A_CM
A
M
A 2
3
D_CM
A 3
CT
L. L
. T
LC 1
2
L
M
_CA 1
SW1 on,on
D M
A 2
¨
ON
D_C
SW2 of f,off
FIGURE 4-21 Vision board VICS 3200
The VICS3200 vision board is equipped with 6 camera connectors, from top to
bottom they are used as follows:
■ Analog camera 1 (A-CAM1): Connector for fiducial camera.
■ Analog camera 2 (A-CAM2): Connector for the first optional single camera.
■ Analog camera 3 (A-CAM3): Not used in Topaz XII Series/Opal-XII.
■ Digital camera 1 (D-CAM1): Connector for the front line array camera.
■ Digital camera 2 (D-CAM2): Connector for the rear line array camera, Topaz-XII
Series only.
■ Digital camera 3 (D-CAM3): Not used in Topaz XII Series/Opal-XII.

System Description
This unit recognizes the components picked up and the fiducial marks on the PCB
and then calculates the position and direction. You can input three analog I/F
cameras and two digital I/F cameras.
It has two light control serial ports. From V.OUT port an image-signal can be sent to
the vision monitor.
Inner-connection is to CN8 and CN9.
SW1, SW2 and CN8, CN9 need to be configured as shown in the table.
&RQQHFWRUV 6ZLWFKHV
CN8 CN9 SW1 SW2
Topaz XII Series/Opal-XII Servo1B-CN7,8 Not use ON,ON OFF,OFF
TABLE 4-10 Settings of vision board
4.5.7 Mother Board

This board (see figure 4-22) connects the various boards such as the system board,
servo board and vision board via an ISA bus. The motherboard also contains an AC
and DC power failure detection function. The AC input, the DC5V and the +12V/-12V
are monitored. A LED indication will show a power voltage drop, instantaneous
power failures, and errors in the DC power supply for the control system. Table 4-11
below shows the various possibilities.
/(' &1 '59 3:5 &1 32:(5

7 .*$ 0

93

$&UHG 3 7 & 027+(5 %2$5' $66<

9
1
61
&1 5$6 &1 836

8/ &1(;7 3:5

'&9JUHHQ 7 3
0$'( 1 , -$3$
1

9 %
8
97 3
=
UH =
(
'&9JUHHQ I* 5 &
1
'3
7 $

+51'5 1

$
'&9JUHHQ %
%
2
&1 3& , 6/27 1

2

9 9 9
)
)
$ 6
$ :
%
% &
&1 3& , 6/27 1

9 9 9
$
&
) 72.,1

9

9

9

9 &1 6%& %8==(5 &1 6<67(0 3& , ,1
$ & &
$ $ $
% &
&1 6<67(0 ,6$ % ' '
%
% 1

9 9 9

& )
$
9 9 9 1
$ & &
$
% &
&1 63$5( % ' ' 1

&
)
$
1
9 9 9
$ & &
$
&
% 1
&1 9 ,6 2
, 1 %2$5' % ' '

& )
$
9 9 9 1

$ & &
$
%
&1 $33/ %2$5' % ' '
$ $
% %
&1 6(592
$ $
% %
'LS6:
&1 6(592 6
21
2))

,2
$ $
<$0$+$
% %
&1 6(592
<$
0$+$ 027
25 &2 /7'
FIGURE 4-22 Mother board

System Description
/(':KHQOLJKWRQ" $&32:(5$EQRUPDO 91RUPDO 91RUPDO 91RUPDO 1RWH
VAC>=90V X - - - Normal
AC100V:VAC
VAC<80V O(red) - - - AC 200V drop
4.73<=V1<=5.44V - O(green) - - Normal
DC+5V: V1
V1<4.73V - X - - DC 5V failure
11.3V<=V2<=13.3V - - O(green) - Normal
DC+12V:V2
V2<11.3,13.3V<V2 - - X - DC+12V failure
DC-12V: V3<=-4.2V - - - O(green) Normal
V3 V3>-4.2V - - - X DC-12V failure
TABLE 4-11 Meaning of LED indicators (O: light on, X: light off, -: no definition)
1 8
‚ON
OFF
S1
FIGURE 4-23 The default setting of the jumper switch ( 8th jumper is off, the others are on.)
4.5.8 Floppy-drive and the Flash Disk

4.5.8.1 Floppy-disk
The 1.44 Mb floppy drive is located in the service panel behind the cover door at
the right bottom front side of the machine.
The drive is connected via a harness to the front side of the system board FDD connector.
4.5.8.2 Flash-disk
In the Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII the system is equipped with an on-board flash disk.
The flash disk is located on the flash board assy which has two slots, which are
accessible from the front side of the system board. Each slot can contain a removable
flash disk.
Standard one 256 MB flash disk (9965 000 09084) is available on the flash board.
When ordering the flash disk at PCS, the operating system Windows-NT has already
been installed on it.
NOTE: When inserting or removing a flashdisk the Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII

should be switched off because the disk is not protected against such
handling and might get damaged. Always mount the protective cover over
the flash disk after mounting.

System Description
4.5.9 Driver Board

This board, see figure 4-24 below, can drive AC motors for up to 7 axes. The amount
of motors used depends on the type of machine. In the MCX controller the driver-1
board is always used for the main machine while the driver-2 board is dedicated for
options such as traychanger (LCS) and auto tray stacker (ATS).
CN6
CN1
282V power
connection CN4
Sticker 1
Sticker 2
Power from servo- CN2

board
To servo 1 (2)
Sticker 3
From servo-board
PWM/FDB signals
To servo 1 (2) CN3
FIGURE 4-24 Driver board
The motor driver DC power is 282VDC and is supplied by the D(river)-power supply
via CN4. On the driver-board the 282VDC is converted into an AC signal for driving
the 3-phase AC-motors. This is done as shown in figure 4-25.
Power transistor U
Oscilator
50 KHz V 3 phase
Power transistor
AC motor
W
Power transistor
12V 282V DC Power module
FIGURE 4-25 Driver board principle
A 50KHz oscillator, powered at 12V, activates every power transistor (which

switches 282V) sequentially thus creating a 3-phase (U,V,W) AC-signal for driving
the motors. The GTR (Giant TRansistor) module, which controls the current, is
located at the rear side of the drive board and is mounted on a large heat sink. The
motor current of a maximum of 4 axes is fed via CN2, and a max. of 3 axes via CN3
to the AC-motors.

System Description
The 5V & ±12V power for the oscillator and logic circuitry are received from servo
board via CN6. The current of the logic power is controlled by an IPM (Intelligent
Power Module) which is fixed on the heat sink. The pulse width modulation and
feedback signals (power failure, over current etc.), from the servo-board are
received via connector CN1.
NOTE: It is possible that not fully populated driver-boards are installed. The board
only contains the drivers for the Axes needed in the system. A fully populated
board can always replace the not fully populated boards, which are stocked.
The table below shows the various driver-boards used in the Topaz-XII Series/
Opal-XII, LCS and ATS systems:
)DFWRU\QXPEHU.-0[[[ 3KLOLSVVHUYLFHQR 0DFKLQHW\SH 5HPDUNV
K4x 5322 216 04691 Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII
G4x 5322 216 04688 ATS Only for ATS
H4x 5322 216 04689 LCS Only for LCS
TABLE 4-12 Driver board assy’s
The ball diagram below shows of the various driver-boards used in Full vision CSM
and CSM/GEM machines and can be used as reference.
-E4* -K4* -H4*

1B in S-XII
-L4* 1B in S-XII A-4*
1B in E-X
1B in E-X 1B in E-XII
LCS
1B in E-XII 1B in T-X
1B in T-XII
1B in O-XII
LCS-W
ETS
-A4* KW8-M5810-10* -G4*
ETS 1C in S-XII ATS 20
E=Emerald, T=Topaz, S=Sapphire, E-X = Emerald-X Series, T-X=Topaz-X Series, E-XII = Emerald-XII Series, T-XII=Topaz-XII
Series, LCS = LCS for Topaz and Emerald, LCS-W = LCS for Emerald-X Series and Topaz-X Series, O-XII = Opal-XII
9 30 014 b3
FIGURE 4-26 Driver board compatibility

System Description
4.5.10 D(river) - Power Assy

The D-power assy rectifies the 3-phase 220VAC power and supplies 282VDC to the
driver boards. The assembly consists of the D-power-board itself and the two
capacitors CAP1 and CAP2 which are located at the right-side back corner of the
MCX controller box, see also figure 4-27 below.
For more details please refer to chapter 4.3, power supply systems.
FIGURE 4-27 Driver power board
4.5.11 5V / 12V Power Supply Assy’s

The MCX-2 control unit contains one power supply for the +5vdc and one for the
+/- 12V DC. The power supply is mounted at the left side in the MCX-2 control box.
(See figure 4-28)
MCX-2 controller box
5 volt power supply
12 volt power supply
FIGURE 4-28 5V, +12V, -12V Power supply
For more details please refer to chapter 4.3 “power supply systems”.

System Description
4.5.12 LED Driver Board

The LED driver board is the board which controls the light intensity of the
component cameras. Unlike the X Series machines, the boards are now located in
the light unit itself.
Every light unit (for line array camera or single vision camera) in the machine has
its own LED driver board, which automatically adjusts the brightness level which is
calibrated as described in chapter 14 Vision systems.
For the line array cameras the dip switch settings are as follows:
&DPHUD 6: 6: 6:
D_CAM1 (front) OFF OFF ON
D_CAM2 (rear) ON OFF ON
For the single vision cameras the dip switch settings are as follows:
&DPHUD 6: 6: 6:
A_CAM2 ON OFF OFF
FIGURE 4-29 Light unit

System Description
4.5.13 I/O Boards

The Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII is equipped with three I/O-boards, one head-I/O (1)
and two conveyor-I/O boards (3). The function of the I/O-boards is to translate and
buffer signals from/to the system unit to/from the actuators/sensors. The head I/
O-board performs above function for all actuators and sensors in the head assy
while the conveyor I/O-boards perform this function for all other actuators and
sensors in the system.
The head I/O-boards consist of a motherboard and daughter- (core-) board. The
Intel 8344 microprocessor on the daughter-board has been replaced with the
Hitachi SH7021-20MHz processor to control the communication between system
board and I/O-boards. The communicating protocol has been changed from SDLC to
HDLC (High Level Data Link Control). For establishing the HDLC protocol the
SH7021-processor makes use of the dedicated component SAB82526N also located
on the daughter-board.The new processor reduces the I/O-scanning time to less
than 1msec instead of the 3 to 4 msec in the second-generation boards. The I/O-
board daughter-board processor makes use of a ROM- and RAM-memory. The RAM-
memory basically has not changed and is used by the processor for temporary data
storage. The ROM-memory has been changed to a flash-ROM.
This flash-ROM in combination with the system-board and VGOS software or higher
enables the software for the SH7021-processor to be uploaded from the system unit
at start-up. For this reason the flash-ROM contains a read-only part and a readable/
write able part. The read-only part contains some dedicated software necessary for
the software download. The readable/write able part is used for the software
download from the system unit.
The boards are shown in the figure 4-30. In the figure the location of the indicators
and settings are highlighted.
CNX1
LED1
CNX2
LED2
S1
D1
D3
CN2
CN12,CN11,CN23
CN14,CN13,CN22
CN5
CN16,CN15
CN18, CN21, CN24
CN13, CN8
CN3, CN4
CN19
CN5, CN6, CN7
FIGURE 4-30 Conveyor I/O-board

System Description
4.5.13.1 Conveyor I/O

The 6-stage DIP switch on the conveyor I/O-board is necessary to make the board
suitable for either the left or right side or a tray changer. The table below shows the
settings:
0HDQLQJ 'LSVZLWFK
1 2 3 4 5 6
I/O-conveyor A 1 1 1 0 0 1
I/O-conveyor B 1 1 1 1 0 1
Tray feeder 1 0 1 0 0 0
“1” = ON
“0” = OFF ATS 20 1 0 1 1 0 0
TABLE 4-13 Conveyor I/O-mother board Dip switch settings
The third generation boards have the same amount of DIP switches as the second
generation boards however the switches for terminator use have been moved to the
daughter-board (core-board), refer to “2-stage DIP-switch” in figure 4-30. The
settings are shown in the table below:
0HDQLQJ 7RSD]; 6HULHV
,,
Dipswitch: 1 2
I/O-conveyor A, Tray feeder/ATS 0 0

“1” = ON, enable
“0” = OFF, disable I/O-conveyor B 1 1
TABLE 4-14 Conveyor I/O-daughter board Dip switch terminator settings
The KM5- conveyor I/O board is upwards compatible with the KG2- conveyor I/O
board. When replacing the KG2 board, connect CN1 and CN2 to CNX1 and CNX2,
respectively.

System Description
LED-indication
LED D3 (+24V) on the mother board and LED2 (+5V) on the daughter board indicate
the condition of the power income. LED D1(SC) on the mother board and LED1 on
the daughter board indicate the condition of the I/O serial communication.
LED DISPLAY LED (SC)/YELLOW LED (+24V OK)/GREEN LED (+5V OK)/GREEN MEANING
SC +24V OK
Dot blinking. Blinking. Light on. Light on. Normal.
(once/fast) +5V OK
SC +24V OK
L. Blinking. Light on. Light on. Power reset.
(Dot blinking.) (once/slow) +5V OK
SC +24V OK
1. Blinking. Light on. Light on. Communication stopped.
(Dot blinking.) (twice) +5V OK
SC +24V OK
No light. No light. Light on. Light on. CPU is not normal running.
+5V OK
SC +24V OK
No light. No light. No light. No light. No power income.
+5V OK
TABLE 4-15 LED indication conveyor I/O board
CN10
LED1
CN11
LED2
CN2
CN12
CNX1
CN5
CN8,CN9,CN7,CN6,CN4
S1
D22
CN13 D23
VR5,VR4,VR3,VR2,VR1
FIGURE 4-31 Head I/O-board
4.5.13.2 Head I/O

This unit is used to control DI/DO signals of the head and consists of two boards:
■ I/O board head assy (KV8-M4572-00X)
■ I/O board core assy (KM5-M4560-1XX)

System Description
Dip switch settings:

0DFKLQH +HDG,2ERDUGDVV\ &25(6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2
Topaz-XII Series ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON
TABLE 4-16 Dipswitch settings head I/O-board
LED indication
■ LED D23(+24V) on the head board and LED2(+5V) on the core board indicate the
condition of the power income.
■ LED22(SC) on the head board and LED1on the core board indicate the condition
of the I/O serial communication.
LED DISPLAY LED (SC)/YELLOW LED (+24V OK)/GREEN LED (+5V OK)/GREEN MEANING
SC +24V OK
Dot blinking. Blinking. Light on. Light on. Normal.
(once/fast) +5V OK
SC +24V OK
L. Blinking. Light on. Light on. Power reset.
(Dot blinking.) (once/slow) +5V OK
SC +24V OK
1. Blinking. Light on. Light on. Communication stopped.
(Dot blinking.) (twice) +5V OK
SC +24V OK
No light. No light. Light on. Light on. CPU is not normal running.
+5V OK
SC +24V OK
No light. No light. No light. No light. No power income.
+5V OK
TABLE 4-17 LED indication head I/O board
4.5.14 Connection Board

The connection-board interconnects signals from and to the sensors, switches,
relays and some valves. The signals that are not directly controlled by the MCX-
controller or controlled directly by the I/O-boards, are not going via the
connection-board. The board is also distributing the 24VDC coming from the GS21
power supply and which is used for the I/O and the EMG-circuits.
In chapter 5 a detailed logic diagram is shown of the board and on the next page
the layout of the PCB is shown. Since the PCB is very important for the safety
circuit, a number of LED’s are mounted on the PCB to indicate the EMG status. For
more information on these LED’s please refer to chapter 4 "Power and Safety" of this
manual. On the board some jumper settings can be set to configure the system
depending on the added options and/or features.
On the board 4 selection switches are available S1, S2, S3 and S4. S1 and S2 are
used for the PCB flow direction, S3 and S4 are used for tray-changer positions.

System Description
The tables below show the setting of S1 and S2 for the transport direction and S3
and S4 for the traychanger position.
3&%GLUHFWLRQ 6 6
L → R (default) B C
R→L A C
TABLE 4-18 S1 settings
&RQILJXUDWLRQ %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW

Standard ON ON ON ON ON ON
FES 20 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON
TABLE 4-19 S3 standard settings
The relation between the S3 and S4 dip switches, connectors and LEDs are as follows:
S3 with 6 dip switches:
%LW &RQQHFWRU 6LJQDO /('
1 CNF25 (EMG optional) EMG 1 5
2 n.a. only used for area sensor in main machine EMG 3A 19
3 n.a. only used for area sensor in main machine EMG 3B 20
4 CNF45 (EMG spare), used for FES20 EMG 4 21
5 CNF45 (EMG spare), used for FES20 EMG 5 22
6 CNF45 (EMG spare) EMG 6 (=8) 23
TABLE 4-20 S3 with 6 dip switches
&RQILJXUDWLRQ 6ELW 6ELW 6ELW 6ELW 6ELW 6ELW

No tray feeder ON ON ON ON ON ON
LCS (1) OFF ON OFF ON ON ON
ATS 20 (2) OFF ON ON ON ON ON

ATS 20 (3) ON OFF ON ON ON ON
Double ATS 20 (4) OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
TABLE 4-21 S4 settings

System Description
S4:
Bit Connector Signal LED
1 CNF26 (TF1 EMG switch) EMG 1F 11
2 CNF49 (TF4 EMG switch) EMG 2 12
3 CNF27 (Cover front 1TF2) EMG 2B 14
4 CNF43 (Cover front 2 TF5) EMG 2C 15
5 CNF28 (Cover rear 1 TF3) EMG 2E 17
6 CNF44 (Cover rear 2 TF6) EMG 3 18
TABLE 4-22 S4 connections
NOTE: 1. See table 22

(1)Connect EMG harnesses of the tray feeder to CNF26 (EMG-SW) and
CNF27 (COVER front).
(2)Connect EMG harness of the tray feeder to CNF26 (EMG-SW).
(3)Connect EMG harness of the tray feeder to CNF49 (EMG-SW).
(4)Connect EMG harnesses of the tray changer to CNF26 (EMG-SW) and
CNF49 (EMG-SW).
2. The speed controller connects on SP1, the jumper harness does not
connect on CNF2 and CNF3.
3. The 24V power source is protected by automatic fuses. These fuses will trip
at a certain current and will be resetted after the power is disconnected.
All the various 24V outlets are indicated by green LED’s (23 in total).
4. The connection board diagram (figure 5-33) shows some additional
circuitry for area sensors. These are not used in Topaz-XII Series/
Opal-XII machines and can be ignored.
After swapping the connection board:
■ Check and/or change the dip swtch settings or harness connections.
■ Check if the EMG circuit is activated after pressing the various emergency push
buttons or when opening the covers of the main machine and if connected on
the external devices.

System Description
FIGURE 4-32 Connection-board layout

System Description
4.5.15 Switcher Board

4.5.15.1 Old Version Switcher Board Topaz-XII Series Only
This version is used in machines built before Oct. 2002.
The switcher board has been positioned right from the MCX box. The functionality
of the switcher board is:
1. It is possible to switch two VGA system’s inputs by the use of an outer switch
(CN9) or an outer input (CN8).
2. It is possible to distribute a VGA input to output 1 and 2 for the machine with
two monitors at front and rear side.
3. It is possible to switch two RS232C system’s inputs by the use of an outer input (CN8).
CAUTION
CAUTION: Set SWITCH_A to the central position “1”!
Outer Outer DC 24V
switch input POWER
CN10
)$&,1*)5217
SWITCH_A CN9 CN8
6,'(2)0$&+,1(
CN7
RS232C
output
CN6
RS232C
CN5 input2LQ
RS232C
input1
&1 &1
CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
VGA VGA VGA VGA

input 1 input 2 output 1 output 2
FIGURE 4-33

System Description
4.5.15.2 Current Version Switcher Board Topaz-XII Series and Opal-XII

This new version is used in machines built from Oct. 2002 onwards. Please
refer to SI-CSM-577 for more detailed info.
FIGURE 4-34 Current version switcher board.
4.5.16 Operating Devices

The system can have 4 devices to enter information manually; the keyboard, the
maintenance support pendant, the operation panel and the touch screen(option).

System Description
When having two screens or operating panels, a console emulation box is connected
to the switcher board. This box simulates a keyboard/mouse connection at the not
operated side (Windows requirement).
Operation Panel
Touch screen on operation
monitor (optionally) or VGA monitor
Maintenance Support
Pendant (MSP)
II
(Only Topaz-X )
Keyboard+mouse
FIGURE 4-35 Topaz-XII Series keyboards
4.5.16.1 PC Keyboard + Mouse

The keyboard for entering data is a standard (small version without keypad) PC-AT
keyboard and is connected to the switcher board.
When having two screens or operation panels, a console emulation box is connected
to the switcher board. This box simulates a keyboard/mouse connection (Windows
requirement) during switching between front and rear.
4.5.16.2 Maintenance Support Pendant (MSP) (Only Topaz-XII)
This pendant can be permanently connected to the system via a cable entering the
Topaz-XII Series at the right (front or rear) side of the system. This keyboards
purpose is to use it at the maintenance actions. Via this keyboard simple function
can be performed or checked such as the I/O monitor, moving the head, etc.
When the MSP has not been connected to the machine, the connector on the
machine has to be short circuited (EMG circuit is short circuited).

System Description
The functionality of the MSP is as follows:

FIGURE 4-36
1. Axes information: With the Page-up and Page-down button two axes can be
chosen. On the left the chosen axes are displayed. Only the chosen axes can be
moved using the MSP at that moment. On the right the current position of the
selected axes is displayed.
2. Speed indication: This field displays the speed of the axes movement. With the
number keys this speed value can be changed.
3. I/O Monitor: With this screen all the I/O signals can be checked or activated. Use
the Page-up and Page-down button to select the I/O signal to be selected (the
cursor has to be positioned on the field for this), activate the bit with the Page-up
and Page-down button and after that the DO button to really activate the I/O bit.
4. Emergency button: This button activates the emergency circuit (de-activates
the servo system). The EMG button can also be used when then MSP is not
“active” (see 7).
5. Joystick: The joystick can be used to move the axes which have been selected at
point 1. The axes can only be moved when holding the Dead-man-switch.
6. Dead-man-switch: This switch has to be hold to make it possible to move the
axes with the joystick (safety reasons).
7. Active button: This button has to be pressed to activate the MSP. The Active
buttons on the operation panels have to be de-activated for this. When the MSP
is active the LED lights up. To de-activate the MSP, the Active button on the MSP
has to be hold for a few seconds.

System Description
8. Ready button: When the MSP is activated the servo system of the machine can
be turned on by pressing this Ready button. The LED will light up then. Pressing
e.g. the EMG button de-activates the servo system again.
9. Keyboard : These button can be used to type in numbers or select an other
menu in the MSP display.
4.5.16.3 Operation Panel
The operation panel is used to run the machine. In a standard machine there is an
operation panel on the front side, but an operation panel on the rear side is an
option. The operation panel has 6 different buttons to perform the basic operation
on the machine.
Together with the MSP, the operation panel(s) is connected to a board which
determines which device is active. Only one device (front operation panel or rear
operation panel or MSP) can be active at the time. The criteria are as follows:
%XWWRQ )XQFWLRQ 9DOLGDWLRQFRQGLWLRQV /LJKWWRZHU
FRONT REAR MSP
Makes operation panel Other panels are Other panels are Other panels are
ACTIVE When panel is valid
active invalid invalid invalid
READY Turns servo on When panel is valid When panel is valid When panel is valid When servo is on
Begins automatic
START When panel is valid When panel is valid When panel is valid During automatic operation
operation
Stops automatic oper- When servo is on and auto-
STOP At all times At all times When panel is valid
ation matic operation is stopped
When buzzer is on, when
ERROR Stops buzzer, cancels
At all times At all times When panel is valid error message occurs, when
CLEAR error, clears message
message is displayed
Resets automatic
RESET When panel is valid When panel is valid When panel is valid During reset operation
operation
TABLE 4-23 Operation panel functions
In the VmSpec (Machine) utility some settings regarding the operation panel can be set:
The parameter “Panel specification” sets the parameters for the operator panel.
■ Panel control type
• Exclusive After EMG the active side stays where it was.
• Neutral After EMG the active side can be chosen.
• Long push Active can be taken over by long push of button and alarm goes off.
(NEVER USE ON ASSEMBLEON MACHINE!!)
■ Button function
• Normal Normal function

System Description
• Extend When in VGOS a screen pops up with YES - NO - CANCEL, the

buttons START - STOP - ERROR CLEAR have the same function as
yes-no cancel.
NOTE: From VGOS 1.05 onwards “Panel specification” is not available anymore.
4.5.16.4 Touch Screen (Optional)
Optionally the VGOS operating monitor can be used as a touch screen. A special
setting (see 4.8.5) in the VGOS software makes data entering via the monitor an
easy operation (online keyboard).
4.5.17 Monitors
The system has only one type of monitor located on top of the machine. Standard
this is a normal VGA monitor, the touch screen monitor is optional. There is no
separate vision monitor; this is integrated in the VGOS software now.
The monitor(s) is connected to the switcher board. This board has been installed
right of the MCX box and is used to switch between the VGOS monitors and RS232
connections.
VGOS operating
monitor
FIGURE 4-37 Topaz-XII series monitors

System Description
4.6 Servo Systems

This chapter describes the servo systems of the Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII machine. A
short overview of all applicable axis systems is given.
The procedures of adjusting the machine reference, secondary limit, software limit, initial
position and initial movement are described in different modules. (Chapter 11 to 15)
4.6.1 Machine Axis

The mechanical movement of the Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII is controlled by the six
axes described in table 24 below
$[LV )XQFWLRQ 3RZHUGULYHPHWKRG
W axis Adjust the width of the conveyor that carries in or out a PCB AC motor/ ball screw
Z axis Moves the nozzle shafts of heads 1 to 8 simultaneously in vertical direction. AC motor/ ball screw
X axis Moves the head assembly in parallel with the PCB transfer direc-
tion(right to left and left to right as viewed from the front of the machine) AC motor/ ball screw
Y axis Moves the head assy forwards and backwards as viewed from the front
of the machine AC motor/ ball screw
R axis Rotates the nozzle shaft of the head 1-8. AC motor/ belt drive
PU-axis Raise or lowers the push-up plate AC motor/screw
TABLE 4-24 Axes overview
Plus direction
Minus direction
Z-axis
R-axis
Y-axis
X-axis
W-axis
PU-axis
FIGURE 4-38 Axes overview

System Description
4.6.2 Adjustments
To preserve the repeatability of axis movement and mounting accuracy, the
following parameters must be set correctly.
3DUDPHWHU $[LV
Machine reference W, Z, X, Y, R and PU
Secondary limit X, Y
Software limit W, Z, X, Y, R,PU
Initial position W, R and PU
Initial movement Z and PU
TABLE 4-25 Adjustment parameters of moving axes
!
WARNING: MAKE SURE TO TAKE ALL NECESSARY SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WHEN DOING
MECHANICAL ACTIONS AT THE SYSTEM. ALWAYS SWITCH OFF THE MACHINE IF
MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY OR DISASSEMBLY ACTIONS ARE CARRIED OUT.
4.7 Vision Systems

4.7.1 Introduction
The Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII uses a moving camera to recognise PCB fiducial marks
and performs teaching. The camera is attached to the head.
To recognise a component there are two types of cameras in the Topaz-XII Series/
Opal-XII. A line array camera and a single vision camera (optional).
The line array camera and single vision camera both uses a main, coax and side illu-
mination unit to illuminate the component. With this unit it is also possible to
recognise BGA, µBGA and CSP’s.

System Description
Moving camera
Single vision camera
Line array camera 2

(Topaz-XII only)
Line array camera 1
FIGURE 4-39 Vision systems used in the Topaz-XII Series
4.7.2 Moving Camera

The moving camera is located at the head assembly and is used to recognise PCB
fiducial marks and to perform teaching. The focus, rotation, lighting level and the
scale adjustment of the moving camera are described in chapter 14.
4.7.3 Single Vision Camera

The single camera (area CCD camera) is used to recognise components. The head
brings the component above the camera. The head stops and lowers the component
to PCB height (=recognition height). After recognition the machine will go to the
mount position and mounts the component. The calibration of the lighting units is
described in chapter 14.
4.7.4 Line Array Camera

The line array camera (multi camera) is a camera with one line of pixels. The head
moves the components over the camera and scans them during movement of the head
assembly (in X direction). After recognition the machine will mounts the component.
The calibration of the line array camera is described in chapter 14.
4.8 VGOS Software

This chapter describes how to check various mechanical, pneumatical and electrical
parameters of the system and how to make adjustments when needed (service
related issues). Most adjustments are performed in the Utilities and Machine menu
of the VGOS software. For the adjustments requiring actual operation and data
editing the Board, Parts and Mark utilities have to be used. With the Unit utility
several mechanical, pneumatical and electrical on/off operation can be done.

System Description
SCREEN 4-1
4.8.1 VGOS, Main Area

The main structure of VGOS is as follows:
6HWWLQJXS3&% %RDUGUHODWHGLQIRUPDWLRQ
0RQLWRUYDULRXVDFWLRQV 3DUWVUHODWHGLQIR
9LHZYDULRXVUHSRUWV 0DUNUHODWHGLQIR
9LHZYDULRXVHUURUUHSRUWV &RQYH\RUXQLWV,2PRQLWRUHWF
6HOHFWDQRSHUDWRU 6DYHFRS\DQGGHOHWHIXQFWLRQV
6ZLWFKWR97(GLWRU 9*26RSWLPL]HU
6ZLWFKWRPDFKLQHDGMXVWPHQWXWLOLW\ 0DFKLQHFRQILJXUDWLRQLQIR
6ZLWFKWKHPDFKLQHRII 6KRZRQOLQHKHOS
6WDWXVDUHDPDLQWHQDQFHGHYLFHV
FIGURE 4-40 Main structure of VGOS

System Description
4.8.2 Machine Menu

After pressing the Machine button the VmSpec (Machine) program appears. In this
program several several machine related parameters can be checked and adjusted.
SCREEN 4-2
NOTE: Always reload a mount program after changing data in the VmSpec program.
Only after performing this, the changes are activated.
NOTE: The machine configuration data is properly set at the factory prior to
shipment, according to the system to be delivered. It is usually not needed
to change this data. However, make the necessary adjustments when you
add an optional device or intend to change functions.
4.8.3 Utilities Menu

After pressing the Utilities button, the MchSetup (Machine setup) program appears.
With this program several machine parameters can be calibrated.

System Description
After selecting this program, you have to login first:
SCREEN 4-3
Choose the correct user, select the English parameter and type in the password:
8VHU 3DVVZRUG 5HPDUNV
Operator No password needed Nothing can be saved
Supervisor S*******
Factory ********* Meant for factory
Service Y******* Meant for Assembléon service engineer
Engineer ******** Meant for software engineer
TABLE 4-26
After this the Utilities menu appears.
SCREEN 4-4 Utility menu

System Description
Every button contains a sub window where various machine items can be adjusted/
calibrated. The functionality is described in the several chapters 11 till 16.
Axis: Adjustment of software limits, dual drive offset, motor reference,
initial position, etc.
Position: Adjustment of several machine positions and the feeder plate offset
Measure height: Height measurement of the several heads
Moving Camera: Moving camera adjustment procedure
Cod-MACS: MACS coordinates adjustment procedure (not used yet)
Vacuum Level: Vacuum level adjustment
Multi Camera: Line array camera adjustment procedure
Head offset: Head offset (X,Y) calibration procedure
Conveyor: Conveyor units adjustment procedure
FNC: FNC clutch, R-init position and clutch adjustment/check procedure
Single camera: Single camera adjustment procedure
ANC: Nozzle station adjustment procedure
Traychanger: LCS/ATS adjustment utility
Initial setting: Settings of the Utilities program
Servo utility: Various servo check utilities
Test utility: Various test utilities
Explorer: Windows file explorer
4.8.4 Unit Menu

The Units utility allows you to check the mechanical, pneumatical or electrical
functions. Some of the functionalities, like operating the I/O can also be done with
the MSP. After selecting the Units button five tabs appear:

System Description
■ Conveyor: used for (de-)activating the several conveyor units which are available
in the machine. This window can also be used for monitoring the PCB movement
in the machine during production.
SCREEN 4-5 Conveyor window
■ Head: used for checking and/or (de-)activating several head functions like
vacuum, blow, nozzle change, etc.
SCREEN 4-6 Head window

System Description
■ Feeder: used for checking and/or (de-)activating feeder positions.
SCREEN 4-7 Feeder window
■ LCS/ATS (only when available in the machine): used for (de-)activating the
several conveyor units which are available in the LCS/ATS. Also this window can
be used for monitoring the PCB movement in the machine during production
SCREEN 4-8 LCS/ATS window

System Description
■ I/O: In this monitor the various I/O signal can be (de-) activated and/or
checked. Be careful when using this functionality.
SCREEN 4-9
4.8.5 Setup Menu

The Setup menu is normally used for setting up a program (PCB). But some service
related functionalities are also available here.
Software setting button: Several software related parameters can be set (see
below).
SW version button: Check the version of the VGOS software. Also FAMF can
be activated here
Board explorer: Copying, saving, etc board data (see user reference
manual). This is also used for creating/restoring a
backup of the PCB program data.
Database: Create or restore a backup of the mark and component
database (see 4.9.14)
System backup: Create or restore system data backup (see chapter 16)
In the next section the software setting utility is explained. After pressing this
button the following window pops up.

System Description
SCREEN 4-10
It is possible to edit the field directly (normally set when not using touch screen).
A dialog window pops up to make it easier to enter data in the field (normally set when using
touch screen)
The keyboard is used for entering data (normally set when not using touch screen).
A dialog window pops up with displaying a keyboard to make it easier to enter data in the field
(normally set when using touch screen)
Select the file formats to be shown.
Used for setting up an assignment check.
A small yellow tool tip is displayed under the button which gives a small explanation of this but-
ton (normally set when not using touch screen).
Used for entering operators, passwords and level editing (explained later).
The location on the flash disk of the several database (mark, pcb,parts,etc) can be set.
Location of the MIS data can be set (to be defined).
Location of the LOG data can be set (to be defined).
Connection with the LAN network can be established (to be defined)
TABLE 4-27

System Description
4.8.6 Operator Button

After pressing the Operator button several machine operator related items can be set:
■ Create operator
■ Remove operator
■ Set/change password
■ Edit level
SCREEN 4-11
4.8.6.1 Create Operator

Follow the next procedure to create an operator/user:
1. Press the INS button
SCREEN 4-12

System Description
2. Enter the name, password (and verify this) and select the level of the operator to
be created.
3. After pressing OK, the operator has been created. He/She can login under his/
her own name
4.8.6.2 Remove Operator
Follow the next procedure to remove an operator/user:
1. Select the group the operator/user belongs to
2. Select the operator/user
3. Press the DEL button and confirm to delete the operator/user
4. Now the operator/user is not available anymore
4.8.6.3 Set/Change Password
Follow the next procedure to change the password:
1. Select the group for which the operator/user belongs to
2. Select the operator/user
3. Press the EDIT button
4. Change the settings. When changing the password, it also has to be verified.
4.8.6.4 Level Edit
Follow the next procedure to edit the several levels.
1. Press the LEVEL EDIT button
2. Choose the level (1 to 10) which has to be edited.
SCREEN 4-13

System Description
3. In the left window the VGOS menu’s (Main menu and its sub directories) are
displayed. Select one of it. In the right window the several buttons and tabs are
displayed.
4. The button or tab can be included in the selected level by marking it. Of course
the button or tab can be de-activated by removing the mark.
SCREEN 4-14
5. After pressing OK and logging in under the new/changed level, all selected
buttons are active.
4.9 Installation and Calibration

4.9.1 Introduction
This chapter of the system description covers the Installation and the Calibration of
the Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII system.
The installation part is covered in paragraphs 4.9.2 until 4.9.10 and must be carried
out when a system is installed the first time and after it is moved to another
location.
The calibration part is covered in paragraphs 4.9.11 until 4.10.1 and must be carried
out after it is shown that the machine is not placing components according to the
given specifications.

System Description
When calibrating the machine completely or partly it is necessary to calibrate in a

specific order to prevent mis-adjustments. Many adjustments are related to
another and cannot be done correctly if the related procedure has not been
executed first. However, some adjustments have no relation with other procedures
and can be done separately. Check at each procedure which pre-conditions are
necessary.
!
WARNING: PLEASE MAKE SURE TO TAKE ALL THE NECESSARY SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WHEN
CARRYING OUT AN ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE AT THE MACHINE.
4.9.2 Installation
This paragraph describes in short the actions and precautions to be taken when a
Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII is installed at the work area. After the system is uncreated
(see for ref., regarding the necessary tools, the pre-installation manual), the system
must be moved to the work-area. Use for this transportation the correct tools and
fork-lifts with the a lifting capacity of more than 2500 kgf.
CAUTION
CAUTION: DO NOT DROP AND/OR COLLIDE AGAINST OTHER EQUIPMENT AND/OR WALLS
WHEN MOVING THE SYSTEM. ALSO UNNECESSARY FORCE MUST BE AVOIDED.
After the system has been placed at the production site carry out and/or check the
following sub-paragraphs. Use for reference the pre-installation manual (4022 591
92002).
4.9.3 Installation Position (Work-area Condition)

Make sure that the flatness of the work area floor is correct, check if the flatness is
< 0.5cm per meter. This is very important when a FES system is going to be
installed. Check also if the floor is stable enough. A wooden floor is highly inad-
equate. See for reference the pre-installation manual (4022 591 92002).
NOTE: Make sure that there is enough room around the system to carry out all
maintenance and operator actions. See for reference the pre-installation
manual (4022 591 92002).

System Description
4.9.4 Environment
Check the environment conditions of the production site. Use the pre-installation
manual as a reference. Important values are:
■ Temperature: 25° ± 5°
■ Humidity: 20% to 80%
■ Light: No direct (sun) light into the machine
■ Dust: Dust-class <100.000
4.9.5 Removing the Transportation Locks

After the system is placed at the correct position, remove the transportation
protection locks. These locks are indicated by means of a yellow flag and are located
in the following places:
■ The X-axis, to hold the head assy in place, see figure 4-41.
■ The Y-axis, to hold the Y-axis in place similar to the X-axis.
FIGURE 4-41 Transportation locks
4.9.6 Leveling of the System

After the system is placed at the work-area, adjusts the 6 feet of the system in such
a way that the system is within the required level. Use the following procedure to
level the machine:
1. Lift the feet 2 - 4 - 6 - so they are not touching the floor. (see figure 4-42)
2. Adjust the conveyor to the correct height, add SMEMA blocks if needed.
3. Lower the feet -1- and -3- to level the machine in -X- direction, place the
leveller on the -X- guide.

System Description
4. Lower the feet -5- to level the machine in -Y- direction, place the leveller on the
-Y- guide.
5. Lower the feet -2, -4- and -6-and when they touch the floor tighten them with a
wrench to approx. 5 Nm (=gently with one finger).
6. Secure the nuts in the same order. 1-3-5, then -2-4-6.
7. 24 hours after installation of the machine re-check if all feet are touching the
floor and check the levelling again.
NOTE: Make sure you have a wrench with you, which can have a width of 46mm.
This is needed for the outer feet. A possible wrench can be ordered under
2622 150 04004 (adjustable wrench).
Conveyor
FIGURE 4-42 Leveling the machine
NOTE: 1. One rotation of a foot equals 2mm height difference.

2. For SMEMA, the conveyor height is 950mm.
3. Do not tighten the screws in the feet during levelling.
4. Under certain floor conditions it may be necessary to remove the rubber
pads underneath the 6 feet to reduce shaking/vibration of the machine.
Be careful when doing so because adding them later on again is difficult.

System Description
4.9.7 Monitor and Keyboard Installation

Install the following items:
■ Touch screen(s) or VGA monitors: check if they are configured for the main
voltage (100VAC for VGA monitor, 12V for touch screen).
■ Keyboard and stand: the stand has to be fixated to the machine at the inside.
■ MSP: guide the harness to behind the right front door. When no MSP is installed
the connector behind the door has to be short circuited.
■ Mouse: The mouse has to be connected to a harness (attached to the switcher
board) which is already in the machine (see also interconnection diagram).
4.9.8 Installation of the Warning Light Tower

Unpack the light-tower and mount it through the hole at the left top side. Connect
the harness to the harness provided for this, inside the machine (top left side).
4.9.9 Air and Mains Power Connections

4.9.9.1 Connecting Mains Power
■ The Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII must be connected to a three-phase mains power
system, via a cord coming from a 16A fusible disconnect switch. This fusible
disconnect switch must be mounted at the wall within the operator’s reach (< 9
feet from the machine) according to National Electric Code (NFPA70) and is only
applicable for the USA and Canada. On the switch box an indication must be
made that it belongs to the machine in question.
!
WARNING: WHEN CHECKING THE MAINS VOLTAGE CIRCUIT USE EXTREME CARE WHEN
DOING SO.
When connecting the Mains power make sure to check first the mains voltage level
and the taps settings on the transformers. If these tape setting are not correct set
them as is shown in figure 5.3.12 in chapter 5.
■ Switch off all circuit breakers in the system before the machine Mains switch
QS11 is switched on.
■ After the QF11/QS11 is switched on check the voltage level at the secondary side
of the Mains transformers. This to ensure to have the correct 100/220V AC at the
secondary side of the transformers.
■ Now check the correct functioning of the other Mains circuit breakers QF21, 22,
31 and 32. Do this one at the time. See for reference the Power diagram in
chapter 5.

System Description
CAUTION
CAUTION: BEFORE MAKING CONNECTIONS, CHECK IF THE PRIMARY TAP TERMINALS ON

THE TWO TRANSFORMERS ARE CONNECTED CORRECTLY TO MATCH THE
VOLTAGE YOU ARE USING. A LABEL SHOWING THE CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
IS POSITIONED AT THE INNER SIDE OF THE REAR COVER OF THE MACHINE.
In chapter 4.3 of this manual additional information is given on the transformer
tap settings and Mains circuit.
4.9.9.2 Installing Air Connection
The air supply of the Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII must fulfill the following
requirements:
Pressure at system > 5 x 105 Pa
Flow 350 Nl/minute

Flow with Oil content < 0.1 mg/m3
< 2°C at 7.
Dew point < 2°C at 7x 105 Pa
< 4°C at 7.2 x 105 Pa
Dust particles size < 10µ m
TABLE 4-28
The air supply unit is located on the outside left panel on the front side of the
machine. The procedure how to adjust the air supply, is explained in chapter 4.4.
Connect the hose from the outside air source to the air coupler plug 30PM on the
machine.
After connecting the Air supply adjust the compressed air settings on the gauge
indicator to 5.5 bar as is indicated in the figure 4-16 chapter 4.4 and the air circuit
diagram in chapter 5
To release the air inside the system an air-switch off is installed. This air switch can
be reached at the back of the machine behind the right-side cover-door. This switch
is mounted behind the mist and air-filters (see air circuit diagram chapter 5). When
cleaning or replacing the mist or air filters make sure to disconnect the air-hose
first.

System Description
4.9.10 First Time Switch on of a System

After all foregoing actions have been done, check the following items before
switching on the system:
■ Check if all circuit breakers are switched on.
■ Check the complete system on loose cables, connections and harnesses (MCX, I/O
boards, sensors, motors, etc).
■ Check every axis by hand on a free movement over the whole travel range
■ Check for mechanical loose parts on the X, Y, conveyor and head assembly’s.
After these checks have been carried out the Mains switch can be switched on.
Perform now the following checks:
■ Check if the machine is normally booting-up
■ Release all emergency buttons
■ Check the machine behavior after a ’return to origin’ command is given.
■ Perform a warm-up sequence and check the machine behavior.
After the warm-up procedure is carried out it is highly recommended to run the
Assembléon acceptance PCB and, if needed, some customer PCB’s to check the func-
tionality of the machine.
Make sure to set-up and check all the related items for running the mount programs
(PCB, components, feeders, conveyor set-up, etc). After finishing the mount
programs check the mounted PCB carefully on missing components and mount
accuracy. If the result is not according to the pre-described workman ship, a
(partly) re-calibration is perhaps necessary. If this is the case, continue with the
next paragraphs of this chapter.
4.9.10.1 Change Password
Make sure you change (section 4.8.6) the password of the default administrator and
default service. Attach a password to it as instructed by your Regional Service
Center.
4.9.11 Calibration Flowchart

When calibrating the machine completely or partly it is necessary to calibrate in a
specific order to prevent mis-adjustments. Many adjustments are related to another
and cannot be done correctly if the related procedure has not been executed first.
However, some adjustments have no relation with other procedures and can be done
separately. Check at each procedure which pre-conditions are necessary.

System Description
Below a flowchart is given of the calibration sequence.
67$57
/(9(//,1* &$0(5$
6HHVHFWLRQ 6HHVHFWLRQ
$'-8670(17
32:(5 $,5 5$;,6

&211(&7,21 $&&85$&<
%$&.83 )8//$872
'$7$ 02817)(('%$&.
25,*,1 ),1(
0$&+,1( $'-8670(176
&219(<25 $&&(37$1&(
81,7 7(67
35( %$&.83
$'-8670(176 0$&+,1('$7$
12==/(67$7,21 ),1,6+
6HHVHFWLRQ
$'-8670(176
FIGURE 4-43 Calibration flowchart
4.9.12 Levelling
Pre-conditions: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . None
4.9.12.1 Level the Machine
See . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . chapter 4.9.6.

System Description
4.9.13 Power and Air Connection

Pre-conditions: Levelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.6
Make sure to have the correct Mains and air pressure level installed, see paragraph
4.9.9, before continue with the next steps.
4.9.14 Back Up
Before doing any adjustment, make sure that data back up described below is
carried out. A more detailed description can be found in chapter 16.
4.9.14.1 System Data Back Up
For the system data back up, refer to chapter 16.2.5.
4.9.14.2 Back Up of Component and Mark Database
It is important to make a back up of the component and mark database regularly.
E.g. when there are flash disk problems, and the flash disk has to be replaced, these
databases can be restored. Use a floppy disk formatted for 1.44 MB. Follow the next
procedure to create the backup.
Component data backup:
1. Press the button in the Setup menu
2. Insert a floppy in the disk drive
3. Press the Backup button in the Parts field.
SCREEN 4-15

System Description
4. When the backup has been finished, the following window pops up.
SCREEN 4-16
5. Keep the floppy on a safe place.

Mark data backup:
1. Press the button in the Setup menu
2. Insert a floppy in the disk drive
3. Press the Backup button in the Mark field.
SCREEN 4-17

System Description
4. When the backup has been finished, the following window pops up.
5. Keep the floppy on a safe place.
NOTE: Restored data can only be used after restarting the system.
4.9.14.3 Backup of PCB Data
It is important to regularly make a back up of the PCB data. Do this by using the
Board Explorer as described in Chapter 16.3.
4.9.15 Origin Machine (Reference)

This chapter gives a short description of the machine reference values. The
complete procedure is described in chapter 11 to 15.
The built-in motor encoder of each axis issues a “0” pulse each time one turn is
complete. When return-to-origin is performed, there will be a difference in distance
between the position where the origin signal is detected and the point at which the
next encoder “0” pulse is received (the origin position actually set). This is called
the machine reference and is usually expressed in percentages, with 100% being
equal to one full turn of the motor.
1 00 436 01
FIGURE 4-44 Machine reference

System Description
4.9.16 Check Conveyor Units

The conveyor unit secures a PCB in the mounting position. Most parts of the
conveyor units operate pneumatically only the push up unit and conveyor widt are
motor controlled. The conveyor unit adjustments are described in chapter 11,
module Base and Transport.
Locate pin Ascent/descent speeds, upper end sensor position
Main stopper Ascent/descent speeds, PCB contact point
Push-up Ascent/descent speeds, upper end sensor position
Push-in Press-in speed, release speed
Board clamp (optional) Clamp/unclamp speed
50043201
TABLE 4-29 Conveyor unit adjustments
Main stopper
Edge clamp
Entrance stopper
Push-in
Locate pin
Push-up plate
Movable
conveyor rail
Fixed
conveyor rail
3 c043 29
FIGURE 4-45 Conveyor unit

System Description
4.9.17 Pre-adjustments
This chapter describes the pre-adjustments that must be checked before doing the
Full Auto Mount Feedback. The fine adjustments will be done after the FAMF. Only
perform adjustment when needed.
■ Switch on the machine
■ Machine limit adjustment
■ Position
■ Nozzle station adjustment
■ Set vacuum levels
CAUTION
CAUTION: IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO FOLLOW THE NEXT PROCEDURES STEP BY STEP.

SOME PROCEDURES ARE ONLY MEANT FOR CHECKING PURPOSE.
4.9.17.1 Switch On the Machine
Pre-Conditions:
■ Connect power ......................4.3
■ Connect air............................4.4
When the system boots up from the hard disk drive or flash disk, the VGOS program
will automatically be loaded into memory. While loading this program, it will check
for the correct program modules on disk and will upload these to the correct boards
in the system.
FIGURE 4-46 VGOS initialisation

System Description
4.9.17.2 Machine Limits

Pre-Condition:
■ Machine origin reference.........4.9.15
This chapter explains how to set the machine limits of the machine. See also
chapters 11, 13 and 15.
The following limits are defined for the machine:
■ Limit 1:
Software detection limit. Software based setting to prevent moving outside a
certain area.
■ Limit 2:
Secondary limit (over travel). Position set by using sensor to prevent moving
outside a certain area. Secondary limit is between mechanical and soft limit.
■ Limit 3:
Mechanical (hard) limit. Physical limit for the specific axis.
On the next page default settings are given. Only use those settings as a reference
/LPLW /LPLW /LPLW &KDSWHU
X Axis Software detection Over Travel Mechanical 13
Y Axis Software detection Over Travel Mechanical 13
Z Axis Software detection - Mechanical 15
R Axis Software detection - - 15
W Axis Software detection - Mechanical 11
PU Axis Software detection - Mechanical 11
TABLE 4-30 Machine limits
There is no general fixed position where the Over Travel or Soft limits must be
located. The positions can be very much dependent on the physical reach of the
heads and the location of a unit. As default the following rule is applicable:
The positions of the mechanical limits need to be known in order to determine the
Over Travel positions of the X and Y-axis, and are necessary to determine the soft-
limit positions of all the other axes.
W Axis:
1. Maximum soft-limit: 0.5 mm from hard limit.
2. Minimum soft-limit: 0.5 mm from hard limit
Z Axis:
1. Maximum soft-limit: 1 mm from hard stop
2. Minimum soft-limit: 1 mm from hard stop

System Description
X Axis:
1. Distance mechanical limit to Soft limit 2 mm
2. Distance mechanical limit to Over Travel limit:1 mm
3. Distance Over Travel Limit to Soft limit: 1 mm
Y Axis:
1. Distance mechanical limit to Soft limit: 2 mm
2. Distance mechanical limit to Over Travel limit:1 mm
3. Distance Over Travel Limit to Soft limit: 1 mm
R Axis:
1. Maximum soft-limit always set to: + 360º
2. Minimum soft-limit always set to: - 360º
PU Axis:
1. Maximum soft-limit always set to: height at where pins are touching
the PCB from origin + PCB
thickness + 1 mm
2. Minimum soft-limit always set to: 1 mm from hard stop
■ W- axis soft-limit adjustment see chapter 11
■ -Z- axis soft-limit adjustment see chapter 15
■ -X- axis soft-limit adjustment see chapter 13
■ -Y- axis soft-limit adjustment see chapter 13
■ -R- axis soft-limit adjustment see chapter 15
■ -PU axis soft-limit adjustment see chapter 11
4.9.17.3 Warm - Up
Pre-Condition:
■ Determine soft-limits..............4.9.17
The warm-up procedure will work within an area of 80% of the defined software
limits. For selecting the WARMUP button, see screen 18.
NOTE: The cooling off period after a 1 hour warm-up run is approximately 25
minutes. If the machine is not used during calibration for more than this
period, a short warm-up of 10 minutes is always recommended. Especially
in the case critical positions are taught.

System Description
SCREEN 4-18 Warm-up
4.9.17.4 Machine Coordinates

The machine coordinates are shown in 2 menus:
■ Utilities (Mch_Setup)
■ Machine (VmSpec)
In the Mch_Setup (Utilities) program, select Position and the following screen
appears where you can perform teaching the position of several hardware devices.
By selecting the Item parameter, several hardware devices can be chosen.

System Description
SCREEN 4-19
All these and other settings can be seen in the VmSpec (Machine) program after
choosing the Mechanical-Position window.
SCREEN 4-20

System Description
NOTE: The position data is properly adjusted at the factory prior to shipment,
according to the system to be delivered. It is unlikely that you will need to
change this data. If necessary, however follow the next chapters in order
to adjust the data correctly.
FINE Mode (Component or mark)
The setting ‘XY Extent’ specifies the degree of accuracy when recognizing a
component or fiducial mark with a camera. The setting in the ‘XY Extent’ column
determines how accurately the recognition angle should be converged (adjusted) to
the specified angle when a single-vision camera (option) is used in the FINE mode.
This setting can be 0.01, 0.02, 0.03 or 0.04 degrees. Normally, select 0.03 in the R
extent column.
■ The setting in the ‘XY-Extent’ column of component FINE mode determines how
accurately the single-vision camera (option) should be positioned to the
specified point during component recognition in the FINE mode. This setting can
be 0.000 to 0.100mm. Normally, set to 0.005 by using the number keys.
■ The setting in the ‘XY-Extent’ column of mark FINE mode determines how accu-
rately the mark position should be converged (adjusted) to the specified point
during fiducial mark recognition. with the moving camera. This setting can be
0.000 to 0.100mm. Normally, set to 0.005 by using the number keys. This setting
is valid only when the FINE mode is selected in the mark information
NOTE: The smaller the setting of this parameter, the higher the recognition and
positioning accuracy. However, the recognition time becomes longer
affecting the cycle time, or the recognition error tends to occur frequently
causing components to be discarded more often.
CO-PLANARITY (Option)
The co-planarity function is a special option with which bend leads can be
detected. It is used to save expensive components. Please contact you local sales
organisation about the availability of this function.
LOCATE PIN / EDGE CLAMP
These are reference positions when a PCB is clamped in the mounting position on
the conveyor. The coordinates can be taught in the utilities menu.

System Description
Wait point
The XY coordinates of the this parameter are the standby position where the head
waits while a PCB is conveyed. Typical wait point coordinates are entered prior to
shipment. The Z coordinate represents the height of heads positioned when the
head assembly moves in the XY directions. This is set to a correct value prior to
shipment, so do not change this setting. The R coordinate is the rotary angle of
each head and is usually set to the initial position. The Action column setting
specifies whether to perform air blow to prevent the nozzles from being clogged
with debris or solder. This coordinate is set in the utilities program (“Position”).
Discard point
This parameter shows the position at which each head discards a component.
Typical discard point coordinates are entered prior to shipment. To change the
discard point XY coordinates, use the same procedure as for teaching the wait
point. Make sure that the head assembly is not detected by a PCB sensor. The Z
coordinate represents the nozzle height at which the head dumps a component. A
typical discard point Z coordinate is entered prior to shipment, but this can be set
to 0.00 because it is not necessary to lower the nozzle when dumping a component.
The “Action” column indicates the time duration for which air blow turns on to
discard or mount a component (in milliseconds). This is valid only for machines
with an air blow unit and is typically set to 20 to 100ms. This coordinate is set in
the utilities program (“Position”).
SCREEN 4-21

System Description
Nozzle clog prevention air blow

To prevent the nozzles from being clogged with dust and solder, this function is
used to blow away such foreign matter in the nozzles when the head assembly is at
the "wait point" or "discard point". This function and air blow time can be specified
in the Type and Feeder columns of the Wait point and Discard point parameters.
Nozzle clog prevention air blow settings and operations
Settings in “Action” column Operations

Wait point Discard point At Wait point At Discard point
Blows air for the time specified in the
NORMAL NORMAL No action
Feeder column of the Discard point.
Other than Blows air for the time specified in the
NORMAL No action
NORMAL Type column of the Discard point.
Blows air for the time Blows air for the time specified in
Discard NORMAL specified in the Feeder the Feeder column of the Discard
column of the Discard point. point.
Blows air for the time Blows air for the time specified in
Other than
Discard selected in the Type column the Type column of the Discard
NORMAL
of the Discard point. point.
5 C04 32 3- 00
FIGURE 4-47
CAUTION
CAUTION: WHEN THIS AIR BLOW IS PERFORMED AT THE "WAIT POINT", BE SURE TO SET
THE "WAIT POINT" AT A POSITION WHICH IS NOT ABOVE THE PCB OR FEEDER.
THE SETTING IN THE FEEDER COLUMN OF THE DISCARD POINT IS SHARED WITH
THE AIR BLOW TIMER FOR SEPARATING A COMPONENT FROM THE NOZZLE JUST
AFTER THE COMPONENT HAS BEEN MOUNTED ON THE PCB. IF THIS SETTING IS
TOO LARGE, THE COMPONENT MAY BOUNCE OFF THE PCB AT THE INSTANT IT IS
MOUNTED. (FOR MORE DETAILS, REFER TO THE MOUNTER OPERATION MANUAL.)
PCB height Z
The Z coordinate of the PCB/Fix. TF parameter represents the height of the head
assembly positioned to mount components on a PCB. Set this Z coordinate to the
height at which the nozzle of Head 1 just makes contact with the surface of a PCB
which is clamped in the mounting position.

System Description
Fixed tray height Z

The R coordinate shows the height of a pallet when a manual tray feeder (MTF) is
used. To set the PCB height (Z coordinate), follow the steps below. Since the height
of the fixed conveyor rail surface is basically the same height as the PCB surface, set
it as the PCB height. Check if a Type 72 nozzle is attached to all heads. Use the
same steps when setting the height of an MTF pallet (R coordinate).
SCREEN 4-22
Simul pickarea Z
To speed up the mounting process the heads can pick-up components from different
feeders simultaneously. However the heads and the pick-up positions are not always
spaced and aligned exactly as they should be. This setting specifies the maximum
deviation between the actual spacing between the heads and the actual spacing
between the feeder positions in the x-axis direction that is permissible if simultaneous
picking is possible. The default setting for the Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII is 0.3mm.
QFP clearance
When placing in fine or QFP mode the head stops at a certain distance above the
component or PCB during mounting or picking before being lowered the remaining
distance under servo control.
The setting specifies the final distance that the head is lowered. Default setting is 4mm.
Nozzle Change Timer/Speed
The value in the timer column is the time duration for which a head stays at the
lower end position when changing a nozzle. (Units are milliseconds.) A typical
setting is around 100msec. If the nozzle change is given an error, try entering a
slightly larger value. A value of as long as one second (1000msec) can be set. The
value in the speed column is the relative ascent and descent speeds for the head
during nozzle change. This is normally set to 100%. If the nozzle change is given an
error, try decreasing this value slightly.

System Description
Retry Limit
This is the maximum number of retries that the mounter is allowed to retry
component pickup or recognition when a pickup error or recognition error occurs.
This parameter can be any value from 1 to 14. When you do not want to allow
retries set this parameter to “NO RETRY”. The number of retries can also be specified
for each component to be mounted. In these cases, retry is performed a number of
times up to a minimum setting.
Air blow
This parameter gives the duration of the air blow after mounting a component
Nozzle check
Select when a nozzle check should be carried out after mounting or after dumping.
Standard this is set to “NO USE”.
Push up axis
This parameter gives the speed of the push up axis (PU). Default is at 100%.
Warning
The error rate gives the maximum permissible percentage of pick and recognition
errors, When exceeding an error message is displayed.
Dumpstation (1,2,3,4)
These are the X,Y and Z coordinates of the (optional) reject station (s). See section
12.3 for more information)
Conv correct (1,2,3,4)
The X,Y and Z coordinates are measured at four points on the conveyor to correct
for conveyor height differences (Z). If the Z-values between the four point differ
more than 1.0 the correction is not carried out. Only used in the Sapphire-XII Series
4.9.18 Additional Pre-adjustments

4.9.18.1 Teach Nozzle Station Positions and Init. R Position
The procedure how to calibrate the nozzle station, the clamp plate position and
nozzle sensor amplifier and nozzle station co-ordinates is explained in chapter 15.
NOTE: The Nozzle Station must be calibrated very accurate because if the Nozzle
hits the Nozzle Station even a little the Nozzle shaft will bend a little bit
every time a Nozzle is changed. This will influence accuracy of placement
so that the machine has to be calibrated again, so please take time to teach
the Nozzle positions very accurate.

System Description
4.9.18.2 Checking the Head Vacuum Generation

The next step is to check the vacuum levels of the machine to get a correct pick -up
action. Chapter 15 explains how to check the vacuum generation of heads.
4.9.19 Camera Calibration

The camera calibration procedure is very important. Follow the exact procedure as
described in chapter 14 module vision systems.
4.9.20 R-axis Accuracy

Before the FAMF procedure is done, the R-axis accuracy adjustment procedure should
be carried out. This procedure calculates the rotational offset of all heads at four
different angles. The FAMF procedure will do the fine adjustment for the SF heads.
This procedure has to be performed in the Utilities menu. When calibrating the line
array camera this has to be done in the Multi Camera menu, for the single vision
camera in the Single Camera menu.
Perform the following procedure:
1. Load the ‘MCH_SETUP’ program in VGOS.
2. Use one of the following components for the R-axis accuracy measurement:
• QFP44 (Part no. 16 in the parts menu of MCH_SETUP)
• SOP16 (Part no. 17 in the parts menu of MCH_SETUP)
If these parts are not defined yet in the parts menu of MCH_SETUP, define them
first. Both components should be picked with nozzle 73.
3. Perform a vision test to check if the chosen component is recognised properly.
4. Select R-axis accuracy in the Multi or Single camera menu of the Utilities menu
(Mch_Setup)
5. Select the applicable camera
6. Select the component number which has been created in step 2
7. Select the head for which the measurement should be done.
8. Pickup the component by pressing the PICKUP button (press ok). The head will
move to the pick position which has been defined in Parts.
9. Press the Execute button to start the measurement. The head moves to the
camera and measures the rotation of the head at 4 angles.
10.After the measurement has finished, the results are shown and when saved
adjusted automatically. The values should be between -1.0 and +1.0.
11.The values are saved in “machine” - “Precision” - “Precision Rotation”.
12.Do the same step for all heads and cameras.

System Description
4.9.21 Introduction to FAMF

The full auto mount feedback (FAMF) procedure is a semi-automatic mounting
accuracy adjustment program for the Assembléon GEM-XII line. The mount accuracy
of the machine is calculated by collecting a large number of mounting results.
Therefore the glass adjustment kit (PA1912/00) and some other parts must be used,
in combination with special written software.
The machine should be calibrated on the following occasions:
■ Regular check (e.q. half yearly) if the mount accuracy is still within specification.
■ Adjustment tool when an option is installed, such as additional line array
camera, single vision camera, etc.
■ Adjustment tool when an item related to the mount accuracy is changed or
replaced (like cameras, head spline, index head, etc.).
Differences between FAMF (X-II machines) and AMF (X-Machines):

• X-II machines are calibrated using 0402 components, X-machines with 0805.
• The FAMF procedure starts with mounting chips, AMF mounts glass QFP’s
first.
• In the FAMF procedure mounting and measuring are done directly after each
other, they are integrated in the same FAMF program. In the AMF procedure
measuring is done by a separate program.
• FAMF uses the “index 1” value to judge if the machines meets the accuracy
specifications (refer to section 4.9.23). For AMF the maximum Xe, Ye and Re
are used.
4.9.22 Machine Specifications

The Topaz-XII Series machine accuracy is defined with the following figures:
&DPHUD ; < 5
Line array chips and SOIC 0.075 mmA 0.075 mmA B
Line array chips 0201-0402 0.050 mmC/0.075 mmD 0.050 mmC/0.075 mmD B
Line array QFP 0.060 mmA 0.060 mmA 0.200°
Single vision 32 mm 0.035 mm 0.035 mm 0.10°
Single vision 45 mm 0.035 mm 0.035 mm 0.10°
A. For 32 mm and 45 mm line array applicable.

B. Not specified.
C. For 32 mm line array camera.
D. For 45 mm line array camera.
TABLE 4-31 Topaz-XII Series (only) specification.

System Description
4.9.23 FAMF Correction Criteria

The FAMF program calculates various parameters to improve the mounting accuracy. Do
not change these parameters manually, because they are intricately intertwined.
A change of one of these values may effect other mounting precision parameters.
The following parameters are calculated:
■ Moving camera offset
The distance in X and Y from the center of rotation of head 1 (reference head) to
the center of the moving camera.
■ Head offset
The distance in X and Y from the center of rotation of head 1 to the center of
rotation of the other heads.
■ Zigzag parameter
Parameter to compensate for offsets related to the mount angle.
■ Parallel parameter
Parameter to compensate for offsets independent of the mount angle.
■ Rotation parameter
Parameter to compensate for offsets related to the mount angle.
After an FAMF step has been performed, the following results are displayed:
■ 3σ = This is not used as a criterion, only in the Index 1 formula.
■ Centre = This is the average (µ) of all measurements. This is not used as a
criterion, only in the Index 1 formula.
■ Index1 = Uxy – µ
------------------------
3σ
Uϕ – µ It means Cpk.
----------------------
3σ
This value should be used as the accuracy criterion for XII-machines.
Index 1 should be 1.0 or higher to meet the accuracy specifications of the
machine.
(Maximum of 3σ of each angle) + 0.15Utcl
■ Index2 =
(Total of 3σ of 4 angle)
This value is not used as a criterion. Index 2 is used in the factory (for acceptance).

System Description
4.9.24 Flowchart of the FAMF Procedure

Below a chart is shown of the various procedures to be followed using the FAMF
program. The flowchart shows one calibration step, for example step A1 for the front
line arrray camera.
Check software
settings
See section 4.9.26.
Select/confirm
Program
See section 4.9.28.
Check or change Program
data according step

See section 4.9.28.
Warm-up
machine
See section 4.9.28.
Clear old measurements in
FAMF Program (Init 0 button)

Save See section 4.9.28.
data
Start mount
program
Feedback See section 4.9.28.
Check measuring results (after 3

No
(chips) or 5 (glass QFP) boards)
See section 4.9.28.
Is this the Are results

No
3rd time performing within specs
this step? >

(INDEX1 1.0)? See section 4.9.28.
Yes Yes
Mechanical problem. Check e.g. Do not
Result2 tab to find problem cause feedback and do not save

See section 4.9.28.
Go to next
step
See section 4.9.28.
Reset FAMF
settings
See section 4.9.30.
FIGURE 4-48

System Description
4.9.25 Required Materials

Parts needed:
■ 4 × type 71 nozzle (Topaz-X(i)II, FNC machine & Opal-XII) or 8 × type 71 nozzle
(Topaz-X(i)II, SF machine).
■ 1 × type 74 nozzle for Topaz-XII Series only.
■ 1 × type 77 and type 75 nozzle for Opal-XII only.
■ PA 1912/00 ‘Glass adjustment kit’ (9466.019.12001)
The ‘Glass adjustment kit’ includes the Glass PCB Board (5322 395 10814) and 16
Glass QFP’s (5322 395 10824) Only use Glass QFP’s with sticker!
■ QFP stand holder to hold 4 QFP’s (for XII machines 5322.256.10459, for XiII
machines 4022.591.74251).
■ Cleaning tissues with ethanol to clean the glass QFP’s.
■ Tape with C0402/R0402 chip components (not included in Glass Adjustment Kit
(PA 1912/00)) (light coloured is preferable but others can be used)
Code: 0402SMC-PA (capacitors)
Supplier: Practical Components Inc.
Web-site: www.practicalcomponents.com
R0402 components are prefered because resistors have sharper defined outer
edges.
■ Standard double sided tape (for glass QFP).
■ CLC foil (for chips) 5322 466 11514 (not included in PA1912/00).
■ Check for availability of an 0402 feeder (2mm index).
QFP 208
Position Glass
Components
Position Small QFP 68
Components
FIGURE 4-49
4.9.26 General FAMF Settings

Press the ‘Machine’ button in the Main Area of VGOS to open the Vm Spec menu.
Several settings have to be changed to perform the FAMF procedure. Before
changing a setting please write down the original settings because all settings must
be put back after the FAMF procedure.

System Description
4.9.26.1 Conveyor
■ Make sure the Conveyor Spec parameter has been set to ‘Demo Fixed’ (in sub-
window “option setting”).
SCREEN 4-23
4.9.26.2 Adjust Mode Menu

In the Adjust Mode Menu (in subwindow ‘option setting’) four settings can be
distinguished.
■ None : This must be selected in normal production mode
■ Adjustmode 1 : This must be selected during mounting of chip components
(FAMF)
■ Adjustmode 2 : This mode must be selected during mounting of glass
components (FAMF)
■ Adjustmode 3: This setting is not used.
SCREEN 4-24
Set the adjust mode to ‘Adjust Mode 1’ because the FAMF procedure starts with
mounting chips

System Description
4.9.26.3 Software
Set the Parts Info Mode and Mount Info mode parameters to ‘V3.0 Extended’ (in
sub-window “installation setting”).
SMEMA
SMEMA
SCREEN 4-25
4.9.26.4 Option Multi MACS

■ Make sure the Multi MACS parameter in the sub window Installation Setting is
set to “Multi MACS 1&2”
SCREEN 4-26
4.9.26.5 Option Coord MACS

Make sure the Coord MACS parameter in the sub window Installation Setting is set
to “Use”
SCREEN 4-27
4.9.26.6 Multi MACS

Go to ‘Settings/Machine Data/Precision/Multi MACS’
■ For the Multi MACS parameter Timer three types of settings can be distinguished:
• 0 : the markers are checked after each pick (=setting during FAMF
procedure)
• 1-254 : the markers are checked every XX minutes regarding the value

System Description
• 255 : the markers are checked once per PCB.
SCREEN 4-28
Set all timer parameters to ‘0’.

4.9.26.7 Save the data by pressing the “floppy“ button and exit the VmSpec
program. The changed settings will be active only after reloading a
program.
REMARK: Make sure that all settings are put back to the original setting after the
FAMF procedure has been performed.
4.9.26.8 Start up the FAMF utility
• Select the button in the Setup working Area
• When the next screen is displayed enter the required password. The blue top
of the window starts blinking.
SCREEN 4-29

System Description
NOTE: The FAMF utility can be de-activated after entering and exiting the ‘SW
Version’ window without entering the password.
• Press the ‘Close’ button.
• Press the button in the Main Area. A special ‘FAMF’ tab is now available.
SCREEN 4-30
• Press the button in the FAMF tab to activate the FAMF procedure.
NOTE: Do not forget to de-select this button after the FAMF procedure has been
finished else the running program will always use the camera selected here!
The top part of the FAMF tab shows the settings to be set for every step of the FAMF
procedure. The lower part of the FAMF tab shows the mounting and measuring
results during and after the FAMF procedure.
The buttons in the upper right part of the FAMF tab are used as follows:

System Description
Activates the FAMF procedure

After running a step of the FAMF procedure, the measurement results are shown in
tables after pressing this button.
Feedback the FAMF measurement results when the results are not within specifi-
cation
Displays the FAMF measurement results graphically.
Clear the result table. This has to be done before the next FAMF step is going to be
performed.
Save the results, and adjust the machine data regarding these results.
Do not press any button yet (except for the button).

This is general information only.
4.9.27 Saving and Storing Data

The results of the measurements are stored in the file Result.dat, which is located
in the directory D:\Machine\Result. This file can be stored on floppy disk when
using it for a chart program.
Before starting the FAMF procedure the existing result.dat file should be renamed.
Open the ‘Utilities’ menu, select ‘Explorer’ and select ‘D:\Machine\Result’. Select
‘Result.dat’ and change the name. After the first FAMF step (three boards of chips)
has been carried out rename the new result.dat file (e.g. TPX2_A1.dat) and
continue with step B1.
NOTE: From VGOS 1.10 onwards it is possible to name the result files in the FAMF
menu itself (see section SCREEN 4-30). From this VGOS version onwards it is
not necessary anymore to open the ‘Explorer’ menu between each FAMF step.
4.9.28 FAMF (Full Auto Mount Feedback) Procedure

The tables below show the FAMF Steps to be taken for calibrating a Topaz-XII FNC or
SF with two line array cameras and one single vision camera. If one of these
cameras is not present the corresponding FAMF Step should be omitted.
The last table shows the FAMF steps for the Opal-XII only.
Each FAMF Step is elaborated in Sections 4.9.28.1 through 4.9.28.14 for a Topaz-XII
FNC. A Topaz-XII SF is calibrated in the same way, except for the extra Steps B5-B8,
D5-D8 and E5-E8.
For the Opal-XII FAMF steps refer to section 4.9.28.15 through 4.9.28.24.

System Description
FAMF Topaz-XII FNC series
NOTE: For chips 3 boards have to be mounted in each step (before checking the
results), for glass QFPs 5 boards must be mounted and measured.
NOTE: Type 72 and 73 are not calibrated because it is too time consuming and the
type 71 nozzle has a higher accuracy.
NOTE: The only difference between Steps B1, B2, B3 and B4 is the head used for
mounting. Step B1 uses head 1, Step B2 uses head 3, Step B3 uses head 5
and Step B4 uses head 7. (analogously for Steps D1-D4 and Steps E1-E4).
6WHS 6HWWLQJLWHPV 0RXQW3URJUDP 1R]]OH +HDG &RPSRQHQW '%QR $GMXVWHG3DUDPHWHUV
Adjust Dig- Std. Upper Moving Camera

0.050
Camera ital 1 XY Position
Measuring Nor- Std. Upper Digital 1_head
3.000
Mode mal R 1_precision zigzag
Measuring R Axis Not 0402 real X,Y
PCB FAMF(_TPX2)_
A1 Tool Calib use 71 1 - 8 compo- 1 Digital 1_head 2-
71_ALL(_OLD)
Main Cam- Dig- nents 8_precision zigzag
era ital 1 X,Y
Digital 1_head 2-
Main Noz- 8_precision parallel
1
zle X,Y
Adjust Dig- Std. Upper
0.040
Camera ital 1 XY
Each Digital 1_head
Measuring Std. Upper
noz- 0.170 7_nozzle 74
Mode R
zle _precision each noz-
B1- FAMF_TPX2_74 1, 3, Glass
Measuring R Axis 74 51 zle X,Y
B4 PCB Use (_OLD) 5, 7 QFP
Tool Calib Digital_1_head
Main Cam- Dig- 1_precision rota-
era ital 1 tion(R)
Main Noz-
1
zle

System Description
Adjust Dig- Std. Upper Digital 2_head

0.050
Camera ital 2 XY 1_precision zigzag
Measuring Nor- Std. Upper X,Y
3.000
Mode mal R Digital 2_head
Measuring R Axis Not 1_precision rotation
PCB
Tool Calib use (R)
Main Cam- Dig- 0402 real Digital 2_head 2-
FAMF(_TPX2)_
C1 era ital 1 71 1-8 compo- 1 8_precision zigzag
71_ALL(_OLD)
nent X,Y
Digital 2_head 2-
8_precision parallel
Main Noz-
1 X,Y
zle
Digital 2_head 2-
8_precision rotation
(R)
Adjust Dig- Std. Upper
0.040
Camera ital 2 XY
Each Digital 2_head
noz- 0.170 7_nozzle 74
Mode R
zle _precision each noz-
D1- FAMF(_TPX2)_ 1, 3, Glass
Measuring R Axis 74 51 zle X,Y
D4 PCB Use 74 (_OLD) 5, 7 QFP
Tool Calib Digital_2_head
Main Cam- Dig- 1_precision rota-
era ital 1 tion(R)
Main Noz-
1
zle
Adjust Ana- Std. Upper
0.040
Camera log 2 XY
Measuring Nor- Std. Upper
0.170
Mode mal R
E1- Measuring R Axis Not FAMF(_TPX)2_ 1,3, Glass Analog 2_head
PCB 74 51
E4 Tool Calib use 74_SGL(_OLD) 5,7 QFP _zigzag (X,Y)
Main Cam- Dig-
era ital 1
Main Noz-
4
zle
TABLE 4-32 FAMF Topaz-XII FNC series

System Description
FAMF Topaz-XII SF series
NOTE: Make sure that eight nozzles type 71 are available for calibrating with
chips.
results), for glass QFPs 5 boards must be mounted and measured.
NOTE: The only difference between Steps B1,B2,B3,B4,B5,B6,B7 and B8 is the

head used for mounting. Step B1 uses head 1, Step B2 uses head 2, Step
B3 uses head 3 and so on. (analogously for Steps D1-D8 and Steps E1-E8)
NOTE: On a standard Topaz-X II SF with nozzle station nozzle 74 is only available

for heads 1, 3, 5 and 7. In this case calibration of heads 2, 4, 6 and 8 with
glass QFP’s is not necessary. For this reason heads 2, 4, 6 and 8 are placed
between brackets in step B, D and E. If a customer has four additional
nozzles 74 for use on heads 2, 4, 6 and 8 these heads must be calibrated
with glass QFP’s too.
When calibrating head 8 set the Mount Action to “Normal” (instead of
“QFP”) because of a lack of space between head 8 and the moving camera.

System Description
Std. Upper
Adjust Camera Digital 1 0.050
XY Moving Camera Position
Measuring Std. Upper Digital 1_head
Normal 3.000 1_precision zigzag X,Y
Mode R FAMF(_TPX2)_71_A 0402 real
A1 71 1-8 1 Digital 1_head 2-
Not LL(_OLD) components
Measuring Tool PCB R Axis Calib 8_precision zigzag X,Y
use
Digital 1_head 2-
Main Camera Digital 1 8_precision parallel X,Y
Main Nozzle 1
Std. Upper
Adjust Camera Digital 1 0.040 1,
XY
(2,) Digital 1_head
Measuring Each noz- Std. Upper 3, _nozzle 74 _precision
0.170 FAMF(_TPX2)_74

B1-B8 Mode zle R 74 (4,) Glass QFP 51 each nozzle X,Y

(_OLD)
Measuring Tool PCB R Axis Calib Use 5, Digital_1_head
Main Camera Digital 1 (6,) _precision rotation(R)
7, (8)
Main Nozzle 1
Std. Upper
XY
Digital 2_head
Measuring Std. Upper 1_precision zigzag X,Y
Normal 3.000
Mode R FAMF(_TPX2)_71_A 0402 real Digital 2_head 2-
C1 71 1-8 1
Not LL(_OLD) component 8_precision zigzag X,Y
Measuring Tool PCB R Axis Calib
use Digital 2_head 2-
Main Nozzle 1
Std. Upper
Adjust Camera Digital 2 0.040 1,
XY
(2,) Digital 2_head
Measuring Each noz- Std. Upper 3, _nozzle 74 _precision
0.170 FAMF(_TPX2)_74

D1-D8 Mode zle R 74 (4,) Glass QFP 51 each nozzle X,Y

(_OLD)
Measuring Tool PCB R Axis Calib Use 5, Digital_2_head
Main Camera Digital 1 (6,) _precision rotation(R)
7, (8)
Main Nozzle 1
Std. Upper
Adjust Camera Analog 2 0.040
XY 1,
Measuring Std. Upper (2,)
Normal 0.170 3,
Mode R FAMF(_TPX2)_74_S Analog 2_head
E1-E8 74 (4,) Glass QFP 51
Not GL(_OLD) _Precision zigzag (X,Y)
Measuring Tool PCB R Axis Calib 5,
use
(6,)
Main Camera Digital 1 7, (8)
Main Nozzle 4
TABLE 4-33 FAMF Topaz-XII SF series

System Description
FAMF Opal-XII
NOTE: Make sure that 4 nozzles type 71 are available for calibrating with chips.
NOTE: Make sure that 1 nozzle type 75 and type 77 are available for calibrating
with glass QFP’s.
results), for glass QFP’s 5 boards must be mounted and measured.
NOTE: The only difference between steps B1,B2, B3 and B4 is the head used for
mounting. Step B1 uses head 1, step B2 uses head 2, step B3 uses head 3
and so on. (same is valid for steps C1-C4, D1-D4 and E1-E4).

System Description
Std. Upper
XY Moving Camera Position
Measuring Std. Upper Digital 1_head
Normal 3.000 1_precision zigzag X,Y
Mode R FAMF_OPALX2_71_ 0402 real
A1 71 1-4 1 Digital 1_head 2-
Not ALL components
Measuring Tool PCB R Axis Calib 4_precision zigzag X,Y
use
Digital 1_head 2-
Main Nozzle 1
Std. Upper
XY
Digital 1_head
Measuring Each noz- Std. Upper _nozzle 77_precision
0.170 1, 2,

B1-B8 Mode zle R FAMF_OPALX2_77 77 Glass QFP 51 each nozzle X,Y

3, 4
Measuring Tool PCB R Axis Calib Use Digital_1_head
_precision rotation (R)
Main Camera Digital 1
Main Nozzle 1
Std. Upper
XY
Digital 1_head
Measuring Each noz- Std. Upper _nozzle 75_precision
0.170 1, 2,

C1-C4 Mode zle R FAMF_OPALX2_75 75 Glass QFP 51 each nozzle X,Y

3, 4
Measuring Tool PCB R Axis Calib Use Digital_1_head
_precision rotation (R)
Main Nozzle 1
Std. Upper
XY
Normal 0.170
Mode R FAMF_OPALX2_77_ 1, 2, Analog 2_head
D1-D4 77 Glass QFP 51
Not SGL 3, 4 _Precision zigzag (X,Y)
use
Main Nozzle 7
Std. Upper
XY
Measuring Each noz- Std. Upper
0.170
Mode zle R FAMF_OPALX2_75_ 1, 2, Analog 2_head
E1-E4 75 Glass QFP 51
Not SGL 3, 4 _Precision zigzag (X,Y)
use
Main Nozzle 7
FIGURE 4-50 FAMF OPAL-XII

System Description
4.9.28.1 STEP A1: Head 1 to 8 for Front Line Array Camera Topaz-XII Series
Make sure that all preceding adjustments have been carried out (refer to Figure 4-
42). Make also sure that the general FAMF settings are all set correctly (refer to
Section 4.9.26). The adjust mode should be set at “adjust mode 1” for chips.
This step is the adjustment of head 1 through 8 for the front line array camera. In
VGOS this camera is known as digital 1.
This procedure will correct the following machine parameters:
■ Moving camera position (X,Y)
■ Digital 1 head 1 through 8 precision zigzag (X,Y)
■ Digital 1 head 2 through 8 precision parallel (XY)
1. Mount preparation:
■ Set the FAMF parameters as follows:
Adjust Camera : . . . . . . . . . . digital1 (front line array camera)
Measuring Mode: . . . . . . . . . normal
Measuring Tool: . . . . . . . . . . PCB
Main camera: . . . . . . . . . . . . digital1
Main Nozzle : . . . . . . . . . . . 1 (for line array camera)
Std Upper XY: . . . . . . . . . . . 0.050 (XY specification criterion)
Std Upper R: . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.00
Raxis calib: . . . . . . . . . . . . . not use
SCREEN 4-31
■ Select file ‘FAMF(_TPX2)_71_ALL(_OLD)’

The file should be available on the machine.
■ Apply CLC foil to the glass plate (dark area of figure 4-49). Make sure that the
CLC foil protrudes at least 2mm from each side of the black area on the glass
PCB. It is extremely important to avoid air bubbles under the CLC foil!

System Description
2. Recognising marks and components

■ Mark recognition
• Make sure that only the board fiducial check is on ‘Execute’
(see section SCREEN 4-32).
• Adjust the movable locate pin and the push up pins and secure the glass PCB.
• The PCB fiducial mark corresponds with mark no.1 in the mark database of
the program. Go to ‘Board/Fiducial/Teach’ and select ‘Trace’ to move the
fiducial camera to the first fiducial (it is in the front left corner of the PCB).
Press ‘Close’, ‘Adjust’ and ‘Test’ to check if the mark is recognised properly.
Optimize the mark data with ‘Find Best’. If the fiducial can not be recognised
because it is outside the search area (3.00 mm in X and Y), the board origin
should be adjusted: Go to ‘Board/Offset’ and change the board coordinates.
Do not change the fiducial coordinates!
• Exit the menu with ‘ok’ (instead of cancel) to save the optimized data.
SCREEN 4-32
■ Component recognition
• Mount a feeder loaded with 0402 components onto the front feederbar on a
position that can be reached by all heads 1 through 8.
• Make sure that nozzle 71 is attached to all heads.
• The 0402 component is defined as part no. 1 in the parts database of the
program. Perform the Adjust Utility to check if the component is recognised
properly and optimize the component data with ‘Find Best’.
• Dump the component.

System Description
SCREEN 4-33
■ Recognising the 0402 component as mark

• Go to “Parts/Adjust” and pick up a 0402 component with head 1
• Move head 1 over the CLC foil to a position where no component will be
mounted during FAMF.
• Go to “Unit/Head” and move head 1 down pneumatically.
• Select “Axis”, select tab “ZR” and move the head assy down until head 1 just
touches the CLC foil on the glass plate.
• Stop vacuum generation and move the head up pneumatically; the
component should stay in the CLC foil.
• Go to the mark menu and select mark no. 11.
• Select “Adjust/Move Head” and move the fiducial camera to the 0402
component on the glass plate.
• Check if the component is recognised as mark and optimise the mark data
with “Find Best”.
• Exit the menu with “OK” (instead of “Cancel”) to save the optimised data.

System Description
3. Warm-Up
Warm-up the machine for 30 minutes to create the same machine status for FAMF as
during production. If the machine has been mechanically in-active for more than
15 minutes, warm-up for another 5 minutes.
4. Start Running
■ Clear the “old” measurement results by pressing the “Init” Button (see section
SCREEN 4-31).
■ Start mounting the program ‘FAMF(_TPX2)_71_ALL(_OLD)’ by releasing the EMG
and pressing the START button on the operation panel.
■ Press the ‘cycle stop’ button to make sure the machine will stop after finishing
the PCB.
■ After the PCB has been finished, press “Reset”, press EMG and take the PCB out
of the machine. Remove the CLC foil (with components) and apply new foil.
■ Run this program again and repeat the procedure until three boards have been
mounted. Do not forget to press the ‘cycle stop’ button for each board!
5. Check results
■ Press the ‘Result’ button (after mounting 3 boards) and select the ‘Result 1’ tab.
SCREEN 4-34

System Description
■ After mounting 3 PCBs check if INDEX1≥1.0

a) If the value is within specification do not feedback and do not save and go on
with the next FAMF step (Step B1). Do not forget to rename the result.dat file!
b) If the value is not within the specification:
• Check the result2 tab to check which head/angle is causing the low index1
• Press the ‘Feedback’ button to FEEDBACK the results.
• Press the ‘Save’ button to save the data.
• Rename the result.dat file.
The results of the Full Auto Mount Feedback can be found in the file Result.dat
(see 4.9.27)
■ Once ‘Feedback’ and ‘Save’ have been performed, do step 4 and 5 again to check
if the feedback has improved the accuracy. After three times feedback the
mounting accuracy must be within specification.
■ In case of bad calibration results please check the following:
a) Recognizing a large number of components at once is more effective than
running the FAMF numerous times. So for instance, if there is a head for
which convergence is difficult, the number of components placed with that
head can be increased without using the other heads. (Make a copy of the
mount program and change the head numbers.)
b) If the measurement results for an individual head are poor, there may be a
mechanical problem with the head in question.
c) If all heads show similar offsets there may be a problem with the camera scale
d) Check the movement of the heads on strange behaviour
e) Check the mounting conditions like mount data, component data, etc.
f) Make sure that the system has been warmed up for at least 30 minutes.
The mount results can be checked graphically by pressing the button and
selecting the result.dat file or by saving the result.dat file to floppy disk and
loading it into a chart program. Ask your local Regional Center for more infor-
mation.
■ Rename the result.dat file before continuing with the next step!
4.9.28.2 STEP B1: Head 1 for Front Line Array Camera Topaz-XII Series
Section 4.9.26). The adjust mode should be set at “adjust mode 2” for Glass QFP’s.
This step is the adjustment of head 1 for the front line array camera. In VGOS this
camera is known as digital 1.
■ Digital 1 head 1 nozzle 74 precision each nozzle (X,Y)
■ Digital 1 head 1 rotation (R)

System Description
Measuring Mode: . . . . . . . . . each Nozzle
Main Nozzle : . . . . . . . . . . . 1(for line array camera)
Std Upper R: . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.170 (R specification criterion)
Raxis calib: . . . . . . . . . . . . . use
SCREEN 4-35
■ Select file ‘FAMF(_TPX2)_74(_OLD)’.

■ Apply double sided tape to the glass PCB on the positions where the glass QFPs
will be mounted (see section FIGURE 4-49).
2. Component and mount file preparation

■ Component Recognition
• Attach nozzle 74 to head 1.
• Clean both sides of the glass QFPs (do not clean the sticker) with a soft tissue
with ethanol.
• The glass QFP is defined as part no. 51 in the parts database of the program.
Perform the adjust utility to check if the component is recognised properly
and optimize the component data with ‘Find Best’.
• Exit the menu with ‘ok’ (instead of ‘cancel’) to save the optimized data.
• Remove the glass component by hand, do not dump it.

System Description
■ QFP Stand
• Mount the QFP stand holder on the front feeder plate on a position where
heads 1, 3, 5 and 7 can reach all pick positions of the QFP Tray.
• Go to part no. 51 in the parts database and open the “Basic” menu. Check if
“D/Package” is set to “tray” and if “E/Feeder type” is set to “Fix. TF”.
• Open the “Pick” menu and set “B/Position Definition” to “Teaching”
• Select the “Teach” button, select “Camera” as teaching unit and move the
fiducial camera to the centre of the first pick position of the tray (left).
It might be helpful to put a glass QFP on the first pick position (QFP side
facing upwards) to align the cross hair of the fiducial camera with the centre
of the glass QFP.
• Select “point” and “teach” to save the current coordinates as the coordinates
of the first pick position.
• Close the teaching screen and select the ”Mount” menu. Check if “G/Mount
Action” is set to “QFP” .
• Select the “Tray” menu and check if “A/Comp. Amount X” is set to 4 and if
“B/Comp. Amount Y” is set to 1.
• XII-Machines: Set “C/Comp Pitch X (mm)” to 40 (mm).
XiII-Machines: Set “C/Comp Pitch X (mm)” to 50 (mm).
REMARK: Using the QFP Tray is mandatory, it is the only way to get reliable
calibration results. In emergency situations “Step Running” can be used:
Press the “Step” button in the Work Area of “Setup” and select “Pause”
for “Parts Pick Down”.
■ Mount File Preparation

• Go to “Board”, “Mount” and check if the component reference number for
mount lines 1,6,11,16,21,26,31 and 36 is set to No. 51.

System Description
• Change the Head No. to “1” for mount lines 1,6,11,16,21,26,31 and 36.
SCREEN 4-36
3. Warm-up
4.Start running
■ Put the glass plate onto the working area
■ Put glass components on the tray holder
■ Clear the “old” measurement results by pressing the “Init” Button
(see section FIGURE 4-35).
■ Start mounting the program ‘FAMF(_TPX2)_74(_OLD)’ by releasing EMG and
pressing the START button on the operation panel.
■ Press the ‘Cycle stop’ button to make sure the machine will stop after finishing
the PCB.
■ After picking the 4th glass QFP from the tray, the machine will give a pick error
(there are only 4 components on the tray and 8 are needed).

System Description
a) Clear the error

b) Press the EMG button
c) Refill the tray
d) Release the EMG situation
e) Start running again by pressing the START button on the operation panel, the
next 4 Glass QFP’s are mounted.
of the machine. Remove the glass QFPs from the board and check if the tape is
still sticky, if not replace it.
■ Run this program again and repeat the procedure until five boards have been
mounted.
5. Check results
■ Press the ‘Result’ button (after 5 boards) and select ‘Result 1’ tab. Make sure the
correct nozzle (=4) and head (=1) are selected.
SCREEN 4-37
■ After mounting 5 PCBs check if INDEX1≥1.0.

with the next FAMF step (Step B2). Do not forget to rename the result.dat
file!
• Check the Result2 tab to check which angle is causing the low INDEX1.
The results of the Full Auto Mount Feedback can be found in the file Result.dat (see
4.9.27).

System Description
■ Once “Feedback” and “Save” have been performed do step 4 and 5 again to check
• Check Head 1 for strange mechanical behaviour.
• Check the camera scale.
• Check the mounting conditions like mount data, component data, etc.
• Make sure that the system has been warmed up for at least 30 minutes.
■ Press the EMG button and remove all glass components from the glass plate.
■ Rename the result.dat file before continuing with the next step.
Please follow the exact same procedure as step B1.
The only difference is that nozzle 74 should be attached to head 3 and that in step
B1.2 the Head No. for mount lines 1,6,11,16,21,26,31 and 36 must be changed in “3”.
The only difference is that nozzle 74 should be attached to head 7 and that in
step B1.2 the Head No. for mount lines 1,6,11,16,21,26,31 and 36 must be
changed in “7”.
4.9.28.6 STEP C1: Head 1 to 8 for REAR Line Array Camera Topaz-XII Series
Please follow the exact same procedure as step A1.
The only differences are:
■ In Step A1.1 the “Adjust Camera” must be set to “digital2” (rear line array
camera). The main camera is still digital 1.
■ The feeder loaded with 0402 components should now be mounted onto the rear
feederbar. Choose a position that can be reached by all heads 1 through 8.
Change the Feeder Set No. in the parts database and perform ‘Adjust’ and ‘Find
Best’ to optimize the component data for the rear line array camera.
Do not forget to rename the result.dat file.
Do not forget to select “Adjust mode1” in the Vmspec.

System Description
4.9.28.7 STEP D1: Head 1 for REAR Line Array Camera Topaz-XII Series
■ In Step B1.1 the “Adjust Camera” must be set to “digital2” (rear line array
■ Optimize the component data of the glass QFP using the rear line array camera.
■ Mount the QFP stand holder on the rear feeder plate on a position where heads
1, 3, 5 and 7 can reach all pick positions of the QFP Tray.
Do not forget to select “Adjust mode2” in the Vmspec.
■ Attach nozzle 74 to head 3.
■ Change in step B1.2 the Head No. for mount lines 1,6,11,16,21,26,31 and 36 in “3”.

System Description
4.9.28.11 STEP E1: Head 1 for Single Vision Camera Topaz-XII Series
In case of a Topaz-XII having the optional second single vision camera, calibrate the
first single vision camera according to the procedure below (Steps E1-E4).
To calibrate the second single vision camera, the first single vision camera has to be
disabled. This way the machine is forced to use the second single vision camera.
Go to “Machine/Camera/Position/Specification and change the maximum
component height of “Analog Camera 2” to “0” mm (screen 4-38). Save the data by
pressing the “floppy” button and exit the VmSpec program.
SCREEN 4-38
The new setting becomes active when the mount file is reloaded. Steps E1-E4 should
be repeated for the second single vision camera. The only difference is that in Step
E1.1 the “Adjust Camera” should be set to “analog 3”.
REMARK: The (first) single vision camera is denoted with “Analog Camera 2” in
“Machine/Camera/Position/Specification”, because Analog Camera 1 is the
Fiducial Camera.

System Description
This step is the adjustment of head 1 for the single vision camera.
The procedure will correct the following machine parameters:
■ Analog 2 head 1 zigzag (X,Y)
1. Mount preparation
Adjust Camera :. . . . . . . . . . analog2 (first single vision camera)
Measuring Mode:. . . . . . . . . Normal
Measuring Tool:. . . . . . . . . . PCB
Main camera: . . . . . . . . . . . digital1
Main Nozzle : . . . . . . . . . . . 4 (for single vision camera)
Raxis calib: . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not use
SCREEN 4-39
■ Select ‘FAMF(_TPX2)_74_SGL(_OLD)’.
• Attach nozzle 74 to head 1
• Clean both sides of the Glass QFPs (do not clean the sticker) with a soft tissue
with ethanol.
• The Glass QFP is defined as part no. 51 in the parts database of the program.
Go to “Mount” and set “G/Mount Action” to “FINE” to force the machine to
use the single vision camera.
• Perform the adjust utility to check if the component is recognised properly
by the single vision camera and optimise the component data with “Find
Best”.
• Remove the component by hand, do not dump it !

System Description
■ QFP Stand
• Mount the QFP stand holder on the rear feeder plate on a position where
of the glass QFP.
• X-Machines: Set “C/Comp Pitch X (mm)” to 40 (mm).
Xi-Machines: Set “C/Comp Pitch X (mm)” to 50 (mm).
3. Warm-up
4. Start running
■ Clear the ‘old’ measurement results by pressing the ‘Init’ button.
■ Start mounting the program “FAMF_TPX2_74_SGL(_OLD)” by releasing EMG and

System Description
■ Press the button to make sure the machine will stop after finishing the
PCB.
a) Clear the error
c) Refill the tray
mounted.
5. Check results
■ Press the button (after mounting 5 PCB’s) and select the ‘Result 1’ tab.
■ Select “Single_FINE” as mount mode and ‘Head 1’ to view the results (see section
FIGURE 4-41)
SCREEN 4-40

with the next FAMF step. (STEP E2) Do not forget to rename the result.dat
file!
• Check in the Result2 tab which angle is causing the low index1.
• Press the button to FEEDBACK the results.

System Description
• Press the button to save the data.

• Rename the Result.dat file.
The results of the Full Auto Mount Feedback can be found in the file Result.dat (see 4.9.27)
Please follow the exact same procedure as step E1.
■ Standard the machine has been configured that mounting in “FINE” mode is
only possible with head 1. To calibrate the single vision camera for heads 3, 5
and 7 go to Machine/Machine Data/Head Down Offset and set “Fine Mode” to
“possible” for heads 3,5 and 7 (see section FIGURE 4-42).
SCREEN 4-41

■ Change in step E1.2 the Head No. for mount lines 1,6,11,16,21,26 and 31 in “3”.
Please follow the exact same procedure as step E1. The only difference is that in
step E1.2 the Head No. for mount lines 1,6,11,16,21,26,31 and 36 must be changed
in “5”. Attach nozzle 74 to head 5.

System Description
4.9.28.15 STEP A1: Head 1 to 4 for Front Line Array Camera Opal-XII
Section 4.9.26). The adjust mode should be set at “adjust mode 1” for chips.
This step is the adjustment of head 1 through 4 for the front line array camera. In
VGOS this camera is known as digital 1.
■ Moving camera position (X,Y)
■ Digital 1 head 1 through 4 precision zigzag (X,Y)
■ Digital 1 head 2 through 4 precision parallel (XY)
Measuring Mode: . . . . . . . . . normal
Main Nozzle : . . . . . . . . . . . 1 (for line array camera)
Std Upper R: . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.00
Raxis calib: . . . . . . . . . . . . . not use
SCREEN 4-42
■ Select file ‘FAMF_OPALX2_71_ALL’

■ Apply CLC foil to the glass plate (dark area of figure 4-49). Make sure that the
CLC foil protrudes at least 2mm from each side of the black area on the glass
PCB. It is extremely important to avoid air bubbles under the CLC foil!

System Description
2. Recognizing marks and components

■ Mark recognition
• Make sure that only the board fiducial check is on ‘Execute’
(see section SCREEN 4-32).
• Adjust the movable locate pin and the push up pins and secure the glass PCB.
• The PCB fiducial mark corresponds with mark no.1 in the mark database of
the program. Go to ‘Board/Fiducial/Teach’ and select ‘Trace’ to move the
fiducial camera to the first fiducial (it is in the front left corner of the PCB).
Press ‘Close’, ‘Adjust’ and ‘Test’ to check if the mark is recognised properly.
Optimize the mark data with ‘Find Best’. If the fiducial can not be recognised
because it is outside the search area (3.00 mm in X and Y), the board origin
should be adjusted: Go to ‘Board/Offset’ and change the board coordinates.
Do not change the fiducial coordinates!
SCREEN 4-43
■ Component recognition
• Mount a feeder loaded with 0402 components onto the front feederbar on a
position that can be reached by all heads 1 through 4.
• Make sure that nozzle 71 is attached to all heads.
• The 0402 component is defined as part no. 1 in the parts database of the
program. Perform the Adjust Utility to check if the component is recognised
properly and optimize the component data with ‘Find Best’.
• Dump the component.
SCREEN 4-44

System Description
■ Recognising the 0402 component as mark

• Go to “Parts/Adjust” and pick up a 0402 component with head 1
• Move head 1 over the CLC foil to a position where no component will be
mounted during FAMF.
• Go to “Unit/Head” and move head 1 down pneumatically.
• Select “Axis”, select tab “ZR” and move the head assy down until head 1 just
touches the CLC foil on the glass plate.
• Stop vacuum generation and move the head up pneumatically; the
component should stay in the CLC foil.
• Go to the mark menu and select mark no. 11.
• Select “Adjust/Move Head” and move the fiducial camera to the 0402
component on the glass plate.
• Check if the component is recognised as mark and optimise the mark data
3. Warm-Up
4. Start Running
■ Clear the “old” measurement results by pressing the “Init” Button (see section
SCREEN 4-31).
■ Start mounting the program ‘FAMF_OPALX2_71_ALL’ by releasing the EMG and
■ Press the ‘cycle stop’ button to make sure the machine will stop after finishing
the PCB.
of the machine. Remove the CLC foil (with components) and apply new foil.
■ Run this program again and repeat the procedure until 2 boards have been
mounted. Do not forget to press the ‘cycle stop’ button for each board!

System Description
5. Check results
■ Press the ‘Result’ button (after mounting 3 boards) and select the ‘Result 1’ tab.
SCREEN 4-45

with the next FAMF step (Step B1). Do not forget to rename the result.dat file!
• Check the result2 tab to check which head/angle is causing the low index1
(see 4.9.27)
■ Once ‘Feedback’ and ‘Save’ have been performed, do step 4 and 5 again to check
a) Recognizing a large number of components at once is more effective than
running the FAMF numerous times. So for instance, if there is a head for
which convergence is difficult, the number of components placed with that
head can be increased without using the other heads. (Make a copy of the
mount program and change the head numbers.)
b) If the measurement results for an individual head are poor, there may be a
mechanical problem with the head in question.
c) If all heads show similar offsets there may be a problem with the camera scale
d) Check the movement of the heads on strange behaviour
e) Check the mounting conditions like mount data, component data, etc.
f) Make sure that the system has been warmed up for at least 30 minutes.

System Description
The mount results can be checked graphically by pressing the button and
selecting the result.dat file or by saving the result.dat file to floppy disk and loading
it into a chart program. Ask your local Regional Center for more information.
■ Rename the result.dat file before continuing with the next step!
4.9.28.16 STEP B1: Head 1 for Front Line Array Camera Opal-XII using Nozzle Type 77
This step is the adjustment of head 1 for the front line array camera. In VGOS this
camera is known as digital 1.
■ Digital 1 head 1 nozzle 77 precision each nozzle (X,Y)
■ Digital 1 head 1 rotation (R)
Measuring Mode: . . . . . . . . . each Nozzle
Main Nozzle : . . . . . . . . . . . 1(for line array camera)
Raxis calib: . . . . . . . . . . . . . use
SCREEN 4-46
■ Select file ‘FAMF_OPALX2_77’.


System Description

• Attach nozzle 75 to head 1.
• Clean both sides of the glass QFPs (do not clean the sticker) with a soft tissue
with ethanol.
• The glass QFP is defined as part no. 51 in the parts database of the program.
Perform the adjust utility to check if the component is recognised properly
and optimize the component data with ‘Find Best’.
• Exit the menu with ‘ok’ (instead of ‘cancel’) to save the optimized data.
• Remove the glass component by hand, do not dump it.
■ QFP Stand
• Mount the QFP stand holder on the front feeder plate on a position where
of the glass QFP.
• Close the teaching screen and select the ”Mount” menu. Check if “G/Mount
Action” is set to “QFP” .
• Set “C/Comp Pitch X (mm)” to 40 (mm).

System Description
SCREEN 4-47
3. Warm-up
4.Start running
■ Clear the “old” measurement results by pressing the “Init” Button
(see section FIGURE 4-35).
■ Start mounting the program ‘FAMF_OPALX2_77’ by releasing EMG and pressing
the START button on the operation panel.
■ Press the ‘Cycle stop’ button to make sure the machine will stop after finishing
the PCB.
a) Clear the error

System Description

c) Refill the tray
mounted.
5. Check results
■ Press the ‘Result’ button (after 5 boards) and select ‘Result 1’ tab. Make sure the
correct nozzle (=7) and head (=1) are selected.
SCREEN 4-48
■ After mounting 5 PCBs check if INDEX1≥1.0.

with the next FAMF step (Step B2). Do not forget to rename the result.dat
file!
• Check the Result2 tab to check which angle is causing the low INDEX1.
The results of the Full Auto Mount Feedback can be found in the file Result.dat (see
4.9.27).

System Description

4.9.28.20 STEP C1 - C4: Head 1 - 4 for Front Line Array Camera Opal-XII using Nozzle
Type 75
Please follow exact the same steps as described in steps B1 - B4 but now use type 75
nozzle instead. Select the following FAMF file: FAMF_OPALX2_75.
4.9.28.21 STEP D1: Head 1 for Single Vision Camera Opal-XII using Nozzle Type 77
REMARK: The (first) single vision camera is denoted with “Analog Camera 2” in
“Machine/Camera/Position/Specification”, because Analog Camera 1 is the
Fiducial Camera.

System Description
This step is the adjustment of head 1 for the single vision camera.
The procedure will correct the following machine parameters:
■ Analog 2 head 1 zigzag (X,Y)
1. Mount preparation
Adjust Camera :. . . . . . . . . . analog2 (first single vision camera)
Measuring Mode:. . . . . . . . . Normal
Measuring Tool:. . . . . . . . . . PCB
Main camera: . . . . . . . . . . . digital1
Main Nozzle : . . . . . . . . . . . 7 (for single vision camera)
Raxis calib: . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not use
SCREEN 4-49
■ Select ‘FAMF_OPALX2_77_SGL’.
• Attach nozzle 74 to head 1
• Clean both sides of the Glass QFPs (do not clean the sticker) with a soft tissue
with ethanol.
• The Glass QFP is defined as part no. 51 in the parts database of the program.
Go to “Mount” and set “G/Mount Action” to “FINE” to force the machine to
use the single vision camera.
• Perform the adjust utility to check if the component is recognised
properly by the single vision camera and optimise the component data
• Remove the component by hand, do not dump it !

System Description
■ QFP Stand
• Mount the QFP stand holder on the rear feeder plate on a position where
of the glass QFP.
• Set “C/Comp Pitch X (mm)” to 40 (mm).
3. Warm-up
4.Start running
■ Clear the ‘old’ measurement results by pressing the ‘Init’ button.
■ Start mounting the program “FAMF_OPALX2_77_SGL” by releasing EMG and
■ Press the button to make sure the machine will stop after finishing the
PCB.

System Description
a) Clear the error
c) Refill the tray
mounted.
5. Check results
■ Press the button (after mounting 5 PCB’s) and select the ‘Result 1’ tab.
■ Select “Single_FINE” as mount mode and ‘Head 1’ to view the results (see section
FIGURE 4-41)
SCREEN 4-50

with the next FAMF step. (STEP E2) Do not forget to rename the result.dat
file!
• Check in the Result2 tab which angle is causing the low index1.
• Press the button to FEEDBACK the results.

System Description
• Press the button to save the data.

• Rename the Result.dat file.
(see 4.9.27)
Please follow the exact same procedure as step E1.
■ Standard the machine has been configured that mounting in “FINE” mode is
only possible with head 1. To calibrate the single vision camera for heads 2, 3
and 4 go to Machine/Machine Data/Head Down Offset and set “Fine Mode” to
“possible” for heads 2, 3 and 4 (see section FIGURE 4-42).
SCREEN 4-51

■ Change in step E1.2 the Head No. for mount lines 1,6,11,16,21,26 and 31 in “2”.

System Description
4.9.28.25 STEP E1 - E4: Head 1 - 4 for Single Vision Camera Opal-XII using Nozzle
Type 75
Please follow exact the same steps as described in steps D1 - D4 but now use nozzle
type 75 instead. At the FAMF parameters set measuring mode to “Each nozzle”.
Select the following FAMF file: FAMF_OPALX2_75_SGL.
4.9.29 Restore Materials Topaz-XII Series and Opal-XII

When all steps A1 through E4 have been performed successfully (index 1>0 for all
steps) the FAMF procedure is completed.
Remove the glass QFP’s from the glass PCB, clean them and put them in the glass
adjustment kit. Remove all CLC foil and double sided tape from the glass PCB, clean
the glass PCB and put it in the storage case.
4.9.30 Reset FAMF Settings Topaz-XII Series and Opal-XII

Put back all settings that were changed in section 4.9.26:
■ Go to “Monitor/FAMF” and deselect the button. De-activate the FAMF

utility by entering and exiting (“Close”) the “SW Version” menu without
entering the password.
■ Set the “Conveyor Spec” parameter in “Machine” back to the original setting.
■ Set the “Adjust Mode” back to “None”.
■ Set the “Parts Info Mode” and “Mount Info Mode” back to “V2.0 Compatible”.
■ Set the “Multi Macs” parameter back to the original setting.
■ Set the “Coord Macs” parameter back to the original setting.
■ Set the “Multi Macs Timer” parameters back to the original setting.
Save the data by pressing the “floppy” button and exit the VmSpec program. The
changed settings will become active after reloading a program.
■ Do not forget to re-enable the first single vision camera that was disabled for
calibrating the second single vision camera. (see section 4.9.28.11, but not
applicable for Opal-XII).

System Description
4.10 Fine Adjustments

4.10.1 Fine Adjustments
During the FAMF procedure the position (X,Y) of the moving camera has been cali-
brated (Step A1 Section 4.9.28.1). Please check the coordinates of the fixed locate
pin, the edge clamp, the nozzle station positions and the feeder block reference
positions (refer to Section 12.1.3) using the moving camera as teaching unit. Adjust
the coordinates if necessary.
4.10.2 Acceptance Test

When the FAMF procedure has been finished successfully, the machine meets the
specifications defined in Section 4.9.22. On special request of the customer the
Assembleon Acceptance Board CT346 (5322.214.91385) or a customer PCB can be
run.
4.10.3 Back-up machine data

When the complete calibration of Figure 4-42 has been carried out and the machine
mounts within its specifications, make a back-up of the machine data. Please follow
the procedure of Section 4.9.14.
4.11 Standard System Principle

4.11.1 Interfaces
There are 4 general interfaces between the various parts of the machine and
between the machine and the out-side world. The inside interfaces are: HDLC (High
Level Data Link Control) and ISA-bus. The outside interfaces are: RS232 serial
interface, Centronics parallel interface, SMEMA, Gate-in/Gate-out interface and
Advance gate.
4.11.2 Bus Definitions

4.11.2.1 ISA-bus
The used bus structure which connects the various PCB’s inside the controller is the
standard ISA (International Standard Architecture) bus.
4.11.2.2 HDLC Link
The communication between the System board and the I/O boards (front/rear/tray
changer) is done via the HDLC link. With this bi-directional synchronous link the
data/clock is serially transported to the I/O boards. The information sent via this
link contains address information followed by data information. Each I/O board has
its own unique address. After sending an address it will be decoded by the I/O PCB
circuitry an if there is a match the I/O PCB in question will take over (or send) the
data information.

System Description
There are 2 wires for the data signals and 2 wires for the clock signal. The two wires
are needed for each signal because the signals are sent via bus-transmitters/
receivers (low voltages) to reduce the influence of noise signals.
As can be seen from the block diagram, the signals are fed to the first I/O board and,
via a receive/transmit circuitry, past on to the next I/O board. This means that a
defect in the receive/transmit circuitry on the first I/O board can cause troubles on
the next I/O boards in the chain. To over-come possible problems it is possible to
interconnect the I/O-2 signal line between the front head I/O and front conveyor I/O
in the machine.
4.11.3 Serial Interface

Two RS232 interface ports are present on the Topaz-XII Series. CMN1 is used for the
hand-held keyboard while CMN2 is used for the connection between the system
board and an external PC system. The meaning of the RS232 connector pins is
shown in table 34.
figure 4-51 shows some examples of connections related to the DTE (Data terminal
Equipment; computer) and the DCE (Data Communication Equipment; modem).
3LQ1U 1DPH 0HDQLQJ ,QSXWRXWSXW
2 TXD Transmit data Output from mounter
3 RXD Receive data Input to mounter
4 RTS Request to send Output from mounter
5 CTS Clear to send Input to mounter
6 DSR Data set ready Input to mounter
7 GND Signal ground -
8 DCD Data carrier detected Input to mounter
20 DTR Data transmission ready Output from mounter
TABLE 4-34 RS-232 Connections

System Description
FIGURE 4-51 RS-232 Connections

System Description
4.11.4 Input and Output Signals Between Machines

The Topaz-XII Series has one method, which can be used to interconnect two or
more systems in a line. This is called the ADVANCE GATE and combines the GATE-IN/
GATE-OUT and the SMEMA interface.
The Topaz-XII Series ejects the finished PCB when it receives a signal from the
machine in the next process, and then sends a signal to the machine in preceding
process to request another PCB. The “NEXT INTERFACE” connector is used to connect
the machine in the next process, and the “PREVIOUS INTERFACE” connector is used
to connect the machine in the preceding process. Both connectors are located on
the front of the Topaz-XII Series. The connector type is AMP 2060043-1 (14-pins
receptacle). The following chapters will explain the advance gate and gives some
information about the SMEMA and GATE IN / GATE OUT.
NEXT INTERFACE PREVIOUS INTERFACE
3 1 3 1
7 4 7 4
11 8 11 8
14 12 14 12
1 C04 50 5- 00
FIGURE 4-52 Advance gate connection

System Description
4.11.4.1 Previous Interface Circuit

When the following three conditions are met, the PREVIOUS INTERFACE circuit in
the Topaz-XII Series allows the next PCB to carried in.
■ The machine is ready for receiving a PCB (BUSY OUT = ON)
■ A PCB carry in signal is input from the previous machine (BA IN [N115] = ON).
■ An automatic operation signal is input from the previous machine (UR IN
[N117] = ON).
NOTE: ■ When the automatic operation signal (UR IN) from the previous machine
turns off during transfer of a PCB, the machine stops carrying in the PCB
temporarily.
■ When the PCB being carried in is detected by the entrance sensor, the
BUSY OUT signal turns off.
■ Carrying in the PCB is finished when both the BUSY OUT and BA IN
turns off.
CONNECTION
BOARD
BUSY OUT
1 1 (T1831) 5V
2 2 GND
3 3 +24V
10.5kΩ N1115
4 4
I/O BOARD 0.1µ
5 5
6 6
7 7
5V
8 8
I/O BOARD
9 9 +24V
10.5kΩ N1117
10 10
LR OUT 0.1µ
11 11 (T1837)
12 12 GND
13 13 CONNECTION
BOARD
14 14
3 1
Previous machine Cable Topaz-X 7 4 PREVIOUS INTERFACE
11 8 connector
14 12
3 C04 50 6- 01
FIGURE 4-53 Previous interface

System Description
3LQQR 6LJQDOQDPH ,2VSHFLILFDWLRQ 6LJQDOVSHFLILFDWLRQV

Busy out Relay contact (zero voltage) out-
1 Signal output during PCB carry in
(T1832) put
Busy out Relay contact (zero voltage) out-

2
(T1831) put
3 BA in (+ 24V) + 24 volt Signal input of PCB carry out request
4 BA in (N115) TR input
5 NC - -
6 NC - -
7 NC - -
8 NC - -
Signal input during automatic opera-

9 UR in (+ 24V) + 24 volt
tion
10 UR in (N117) TR input
Relay contact (zero voltage) out- Signal input during automatic opera-
11 LR out (T1837)
put tion
Relay contact (zero voltage) out-

12 LR out (T1837)
put
13 NC - -
14 NC - -
TABLE 4-35 Signal specification
4.11.4.2 Next Interface Circuit

When the following conditions are met, the NEXT INTERFACE CIRCUIT in the Topaz-XII
Series allows the PCB to be carried out.
■ The machine is read to carry out the PCB (BA OUT = ON).
■ A PCB carry in signal is input for the next machine (BUSY IN [N113] = ON).
■ An automatic operation signal is input from the next machine (LR IN
[N116] = ON).

System Description
NOTE: ■ When the automatic operation signal (LR IN) from the next machine
turns off during transfer of a PCB, the machine stops carrying out the
PCB temporarily.
■ When the PCB being carried out is detected by the exit sensor, the BA
OUT signal turns off.
■ Carrying out the PCB is finished when both the BUSY IN and BA OUT
turns off.
5V
I/O BOARD
BUSY IN +24V 1 1
10.5kΩ
(N1113)
2 2
0.1µ BA OUT
(T1832) 3 3
GND 4 4
CONNECTION
BOARD 5 5
3 1
7 4 6 6
11 8
12
7 7
14
CONNECTION 8 8
BOARD
UR OUT
(T1833) 9 9
NEXT INTERFACE
connector 5V GND 10 10
IN
+24V 11 11
10.5kΩ
(N1120) 5V 12 12
0.1µ
COUNT RESET +24V 13 13
10.5kΩ
(N1116)
14 14
0.1µ I/O BOARD
Topaz-X Cable Next machine
3 C04 50 8- 01
FIGURE 4-54 Next interface circuit.

System Description
3LQQR 6LJQDOQDPH ,2VSHFLILFDWLRQ 6LJQDOVSHFLILFDWLRQV

1 Busy in (+ 24V) + 24 volt Signal input during PCB carry in
2 Busy in (N1113) TR input
Relay contact (zero voltage) out- Signal input of PCB carry out
3 BA out (T1832)
put request
4 BA out (T1832)
put
5 NC - -
6 NC - -
7 NC - -
8 NC - -
Relay contact (zero voltage) out- Signal output during automatic
9 UR out (T1833)
put operation
10 UR out (T1833)
put
Signal input during automatic
11 LR in (+ 24V) + 24 volt
operation
12 LR in (N1116) TR input
13 Count reset (+24V) + 24 volt Signal input for Count reset
14 Count reset (+24V) TR input
TABLE 4-36 Transfer signal specification
4.11.5 SMEMA Interface and GATE IN / GATE OUT Interface

4.11.5.1 SMEMA Interface
In figure 4-55 below the SMEMA connection is shown.
The following signals can distinguished:
1. The BUSY-out signal from the main- to the previous (up-stream) –machine.
2. The BA-in (board available) signal from the previous- to the main-machine
3. The BUSY-in signal from the next (down-stream) machine to the main-machine
4. The BA-out signal from the main-machine to the next (down-stream) machine
The logic is as follows:
a) When the main machine is busy (contacts are ‘open’) no board is sent.

System Description
b) When the up-stream (previous) machine has a board available the contacts
are closed.
c) When the main machine is not busy and a board is sent, the state of the main
machine must go busy, and the signal BA must go false within a pre-set time
period. Machine actions, in case of an error, are optional.
d) The next board may not be sent until the next ‘not busy’ cycle. The ‘busy’ and
‘board available’ signals must at least 50 mS in duration for either state.
DIRECTION OF THE BOARDS
RUN - IN RUN - OUT
1 1 1 1
2 2 BUSY 2 2 BUSY
BOARD BOARD
AVAILABLE 3 3 AVAILABLE 3 3
4 4 4 4
S D-22 82
FIGURE 4-55 SMEMA interface
4.11.5.2 Gate-in/Gate-out Interface

The Gate-in / Gate-out is a more simple interface to connect the machines in line.
1. Gate-in connector (3-pin female)
This is the connector for incoming PCB request-signals from the machine in the
next process, the pinning of this connector is as follows:
• pin 1: signal NJ15 Count reset signal
• pin 2: signal NJ12 Gate-in signal input
• pin 3: signal -24C 0V, Ground (shared by NJ15 and NJ12)
2. Gate-in signal (input):
This signal is received from the machine in the subsequent process. When there
is conductivity between (2) <> (3) (closed), the system judges that a request
for a PCB loading has been made. When mounting has finished, the PCB is
ejected.

System Description
3. Count reset signal:

This signal resets the counter for the max. number of PCB’s. If (1) <-> (3)
become conductive (closed), the PCB counter is reset.
The output from the subsequent process should be handled as relay contact
points (dry contact point, no voltage output). In figure 4-56 the gate-in
connection is shown.
[ G AT E _ IN .W PG ]
FIGURE 4-56 Gate-in connection
[G A T E_ O UT .W PG ]
FIGURE 4-57 Gate-out connection
4. Gate out connector (output):

This is the connector for PCB request-signals sent to the machine in the previous
process, the pinning of this connector is as follows:
• pin 1: empty
• pin 2: +24C relay contact point output. --> Dry contact point.
• pin 3: TK05 gate-out signal
5. Gate out signal (output):
This signal is sent to the machine in the previous process. If the machine in the
previous process has completed its preparatory operations, it renders (2) <-> (3)
conductive (=closed), as a PCB request signal. In figure 4-57 the gate-out
connection is shown.

System Description
How machines are connected to each other using the gate-in and gate-out is
shown in figure 4-58.
[F LO W .W PG ]
FIGURE 4-58 SMEMA connections
4.11.5.3 Relation between Gate-in/Gate-out and SMEMA

The relation between SMEMA and Gate-in/out is shown in figure 4-59.
FIGURE 4-59 Principle SMEMA - Gate-in/out

System Trouble Shooting
CHAPTER 5 System Trouble Shooting

5.1 Introduction
The Topaz-XII Series is equipped with an online error check feature. This to keep
the down time as short as possible. This chapter gives an overview of all kind of
possible error messages on the Topaz-XII Series.
In chapter 5.3 the electrical diagrams of the system are given and in chapter 5.4 a
list with all I/O signals are given.
5.2 Error Messages

The error messages are described in the following paragraphs. It is also possible to
check these error messages on the machine. This can be done via the HELP button
in the Main Area.
Error messages starting with an “E” are application errors (VGOS errors). Error messages
starting with an “L” are system errors (e.g. servo, I/O) and Windows NT errors.
Make sure the CD with the HELP file is in the CD-ROM drive; HELP is read from CD.
5.2.1 Errors
( Detection succeeded. (PHDQLQJ)Recognition has been made successfully.
The corrected data is now effective. (FDXVH)None
(UHPHG\)Not needed
( CORRECTION DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The size of one side of the detected component is 0.
Only 1 Lead detected. (FDXVH)The component is standing on end.
(UHPHG\)Adjust the reader head to improve pickup.
( CORRECTION DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)Convergence of multi-stage recognition was not possible.
Correction data is not loaded. Or it diver- (FDXVH)The axis positioning capability is inadequate.
sifies.
(UHPHG\)Check to see if the component is slipping on t henozzle or is otherwise
insecurely attached.
( COMPONENT DETECTION ERROR (PHDQLQJ)Recognition of the component was not possible.
Failed to find first lead. Failed to find the (FDXVH)The component has not been picked up, or the component is too dark to
first Lead Edge be seen by the camera.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Adjust so that the component can be picked up. Use supplementary
adjustment to change the recognition parameters.
Component data 150
Feeder set position 20
( COMPONENT DETECTION ERROR (PHDQLQJ)One of the components leads could not be detected.
Failed to find second lead. (FDXVH)The recognition parameter is for a different component, or a different
component is being recognized.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Use supplementary adjustment to re-adjust.
Component data 150

( LEAD NUMBER ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The number of detected leads is different.

The number of detected leads is differ- (UHPHG\)The data is for a different component or the offset value for the
ent than specified. detected line is inappropriate.
Mount data 765 (FDXVH)Use supplementary adjustment to correct the component, or check the
data.
Component data 150
( LEAD EDGES NUMBER ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The number of leads detected is different from the setting.
The number of detected lead edges is (UHPHG\)Recognition is not stable.
different than specified.
Mount data 765 (FDXVH)Change the recognition position or the flash intensity.
Component data 150
( LEAD DETECTION ERROR (PHDQLQJ)There was trouble recognizing the tip of the lead.
Failed to find the lead top. (UHPHG\)The image of the component produced for recognition was not clearly
detailed.
Mount data 765 (FDXVH)Use supplementary adjustment to set stable parameters.
Component data 150
( LEAD PITCH ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The lead pitch is different from the specified pitch.
The detected Lead Pitch is out of toler- (FDXVH)The feet are bent, or the wrong lead pitch has been specified.
ance
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Correct the contents of the setting, and if the feet on the component are
bent, don’t use that component, or use supplementary adjustment to correct it.
Component data 150
( COMPONENT DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)Data has not been registered for the part being recognized.
The Component data was not loaded (FDXVH)There is a problem with the vision board.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Check to see how often the problem occurs, and contact the manufac-
turer if it occurs frequently.
Component data 150
( COMPONENT DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)Too much data has been sent to the vision board, and will not fit in
the memory.
Failed to download the component data. (FDXVH)Too much data has been created for a complex component.
Memory for component data is full.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Use less data for irregularly-shaped connectors and other MSEW
parts.
Component data 150
( COMPONENT DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)This is not an error.
This component data already existed (FDXVH)None
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Not needed
Component data 150

( COMPONENT DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The component recognition mode is not supported.
The component shape is illegal (FDXVH)The versions of the vision software and the VIOS software do not
match.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Contact the manufacturer and check the combination of versions
being used.
Component data 150
( VISION BUSY ERROR (PHDQLQJ)Image processing is in progress.
Vision system is now recognizing. (FDXVH)None
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Wait until processing has been completed.
Component data 150
( VISION TIME_OUT ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The vision system has not responded within the given time period.
Time-out occurred: Vision recognition is (FDXVH)There is a problem with the vision board.
aborted. The start trigger did not come
in.
Component data 150
( VISION TIME_OUT ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The vision system terminated the processing beFDXVH it exceeded
the time limit.
Time-out occurred: Vision recognition (FDXVH)The servo axis does not move smoothly
aborted. Sync. signal from the camera
did not come in.
Component data 150
( DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The specified data does not exist.
Failed to find this component data on (FDXVH)There may be a problem with the hard disk.
HDD. Check HDD (Hard Disk Drive).
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Contact the manufacturer.
Component data 150
( NOZZLE DETECTION ERROR (PHDQLQJ)Nozzle detection error
Failed to find the nozzle center (FDXVH)There is no object on the screen to be recognized.
(UHPHG\)Pick up a component before initiating recognition.
( REFERENCE MARKER DETECTION (PHDQLQJ)No reference markers could be detected.

ERROR
Failed to detect reference marker edge (FDXVH)The timing of the synchronization has not been adjusted properly, or the
of moving direction. marker information needs re-adjusting
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Adjust as necessary.
Component data 150


ERROR
Failed to detect reference marker posi- (FDXVH)The timing of the synchronization has not been adjusted properly, or the
tion of moving direction marker information needs re-adjusting
Component data 150
ERROR
Failed to detect reference marker posi- (FDXVH)The timing of the synchronization has not been adjusted properly, or the
tion of fixed direction marker information needs re-adjusting
Component data 150
( LEAD WIDTH ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The lead width is wrong.
The detected Lead Width is out of toler- (FDXVH)The setting for the lead width is wrong, or the recognition parameter is
ance not appropriate.
Component data 150
( COMPONENT DATA DOWNLOAD (PHDQLQJ)Component data is not being sent to the vision board.
ERROR
Unable to update the component data. (FDXVH)Too much data has been created for a complex component.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Use less data for irregularly-shaped parts in MSEW mode.
Component data 150
( COMPONENT DATA UPDATED. (PHDQLQJ)This is not an error.
The component data is updated. (This is (FDXVH)None
not an Error)
(UHPHG\)Not needed
( LEAD SKEW ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The lead is skewed in general.
Component lead skew detected. (FDXVH)There is overall skewing of the lead.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Do not use components with this problem.
Component data 150
( LEAD LENGTH ERROR (PHDQLQJ)Lead lengths are not uniform.
The lead lengths are not equal to each (FDXVH)The component leads are bent.
other
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Do not use components with this problem, or adjust the setting so that
the component lead length is not checked.
Component data 150
( COMPONENT SIZE ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The component size is different from the specified size.
The measured size of the [Std.Chip] (FDXVH)The wrong data has been specified, or the recognition is not stable.
component type is out of tolerance.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Use supplementary adjustment to re-confirm.
Component data 150

( COMPONENT SIZE ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The component size is different from the specified size.
The measured size of component is out (FDXVH)The wrong data has been specified, or the recognition is not stable.
of tolerance.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Use supplementary adjustment to re-confirm.
Component data 150
( COMPONENT DETECTION ERROR (PHDQLQJ)Recognition of the component was not possible.
Failed to detect the [Std.Chip] type com- (FDXVH)The component has not been picked up, or the component is too dark to
ponent. be seen by the camera.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Adjust so that the component can be picked up. Use supplementary
adjustment to change the recognition parameters.
Component data 150
( PICK UP POSITION ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The component could not be picked up in the center of the nozzle.
Failed to pick up the component at the (FDXVH)The pickup precision is poor.
center of the nozzle
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Stabilize the component pickup, or reduce the effective diameter size
of the nozzle.
Component data 150
( ILLEGAL RESULT ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The center coordinates of the recognized component are wrong.
The detected center position is illegal. (FDXVH)The component recognition is not stable.
Component data 150
( PICK UP ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The vacuum sensor confirmed that a component pickup error was made.
Failed to pick up the component. Vision (FDXVH)The component cannot be picked up, the setting for the vacuum pres-
system could not find the component. sure is wrong, or the pickup conditions are not stable.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Use supplementary adjustment to re-specify the pickup vacuum level,
or other measures to stabilize the
Component data 150
( RETRY LIMIT OVER (PHDQLQJ)The component could not be picked up successfully with the speci-
fied number of retries.
Vision error: Maximum number of retries (FDXVH)
for this component is exceeded.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Stabilize the component pickup, or the recognition parameters.
Component data 150
/0000/0004/0005/0006/E
( COMPONENT DETECTION ERROR (PHDQLQJ)An error occurred in detecting the component.
Failed to detect the component. (FDXVH)The pickup conditions are not stable, or the recognition conditions are
not stable.
Component data 150

( MOUNT ERROR (PHDQLQJ)During the vacuum check of component mounting, it was confirmed
that the component is still on the nozzle.
Failed to mount component by vacuum (FDXVH)The volume of air discharged from the nozzle has not been adjusted
check properly, or the setting for the mounting level is incorrect.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Re-adjust the pickup level, and check the dispensing air pressure by
hand.
Component data 150
( DUMP ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The component cannot be discarded.
Vacuum check error: Failed to dump the (FDXVH)The dispensing air pressure is too low, or the wrong setting has been
component. entered for the mounting vacuum pressure.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Adjust the data and re-adjust the dispensing pressure.
Component data 150
( VACUUM LEVEL ERROR (PHDQLQJ)It has been confirmed that the vacuum pickup level has not reached
the specified level.
Vacuum level does not reach specified (FDXVH)The setting for the pickup vacuum is too low, or the component cannot
level. Mount sequence is aborted. be picked up correctly.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Stabilize the component pickup conditions, and use supplementary
adjustment to re-adjust the pickup vacuum pressure.
Component data 150
( LASER SYSTEM ERROR(code 00, 03, (PHDQLQJ)A problem has occurred with the laser recognition unit hardware or
04, 05, 07, 08, 09, 72, 73, 74, etc) software
A software or hardware error of the (FDXVH)The laser recognition unit hardware has broken down, or a problem has
Laser occurred with the software.
Alignment Unit is detected. (UHPHG\)Contact the manufacturer.
Mount data 765
Component data 150
( COMPONENT DETECTION (PHDQLQJ) The laser beam is not reaching the component.
ERROR(code 64, 75)
The laser sensor could not detect the (FDXVH)There is no component on the nozzle, or the setting for the laser recog-
component. nition height is inappropriate.
Please check the laser height. (UHPHG\)Use supplementary adjustment to re-adjust the component.
Mount data 765
Component data 150
( SPEED DETECTION ERROR (code 65, (PHDQLQJ)During laser recognition, the component rotates too quickly, causing
90, 91, 92, 93) a recognition error.
Laser system cannot read a clear image (FDXVH)The scanning speed is too fast.
of the component. The rotation speed is
too fast.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Reduce the speed at which components are being mounted.
Component data 150

( COMPONENT DETECTION ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The minimum width of the component cannot be detected.
(code 66)
Minimum width of component cannot be (FDXVH)An attempt has been made to use recognition on components which are
found. The component is round or mis- not appropriate, or the component has not been picked up properly.
aligned on the nozzle.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Do not use laser recognition, or use supplementary adjustment to cor-
rect the component.
Component data 150
( COMPONENT SIZE ERROR (code 22) (PHDQLQJ)The size of the component is not with in the specified tolerance
range.
Laser detection error: The measured (FDXVH)The molded size of the component is inappropriate, or the component
size of the component is out of toler- has not been picked up correctly.
ance.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Stabilize the pickup conditions, and check the size of the component.
Component data 150
( COMPONENT POSITION (PHDQLQJ)The laser recognition results are not within the detection range of the
ERROR(code 23) laser.
Laser detection error: The measured (FDXVH)The component used is too big for laser recognition.
position of the component is illegal.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Try using another method of recognition.
Component data 150
( DETECTION ABORTED(code 67) (PHDQLQJ)Component recognition was interrupted before being completed.
Measurement is aborted by a STOP or (FDXVH)The recognition speed is too fast, and the component on the nozzle may
EMG operation. have moved during recognition.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Reduce the mounting speed.
Component data 150
( LASER WINDOW ERROR(code 68, 78, (PHDQLQJ)The component protrudes from the laser recognition window.
79, 80, 81, 82)
The component is too large for the win- (FDXVH)An attempt was made to use laser recognition with a component for
dow or the window is blocked by other which it is not possible.
objects.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Do not use laser recognition.
Component data 150
( LASER COMMUNICATION (PHDQLQJ)An error occurred inside the laser recognition unit.
ERROR(code 69)
Communication error occurred in the (FDXVH)There may be a problem with the hardware.
Laser system.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Contact the manufacturer.
Component data 150

( MEASUREMENT FAILED(code 70, 76, (PHDQLQJ)Noise has occurred in the silhouette of the component.
77)
Too less slope detected during rotation. (FDXVH)The light-receiving element of the laser is dirty.
The image of the component is not
clear.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Clean the light-receiving element of the laser with alcohol.
Component data 150
( EDGE DETECTION ERROR(code 71) (PHDQLQJ)The edge of the component could not be detected.
Laser detection error: Too many edges (FDXVH)The component used is not appropriate for laser recognition.
detected. Part may be incorrectly posi-
tioned.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Do not use laser recognition with this component.
Component data 150
( CO-PLANARITY CHECK ERROR Set "Co-Planarity" value larger.
Co-Planarity check found the lead out of
Max Tweeze.
Mount data 3
Component data 11
( NOZZLE PLUGGED ERROR Please remove FDXVH which is shown in "Error Message".
Possible FDXVH :
1. In [3/MAINTE/M]-[2/MCH_DATA]-
[Vacuum Level], the value of [Low level]
of current head is too small.
2. There is component under current
nozzle.
3. Current nozzle is plugged.
Please remove FDXVH.
( DETECT THE PICK ERROR BY LAM Check the pick up position of component.
Detected the component that was
picked side of body.
Mount data 3
Component data 21
( MARK DETECTION ERROR (PHDQLQJ)An error occurred with fiducial mark detection.
Failed to detect defined mark. (FDXVH)The surface of the mark is dirty, or the data setting is wrong.
(UHPHG\)Clean the surface of the mark with an eraser and cloth, or use supple-
mentary adjustment to check the data for the mark.
( MARK AREA OR PERIMETER ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The shape of the detected mark does not match the specified setting.
The detected fiducial mark area or (FDXVH)The shape of the mark has not been registered correctly, or adjustment
perimeter is out of tolerance. has not been done properly.
(UHPHG\)Check the data for the mark and use supplementary adjustment to
correct it.

( MARK DETECTION ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The mark is not located properly within the search area.
A part of fiducial mark is located out of (FDXVH)The PCB has not been positioned correctly, or a search area has been
the specified search area or the fiducial specified which is too small.
correction angle is too large.
(UHPHG\)Make sure the PCB is securely fastened in place, and that the search
area is appropriate.
( MARK SHAPE ERROR (PHDQLQJ)A fiducial mark of the specified shape cannot be detected.
Failed to detect a fiducial mark of the (FDXVH)The shape has not been specified correctly, or the image which has
specified shape been read is not clear.
(UHPHG\)Check the shape information and clean the surface of the mark.
( MARK AREA OR PERIMETER ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The shape of the detected mark does not match the specified setting.
The detected fiducial mark area or (FDXVH)The shape of the mark has not been registered correctly, or adjustment
perimeter is out of tolerance (Special) has not been done properly.
(UHPHG\)Check the data for the mark and use supplementary adjustment to
correct it.
( MARK DETECTION ERROR (PHDQLQJ)An error occurred with fiducial mark detection.
Failed to detect defined mark. (FDXVH)The surface of the mark is dirty, or the data setting is wrong.
Do you execute VISION-CURSOR- (UHPHG\)Clean the surface of the mark with an eraser and cloth, or use supple-
TEACHING? mentary adjustment to check the data for the mark.
[F10] key to execute
Any other key to abort
( VISION-CURSOR-TEACHING (PHDQLQJ)When executing VISION-CURSOR-TEACH, this message print on
CRT.
Please teach fiducial mark while looking
VISION-MOMITOR.
[ESC] : Abort
[ENTER] : Teaching
[Arrows] : Moving at TEACH-
WINDOW
[SHIFT]+[Arrows] : Moving at TEACH-
WINDOW
[TAB] : Changing at TEACH-
WINDOW
( Failed to RESET pick routine. (PHDQLQJ)An error occurred during the pickup operation.
Pick routine did not stop correctly. (FDXVH)The sensor is defective, or the solenoid valve is not operating correctly.
Retrying now. (UHPHG\)Check the operation of the head and the value set for the sensor reac-
tion.
( Failed to RESET component vision rou- (PHDQLQJ)An error occurred during recognition of the component.
tine.
Component vision routine did not stop (FDXVH)Communication with the vision board could not be completed normally.
correctly. Retrying now.
(UHPHG\)Check to see how often the problem occurs, and contact the manufac-
turer.

( Failed to RESET fiducial routine. (PHDQLQJ)Recognition of the fiducial mark could not be completed.
Fiducial routine did not stop correctly. (FDXVH)There is a problem with communication with the vision board.
Retrying now.
(UHPHG\)Check to see how often the problem occurs, and contact the manufac-
turer.
( Failed to RESET mount routine. (PHDQLQJ)Mounting could not be completed.

Mount routine did not stop correctly. (FDXVH)The sensor is defective, or the solenoid valve is defective.
Retrying now. (UHPHG\)Check the operation of the solenoid valve and sensor.
( Failed to RESET LASER recognition (PHDQLQJ)Laser recognition could not be completed.
routine.
LASER recognition routine didn’t finish (FDXVH)Communication with the laser recognition unit is not being carried out
correctly. properly.
Ready to Retry. (UHPHG\)Replace the laser recognition unit, the laser recognition board, or the I/
O board. If the problem occurs frequently, contact the manufacturer.
( LASER TIMEOUT ERROR (PHDQLQJ)Laser recognition could not be completed.
Laser recognition rutine was interrupted (FDXVH)Communication with the laser recognition unit is not being carried out
by time out error. The rutine will be properly.
reset.
Please run again. (UHPHG\)Replace the laser recognition unit, the laser recognition board, or the I/
O board. If the problem occurs frequently, contact the manufacturer.
( Machines has been already reset condi- Machine is already reset condition. In case head is on the feeder or manual tray
tion now. feeder, so you want to move dumping position. Press [TAB] key.
If you want to move machine’s head to
DUMP POSITION, push the [TAB] key
to execute.
If not, push the other key to cancel.
( PCB TRANSFER ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The number of PCBs transported on the conveyor exceeds the rated
number.
Unexpected PCB is on the conveyor. (FDXVH)PCBs are being loaded although no PCB request signal has been
issued, or an irregular PCB has been detected.
(UHPHG\)Adjust the position of the sensor at the exit end of the loading con-
veyor, or the loading sensor on this machine or re-adjust the PCB detection sen-
sor and the entrance stopper sensor.
( PCB TRANSFER ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The PCB which was detected prior to the beginning of loading could
not b confirmed after being loaded; a PCB which was confirmed before unload-
ing cannot be detected at the exit; or a PCB which could not be confirmed
before loading or unloading was confirmed after being loaded or unloaded.
The PCB detected before transfer is not (FDXVH)
detected after transfer. Maybe there is
the PCB on the edge of the moving con-
veyor. Set the PCB to its normal position
manually.
(UHPHG\)Re-adjust the PCB detection sensor. If PCBs are not being trans-
ported correctly, adjust the conveyor unit and other related parts, or adjust the
PCB width data.

( Machine is unable to start running (PHDQLQJ)This is a warning message which appears when the conveyor width
beFDXVH the conveyor width is not is changed.
ready, The conveyor width will be
changed first. Misalignment of
PUSH_UP PINS or PCB on conveyor
may damage machine.
Assure safety and push the [ENTER] (FDXVH)None
key.
(UHPHG\)Press any key.
( PCB TRANSFER ERROR (PHDQLQJ)A PCB was detected by the danger alert sensor at the connecting
section of the moving conveyor.
PCB is detected on the edge of the mov- (FDXVH)This is to alert the operator that a PCB may be left on the conveyor at
ing conveyor. Set the PCB to its normal the connecting section.
position manually.
(UHPHG\)If there is a PCB at the connecting section, remove it. If there is none,
the sensor may be malfunctioning. Use an I/O monitor to check the sensor oper-
ation.
( PCB FIXING ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The locating pin sensor or the pushup sensor on the PCB transport
unit does not respond correctly to the status of the solenoid.
PCB trans-unit, locate-pin or push-up- (FDXVH)The sensor position has not been adjusted correctly, or operation is
unit does not response to command. unstable beFDXVH the speed controller has been tightened too far.
(UHPHG\)Check the operation of height-related sensors on the PCB transport
unit.
( DUMP STATION FULL (PHDQLQJ)The dump station is filled with discarded components.
Dump station is filled with components. (FDXVH)The overflow sensor at the dump station has been activated.
Please remove the components manu-
ally from the dump station, then start
again.
(UHPHG\)Remove all of the components discarded at the dump station.
( COMPONENT COUNT STOP (PHDQLQJ)During a test run, errors are still occurring after the specified number
of test runs.
Component counter reached to speci- (FDXVH)Pickup confirmation or another operation is unstable.
fied number. Fill the components and
run again.
Component data 151 (UHPHG\)Check the pickup operation, and use supplementary adjustment to
check the status of recognition.
Component data 152
( COMPONENT COUNT STOP (PHDQLQJ)During a test run, errors are still occurring after the specified number
of test runs.
Component counter reached to speci- (FDXVH)Pickup confirmation or another operation is unstable.
fied number. Fill the components and
run again.
Component data 150 (UHPHG\)Check the pickup operation, and use supplementary adjustment to
check the status of recognition.

( PCB TRANSFER ERROR (PHDQLQJ)When a PCB is being unloaded from the conveyor, the PCB does not
arrive at the exit sensor.
When the PCB was transferred to fixed (FDXVH) There are still PCBs left on the conveyor, or the conveyor exit sensor
conveyer of PCB exit side, error hap- was unable to detect the PCB.
pened for time over. Maybe the PCB
stopped between fixed conveyor and
moving conveyor. Or the PCB stopped
in fixed conveyor of PCB exit side. Set
the PCB to its normal position manually.
(UHPHG\)Adjust the conveyor and check that PCBs are being carried smoothly
to the exit. Also check the operation of the conveyor exit sensor.
( PCB TRANSFER ERROR (PHDQLQJ)A PCB could not be unloaded to the next process.
The PCB was not able to exit from fixed (FDXVH)The conveyor exit sensor is continuing to detect a PCB.
conveyer of PCB exit side. Maybe the
PCB stopped on edge of fixed conveyer
of PCB exit side. Set the PCB to its nor-
mal position manually.
(UHPHG\)Adjust the conveyor exit sensor, or adjust the conveyor so that PCBs
arriving at the exit can be transported smoothly to the next process.
( PCB TRANSFER ERROR (PHDQLQJ)A PCB exists between Table A and Table B, preventing the tables
from being moved.
Moving conveyor can not move, (FDXVH)There is a PCB between Table A and Table B.
beFDXVH there is the PCB on the edge
of the moving conveyor. Set the PCB to
its normal position manually.
(UHPHG\)Remove the PCB and adjust the conveyor so it moves smoothly from
Table A to Table B; or adjust the sensor at the connecting section of the con-
veyor.
( PCB TRANSFER ERROR (PHDQLQJ)A PCB has been loaded with no problem but is not carried as far as
the standby position sensor.
Fixed conveyor of PCB entrance side (FDXVH)The standby position sensor or the conveyor entrance sensor is defec-
stopped for time over. Check whether tive or the PCB has stopped somewhere along the entrance conveyor.
the PCB stops in fixed conveyor of PCB
entrance side.
(UHPHG\)Adjust the conveyor so that PCBs are carried smoothly. Check the
operation of the entrance sensor and the PCB standby position sensor.
( PCB TRANSFER ERROR (PHDQLQJ)PCBs are found both on entrance and entrance stopper.
PCBs are found both on entrance and (FDXVH)More than 1 pcbs may be conveyed to the working position.
entrance stopper. Check whether more
than 1 pcbs are conveyed to the working
position.
(UHPHG\)Remove the PCB which is detected by entrance sensor.
( EMERGENCY STOPPING FUNCTION (PHDQLQJ)An emergency stop has occurred.
for safety is now active. Confirm Safety (FDXVH)An emergency stop has occurred beFDXVH of trouble with the machine,
and push the SERVO ON SWITCH to or beFDXVH the Emergency Stop button was pressed.
enable the machine. If you succeed, the
RED-MESSAGE-LIGHT will be switched
off.
(UHPHG\)Check safety factors and press the Ready button.

( Please make sure that the EMER- (PHDQLQJ)This is not an error message.
GENCY STOP is ON.
When you wish to turn off the power, you (FDXVH)None
have to make sure that the EMER-
GENCY STOP is ON.
(UHPHG\)None
( SEARCH FOR ORIGIN is not performed (PHDQLQJ)The motor shaft has not completed its return to the origin position.
yet. Select SEARCH ORIGIN first by
using the COMMAND LISTS.
(FDXVH)A return to the origin position was not carried out after the power supply
was turned on.
(UHPHG\)Use the command window to specify an origin position return.
( Ready to turn off Power. (PHDQLQJ)This is not an error message.
A) System can be switched off now, or (FDXVH)None
B) Push any key to enter SLEEP mode. (UHPHG\)None
Unsaved data in memory will be lost
when the system is switched off without
this message being displayed.
( Be careful for Safety !!! (PHDQLQJ)This is an axis movement warning message which appears when a
component is discarded while the power supply is off, or under other circum-
stances.
Machine axes will move to dump point. (FDXVH)None
[ENTER] : execute (UHPHG\)To move the axis, press the Enter key. If the axis cannot be moved
beFDXVH it is dangerous, press any other key.
[Others] : abort
( Insert installation disk or upgrade disk to (PHDQLQJ)In order to upgrade the software, this indicates that the Install disk or
floppy drive, and turn off the power, and Upgrade disk should be inserted and the power supply turned off and then on
turn on the power again. again.
(FDXVH)None
(UHPHG\)With the disk inserted, turn the power supply off and then on again.
( This command had been disabled. (PHDQLQJ)This command has been disable.
To install/upgrade software, start up (FDXVH)This command has been deleted.
[VIOS SOFTWARE UTILITY] and exe-
cute next command.
2.Update of VIOS Soft (UHPHG\)Use command of [VIOS SOFTWARE UTILITY]
3.Installation of System Data
( This command had been disabled. (PHDQLQJ)This command has been disable.
To update system data backup, start up (FDXVH)This command has been deleted.
[VIOS SOFTWARE UTILITY] and exe-
cute next command.
4.Backup of System Data (UHPHG\)Use command of [VIOS SOFTWARE UTILITY]
( RETURNING TO ORIGIN. PLEASE (PHDQLQJ)Return to origin position is in progress.
WAIT.....
(FDXVH)None
(UHPHG\)None

( Hit any key to RESET running, or.. (PHDQLQJ)This is a confirmation message asking whether it is all right to reset
the system.
Hit the [ESC] key not to RESET. (FDXVH)None
(UHPHG\)To avoid a reset, press the ESC key.
( Now reading data. (PHDQLQJ)The system is waiting for the data reading process to end.
Please wait a moment.... (FDXVH)None
(UHPHG\)Please wait.
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)An attempt was made to run the system without specifying a PCB
name.
No PCB selected. (FDXVH)No PCB name has been specified.
(UHPHG\)Specify the name of the PCB when the PCB being manufactured is
switched.
( This command is not (yet) available. (PHDQLQJ)This command cannot be used.
(FDXVH)A command was issued which cannot be used.
COMMAND ERROR (UHPHG\)Do not use this command.
( Now writing data. (PHDQLQJ)Data writing is in progress.
(UHPHG\)Wait until the data writing process has been completed.
( RESET is now active. (PHDQLQJ)A reset is in progress.
(UHPHG\)Wait until the reset has been completed.
( Initializing All Production History (PHDQLQJ)The production history information is being initialized.
(UHPHG\)Wait until the process has been completed.
( Release the EMERGENCY switch and (PHDQLQJ)A return to the origin position cannot be executed beFDXVH an emer-
push the READY key to activate the gency stop has occurred.
servo for searching the origin.
(FDXVH)An attempt was made to execute a return to the origin position during an
emergency stop.
(UHPHG\)Cancel the emergency stop and then select the return to origin posi-
tion command again.
( This command is not available when the (PHDQLQJ)This command cannot be executed while the machine is in operation.
machine is running. Please stop the
machine first.
(FDXVH)A command was selected which cannot be executed during automatic
operation.
(UHPHG\)Stop the machine before executing the command.
( === Now head vacuum is ON.=== (PHDQLQJ)A component had been picked up by the head when an attempt was
made to reset, so there is a possibility of the component being dropped after the
reset.
After resetting, vacuum power will be (FDXVH)An attempt was made to reset with a component still on the nozzle. An
OFF. If component is on head, it is dan- attempt was made to reset with the pickup valve of the head still on.
gerous to drop component on that spot
independent of dumping way defined in
Component Information.
In case you don’t want to drop it, push (UHPHG\)If a component has been picked up, release it before pressing the key.
EMG-BOTTOM and check safety, and
please remove it.

( This command is not available if (PHDQLQJ)This command cannot be executed unless a reset has been carried
machine is not reset. Please reset the out.
machine first.
(FDXVH)A command was selected which cannot be executed without carrying
out a reset first.
(UHPHG\)Carry out a reset before executing this command.
( Initializing PCB counter. (PHDQLQJ)The PCB counter is being initialized.
(UHPHG\)Wait until the initialization has been completed.
( Changing Production Schedule (PHDQLQJ)The PCB counter is being changed.
(UHPHG\)Wait until the process has been completed.
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)An error occurred when reading the PCB data.
Failed to read data. (FDXVH)A PCB with an asterisk (*) was selected, or the PCB data has been
destroyed.
(UHPHG\)
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The component specified in the mounting data does not exist.
No component data available for the (FDXVH)The component data for the component being used is not the PCB data.
mount data.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Create the component data specified by the mounting data.
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)Fiducial data does not exist.
No fiducial data available for the mount (FDXVH)The fiducial data specified by the mounting data does not exist.
point fiducial.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Create the data for the fiducial coordinates.
Fiducial data 1
( E0133 (PHDQLQJ)The specified head number cannot be accommodated.
PCB DATA ERROR (FDXVH)A head number has been specified which is not correct.
Illegal head number. (UHPHG\)Change the head number to the correct one.
Mount data 765
Head number 2
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The PCB data is only using PCB badmark.
It is illegal setting of badmark function (FDXVH) The PCB data is only using PCB badmark.
that only using PCB badmark. PCB bad-
mark is useful to judge existence of
BLOCK or LOCAL badmark. So, you
have to use PCB badmark function with
using BLOCK badmark or LOCAL bad-
mark.
(UHPHG\)Change PCB data to use other badmark, or not to use PCB badmark.
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)No data exists for the specified fiducial mark.
No mark data available for the mount (FDXVH)No mark data exists.
point fiducial.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Create the specified mark data.
Fiducial data 1
Mark data 1

( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The mark data for the specified fiducial does not exist.
No mark data available for the PCB fidu- (FDXVH)No mark data exists.
cial.
Mark data 1 (UHPHG\)Create the mark data.
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)No mark data exists that corresponds to the block fiducial.
No mark data available for the BLOCK (FDXVH)The specified mark data does not exist.
fiducial.
Mark data 1 (UHPHG\)Create the specified mark data.
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)ÊNo mark data exists that corresponds to the bad mark.
No mark data available for the PCB or (FDXVH)The specified mark data does not exist.
BLOCK badmark.
Mark data 1 (UHPHG\)Create the specified mark data.
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)A feeder setting position has been specified which is not correct, or a
feeder is interfering with operation.
Illegal feeder set number or feeder type. (FDXVH)A feeder has been set in a position which interferes with the adjacent
feeder, or the feeder setting is erroneous.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Check the feeder setting number or the type of feeder, and change it
to the correct one.
Component data 150
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The feeder type specified in the fixed component information is differ-
ent from that specified in the PCB data.
Illegal feeder type. (FDXVH)The feeder type specified in the fixed component information does not
match that specified in the PCB data.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Make sure the feeder type specified in the fixed component informa-
tion matches that specified in the PCB data.
Component data 150
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The mounting position interferes with the soft limit.
Mount position is outside moving area. (FDXVH)An incorrect value has been entered for the mounting position, or an
attempt was made to mount components with a head that does not reach far
enough.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Check the mounting position data. Use a head which extends far
enough to reach the mounting position.
Axes X1
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The fiducial mark position interferes with the soft limit.
Fiducial position is outside moving area. (FDXVH)There is something wrong with the data that has been entered for the
fiducial mark coordinates.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Correct the fiducial mark coordinates.
Fiducial data 1
Axes X1
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The coordinates of the PCB fiducial mark are not within the soft limit.
PCB fiducial position is outside moving (FDXVH)An incorrect value has been entered for the fiducial mark coordinates.
area.
Axes X1 (UHPHG\)Check the fiducial mark coordinate data.
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The block fiducial position is not within the soft limit.
BLOCK fiducial position is outside mov- (FDXVH)An incorrect value has been entered for the block fiducial mark coordi-
ing area. nates, or for the block repeat values.
Axes X1 (UHPHG\)Check the data for the block fiducial coordinates and the block repeat
coordinates.

( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The bad mark coordinates are not within the soft limit.
Bad mark position is outside moving (FDXVH)An incorrect value has been entered for the bad mark coordinates.
area.
Axes X1 (UHPHG\)Check the bad mark coordinate position.
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The pickup position is not within the soft limit.
Pickup position is outside moving area. (FDXVH)A head number has been selected which cannot be used for picking up
components, or the teaching function has been selected and an incorrect value
has been entered for the coordinates.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Check to make sure the head number can be used for pickup, and if
the teaching function is being used, check the coordinates.
Component data 150
Axes X1
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The head being used cannot be used to pick up components.
Illegal head-component combination. (FDXVH)A head has been specified to pick up components with which a different
nozzle is already being used, or a nozzle which can be used to pick up the com-
ponents has not been attached to the head.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Go back to the editing screen and change the head number.
Component data 150
Head number 2
( Checking PCB and BLOCK fiducial (PHDQLQJ)This is not an error message; the PCB fiducial and block fiducial data
data. are being checked.
Please wait a moment...... (FDXVH)None
Block number (UHPHG\)Wait until the check has been completed.
( Checking mount data. (PHDQLQJ)The mounting data is being checked. This is not an error message.
Please wait a moment....... (FDXVH)None
Mount data (UHPHG\)Wait until the check has been completed.
Block number
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The settings for the component shape information are not correct, or
the component data itself has not been specified.
Illegal component shape data or compo- (FDXVH)The component shape information has not been specified correctly, or
nent data is not defined. the component data has not been defined.
Component data 150 (UHPHG\)Go back to the editing screen and see if the component data has been
are correct. If using FixCmpRef.", execute "FIXED COMP.MATCH". If executing
"AUTO DISTRIBUTION", the number of component is different. Execute the
optimization of each machine.
If this component is "FixCmpRef.", exe-
cute "FIXED COMP. MATCH" in
"DATA_GENERATOR". Input the "Align-
ment Type" of "Component Inf.".
If execute the "AUTO DISTRIBUTION",
execute the opitmization of each
machine.

( Current nozzles on heads are different (PHDQLQJ)The nozzles which are currently attached are not the right combina-
from the nozzles necessary for this PCB. tion for the PCB about to be manufactured.
A TABLE:[Upper = Head No., Lower = (FDXVH)The wrong combination of nozzles was used when the setup was
Nozzle Type] changed.
Head 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 (UHPHG\)Attach the correct nozzles, following the instructions on the display.
14 15 16
Nzl. 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4
5
B TABLE:[Upper = Head No., Lower =
Nozzle Type]
Head 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16
Nzl. 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4
5
( Please check each heads equipped with (PHDQLQJ)This is the display showing the nozzle settings required for the PCB
nozzles as shown below. about to be manufactured. It is not an error message.
A TABLE:[Upper = Head No., Lower = (FDXVH)None
Nozzle Type]
Head 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 (UHPHG\)Check to make sure the nozzles which have been specified match
14 15 16 those displayed before starting production.
Nzl. 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4
5
Nozzle Type]
Head 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16
Nzl. 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4
5
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The settings for the recognition unit are not correct.
Setting of the alignment module is not (FDXVH)The recognition unit has not been specified in the component data; a
correct. recognition unit which does not actually exist has been specified in the compo-
nent data; or the component is one which cannot be recognized with the speci-
fied recognition unit.
One of the following could FDXVH this (UHPHG\)Go back to the editing screen and specify the correct recognition unit.
error:
- Alignment module is not specified
- Alignment module is not equipped.
- Alignment module cannot handle this
component.
Component data 150
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The head specified in the mounting data is already being used with
different nozzles for other components, and nozzles cannot be specified for
picking up the currently specified components.
The nozzle for the head specified in the (FDXVH)An attempt was made to use the same head to pick up components
mount data is already assigned to other which require different nozzles.
component type. The component cannot
be handled by this nozzle.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Go back to the editing screen and change the head number.
Component data 150

( PLEASE CHECK FOR ANY ILLEGAL (PHDQLQJ)The operating conditions which have been specified are not appro-
RUNNING CONDITION priate for production.
Check followings. If all OK, please con- (FDXVH)The production conditions have not been set for a vacuum check; the
tinue. regular image processing correction is not being used; a PCB securing method
has been selected which is not available with the machine; the regular transport
mode is not being used; or the PCB size is not within the specifications.
Production Should be [WithVacChk]. (UHPHG\)Go back to the editing screen and change the operating conditions, or
change the settings for the operating conditions.
Vision Align Should be [UseVision].
PCB Fix Device Not Equipped device is
not available.
Ent. Stopper Available if is equipped.
PCB Trans Mode Should be [Normal].
PCB Size is not within range.
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The nozzle used with the components specified in the mounting data
does not exist in the nozzle station.
The nozzle for the component specified (FDXVH)The head setting is wrong and a nozzle which can be used to pick up
in the mount data does not exist in noz- the components does not exist in the nozzle station, or the component setting is
zle station. wrong and there is no nozzle which can be used to pick up the components.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Go back to the editing screen and check the mounting and component
data.
Component data 150
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The head specified in the mounting data does not correspond to the
recognition unit which corresponds to the components.
The head specified in the mount data (FDXVH)The wrong head number has been specified, or the wrong recognition
cannot align the component. unit has been specified.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Go back to the editing screen and correct the recognition unit or the
head number.
Component data 150
( COMPONENT DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)Teaching must be used for the position at which tray components to
be picked up.
Feeder Position must be Teaching for (FDXVH)The pickup position coordinates have been specified automatically.
tray feeder component.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Go back to the editing screen and use teaching to change the pickup
position coordinates. Also use teaching to correct the pickup coordinates.
Component data 150
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The head specified in the mounting data does not contain the right
nozzle for picking up the specified components.
The mount data has a component that (FDXVH)The wrong head number has been specified, or the wrong nozzle has
cannot be attached to the specified noz- been specified for use with the components.
zle type.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Go back to the editing screen and edit the mounting data or the com-
ponent data.
Component data 150

( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)No nozzle exists which can be used to pick up the components spec-
ified in the mounting data.
The component cannot be handled by (FDXVH)There is a problem with the specification of the pickup nozzle in the
any nozzle. component data.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Go back to the editing screen and edit the component data.
Component data 150
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The components specified in the mounting data are outside of the
range for which laser recognition is possible.
The component size is bigger than the (FDXVH)An attempt was made to use laser recognition with components which
laser window size of LASER alignment are too big.
module.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Go back to the editing screen and change the recognition unit.
Component data 150
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)There is a problem with the setting for the quantity of components or
the number of trays in the component data
Illegal Comp.Amount or TrayAmount (FDXVH)No setting has been entered for the quantity of components or the
specified in the component data. number of trays, or the wrong value has been entered.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Go back to the editing screen and edit the number of components or
the number of trays.
Component data 150
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)There is a problem with the starting or ending pallet number in the
component data.
Illegal Pallet-Start and Last number (FDXVH)A number which does not exist has been specified as the starting or
specified in the component data. ending pallet number, or an ending number has been specified which is larger
than the starting number.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Go back to the editing screen and edit the starting or ending pallet
number.
Component data 150
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The pickup position for components in the external tray is not within
the movement range of the external tray axis.
Pickup position in tray unit is outside the (FDXVH)The coordinates for the pickup position in the component data are not
moving area. appropriate.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Go back to the editing screen and re-teach the pickup position.
Component data 150
axes LX
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The number of local fiducial data exceeds the allowable limit.
Too much local fiducial data are found. (FDXVH)The number of local fiducial is too large.
(UHPHG\)Go back to the editing screen and reduce the number of local fiducial
being used.
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)A dump station has been specified in the component data even
though no dump station has been installed in the machine.
This machine is not equipped with a (FDXVH)Same as above.
Dump station.
Component data 150 (UHPHG\)Go back to the editing screen and change the dump method specified
in the component data.

( NO COMPONENT (PHDQLQJ)When the PCB was checked for components following placing, no
components were found on it.
Hit the [ESC] key to go next step. Hit the (FDXVH)There was an error in placing earlier components on the PCB, or the
[ENTER] key to recover this component sensor has not been adjusted correctly.
again.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)If the error has occurred even though components were actually
placed on the PCB, simply press the ESC key. If no components have actually
been placed on the PCB, press the Enter key to place those components once
again.
Component data 150
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)When the bad mark function is being used, the preceding picking
function cannot be used.
PCB BADMARK, BLOCK BADMARK, (FDXVH)The bad mark and preceding picking functions cannot be used in combi-
LOCAL BADMARK and PRECEDING nation.
PICKING cannot be executed at the
same time.
(UHPHG\)Go back to the editing screen and cancel either the preceding pickup
function or the bad mark function.
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The alternative component function has been indicated when there
are no more components left on the tray.
You can’t use alternative component (FDXVH)Same as above.
function for tray component.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Go back to the editing screen and set a value of "0" for the alternative
component function.
Component data 150
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The tables for the original components and the alternative compo-
nents are different.
Alternative component is on the different (FDXVH)The original components have been specified for Table A and the alter-
table from the original one. native components for Table B, or the reverse.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Go back to the editing screen and change the feeder setting number in
the component data, so that movement is made to the same table.
Component data 150
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)Different nozzles have been specified for the original components
and the alternative components.
Required Nozzle for alternative compo- (FDXVH)Same as above.
nent is different from original one.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Go back to the editing screen and check the nozzle setting in the com-
ponent data.
Component data 150

( Component runs out. (PHDQLQJ)The components have been judged as having run out, beFDXVH of a
pickup error. This asks whether or not alternative components should be used
Will you switch component? (FDXVH)BeFDXVH of a pickup error, the system has decided that components
have run out. To change to alternative components, press the Enter key. If not
changing to alternative components, press any other key to continue using the
original components. If original components still exist but cannot be picked up
beFDXVH of a problem with the feeder or for another reason, a change to alter-
native components cannot be executed.
Press [ENTER] to switch, others not to. (UHPHG\)Check the feeder status and either switch to alternative components,
or continue using the original components.
Current component 150
Alternative component 151
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The feeder containing the alternative components is different from
that containing the original components.
Feeder Type for alternative component (FDXVH)Same as above.
is different from original one.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Go back to the editing screen and change the feeder being used in the
component data.
Component data 150
( PCB DATA ERROR
Setting for alternative component must
end original one.
Mount data 765
Component data 150
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)When using the component check function, which is a special func-
tion there is a problem with the PCB data.
When using component check function, (FDXVH)The check coordinates specified by the point fiducial number in the
there must be PriDispense data which is placing data are not included in the pre-dispensing data.
pointed by fiducial number in mount
data.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Create the check coordinates in the pre-dispensing data.
PreDispense data 1
When using component check function, (FDXVH)No mounting data number has been specified in the pre-dispensing
Mark number in Predispense data must data which contains the check coordinates.
be set which is used by mount data.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Specify the mounting data number in the pre-dispensing data.
PreDispense data 1
When using component check function, (FDXVH)No mark information for bad marks has been specified in the pre-dis-
you must prepare some Mark data. But pensing data which contains the check coordinates.
it doesn’t exist or is not suitable.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Create the mark information for the bad marks.
PreDispense data 1
Mark data 1

( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)Components which are organized in a series by the alternative com-
ponent settings do not have the same count stop settings.
CountOutStop must be same among (FDXVH)Alternative components in a series have different count stop settings, so
alternative components group. they will either stop or not stop.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Standardize the settings.
Component data 150
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The specified alternative components do not exist.
Specified alternative component doesn’t (FDXVH)There are no alternative components that match the setting.
exist.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)When using alternative components, create data for the alternative
components corresponding to the specified number, or do not specify alterna-
tive components.
Component data 150
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The feeder type specified in the PCB data is different from that in the
fixed components data.
Feeder type of the component is differ- (FDXVH)A different type of feeder has been specified in the PCB data from that
ent from the one of the fixed component specified in the fixed components data.
data.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Change one setting or the other so that they match.
Component data 150
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)An error occurred when reading the fixed component data.
Failed to read the fixed component data. (FDXVH)No fixed component data file exists in the machine, or the fixed compo-
nents data file has been destroyed.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Copy the fixed component data from the backup disk.
Component data 150
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The specified component data does not exist.
Specified fixed component doesn’t exist. (FDXVH)The fixed component data corresponding to the fixed component data
number specified in the mounting data does not exist.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Do not use the fixed component data, or create new fixed component
data.
Component data 150
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The number of block repeats exceeds the rated limit.
The number of block repeat data (FDXVH)The specified number of block repeats exceeds the maximum limit of
exceeds limitation. 512.
Maximum quantity is 765 . (UHPHG\)Specify a number of block repeats that is 512 or less.
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The names of several components in a series of alternative compo-
nents are different.
Component Name must be same (FDXVH)The names of all alternative components must be the same.
among alternative components group.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Specify the names of alternative components linked in a series so that
all of the names are the same.
Component data 150

( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)In the component data for a series of alternative components, there
are some data which refer to fixed component data and some which do not.
Usage of UpdateGroupNo must be same (FDXVH)With alternative components, the fixed component data references for
among alternative components group. series component data must be the same.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Standardize the settings so that the fixed component data is either ref-
erenced or not referenced for all of the alternative component data in the series.
Component data 150
( PCB DATA ERROR Please input correct position of Local Badmark.
Local badmark position is outside mov-
ing area.
Mount data 3
Local Badmark data 5
Axes X
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The mark data for the specified not an badmark does not exist.
No mark data available for the local bad- (FDXVH)No mark data exists.
mark. Or the mark data is not for bad-
mark.
Mount data 7 (UHPHG\)Create the mark data.
Mark data 2
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)QFP components cannot be picked up using this mounting method
beFDXVH of an incorrect setting in the pickup heights.
Pickup position is outside moving area (FDXVH)
for soft landing motion.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Check the settings for pickup heights.
Component data 150
Axes Z1
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)When the QFP mounting method is being used, the mounting posi-
tion height is not within the soft limit.
Mount position is outside moving area (FDXVH)When the QFP mounting method is being used, the setting for the
for soft landing motion. mounting position height is outside of the soft limit.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Check the setting for the mounting position height.
Component data 150
Axes Z1
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The specified nozzle cannot be attached to the head.
No nozzle to attach to the head. (FDXVH)BeFDXVH the setting for the number of nozzles is wrong, there are not
enough nozzles to be attached to the head, or it is not possible to use more than
the current number of nozzles.
AxisTable A (UHPHG\)If the nozzles are available, change the setting for the number of noz-
zles In any other case, create PCB data which does not specify a head using
the same nozzles.
Head 2
The number of possessed nozzle may
not be enough.
( Current nozzles on heads are different (PHDQLQJ)The nozzles which are currently attached are not the right combina-
from the nozzles necessary for this PCB. tion for the PCB about to be manufactured.
XY TABLE[Upper = Head No., Lower = (FDXVH)The wrong combination of nozzles was used when the setup was
Nozzle Type] changed.
Head 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (UHPHG\)Attach the correct nozzles, following the instructions on the display.
Nzl. 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2

( Please check each heads equipped with (PHDQLQJ)This is the display showing the nozzle settings required for the PCB
nozzles as shown below. about to be manufactured. It is not an error message.
XY TABLE[Upper = Head No., Lower = (FDXVH)None
Nozzle Type]
Head 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (UHPHG\)Check to make sure the nozzles which have been specified match
those displayed before starting production.
Nzl. 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The component is interfering with the adjacent nozzle.
Component will interfere with other noz- (FDXVH)BeFDXVH the component is large, it is interfering with the nozzle next to
zles. it.
Mount data 765 (UHPHG\)Create the appropriate data and try again.
Component data 150
Head 2
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The PCB width is not within the soft limit.
PCB width is outside moving area. (FDXVH)An attempt was made to use a PCB which is not within the specifica-
tions, or there is something wrong with the PCB width setting.
Axes LW (UHPHG\)Check the PCB width setting.
( PCB SIZE ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The PCB width is not within the usable range.
Width of PCB is out of range. (FDXVH)The PCB width is not within the range of 80 mm (min.) to 460 mm
(max.).
80(mm) < [Width of PCB] < 460(mm), (UHPHG\)Set the PCB width to a value within the allowable range of 80 to 460
please set width of PCB again. mm.
( PCB DATA ERROR If you want to use local badmark function. Set "skip?" parameter "Exec". If you
don’t want to use set "0" in mount data
No local badmark data is set to "Note"
for executable mounting data. During
production, "Note" data is ignored. So if
you want to use local badmark function,
set this " Exec". If not, set "0" for BadMk
in mounting data.
Mount Data 6
Local Badmark Data 3
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The nr. of mount data exceeds limit.
The PCB has too many mount data. (FDXVH)The nr. of mount data exceeds limit.
(UHPHG\)Delete some mount data. Or delete some skip data in block repeat
and etc.
( NOZZLE CHANGE ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The nozzle could not be picked up.
Failed to pick up a nozzle. Please check (FDXVH)The nozzle station sensor may be defective, or the height, angle, or XY
the sensor of the nozzle station and coordinates may not have been correctly adjusted in the nozzle station informa-
adjust height, angle and position data of tion.
the nozzle station.
Head No. 2 (UHPHG\)Adjust the sensor. Also, re-adjust the nozzle position, angle, and
height in the nozzle station information.
Station No. 11

( NOZZLE CHANGE ERROR (PHDQLQJ)An error occurred when housing the nozzle.
Failed to store a nozzle. Please check FDXVHThe nozzle station sensor may be defective, or the height, angle, or XY
the sensor of nozzle station and adjust coordinates may not have been correctly adjusted in the nozzle station informa-
height, angle and position data of the tion.
nozzle station.
Head No. 2 (UHPHG\)Check the operation of the nozzle station sensor. Also, re-adjust the
nozzle position, angle, and height in the nozzle station information.
Station No. 11
( DOWNLOAD WINDOW DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)An error occurred when transferring window data to the laser recog-
nition unit.
Failed to download the window data of FDXVHAn error occurred in sending the data because of noise or another fac-
the laser unit. Please Power OFF the tor, or the laser recognition unit has become disconnected from the I/O board.
machine and check the connection of
the laser unit.
(UHPHG\)Check the laser recognition unit connections, and then turn the power
supply off and try running the machine again. Check to see how often the prob-
lem occurs, and contact the manufacturer if necessary.
( NOZZLE STATION ERROR (PHDQLQJ)Several nozzles are produced from the nozzle station of the specified
head.
One or more nozzle(s) are not present FDXVHThe nozzle station sensor may be defective, or several nozzles have
on the nozzle station. Please check the been removed from the nozzle station.
sensors of the nozzle station and insert
the appropriate nozzle(s).
Head No. 2 (UHPHG\)Make sure the correct nozzles are stored in the nozzle station, or
check the operation of the nozzle station sensor.
( NOZZLE STATION ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The nozzle intended for use is not in the nozzle station.
There is no nozzle present for next FDXVHThe nozzle which is planned for use has not been specified in the noz-
sequence. Please check nozzle station zle station information.
data.
Head No. 2 (UHPHG\)Check the settings in the nozzle station information.
Station No. 11
( NOZZLE STATION ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The nozzle station contains more than one of the same nozzle.
There is more than one nozzle for next FDXVHTwo of the same nozzle have been specified in the nozzle station infor-
sequence. Please check sensors of the mation.
nozzle station and insert the appropriate
nozzle(s).
Head No. 2 (UHPHG\)Check the nozzle station information.
Station No. 11
( DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)A head number of 3 or higher has been specified in the mounting
data for a mounter which has only two heads.
The next mount sequence specifies that FDXVHA head number of 3 or more has been specified.
more than three heads are used or the
head number used is 3 or more. Please
check the mount data.
(UHPHG\)Change the head number in the placing data to 1 or 2.

( DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)Vision recognition is specified with head 2.

The next mount sequence specifies that FDXVHWith this machine, vision recognition cannot be carried out using
more than three heads are used or the head 2.
head number used is 3 or more. Please
check the mount data.
(UHPHG\)Change the head number to 1, or change to laser recognition.
( BACKLIGHT POSITION ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The backlighting illumination is dangerously positioned.
1. Ensure all nozzles not in use are in FDXVHWhen an attempt was made to change nozzles, the nozzles could not
station. be changed because the position of the backlighting illumination was danger-
ous.
2. Ensure the sensor knows nozzles (UHPHG\)Check to see that all of the nozzles are in the nozzle station, and that
are there. the sensor reacts to all of the nozzles in the nozzle station. Next, press the
Emergency Stop button and move head 2 to its upper end and head 1 below the
backlighting illumination Then use the backlighting illumination movement com-
mand to move the backlighting illumination to the right.
3. Push EMG sw. and pull up no.2
head to up-end, push down no.1 head to
lower pos.
4. In case the step 1-3 had not solved
problem, Please move backlight to right
position by CHANGE BACKLIGHT com-
mand.
( NOZZLE CHANGE ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The nozzle cannot be replaced because a component has been
picked up.
Now, head is picking the component. FDXVHTwo causes are possible: the head vacuum is on, or the head vacuum is
Head can’t change the nozzle. on and a component has been detected by the vacuum level sensor.
(UHPHG\)Remove the component from the nozzle or turn off the head vacuum.
( OPERATION ERROR Accident happened for YV-120 machine Nozzle changing is failed. According to
the message and recover this accident
1. Ensure all nozzles not in use are in
station.
2. Ensure the sensor knows nozzles
are there.
3. Push EMG sw. Check the safety of
head, nozzles, nozzle station.
4. In case the step 1-3 had not solved
problem, Please ensure safety by manual.
( 4-Point Fiducial Data Error Please set fiducial data according to "Error Message".
Fiducial No. 5
_@_@_@_@_@_@_@_@_@_@_@
_@6
Setting of [Type] is not correct. Please
set like this,
_@_@_@_@_@_@_@_@_@_@No.
5 --> [4Local-M]
_@_@_@_@_@_@_@_@_@_@No.
6 --> [4Local-S]

( 4-Point Fiducial Data Error Please set 4 point fiducial data like shown in "Error Message".
Fiducial No. 5
_@_@_@_@_@ _@_@6
Fiducial No. 5
_@_@_@_@_@_@_@ 6
Setting of [Mark] is not correct. Please
set same number.
Fiducial No. 5
_@_@_@_@_@_@_@6
Distance between point and another
point is too short.
Please set this distance more than
5(mm). Please set coordinates of 4-
point again.
Fiducial No. 5
_@_@_@_@ _@_@_@6
In quadrilaterals which is composed of
4-point fiducial, distance between one
point and one side of quadrilaterals is
less than 5(mm). Please set coordinates
of 4-point again.
Fiducial No. 5
_@_@_@_@ _@_@_@6
In quadrilaterals which is composed of
4-point fiducial, there is interior angle
which is over 180 degree. sage. Please
set coordinates of 4-point again.
Fiducial No. 5
_@_@_@_@_@ _@_@6
It is impossible to use this fiducial
number which is selected in this Mount
Data, because this data is [4Local-S].
Please use [4Local-M] Fiducial number
of 4-point fiducial.
Fiducial No. 4
It is impossible to use this fiducial data,
because this data is [Note]. Please
change from [Note] to [Exec].
( PCB DATA ERROR Please set 4 point fiducial data like shown in "Error Message".
Mount data No. 4
Fiducial data No. 6

( 4-Point Fiducial Data Errorpe Error Please set 4 point fiducial data like shown in "Error Message".
Mount data No. 6
Fiducial data No. 2
3
Coordinate of mount point is out of
range of 4-point-fiducial. to use this
function in Please don’t use this 4-point
fiducial for this mount point.
( Data Warning Set same number of block in PCB Information as total local badmark number.
The piece of block that you defined in
PCB Information is different from piece
of local badmark.
In this case, machine cannot count
Block Numbers in Production History. If
you want to count Block Numbers,
change number of block in PCB Infor-
mation.
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The mark data for the specified not an fiducial does not exist.
No mark data available for the local fidu- FDXVHNo mark data exists.
cial. Or the mark data is not for fiducial.
Mount Data 1 (UHPHG\)Create the mark data.
Mark Data 2
( PCB DATA WARNING (PHDQLQJ)It may be impossible to recognized this component by using
"Multi.Cam" because height of this component is out of range for "Multi.Cam"
Height of component is out of range for (UHPHG\)Please check recognition of this component in [ADJUST ASSISTANT].
"Multi Cam".
Component Data 2
It may be impossible to recognize this
component by using "Multi.Cam". It is
necessary to check whether this compo-
nent is able to be recognized by using
"Multi.Cam" in [ADJUST ASSISTANT].
To continue "Data-Check", press any
key.
( MARK DATA WARNING (PHDQLQJ)
Templet image can’t be downloaded to (UHPHG\)
the vision.
¥Did you create templet image of target
mark?
¥Don't you make too many mark data in
one PCB?
¥Don't you want to use too many kind of
mark?
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ) No effective data in the PCB data.
Effective data was not found. There is (UHPHG\) Use "PASS".
no data to execute. Use 'PASS'.

( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ) There is no data for pattern matching.
There is no mark pattern data. Some (UHPHG\) Make data for pattern matching of fiducial mark in mark information.
pattern matching function is used for
fiducial mark, but it has no pattern
matching data. This data was made by
executing of [Adjust Assistant] in Mark
Information.
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ) This component is too high for its height.
This component body height is too high. (UHPHG\) Check camera coordinate data.
So this component is cannot recognize
by equipped camera.
Mount Data 10
Component Data 5
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ) This component is too big for its height.
This component body size is too big.gh. (UHPHG\) Check camera coordinate data.
So this component is cannot recognize
by equipped camera.
Mount Data 10
Component Data 5
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ) The head "FineMode" is "Impossible " cannot act by "FineType".
"Mount Action" reserved component FDXVH Reserved head is FineMode Impossible, but reserved component is
number is "Fine Type", but fine mode "FineType".
reserved head is "Impossible".
Mount data 10 (UHPHG\) Please do one of following ways.
Head number 5 _œ Change headnum Finemode Possible.
Please reserve component number not _œ Change component not Finetype.
"Fine Type", etc.
_œ Change component data other type
_œ Change "FineMode" "Possible".
( COMPONENT DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ) Feeder Type was not defined yet.
Feeder Type for this component was not FDXVH It seems that component package parameter was changed after feeder
defined. Specify the feeder type data in type was defined. So, feeder type was changed to "Not Defined"
Component Info.
Mount Data 12 (UHPHG\) Select right feeder type.
Component Data 3
( COMPONENT DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ) Feeder position is set to "Automatic" but this is a stick feeder compo-
nent.
Feeder Position must be "Teaching" or FDXVH Stick feeder must set its feeder set position to "Teaching" or "Relative".
"Relative" for stick feeder component.
Input Feeder Pos_X,Y:
In case "Teaching", from the datum of (UHPHG\) Set right setting for Feeder Position (Teaching or Relative). And input
machine origin. Feeder Pos_X,Y parameter.
In case "Relative", from the datum of In case "Teaching", input from the datum of machine origin
8mm tape feeder pickup position.
Component data 3 In case "Relative", input from the datum of 8mm tape feeder pick up position

( COMMUNICATION ERROR (PHDQLQJ) Failure of communicating with LOADER.

Failure of communicating with LOADER. FDXVH Cause is shown in "Error Message".
One of the following could cause this
error:
‡@ LOADER or UNROADER is turned (UHPHG\)Please remove cause.
off power.
‡A LOADER or UNROADER is in emer-
gency stop.
‡B LOADER or UNROADER is in auto-
running.
‡C LOADER or UNROADER has
already received PCB width data after
power-on.
( If you don't want to repeat communicat- This message is not "Error Message".
ing with LOADER Please push [TAB]
keys.
If you want to repeat communicating (PHDQLQJ)
with LOADER Please push other keys.
FDXVHNone
(UHPHG\)None
( DUMP STATION DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)Feeder number for dump station is 0.
The feeder number used for dump sta- FDXVHFeeder number for dump station must be more than 1.
tion is not defined. It must not be 0.
Please confirm it.
(UHPHG\)Please set number again.
The feeder number used for dump sta- FDXVHThere is no dump station on the table which feeder for a component is
tion is not suitable. In case of SM112, if attached.
this number for A-table is defined more
than 101, then this error will happen.
Please confirm it.
(UHPHG\)If no dump station, please abort to use. Please change feeder location
on same table to dump station. Please set more than 1 in feeder number for
dump station.
The X,Y position of dump station is not FDXVHBecause all heads must be reached on this coordinate, but current pos.
suitable. All heads must be reach on this is out of it.
position, but the current coordinate is
out of it. In case of SM112, dump station
may be set about from 16 to 40 feeder
location number. Please correct X,Y
coordinate of dump station.
(UHPHG\)Please change the position of dump station, and change the coordi-
nate again.

( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)Illegal dispense head was defined in dot dispense data.
There is no dispense head for dot dis- FDXVHThe head does not exist, or the head number is not dispense head.
pensing. Check the head type and noz-
zle type in 3-2-A1-[Head Offset].
Dot Dispense data 11 (UHPHG\)Please input right head number.
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)X,Y position of Dot Dispense data is out of moving area.
Dot dispensing position is outside mov- FDXVHThe position is out of software limit.
ing area.
Dot Dispense data 3 (UHPHG\)Please set right X, Y position or set right head number.
Axes X
( Checking dot dispensing data. Please (PHDQLQJ)Data check about dot dispensing data is being now carried on.
wait a moment.......
Dot Dispense data 4 FDXVHThis is not error message.
Block number 3 (UHPHG\)Please wait until data check finish.
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)Local badmark position defined in Dot dispense data is out of moving
Area.
Local badmark position of dispense data FDXVHLocal badmark position is out of software limit.
is outside moving area.
Dispense data 4 (UHPHG\)Please input right local badmark position.
Axes X
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)Local badmark data for dot dispense data does not exist.
There is no local badmark data for the FDXVHLocal badmark data have not defined in local badmark information yet.
dot dispense.
Dispense Data 4 (UHPHG\)Please define local badmark data, if you use this function.
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)There is not mark data for local badmark.
There is no mark data of local badmark FDXVHThe mark data of Local badmark data for dot dispense have not defined.
available for the dot dispense data.
Dot Dispense Data 4 (UHPHG\)Please define mark data in mark information for local badmark of dot
dispense data.
Mark data 5
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The local badmark data of the dot dispense data is "Note" data.
No local badmark data is set to "Note" FDXVHLocal badmark that is "Note" is ignored during in running condition.
for executable dot dispense data. During
production, "Note" data is ignored. So if
you want to use local badmark function,
set this " Exec". If not, set "0" for BadMk
in dot dispensing data.
Dot Dispense Data 4 (UHPHG\)Please input "Exec" data of local badmark for dot dispense data.

( 4-Point Fiducial Data Error (PHDQLQJ)The fiducial number of dot dispense data is "4Local-S" data.
Dot Dispense Data No. 4 FDXVH"4Local-S" data is not for setted in fiducial number of dot dispense data.
Fiducial Data No. 3 (UHPHG\)Please set "4Local-M" number.
It is impossible to use this Fiducial
number which is selected in this Dot Dis-
pense Data, because this data is
[4Local-S]. Please use [4Local-M] Fidu-
cial number of 4-point fiducial.
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)The fiducial number of dot dispense
Dot Dispense Data No. 4 FDXVH"Note" data is ignored in running.
Fiducial data No. 3 (UHPHG\)Set "Exec" from "Note".
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)There is no fiducial data for dot dispense data.
No fiducial data available for the dot dis- FDXVHThe fiducial number of dot dispense has not defined yet.
pense local fiducial.
Dot Dispense data 4 (UHPHG\)Please make fiducial data
Fiducial data 3
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)There is no mark data for fiducial data of dot dispense data.
No mark data available for the dot dis- FDXVHThe mark data was not made yet.
pense local fiducial.
Dot Dispense data 10 (UHPHG\)Please make mark data of fiducial of dot dispense, or if you have
already prepared mark data, set that mark number.
Fiducial data 5
Mark data 2
( Checking pre dispensing data. (PHDQLQJ)Data check about pre dispensing data is being now carryed on.
Please wait a moment....... FDXVHThis is not error message.
Pre Dispense data 4 (UHPHG\)Please wait until data check finish.
Block number 3
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)X,Y position of Pre Dispense data is out of moving area.
Pre dispensing position is outside mov- FDXVHThe position is out of software limit.
ing area.
Pre Dispense data 3 (UHPHG\)Please set right X, Y position or set right head number.
Axes X
( PCB DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)Illegal dispense head was defined in pre dispense data.
There is no dispense head for pre dis- FDXVHThe head does not exist, or the head number is not dispense head.
pensing.
Pre Dispense data 11 (UHPHG\)Please input right head number.
Head number 4
( PCB DATA ERR Please don’t use "Point Fiducial" for Dispense.
It is impossible to use "Point Fiducial" for
Dispense. Please check the mount data
or fiducial data.
Dot Dispense data 5
Fiducial data 3

( PCB DATA ERR Non adequate dispensing unit was defined. Please set head number "0", to
select head automatically, or input adequate value for dispensing unit that is
defined in NOZZLE-SPEC Information.
Illegal unit for pre dispensing. Defined
unit for that head is out of range for ade-
quate unit.
Pre Dispense data 5
Head number 3
Unit 30
( PCB DATA ERR Non adequate dispensing unit was defined. Please set head number "0", to
select head automatically, or input adequate value for dispensing unit that is
defined in NOZZLE-SPEC Information.
Illegal unit for dot dispensing. Defined
unit for that head is out of range for ade-
quate unit.
Dot Dispense data 4
Head number 2
Unit 70
( DOT STATION PITCH ERR (PHDQLQJ)DOT STATION PITCH ERR
Dot station pitch either X direction or Y FDXVHDot station pitch either X direction or Y direction must be set "0".
direction must be set "0". Please check
the dot station pitch X,Y.
(UHPHG\)Please check the dot station pitch X,Y.
( DOT STATION MAX MATRIX NUMBER (PHDQLQJ)DOT STATION MAX MATRIX NUMBER ERR
ERR
Please set max matrix number to more FDXVHPlease set max matrix number to more than 1.
than 1. Please check the max matrix
number.
(UHPHG\)Please check the max matrix number.
( DOT STATION DATA ERR (PHDQLQJ)DOT STATION DATA ERR

All heads can not be able to reach to dot FDXVHAll heads can not be able to reach to dot station.
station. Please check the dot station
position X,Y.
Head number X (UHPHG\)Please check the dot station position X,Y.
Axis X
( NOZZLE SPEC DATA ERROR (PHDQLQJ)NOZZLE SPEC DATA ERROR

Failed to read the nozzle spec informa- FDXVHFailed to read the nozzle spec information.
tion. Please prepare correct nozzle spec
information. Select this command by
YVOS2....3-3-[A4 NOZZLE SPEC.INF]- (UHPHG\)Please prepare correct nozzle spec information.
[SM86D Type]
MACHINE.3-1-[A4 NOZZLE SPEC.INF]-
[Shift]+[Enter]
Machine SM86D
file NO?\NZL_TIM.STS

( Tray unit error : The component is not (PHDQLQJ) The tray changer was not able to place the supply components on
placed correctly on the traverser station. the traverser. If extra parts have been placed on the specified traverser, remove
If the component is on the station, them.
please remove it.
Mount data 765 FDXVHThe pickup sensor on the station was not able to decide correctly
whether or not there was a component on the traverser.
Component data 153 (UHPHG\) If there are extra components on the traverser, remove them. If there
is no problem with the components, and the sensor has malfunctioned, re-
adjust the sensor.
Station 2
Next tray position is for the next pick
sequence. (X= 6 , Y= 3)
( Tray unit error : Returned component is PHDQLQJComponents which were returned from the main unit could not be
not placed correctly on the traverser sta- placed correctly on the traverser.
tion. If the component is on the station,
please remove it.
Mount data 765 FDXVHComponents from the main unit were not placed correctly on the
traverser or fell off during transport.
Component data 153 UHPHG\If components have fallen off, remove those components. If the sensor
judges that there are components on the traverser when in actuality there are
none, re-adjust the sensor.
Station 2
( Tray unit error : Returned component is PHDQLQJComponents could not be picked up from the tray.
not placed correctly on the traverser sta-
please remove it.
Mount data 765 FDXVHThere were no components on the tray when the attempt was made to
pick them up, or components fell off when being moved from the tray to the
traverser.
Component data 153 UHPHG\If components have fallen off, remove those components. If compo-
nents have run out, supply more.
Pallet 9
( Tray unit error : Returned component is PHDQLQJThe external tray changer was not able to place components prop-
not placed correctly on the traverser sta- erly on the traverser.
please remove it.
Mount data 765 FDXVHComponents fell off of the external tray changer when being trans-
ported, or the sensor on the traverser judged that there were no components on
the traverser, even though there were.
Component data 153 UHPHG\If components have fallen off, remove those components. Adjust the
pickup sensor for the traverser so that it judges correctly whether or not there
are components on the traverser.
Station 2

( Tray unit error : Returned component is PHDQLQJAn error occurred when picking up components from the traverser.
not placed correctly on the traverser sta-
please remove it.
Mount data 765 FDXVHComponents which should have been on the traverser were not there,
or an attempt was made to pick up components from the traverser but the
pickup head sensor or the traverser sensor was not able to judge correctly
whether there were components on the traverser.
Component data 153 UHPHG\Re-adjust the sensors, or, if there are components which have fallen
off, remove them.
Station 2
( Tray unit error : Returned component is PHDQLQJAn error occurred when unknown component is on the traverser sta-
not placed correctly on the traverser station
please remove it.
Mount data 765 FDXVHReset operation was done when some component is on the traverser
station Or traverser sensor was not able to judge the existence of component.
Component data 153 UHPHG\Please remove the component on the traverser station. Or re-adjust
the sensors of traverser.
Station 2
( Tray unit error : Failed to store the pallet. PHDQLQJThe pallet could not be housed in the magazine.
To start production again, please return
the pallet to its assigned magazine.
Mount data 765 FDXVHA mechanical problem occurred when the attempt was made to house
the pallet in the magazine.
Component data 153 UHPHG\Press the Emergency Stop button and return the pallet to the maga-
zine manually.
Pallet 9
( Tray unit error : Failed to pull out the pal- PHDQLQJAn error occurred when taking the pallet out of the magazine.
let. To start production again, please
return the pallet to its assigned magazine.
Mount data 765 FDXVHFor mechanical reasons, an error occurred when the pallet was being
taken out of the magazine.
Component data 153 UHPHG\If the pallet has been ejected from the magazine too abruptly, press
the Emergency Stop button and return it to the magazine manually.
Pallet 9
( Tray unit error : The hook action was PHDQLQJThe hook did not respond correctly to an Open or Close instruction.
performed incorrectly. Please check the
following items:
1. Pallet (No. 9) access position. FDXVHThe hook has not grasped the pallet at the correct position.
2. The hook nail. UHPHG\Re-insert the hook at the correct position in the pallet, and start the
If the pallet is out of the magazine, then: operation again from the beginning. If the pallet has been ejected from the mag-
azine too abruptly, however, press the Emergency Stop button and return it to
the magazine manually.
1. Make sure to push EMERGENCY
STOP ON.
2. Remove the pallet from the stage
section.
3. Return the pallet to its magazine.

( PHDQLQJUnnecessary components have been detected on the external tray
head or traverser.
FDXVHComponents whose origin is unclear have been discovered.
UHPHG\Remove the specified components manually.
( Tray unit : The tray unit head or
traverser station has a component
attached to its nozzle (pad). After
removing the component, please press
any key.
( Tray unit error : Abort the RESET PHDQLQJThis is a notification that the reset process has been interrupted.
process. If a pallet is out of the maga-
zine, please return it to its assigned
magazine.
FDXVHAn interlock emergency stop instruction or similar instruction has been
issued.
UHPHG\If a pallet has been forcibly ejected return it to the magazine.
( Tray unit : Tray unit is working now! PHDQLQJThis is a notification that the tray changer is in operation.
Please wait.....
FDXVHNone
UHPHG\Please wait.
( Tray unit error : The pallet is out of the PHDQLQJThe pallet has been forcibly ejected from the magazine.
magazine. Return the pallet to its
assigned magazine.
FDXVHSame as above.
UHPHG\Return the pallet to the magazine.
( Tray unit error : The door is open. PHDQLQJOperation cannot begin because the door of the external tray
Please close the door. changer is open.
FDXVHThe door of the external tray changer is open.
UHPHG\Close the door which is open.
( Tray unit error : Failed to store the pallet. PHDQLQJAn error has occurred in housing the pallet in the magazine.
To start production again, please return
the pallet to its assigned magazine.
FDXVHNone
UHPHG\Press the Emergency Stop button and return the pallet to the maga-
zine manually.
( Tray unit error : Failed to pull out the PHDQLQJ An error occurred in taking the pallet out of the magazine.
pallet. To start production again,
please return the pallet to its assigned
magazine.
FDXVHNone
UHPHG\Press the Emergency Stop button and return the pallet to the maga-
zine manually.
( Tray unit error : The door is open. The door that normally closed is open. May be the door is broken.
Please close the door. Something wrong
with door and check one.

( Tray unit error : Unknown error PHDQLQJAn internal problem has occurred in the tray changer.
FDXVHThe software version does not match.
UHPHG\First, contact the manufacturer and then re-install the software.
( Now, head of machine or tray-changer is Remove the component from head of machine or Tray-Changer.
picking the component. If "SET PALLET"
will be executed, component will drop
from head. If you execute "SET PAL-
LET", remove component from head
and hit [Space] key. If you cancel "SET
PALLET", hit other key.
( EMERGENCY STOP ON PHDQLQJThe pallet has been forcibly ejected from the magazine.
The tray unit pallet is out of the maga- FDXVHNone
zine. When you push [READY], make
sure followings.
1. Can you keep on safety for another UHPHG\Press the Emergency Stop button, return the pallet to the magazine,
persons? and press the Ready button.
2. Have you kept on machine moving
area?
3. Have you returned a pallet to mag-
azine?
( INTERLOCK ERROR PHDQLQJThe pallet has been forcibly ejected from the magazine.
sure followings.
1. Can you keep on safety for another UHPHG\Return the pallet correctly to the magazine and start the operation
persons? again.
area?
azine?
( ORIGIN IMCOMPLETE PHDQLQJThe pallet has been forcibly ejected from the magazine.
sure followings.
1. Can you keep on safety for another UHPHG\Press the Emergency Stop button and return the pallet to the maga-
persons? zine.
area?
azine?
( Now reading data. Please wait a PHDQLQJThis indicates that the PCB data is being read.
moment....
FDXVHNone
UHPHG\Please wait.
( Now reading data. Please wait a PHDQLQJThis indicates that the PCB data is being read.
moment....
FDXVHNone
UHPHG\Please wait.

( DATA READING ERROR PHDQLQJAn error occurred in reading the data
Failed to read data. FDXVHThe file may have been destroyed.
UHPHG\The relevant data could not be read. If there is a backup copy, copy
the data from the backup and use it.
( PCB DATA ERROR PHDQLQJAn error occurred in writing the PCB data.
Failed to write data. FDXVHThe hard disk is full, or there is a problem with the disk.
UHPHG\First check the condition of the disk If there is a problem with the
number of files, delete any unnecessary files and then try writing the data again.
( PCB DATA ERROR PHDQLQJPlease specify the PCB data first.
No PCB has been selected. Select PCB FDXVHAnother command was issued before specifying which PCB is to be
by [D1 SWITCH PCB DATA] edited.
UHPHG\First use the edit target switching command to specify the file to be
edited.
( Creating new PCB data now. Please PHDQLQJThis is an indication that new PCB data is being created.
wait a moment.....
FDXVHNone
UHPHG\Please wait.
( <PCB Information> cannot open SUB- PHDQLQJThis screen cannot be used for PCB in formation.
WINDOW.
FDXVHA sub-screen command was used, although sub-screens cannot be
opened with PCB information; or the F4 key was pressed.
UHPHG\None
( No more PCB files can be edited (Max PHDQLQJAn attempt was made to edit 10 or more PCB files at once.
10 files).
FDXVHA large number of PCB files were opened without saving previous files
first.
UHPHG\Save PCB data files which have already been opened, before opening
another file.
( In this menu, repeated patterns can be PHDQLQJThis notifies the user that editing of block repeat data is beginning.
defined. Press [ENTER] key to enter this
menu. Press any other key to abort.
FDXVHNone
UHPHG\Press the Enter key.
( In this menu, dispense actions can be PHDQLQJThis notifies the user that the editing screen for adhesive dispensing
defined. Press [ENTER] key to enter this is being accessed.
menu. Press any other key to abort.
FDXVHNone
( In this menu, point-fiducial, local-fiducial PHDQLQJThis notifies the user that the editing screen for point fiducial data is
and 4-point-fiducial can be defined. being accessed.
Press [ENTER] key to enter this menu.
Press any other key to abort.
FDXVHNone

( No Data base number is specified. If you PHDQLQJ The database information setting command was issued, or the F7
would like to perform a ’Set from Data- key pressed, without specifying the database number.
base’, then please input a Data base
number in the SUB WINDOW.
0 : means that the DataBase number is FDXVHSame as above.
not specified.
UHPHG\Enter any value other than 0 for the database number on the sub-
screen (the right-hand screen).
( CAUTION : Ready to load Component PHDQLQJThis notifies the user that all of the component data will be overwrit-
information from machine Data base to ten by the database information.
ALL components in the PCB component
data base. Any adjusted parameter in
the current PCB component data base
will be lost. Push the [SPACE] key to
execute. Push the [ESC] key to cancel
this operation.
FDXVHNone
UHPHG\To execute the process, press the Space key. To cancel it, press the
ESC key.
( CAUTION: Amount of data exceeded PHDQLQJToo much PCB data exists.
the limit for auto-running. Reduce the
number of data. Amount of ’Mount Data’,
’Component Info.’, ’Mark Information’,
’Block Repeat’, ’Fiducial Mark’, ’PreDis-
pense’ and ’DotDispense’ cannot
exceed 2560. And ’Component Inf’ can-
not exceed 255.
FDXVHData has been copied or additions made, so that the resulting data
exceeds the specifications.
UHPHG\Delete any data which is not being used, or if the amount of data
exceeds the specifications, distribute the data between several machines, so
that data for any one machine is within the specifications.
( ERROR:PRD HISTORY does not exist PHDQLQJThere is no production history information.
on the disk. Copy to Machine first.
FDXVHAn attempt was made to view the production history information for a
PCB for which there is no such information yet.
UHPHG\With the YVOS2, read the production history information from the
machine. With the machine, there is no production history information until
PCBs have actually been produced, so do not try to open the information.
( ERROR: If copy selected lines or insert PHDQLQJ Too many data to exceed maximum data numbers.
1 line, the end of data will be over the
maximum number of lines.
FDXVHIf copying had executed, result is over of limited data numbers.
UHPHG\Quit of this operation, or decrease data numbers that you have
selected.

( ERROR: Replace command cannot be PHDQLQJReplace command is not effective for this window.
executed in this condition. Now Replace
function is for MOUNT information. If
you want to execute Replace function,
set current window as MOUNT informa-
tion.
FDXVHReplace command can be executed in MOUNT information
UHPHG\Change current window to MOUNT information.
( Processing Data. Please wait a PHDQLQJThis notifies the user that data is being processed.
moment.....
FDXVHNone
UHPHG\Please wait.
( CAUTION: Now going insert data. PHDQLQJThis is a warning that an attempt has been made to insert or copy
component data items.
But, it is dangerous for not fitting data, FDXVHNone
because data number will be changed.
Push the [ENTER] key to execute. Push
the other key to cancel this operation.
UHPHG\This is a warning message. To proceed with the changes, press the
Enter key.
( CAUTION: Now going delete empty PHDQLQJThis is a warning that an attempt has been made to delete filler com-
data area. But, it is dangerous for not fit- ponent data items.
ting data, because data number will be
changed. Push the [ENTER] key to exe-
cute. Push the other key to cancel this
operation.
FDXVHNone
UHPHG\This is simply a warning message. To proceed with the changes,
press the Enter key.
( ERROR: Following copying is impossi- PHDQLQJThe copying is impossible.
ble.
1. Between PCB data and all data FDXVHYou did impossible copying.
2. Between Component data and the UHPHG\Do possible copying.
other data
3. Between Mark data and the other
data
4. Except among Mount data, PreDis-
pense data, and DotDispense data
5. Except among Block Repeat data,
Point Fiducial data, and Local Bad data
( CAUTION: Note data is exist. If execute, Be careful to execute the delete or copy command. If "NOTE" data is lost, it is
block conversion is not available. Push not available to back the original data from block converted data.
the [ENTER] key to execute. Push the
other key to cancel this operation.

( ERROR: This command is available to This command is available to Mount-Data, Parts-Data, and DotDispens-Data
Mount-Data, Parts-Data, and DotDis- only.
pens-Data only. Push the [ENTER] key
to cancel this operation.
( CAUTION: Data not found. After refer- After reference, The data was not found.
ence, The data was not found.
( Teach 2nd position for AVERAGE PHDQLQJThis notifies the user that teaching is in progress.
TEACHING.
[SHIFT+F10]: to continue next (max 4) FDXVHNone
[F10] : to decide value UHPHG\None
( Teach 3rd position for AVERAGE PHDQLQJThis notifies the user that teaching is in progress.
TEACHING.
[SHIFT+F10]: to continue next (max 4) FDXVHNone
[F10] : to decide value UHPHG\None
( Teach last position for AVERAGE PHDQLQJThis notifies the user that teaching is in progress.
TEACHING. You cannot teach more
than four positions.
[F10] : to decide value FDXVHNone
UHPHG\None
( Please teach another side position on PHDQLQJThis notifies the user that the system is in the middle of distance
the diagonal line for DISTANCE TEACH- teaching.
ING.
[F10] : to decide value FDXVHNone
UHPHG\None
( EMG.STOP ON or ORIGIN INCOM- PHDQLQJConditions have not been met when teaching or tracing is attempted.
PLETE. You cannot do teaching or trac-
ing.
FDXVHAn attempt was made to initiate teaching or tracing during an emer-
gency stop, or before the origin point is reached.
UHPHG\First cancel the emergency stop, and if a return to the origin position
has not been carried out, execute that command.
( TEACH & TRACE condition is not ready. PHDQLQJConditions for teaching or tracing have not been specified.
Select TEACH UNIT, SPEED, and FID. FDXVHSame as above.
CORRECTION at [B0 TEACH,TRACE
CONDITION].
UHPHG\Specify the teaching unit and other information with the D0 teaching/
tracing conditions before carrying out the teaching or tracing.
( X-Comp. Amount or Y-Comp. Amount is PHDQLQJA value of 1 or less has been entered for the component quantity in
less than 1. the component quantity information.
You cannot do DISTANCE TEACHING. FDXVHSame as above.
UHPHG\None
( X-TrayAmount or Y-TrayAmount is less PHDQLQJAn attempt was made to initiate tray teaching with a value of 1 or less
than 1. You can not do DISTANCE entered for the tray quantity in the tray quantity information.
TEACHING.
FDXVHSame as above.
UHPHG\None
( Pallet-StartNo has an illegal value. PHDQLQJThe starting pallet number is not correct.
You can not do teaching or tracing. FDXVHThe starting pallet number which has been input is not correct.
UHPHG\First input the correct pallet number and then try the operation again.

( You cannot teach with FIDUCIAL COR- PHDQLQJFiducial mark recognition was not successful even though the fidu-
RECTION. Select FIDUCIAL CORREC- cial correction parameter is set to "Yes" in the teaching and tracing conditions.
TION to be ON and do recognition of
mark at [B0 TEACH,TRACE CONDI-
TION].
FDXVHSame as above.
UHPHG\Correct the setting in the teaching and tracing conditions, select "Yes"
for the fiducial correction function, and run the fiducial mark recognition again.
( Type of fiducial recognition is not PHDQLQJThe type of fiducial correction has not set yet.
selected. Please set the item of PCB
Fiducial or BLOCK Fiducial to "Use" in
the PCB information.
FDXVHThe fiducial item must be set "Use" to PCB, BLOCK, or both.
UHPHG\Set the fiducial item in the PCB information to PCB, BLOCK, both.
( Mark data is not ready. Please prepare PHDQLQJThere is no mark data for the fiducial recognition function.
correct mark data.
FDXVHSame as above.
UHPHG\The data for the mark number specified by the fiducial mark parameter
in the PCB information needs to be defined as the relevant number in the mark
information. Check to see that this data has been defined.
( All coordinates of the fiducial mark are PHDQLQJAll of the fiducial mark coordinates are set to 0.
(0.0).
Fiducial correction does not work with FDXVHNo coordinate data has been entered for the fiducial marks.
this condition. Please set correct coordi-
nates.
UHPHG\Input the correct coordinates.
( Undefined TrayChanger had been PHDQLQJThe tray changer specified in the component data does not exist on
selected as ’Feeder Type’. Correct this machine.
’Feeder Type’ data.
FDXVHThe setting indicates use of a tray changer which does not exist on this
machine.
UHPHG\Correct the setting for the feeder type.
( ALIGNMENT ERROR PHDQLQJThe setting for the recognition unit is wrong.
Setting of the alignment module is not FDXVHThe recognition unit has not been specified; a recognition unit which
correct. One of the following could does not exist has been specified; recognition of that component is not possible
cause this error: with the recognition unit that has been specified; or the component is too large
to use laser recognition.
_EAlignment module is not specified. UHPHG\Edit the setting so that it is correct.
_EAlignment module is not equipped.
_EAlignment module cannot handle this
component.
_EThis component is too large to align-
ment module.

( ALIGNMENT TYPE ERROR PHDQLQJEither the correction type or the mark function has not been speci-
fied.
1. Component Database FDXVHIf the component database is being used, the type of correction has not
been specified. If the mark database is being used, the mark function has not
been specified.
Alignment type is ’undefined’. UHPHG\With a component database, specify the correction type. With a mark
data base, specify the mark function correctly.
2. Mark Database
Marktype is ’Not Specify’.
( PARAMETER-SEARCH ERROR PHDQLQJAn error occurred in optimizing the component parameters.
Failure of parameter-search of the com- FDXVHComponent optimization was not possible.
ponent!
Please check body-parameter of the UHPHG\First check to see if basic data such as the component shape is cor-
component, for example ’body size x’. rect, and then try the function again.
( PCB DATA ERROR PHDQLQJThe settings for the component shape information are inappropriate,
and the component data cannot be transferred to vision data.
Illegal component shape data or compo- FDXVHThere is inappropriate data among the component shape information.
nent data is not defined.
UHPHG\Go back to the editing screen and correct the data.
( COMPONENT DATA ERROR PHDQLQJIt is impossible to execute [ DRAW THE SHAPE (CMP) ] command.
It is impossible to execute "DRAW THE FDXVH 1."Alignment Module" is "Non".
SHAPE(CMP)". Please check next.
(1)"Alignment Module" is "Non". 2."Alignment Type" is "Undefined"
(2)"Alignment Type" is "Undefined". UHPHG\Please set these parameters.
(3)Alignment module cannot handle this
component.
( MACHINE DATA ERROR PHDQLQJFailed to read machine data.
Failed to read machine data. FDXVHIncorrect size of machine data of some machine data files are lost.
UHPHG\Copy machined data from back-up disk.
( DATA ERROR PHDQLQJThe number of feeders specified for use in the data creation function
exceeds the number available, so the setup is impossible.
The number of used feeder exceeds (cause)
your possession.
Feeder group PNEUMATIC Type UHPHG\If the number of feeders being used is wrong, use the configuration
mode to correct the feeder quantity information. If there are actually too few
feeders, buy more.
Feeder type 8mm tape
( DATA ERROR PHDQLQJThe number of nozzles planned for use exceeds the number availa-
ble for processing.
The number of used nozzle exceeds FDXVHThe number of nozzles used to manufacture the data currently being
your possession. planned is not enough for the actual processing.
Machine 1 UHPHG\If the setting for the number used in processing is wrong, correct it in
the machine configuration. If there are actually too few nozzles, purchase more,
or use the YV112 to create data for the places where nozzles are to be secured
and used.
Nozzle_type 2

( DATA ERROR PHDQLQJThe number of component data exceeds the specifications.
The number of component data exceeds FDXVHComponents assigned to the specified machine exceed the specifica-
system limit. tions.
Machine 2 UHPHG\Shift some of the component data assigned to that machine to another
machine.
( DATA ERROR PHDQLQJThe number of mounting data exceeds the specifications for that
machine.
The number of mount data exceeds sys- FDXVHSame as above.
tem limit.
Machine 2 UHPHG\Set up the specified components on another machine.
( DATA ERROR PHDQLQJIn no-nozzle change machine, nozzle is not distributed to each head.
The nozzle is not distributed to head. FDXVHSome component is too big size to interfere to nearest nozzle(head).
Machine SM120 UHPHG\Check the component size and nozzle type. Check the number of noz-
zle and the setting of head spec. inf..
¥Some nozzles cannot pick the interfer-
ing component. Check the nozzle type
of each components.
¥Luck of nozzle number. Check the noz-
zle number and head spec. inf..
( Failed to access feeder quantity data PHDQLQJAn error occurred in accessing the data file containing the number of
file. feeders to be used.
FDXVHThere is a problem with the hard disk
UHPHG\Try creating the data again from the beginning. If it cannot be recov-
ered, contact the manufacturer.
( Failed to access nozzle quantity data PHDQLQJAn error occurred in accessing the data file containing the number of
file. feeders to be used.
FDXVH There is a problem with the hard disk
UHPHG\Try creating the data again from the beginning. If it cannot be recov-
ered, contact the manufacturer.
( DATA ERROR PHDQLQJThere is no component data.
No component data exists. FDXVHSame as above.
Machine 2 UHPHG\Create the specified component data.
PCB CUK93001
Component 150
( DATA ERROR PHDQLQJThere is no fiducial data.
No fiducial data exists for the mount FDXVHSame as above.
data.
Machine 2 UHPHG\Create the specified fiducial data.
PCB CUK93001
Mount 765
Fiducial 1
( DATA ERROR PHDQLQJThere is no mark data.
No mark data exists. FDXVHSame as above.
Machine 2 UHPHG\Create the mark data.
PCB CUK93001
Mark 1

( DATA ERROR PHDQLQJThere is no badmark data.

No badmark data exists for the mount FDXVH Same as above.
data.
Machine 2 UHPHG\Create the specified badmark data.
PCB CUK93001
dispense 765
Badmark 1
( DATA ERROR PHDQLQJThere is no fiducial data.
No fiducial data exists for the dispense FDXVHSame as above.
data.
Machine 2 UHPHG\Create the specified fiducial data.
PCB CUK93001
dispense 765
Fiducial 1
( DATA ERROR PHDQLQJThere is no badmark data.
No badmark data exists for the dispense FDXVHSame as above.
data.
Machine 2 UHPHG\Create the specified badmark data.
PCB CUK93001
dispense 765
Badmark 1
( Dispense machine is not exist. Please select the "Exist" of Dispense Head in MCH_CONFIG.
( Failed to open dispense information. Fail to make the temporary file.
( CAUTION: Now going to convert the

data from "Exec" to "Note" in Mount,
Block repeat, Local fiducial and Local
badmark. So, "Exec"data will be deleted.
Push the [ENTER] key to execute. Push
the [ESC] key to cancel this operation.
( "Note" data need to execute the convert Check the existence of "Note" data in Mount, Block repeat, Local fiducial, Local
from block converted data to original badmark.
data is not exist.
Machine YV112
( CAUTION: Amount of Mount data that Calculated mount data over 2500. So check and decrease the amount of Mount,
executed block conversion exceeded Block repeat, Local fiducial and Local badmark within 2560.
2500. Amount of data exceeded the limit
for auto-running. Reduce the number of
data. Amount of ’Mount Data", ’Compo-
nent Info,’ , ’Mark Information’, ’Block
Repeat’, ’Fiducial Mark’, ’PreDispense’
and ’DotDispense’ cannot exceed 2560.
Push the [ENTER] key to continue. Push
the [ESC] key to cancel this operation.
( There is only one "Exec" data in Block This PCB data is not for block. Block data need more than two "Exec" data in
repeat. Block repeat.

( PCB DATA ERRORNFORMATION PHDQLQJSuitable alignment module for the component is not equipped on the
ERROR machine.
No alignment module for the compo- FDXVHThere is an error in the setting in the alignment module for the compo-
nent. nent or the component must be mounted by the other machine.
Machine 2 UHPHG\Correct the erroneous setting.
PCB CUK93001
Component 1
( PCB DATA ERROR Feeder Information PHDQLQJThough the component must be dumped to the dump station, the
machine is not equipped with a dump station properly.
No dump station for the component. Or FDXVHThere is an error in the setting in the dump way for the component or
the table of the dumpstation is different the machine data. Or the table of the dump station is different from the table
from the one of the component. where the component is fixed.
Machine 2 UHPHG\Correct the erroneous setting.
PCB CUK93001
Component 1
( DOT DISPENSE SORT TIMEOUT PHDQLQJDispense sort was interrupted by timeout error.
ERROR
Dispense sort was interrupted by time FDXVHIllegal Diameter, Stopper and Pitch data of the nozzle spec.
out error. Dispense sort was finished,
but it is contained the data that stopper
may interfere with other dispense data.
Please check the following: UHPHG\Please check the nozzle spec data.
¥Illegal Diameter, Stopper and Pitch
data of the nozzle spec.
( COMMAND ERROR PHDQLQJThese commands are not available for component with positive "Fix-
CmpRef.".
1.[ADJUST ASSISTANT] command is UHPHG\Use these commands to components data in PCB
not available for a component with posi- [STATIC_COMPONENTS].
tive "FixCmpRef."
2.[DRAW THE SHAPE(CMP)] command
is not available for a component with
positive "FixCmpRef."
( DATA ERROR PHDQLQJAn error occurred when setting data from the database.
Failed to quote component details from FDXVHThere is no information in the database corresponding to the specified
its Data Base. database number.
Component 150 UHPHG\Use the database list command to check the existing database num-
bers, and specify an existing number.
specifies an illegal database number.
CheckPoint: DataBase Number
( DATA ERROR PHDQLQJAn error occurred when setting data from the database.
Failed to quote mark details from its FDXVHThere is no database corresponding to the specified database.
Data Base.
Mark 150 UHPHG\Use the database list command to check the existing database num-
bers, and specify an existing number.
specifies an illegal database number.
CheckPoint: DataBase Number

( DATA ERROR PHDQLQJData cannot be set from the database.
Failed to set up component or mark FDXVHAn attempt was made to use the database setting function on a screen
information from its Data Base. other than the component information or mark information screen.
UHPHG\Use the F3 key to switch to the component information or mark infor-
mation screen.
( FILE ERROR PHDQLQJAn error occurred in reading the PCB data.
Failed to read PCB Data. FDXVH_gPCB data with an asterisk (*) was selected; a machine which has not
been registered was selected; or the PCB data has been destroyed.
UHPHG\In the first two cases, correct the operation. In the last case, copy the
data from the backup disk.
( DATA ERROR PHDQLQJAn error occurred in attaching the fixed feeder because of the data
created.
Failed to set up Fixed feeders at its posi- FDXVHAnother fixed feeder already exists in that position, so there is no space
tion. to attach the specified feeder.
Component 150 UHPHG\Find the feeder which is interfering with the fixed feeder, and remove
it, or delete the specification of the fixed feeder which is causing the problem. If
the component that feeder position is "TEACHING", change to "AUTOMATIC"
and execute the optimization.
specifies an impossible set position.
The component that feeder position is
"Teaching" is exist.
Change the "FeederPosition" into "Auto-
matic".
Change the "MOUNT DATA CONDI-
TION" into "FEEDER MOVE".
( DATA ERROR PHDQLQJAn error occurred in the nozzle layout when the data was created.
Failed to distribute nozzles. FDXVHIf a feeder has already been fixed in that position, the nozzle could not
be positioned in a place where it is possible to pick up components.
UHPHG\Change the position of the fixed feeder.
( DATA ERROR PHDQLQJAn error occurred in the layout in the mounting data.
Failed to distribute mount data. FDXVHIf the data is too complex, an error occurs in the mounting data and the
feeders cannot be positioned.
UHPHG\Shift part of the data to another machine.
( FILE ERROR PHDQLQJAn error occurred in writing the PCB data.
Failed to write PCB Data. FDXVHThere is no space available on the hard disk, or there is a problem with
the hard disk.
UHPHG\If there is no space available, back up any unnecessary PCB data and
then delete it. In any other case, check to see how often the problem occurs,
and contact the manufacturer.
( Failed to read Machine Equipment Data. PHDQLQJAn error occurred when reading the model information.
FDXVHThe software versions do not match, or the model setting does not
match the registered machine data.
UHPHG\Register the machine data again and check the versions. If the ver-
sions are different, contact the manufacturer.

( DATA GENERATOR OBJECT ERROR PHDQLQJThe dummy file which has to serve as a target for creating the data
% does not exist.
Dummy file for DATA GENERATOR FDXVHThe PCB name has not been selected; the dummy file has been errone-
doesn’t exist. ously deleted; or no line has been selected
Possible cause : UHPHG\Select the PCB line.
1.Object PCB hasn’t been selected.
2.Dummy file was deleted because of
error.
Counter measures :
1.Select PCB.
2.Select [A1 OBJECT SELECTION] and
exit.
( DATA GENERATOR OBJECT ERROR
$ Dummy file for DATA GENERATOR
doesn’t exist.
Possible cause :
1.Object PCB or line hasn’t been
selected..
2.Dummy file was deleted because of
error.
Counter measures :
1.Select PCB and line.
2.Select [A1 OBJECT SELECTION] and
exit.
( DATA GENERATOR OBJECT ERROR PHDQLQJBecause PCB data is not selected, the command is not available.
% This command is not available until you FDXVHSame as above.
select PCB data.
UHPHG\Select PCB data before executing the command.
( DATA GENERATOR OBJECT ERROR PHDQLQJBecause PCB data,line is not selected, the command is not availa-
ble.
$ This command is not available until you FDXVHSame as above.
select PCB data and line.
UHPHG\Select PCB, line before executing the command.
( You have not specified a Machine PHDQLQJThe machine number which serves as the target for creating data
Number. Please select, at least, one has not been selected.
number.
FDXVHSame as above.
UHPHG\Select the machine.
( The dummy file for current object PCB PHDQLQJThe dummy file of PCB data which currently serves as the target for
will be deleted. Will you continue? To creating data will be lost if the command about to be executed is actually exe-
abort this process, press [ESC] key. cuted.
FDXVHSame as above.
UHPHG\If losing the dummy file will cause problems, press the ESC key. If the
dummy file can be deleted, press any other key.

( Nozzle settings are shown below. PHDQLQJThis shows how the nozzles will be attached as specified by the PCB
data, following creation of the data.
% A TABLE:[Upper = Head No., Lower = FDXVHNone
Nozzle Type]
Head 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 UHPHG\None
14 15 16
Nzl. 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 5
Nozzle Type]
Head 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16
Nzl. 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 5
( Nozzle settings are shown below.
$ Machine 2
A TABLE:[Upper = Head No., Lower =
Nozzle Type]
Head 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16
Nzl. 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 5
Nozzle Type]
Head 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16
Nzl. 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 5
( This PCB is already selected. PHDQLQJThe PCB you are trying to select has already been selected.
FDXVHSame as above.
UHPHG\None
( You cannot select any more PCB. PHDQLQJThe number of PCBs you are trying to select as fixed PCBs for data
creation exceeds the allowable number
FDXVHAn attempt was made to register five or more PCBs as fixed PCBs.
UHPHG\Select one of the PCBs already registered as a fixed PCB and cancel it.
( No type of nozzle can pickup the com- PHDQLQJAn attempt was made to pick up components without an appropriate
ponent. nozzle.
Component 150 FDXVHThe setting in the component data for the nozzles to be used is wrong.
Check Point: UHPHG\Go back to the editing screen and check the component data.
Required Nozzle(Component data)
Nozzle Information
( No head to attach the nozzle to in order PHDQLQJThere is no head to which a nozzle which can be used to pick up the
to pickup the component. components can be attached.
Component 150 FDXVHIf the setting for the recommended nozzle is set to "None", the nozzles
has already been decided by the user, and there is no empty space; or a fixed
feeder is being used, and the appropriate nozzles cannot be attached to a head
which will reach that feeder. Also, it may be that a head has been installed
which cannot move into the work area, so the nozzle cannot be attached to it.
Check Point: UHPHG\Go back to the editing screen and change the nozzle position or the
feeder position.
Nozzle Setting (In case of
NO_NOZZLE_SUGGESTION)
Feeder Position (In case of fixed feeder)
Un-used Head (In case of 112)

( Failed to distribute feeder. PHDQLQJAn error occurred in the feeder layout when creating the data.
No place to fix the component. FDXVHBecause the data is too complex, ultimately there are no more places
where feeders can be attached. Or there are too many feeders, so that the lay-
out is logistically impossible
Component 150 UHPHG\Try fixing the setting position for the component where the problem is
occurring, or shift that component to another machine.
Check Point: Fix the position of the com-
ponent.
( Failed to copy PCB data. PHDQLQJAn error occurred in copying the PCB data.
FDXVHÊThere is no space available on the hard disk, or there is a problem with
the hard disk.
( NOZZLE SET INFORMATION ERROR PHDQLQJWhen the nozzle configuration was edited, a setting was used which
attaches a nozzle to a head which can not accommodate that nozzle.
The selected nozzle cannot be fixed to FDXVHSame as above.
this head.
UHPHG\Do not attach that nozzle to that head.
( COMMAND ERROR PHDQLQJThe nozzle setting is possible only when the nozzle setting condi-
tions are edited manually.
[A2 NOZZLE SETTING] is available only FDXVHThe nozzle setting was selected even though the nozzle setting condi-
in the case that you select EDITING for tions must be edited manually.
NZL.CONDITION SEL.
But you can change to EDITING tempo- UHPHG\Do not change that setting, or edit the setting conditions manually.
rarily. (while you don't exit from making
data mode) If you want to change, push
the [ENTER] key. If you don't want to
change, push any other key.
( No head available to handle the compo- PHDQLQJNo head exists which can be used with the components.
nent.
Component 150 FDXVHBecause the components are too big, there is no head to which an
appropriate nozzle can be attached, or there is something wrong with the com-
ponent data setting specifying the nozzle to be used.
Check Point: UHPHG\Go back to the editing screen and check the component data.
Component Size
Required Nozzle(Component data)
( Wait a moment while PHDQLQJPCB data is being copied. This is not an error message.
copying PCB data.... FDXVHNone
UHPHG\Please wait until the data has been copied.

% XY TABLE[Upper = Head No., Lower =
Nozzle Type]
Head 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Nzl. 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2


$ Machine 2
XY TABLE[Upper = Head No., Lower =
Nozzle Type]
Head 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Nzl. 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
( There is no more than two mount data. PHDQLQJThe bulk substitution and component separation functions cannot be
used because there is no data in the placing information.
In this condition, this function is not FDXVHNo placing information exists.
available. You can not select
"REPLACE" or "MULTIPLY COMPO-
NENT" when Component data is not
available.
UHPHG\Input the placing data.
( There is no more than two componet PHDQLQJThe bulk substitution and component separation functions cannot be
data. used because there is no component data.
In this condition, this function is not FDXVHNo component information exists.
available. You can not select
"REPLACE" or "MULTIPLY COMPO-
NENT" when Component data is not
available.
UHPHG\Input the component information.
( There is no more than two mount or PHDQLQJThe component number control function cannot be used because
component data. there is no data in the component or placing information.
In this condition, this function is not FDXVHThere is no component or placing information.
available. You can not select "RENUM-
BER COMPONENT" tavailable. when
Component data or Mount data is not
available.
UHPHG\Input the component or placing information.
( Not find new Component number All PHDQLQJEditing is not possible because there is not enough space available
component number used for the remaining component data that has to be registered.
FDXVHThere is too much component data registered which is not needed, or
there is too much component data which is actually being used.
UHPHG\If too much unnecessary data has been registered, delete some of it.
In any other case, the supplementary editing function cannot be used.
( Failed to open component information. PHDQLQJAn error occurred in the component in formation file.
FDXVHThere is no space available on the hard disk, or there is a problem with
the hard disk.
( Failed to read component information. PHDQLQJAn error occurred in the component in formation file.
the hard disk.

( Failed to write component information. PHDQLQJAn error occurred in the component in formation file.
the hard disk.
( Component information are not PHDQLQJComponent information has not been selected.
selected.
FDXVHSame as above.
UHPHG\Select the component information.
( There are components on destination PHDQLQJWhen components are being moved in the component information, a
whose name is same as the one shown component with the same name already exists at the destination location.
below. Would you continue?
Component 3 FDXVHA component with the same name is already located at that destination.
Component Name R3216 UHPHG\If having two components with the same name at the destination is not
a problem, go ahead with the shift. Otherwise, press the ESC key to interrupt
the shift.
[ESC] key to abort

Other key to continue
( The component shown below can not be PHDQLQJIn the group of comp. being moved in the component information
moved because it doesn’t fulfill the con- screen, a component exists which uses fixed component reference function.
dition. The component will not be moved.
FDXVHSame as above.
Component 3 UHPHG\No remedy.
Component Name R3216
The condition for moving component

Not using fixed component reference
function
Using feeder optimization
( The component shown below uses PHDQLQJIn the group of components being moved on the component informa-
"Teaching" for "Feeder Position". Would tion screen, feeder position coordinates exist which are teaching data.
you continue?
Component 3 FDXVHSame as above.
Component Name R3216 UHPHG\To cancel the movement because of the position coordinate teaching,
press the ESC key. To continue the movement press any other key.
[ESC] key to abort
( The component is multipled. PHDQLQJWhen you execute the multiply component, you select whether using
alternate component or not. This component is already alternated, this function
is not used.
Would you define as the alternate com- (cause)
ponent?
[ESC] key is not. (remedy)
Other key is defined.

( Failed to open PCB data. PHDQLQJAn error occurred when opening the PCB file.
Machine 2 FDXVHThere is no space available on the hard disk, or there is a problem with
the hard disk.
PCB CUK93001 UHPHG\If there is no space available, back up any unnecessary PCB data and
( Failed to read PCB data. PHDQLQJAn error occurred when opening the PCB file.
the hard disk.
( Failed to write PCB data. PHDQLQJAn error occurred when opening the PCB file.
the hard disk.
( Failed to copy PCB data. PHDQLQJAn error occurred when opening the PCB file.
the hard disk.
( Failed to fix the component in PCB. PHDQLQJFixed components in the PCB data cannot be fixed.
Machine 2 FDXVHThe components cannot be fixed because they interfere with another
feeder which has already been fixed.
PCB CUK93001 UHPHG\Do not attempt to fix the components causing the interference, or stop
trying to fix the components which are currently displayed.
( Fixed component information error PHDQLQJAn error occurred when opening the fixed component information file.
Failed to open fixed component informa- FDXVHThere is no space available on the hard disk, or there is a problem with
tion. the hard disk.
then delete it. If there is a problem with the disk, check to see how often the
problem occurs, and contact the manufacturer.
( Fixed component information error PHDQLQJAn error occurred when opening the fixed component information
file.
Failed to read fixed component informa- FDXVHThere is no space available on the hard disk, or there is a problem with
( Fixed component information error PHDQLQJAn error occurred when opening the fixed component information
file.
Failed to write fixed component informa- FDXVHThere is no space available on the hard disk, or there is a problem with

( Fixed component information error PHDQLQJThe specified fixed component information does not exist.
Specified fixed component doesn’t exist. FDXVHThere was an error in registering the fixed component reference
number, or the fixed component has not yet been registered.
UHPHG\Go back to the editing screen and check the reference number for the
fixed component. If the fixed component has not yet been registered register it.
( Fixed component information error PHDQLQJThe component name registered in the PCB data is different from the
fixed component being referenced by that component.
"Component Name" are different FDXVHSame as above.
between PCB data and fixed compo-
nent.
UHPHG\Change the component name in the PCB data to match that of the
fixed component.
( Fixed component information error PHDQLQJThe name of the feeder being used in the PCB data is different from
the fixed component feeder being referenced by that component.
"Feeder Type" are different between FDXVHSame as above.
PCB data and fixed component.
UHPHG\Change the name of the feeder being used in the PCB data to match
that of the fixed component feeder.
( You can’t multiply such a component as PHDQLQJAn attempt was made to input multiple components referencing fixed
components on the component information screen.
_E Using fixed component reference FDXVHSame as above.
function
_E Not using feeder optimization UHPHG\There cannot be more than one component referencing any particular
fixed component.
_E Tray components
( Failed to fix the component in fixed com- PHDQLQJComponents registered in the fixed components cannot be fixed.
ponent.
FDXVHThe components cannot be fixed because they interfere with another
feeder which has already been fixed.
UHPHG\Edit the fixed component information and delete the component which
is causing the interference.
( Alternative component error PHDQLQJAn error occurred when reading the alternative component data.
Failed to read alternative component. FDXVHThe data for the alternative component specified by the component data
does not exist, or there is a problem with the hard disk.
UHPHG\Go back to the editing screen, and if the alternative component does
not exist, register it, or change the number of the alternative component. If there
is a problem with the hard disk, check to see how often it occurs, and contact
the manufacturer.
( Alternative component error PHDQLQJThe settings for alternative components must form a loop that goes
from 1 to 2 to 3 and back to 1 again, but they do not form this loop.
Loop is not perfect. FDXVHThe alternative component settings go from 1 to 2 to 3 and then stop, or
form a figure 6 by going from 1 to 2 to 3 and back to 2 again.
UHPHG\Go back to the editing screen and check the alternative component
numbers.

( Alternative component error PHDQLQJThere is no alternative component data.

Alternative component specified in the FDXVHThe user has forgotten to register the alternative components, or there
data doesn’t exist. is a registration error in the alternative component number.
Machine YV112 UHPHG\Go back to the editing screen and register the alternative components,
or change the number of the alternative components.
Component 3
( Alternative component error PHDQLQJThe feeder being used for alternative components is not the same
feeder that was used for the original components.
"Feeder Type" is not same as original FDXVHSame as above.
one.
In Static Components, the component UHPHG\The feeder being used for alternative components must match the
data of same name are dealed with the feeder that was used for the original components.
alternative component. Each alternative
components need to same the above
condition.
( Alternative component error PHDQLQJThe nozzle being used for alternative components is not the same
nozzle that was used for the original components.
"Required Nozzle" is not same as origi- FDXVHSame as above.
nal one.
In Static Components, the component UHPHG\Go back to the editing screen and make the nozzle being used for
data of same name are dealed with the alternative components match the nozzle that was used for the original compo-
alternative component. Each alternative nents.
condition.
( Alternative component error PHDQLQJThe setting for the "count out stop" function used with alternative
components does not match that used with the original components.
"CountOutStop" is not same as original FDXVHSame as above.
one.
In Static Components,the component UHPHG\The setting for the "count out stop" function used with alternative com-
data of same name are dealed with the ponents must match that used with the original components.
condition.
( Alternative component error PHDQLQJIn the alternative components loop, all of the settings for "Use" or
"Don’t Use" must be set to the same setting.
"UpdateGroupNo" must be all positive or FDXVHIn the alternative components loop, some of the components reference
all 0 in loop. fixed components, while some do not.
In Static Components,the component UHPHG\Go back to the editing screen and change the settings so that they all
data of same name are dealed with the reference fixed components, or none of them do.
condition.
( Alternative component error PHDQLQJIn the alternative components loop, there are components with differ-
ent mounting tables.
Mount table is not same as original one. FDXVHWhen the settings for the alternative components are 1 --> 2 --> 3, No. 3
is attached to Table B although Nos. 1 and 2 are attached to Table A, or a differ-
ent combination of the above.
UHPHG\Go back to the editing screen and change the feeder setting numbers
so that all of the alternative components are assigned to the same mounting table.

( Alternative component error PHDQLQJThe alternative components cannot be used as tray components.
You can’t use alternative function for FDXVHAn attempt was made to use alternative components as tray compo-
tray. nents.
UHPHG\Go back to the editing screen and change the alternative component
number for the tray components to 0.
( Alternative component error PHDQLQJThe name of the alternative component does not match the name of
the original component.
"Component Name" are different from FDXVHSame as above.
original one.
UHPHG\Go back to the editing screen and change the name of the alternative
component so it matches that of the original component.
( Failed to open fixed component match- PHDQLQJAn error occurred in opening the work file for the fixed component
ing work file. matching
the hard disk.
( Failed to read fixed component match- PHDQLQJAn error occurred in opening the work file for the fixed component
the hard disk.
( Failed to write fixed component match- PHDQLQJAn error occurred in opening the work file for the fixed component
the hard disk.
( Failed to open fixed component work PHDQLQJAn error occurred in opening the work file for the fixed component
file. matching
the hard disk.
( Failed to read fixed component work file. PHDQLQJAn error occurred in opening the work file for the fixed component
matching
the hard disk.

( Failed to write fixed component work PHDQLQJAn error occurred in opening the work file for the fixed component
file. matching
the hard disk.
( You can’t multiply component so many PHDQLQJWhen component separation is done on the component information
times. screen, the number of component divisions exceeds the upper limit.
FDXVHAn excessively large value was input for the number of component divi-
sions
UHPHG\Reduce the number of component divisions.
( Mount data specifies too big component PHDQLQJThe component number specified in the mounting data exceeds the
number. maximum number of components that the machine can accommodate.
FDXVHThe number input for the components in the mounting data is too large.
UHPHG\Go back to the editing screen and correct the component number in
the mounting data.
( Selected PCB is not registered in PHDQLQJThe selected PCB data has not been registered on the selected line.
selected line.
FDXVHThere is an error in the selection of either the line or the PCB data, or
the PCB data has not been registered.
UHPHG\Correct the selection of either the line or the PCB data, or register the
PCB data.
( Too much point, local and 4-point fidu- PHDQLQJThere are too many elements of point, local or 4-point fiducial data.
cial data.
FDXVHToo many point, local or 4-point fiducials are being used.
UHPHG\Reduce the number of point, local or 4-point fiducials.
( Too much mark data. PHDQLQJThere are too many elements of mark data.
FDXVHThere are too many elements of mark data being used for fiducials and
bad marks.
UHPHG\Reduce the mark data.
( Illegal mark number is specified in fidu- PHDQLQJThe number of the mark specified in the fiducial data.
cial data.
FDXVHSame as above.
UHPHG\Go back to the editing screen and correct the mark number in the fidu-
cial data.
( Have you saved component informa- PHDQLQJBefore fixed component matching is carried out on the component
tion? information screen, the component information must first be saved. This is a
confirmation message asking if the information has been saved, and not an
error message.
[ESC] key to abort fixed comp. match FDXVHNone
Other key to exec fixed comp. match UHPHG\If the data has not been saved, press the ESC key. After the data has
been saved, try the fixed component matching. If the data has already been
saved, press any other key to proceed.

( Have you saved component informa- PHDQLQJBefore fixed component matching is carried out on the component infor-
tion? mation screen, the component information must first be saved. This is a confirma-
tion message asking if the information has been saved, and not an error message.
[ESC] key to abort auto distribution FDXVHNone
Other key to exec auto distribution UHPHG\If the data has not been saved, press the ESC key. After the data has
been saved, try the fixed component matching. If the data has already been
saved, press any other key to proceed.
( Failed to open nozzle combination infor- PHDQLQJAn error occurred when opening the nozzle settings file.
mation.
the hard disk.
( Failed to read nozzle combination infor- PHDQLQJAn error occurred when opening the nozzle settings file.
mation.
the hard disk.
( Failed to write nozzle combination infor- PHDQLQJAn error occurred when opening the nozzle settings file.
mation.
the hard disk.
( Failed to read machine configuration. PHDQLQJAn error occurred when reading the machine configuration file.
Machine 2 FDXVHThe software versions do not match, or there is a problem with the hard
disk.
UHPHG\Check the software versions, and contact the manufacturer.
( Failed to read machine data. PHDQLQJAn error occurred when reading the machine data.
Machine 2 FDXVHNo machine data has been registered; machine data has been regis-
tered which is different from the registered model number; or there is a problem
with the hard disk.
UHPHG\Check to see if the machine data has been registered correctly. If the
problem occurs even if the data has been registered, check to see how often it
occurs, and contact the manufacturer.
( Failed to read machine specification. PHDQLQJAn error occurred when reading the machine specifications.
Machine 2 FDXVHThe software versions do not match, or there is a problem with the hard
disk.
UHPHG\Check the software versions, and contact the manufacturer.
( Now copying PCB data to work data PHDQLQJThe PCB data is being copied as work data for creating data. This is
not an error message.
(DUMMY_GENERATOR). FDXVHNone
UHPHG\Wait for the process to be completed.

( Generating nozzle file. PHDQLQJThe nozzle file is being created. This is not an error message.
FDXVHNone
( Accessing disk. PHDQLQJThe disk is being accessed. This is not an error message.
Wait a few moment. FDXVHNone
( Fail to make work data PHDQLQJFail to make the DUMMY_GENERATOR.
(DUMMY_GENERATOR).
Using the different make data of PCB FDXVHIn PCB Inf., difference mark number is used between the machines.
Information between the machines.
UHPHG\Using the same mark number in PCB Inf. among the machines.
( PCB name and line name were not chosen. PHDQLQJYou didn’t choose PCB and line name.
If both of them are not chosen, you can’t FDXVHexiting without choice.
make data. If you want to make data,
choose again.
UHPHG\If you haven’t chosen, Choose. If you stop making data, no need.
( QUICK STOP ACTIVE: "NJ06 FRONT- PHDQLQJAn emergency stop has occurred because the front cover of Table A
RIGHT COVER" is open, and the interlock has been activated.
QUICK STOP FUNCTION for safety is FDXVHThe cover on the front side is open, or the sensor is defective.
now active. To continue, please assure
that the front-right cover is correctly
closed.
UHPHG\Close the cover.
( QUICK STOP ACTIVE: "NJ07 A TABLE, PHDQLQJThe interlock has been activated because the external axis cover of
Y AXIS COVER" Table A is open.
QUICK STOP FUNCTION for safety is FDXVHThe cover on the front side is open, or the sensor is defective.
that the A table, Y Axis cover is correctly
closed.
( QUICK STOP ACTIVE: "NJ10 FRONT- PHDQLQJThe front feeder sensor on the machine has detected that a feeder is
FEEDER SENSOR" not securely seated.
QUICK STOP FUNCTION for safety is FDXVHA feeder is not attached properly, or the sensor is malfunctioning. This
now active. To continue, please assure message may also be displayed during an emergency stop, but this is normal
that the front feeders are inserted cor- and does not indicate a problem.
rectly.
UHPHG\In any case other than an emergency stop, check to make sure the
feeders are attached properly.
( QUICK STOP ACTIVE: "NM06 REAR- PHDQLQJThe rear cover of Table B is open.
RIGHT COVER"
QUICK STOP FUNCTION for safety is FDXVHA cover is open, or the sensor is defective.
that the rear-right cover is correctly
closed.
( QUICK STOP ACTIVE: "NM07 B TABLE PHDQLQJThe interlock has been activated because the front axis cover of
Y AXIS COVER" Table B is open.
UHPHG\Store the pallet in a position in the magazine where it does not acti-
vate the pallet eject sensor.

( INTERLOCK ERROR PHDQLQJThe pallet has been pulled out of the external tray changer.
One pallet of tray unit is on the table. FDXVHAn attempt was made to restart operation with the Emergency Stop but-
Please set it into the rack. ton pressed and the pallet pulled out of the external tray changer.
UHPHG\Store the pallet which has been pulled out on the table back in the tray
changer manually.
( INTERLOCK ERROR PHDQLQJThe status of the operation sensor in the latching section where pal-
lets are stored in the tray changer is inappropriate for movement.
Pallet latch condition is illegal. Please FDXVHThe operation of the latch sensor is inappropriate.
check latch sensor.
UHPHG\Re-adjust the latch sensor, or push the pallet to a position where the
sensor operates correctly.
( DEFINED MAXIMUM AMOUNT OF PHDQLQJ The number of PCBs specified for use in the unloader have already
PCBs been unloaded to the next process, but the unloader is still waiting for a reset
signal.
FOR THE UNLOADER IS REACHED: FDXVHThe unloader has reached the limit number of PCBs, and has reached
the number specified by the unloader quantity/capacity parameter in the PCB
information, so unloading of PCBs has been stopped.
A) Waiting for the reset-signal from the UHPHG\Replace the unloader rack, or if the control is defective, set the
un-loader, or.. unloader quantity/capacity parameter to 0.
B) Hit any key to restart for new reck.
Set the parameter [Pcb/Unloader], in the
[PCB information] menu to 0 to ignore
this.
( DEFINED PRODUCTION AMOUNT OF PHDQLQJ Production has been stopped because the specified number of
PCBs IS REACHED. PCBs have been produced.
To continue the production, set the [Pcb/ FDXVH The number of PCBs to be produced has been specified in the PCB
Schedule] parameter to 0. When switch- information and that number has been reached.
ing the PCB data, make sure that there
is no PCB on the buffer conveyor.
UHPHG\Shift to the PCB information, and on the PCB information screen,
specify the additional number of PCBs to be produced. Then start the operation
again.
( Ready to start WARMING UP. PHDQLQJThis is a notice that warmup operation is beginning.
REMOVE: FDXVHThe warmup instruction has been issued.
■ Any board on the conveyor UHPHG\Nothing needs to be done. This is not an error.
■ All Push-up pins.
■ other obstructing items.
Push the [ESC] key to abort WARMING
UP and to return to the command menu.
( Now WARMING UP ..... PHDQLQJThis indicates that warmup is in progress.
Press the [ENTER] key to stop WARM- FDXVHNone
ING UP.
UHPHG\None

( Stopped according to CONVEY OUT PHDQLQJAfter components have been mounted on the PCB and the eject
PCB command. When switching the command has been used, the equipment stopped.
PCB data, make sure that there is no
PCB on the buffer conveyor.
FDXVHThe components have been mounted on the PCB and the eject com-
mand was issued. Mounting of all PCBs being loaded at that point is brought to
a stop.
UHPHG\ To continue production, press the Run key at this point. Operation will
be restarted.
( EMERGENCY STOP function is now PHDQLQJ When operation is concluded, an emergency stop is in progress,
active. Select power off sequence: and there are several steps that have to be taken in order to turn the power sup-
ply off.
[READY] : power off sequence is active. FDXVHAn emergency stop is in progress.
[ENTER] : power off sequence is in- UHPHG\Press the Ready button to cancel the emergency stop status.
active.
( Be careful for Safety !!! Machine axes PHDQLQJThis is a warning message alerting the user that the axis is going to
will move. move in order to end the processing. It is not an error.
[ENTER] : execute FDXVHNone
[Others] : abort UHPHG\Press the Enter key to conclude the processing.
( Machine is changing the back light posi- PHDQLQJThis notifies the user that the backlighting illumination is being
tion moved to the right.
to the right now! Please wait... FDXVHNone
UHPHG\Wait until the message disappears from the screen.
( Failed to search origin PHDQLQJAn error occurred in the servo system hardware when a return to the
origin point was carried out.
by EMERGENCY SWITCH or SERVO FDXVHThe Emergency Stop button was pressed during a return to the origin
ERROR. point, or the servo is defective.
UHPHG\Do not use the Emergency Stop button while a return to the origin
point is in progress. Check how often the problem occurs, and contact the man-
ufacturer.
( ILLEGAL TRAY DATA DURING RUN- PHDQLQJA problem occurred with tray changer control during operation.
NING-1
Meaning: Illegal data during running. FDXVHBecause the operation is complex, the system has lost track of where
the component is.
Recovering: Pls. RESET RUNNING. UHPHG\Reset the system.
( ILLEGAL TRAY DATA DURING RUN- PHDQLQJA problem occurred with tray changer control during operation.
NING-2
Meaning: Illegal data during running. FDXVHBecause the operation is complex, the system has lost track of where
the component is.
Recovering: Pls. RESET RUNNING. UHPHG\Reset the system.
( CO-PLANARITY CHECK ERROR PHDQLQJA lead which is not securely attached has been detected, but the
sensor which causes the head to descend has not reacted.
Head down position sensor error. FDXVHThe sensor has malfunctioned, or there is a problem with the position
Please check the mechanical position of coordinates of the device which detects leads which are not securely attached.
Co-Planarity sensor and sensor sensiv-
ity.
UHPHG\ Trace the position coordinates using the machine data editing func-
tion, and check the operation of the sensor.

( CO-PLANARITY CHECK ERROR PHDQLQJWhen an attempt was made to detect loose leads, the safety check
sensor on the device which detects leads which are not securely attached
alerted the user of danger.
Horizontal scanning safety check sensor FDXVHThe sensor may have reacted to the sensor which prevents contact
of Co-Planarity checked danger. Bad between the nozzles and components and the loose lead detection (co-
position of Co-Planarity sensor, or pick- planarity) unit.
ing error is too big. his component. Or
size of component is no good. Please
check these items.
UHPHG\Check the relative heights of the units, and if the sensor needs to be
adjusted, adjust it. Otherwise, if the pickup tolerance for the components is
excessive, adjust the pickup position.
( CO-PLANARITY CHECK ERROR PHDQLQJThere is a problem with the position data for the loose lead detection
(co-planarity) unit.
Error of position of Co-Planarity Check FDXVHThe data has not been adjusted properly.
sensor. Please check the mechanical
position of Co-Planarity Check sensor.
UHPHG\Re-adjust the data.
( CO-PLANARITY CHECK ERROR PHDQLQJAn attempt was made to detect loose leads on a component which is
not within the specifications of the loose lead detection (co-planarity) unit.
This component is out of regulation. of FDXVHDetection of loose leads is specified in the data for components whose
Co-Planarity Check sensor. Only specifications do not allow this type of detection.
"QFP","SOP"is suitable. Or 20.5mm
square is minimum size and 45mm
square is maximum size for Co-Planarity
check.
UHPHG\If there is an error in the component size or other data, change the
input value. Otherwise do not specify that the loose lead detection (co-planarity)
function be used.
( CO-PLANARITY CHECK ERROR PHDQLQJBecause the pickup tolerance is excessive, the loose lead detection
(co-planarity) unit cannot be used.
Picking position is bad for Co-Planarity FDXVHThe pickup tolerance is excessive.
Check. Picking error is too large for Co-
Planarity. Please check the picking posi-
tion.
UHPHG\Raise the level of the pickup precision, or stabilize the pickup condi-
tions.
( CO-PLANARITY CHECK ERROR PHDQLQJA lead has been detected which is not within the range set for results
of loose lead detection (co-planarity).
Co-linearity check found the lead out of FDXVHThe lead on the component is not securely attached.
tolerance.
UHPHG\Do not use that component, or, if the value set for loose lead detection
(co-planarity) is too strict, change it to a more lenient setting.

( CO-PLANARITY CHECK ERROR PHDQLQJDuring detection of loose leads, the pickup sensor which checks for
the presence of components detects that there are no more components.
Vacuum check error. FDXVH The component may have fallen off during lead detection, or the pickup
and mounting level has not been set properly.
UHPHG\Check to see if the component is still on the nozzle, and check the set-
ting of the pickup and mounting level.
( CO-PLANARITY CHECK ERROR PHDQLQJCommunication with the loose lead detection (co-planarity) unit is not
CO-PLANARITY CHECK ERRORdition FDXVHThere is a problem with the communications cable connecting the loose
Error. lead detection (co-planarity) unit, or the unit itself is defective
Please once reset and run. Co-Planarity UHPHG\Contact the manufacturer.
Check sensor and board Condition
Error. Please once reset and run.
In case machine does not recover by this
way, please check the indicator of Lase
Lead Locator board. If it is flashing in
red, once power off and power on again.
( CO-PLANARITY CHECK ERROR PHDQLQJAn error occurred in detecting loose leads (checking co-planarity).
Co-Planarity Check sensor cannot get FDXVHThe component lead does not pass through the area it must be in in
good result. Please check the mechanical order for loose leads to be detected.
position. of Co-Planarity Check sensor.
UHPHG\Re-adjust the height data and the X and Y position data for the loose
lead detection (co-planarity) unit, which are found among the component thick-
ness or the mechanical coordinates.
( CO-PLANARITY CHECK ERROR PHDQLQJThe conditions necessary for executing loose lead detection (co-
planarity) have not been met.
Co-Planarity Check sensor data error.", FDXVHThe data has not been specified correctly.
"SOP". In case for using Co-Planarity
Check these conditions are need,
1.Vision type is suitable only UHPHG\Check to see whether the recognition type is set to QFP or SOP, and
"QFP","SOP". that the loose lead detection (co-planarity) unit has been installed. If the above
conditions cannot be met do not use the loose lead detection (co-planarity) unit.
2.There is option of Co-Planarity.
3.Component size is within reguration.
( RETRY active. PHDQLQJThis is not an error message.
FDXVHNone
UHPHG\None
( PCB name : [CUK93001 ] PHDQLQJThis is a warning that PCB data exists which has been edited, but the
revised version has not been backed up.
CAUTION: PCB data is new or changed FDXVHThere is PCB data for which changes have been entered, but the
and requires a backup. revised data has not been backed up.
Insert a backup DISKETTE in the UHPHG\Insert the PCB data disk in the floppy disk drive and press the Enter
FLOPPY DRIVE, select "START MAIN- key. To proceed without backing up the data, simply press the ESC key.
TENANCE" and press the [ENTER] key,
or.. Press the [ESC] key to skip the
backup.
( PCB name : [CUK93001 ] PHDQLQJThis message indicates that data is being backed up. It is not an
error message.
Writing backup data now. FDXVHNone
Please wait a moment.... UHPHG\Wait until the process has been completed.

( PCB name : [CUK93001 ] PHDQLQJAn attempt was made to back up data, but no floppy disk which can
read the data has been inserted in the drive.
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE is not ready. FDXVHThe backup process was started without inserting the floppy disk.
Data cannot be backed up. UHPHG\Insert the floppy disk and then press the Enter key once more. If no
floppy disk is available, press the ESC key.
( PCB name : [CUK93001 ] PHDQLQJAn attempt was made to back up data, but the floppy disk has not yet
been made the PCB data disk.
DISK is not prepared for VIOS. FDXVHA floppy disk is being used for which the PCB data disk creation com-
mand has not been used to make it a PCB data disk.
Data cannot be backed up. UHPHG\Use a floppy disk which has been made into the PCB data disk using
the PCB data disk creation command. To cancel the backup process, press the
ESC key.
( PCB name : [CUK93001 ] PHDQLQJAn error occurred when backing up data.
Cannot execute data backup. The rea- FDXVHThe floppy disk is full; there is a faulty sector on the disk; or the floppy
son is as follows. disk was ejected before the backup process was completed.
■ Floppy disk is full. UHPHG\Insert a different PCB data disk and execute the command again.
■ Floppy disk has bad sector.
( PCB name : [CUK93001 ]
Now reading data.
Please wait a moment....
/0000/1000/E
( OPTION ERROR PHDQLQJAn attempt was made to use optional equipment which has not been
installed, or an option is being used which can be used only with the mounter
itself.
This option is not implemented in this FDXVHSame as above.
software. This function is available only
in the surface-mounter.
UHPHG\None
( OPTION ERROR PHDQLQJAn attempt was made to use optional equipment which has not been
installed, or an option is being used which can be used only with the mounter
itself.
software. This function is not available.
UHPHG\None
( COMMAND ERROR PHDQLQJAn item has been selected which cannot be used because the pro-
tective license has not been input.
You cannot select this item, because the FDXVHThe protective license has not been input.
PROTECT LICENSE is not given.
UHPHG\Input the protective license and run the process again.
( RUNNING PCB NOT SELECTED PHDQLQJThe selected command cannot be executed because the PCB to be
produced in the automatic operation mode has not been decided.
Because "PRODUCTION PCB" had not FDXVHThe PCB to be produced in the automatic operation mode has not been
indicated in the <<RUNNING>> mode, decided.
you cannot select this mode at this
moment.
UHPHG\Specify the PCB to be produced in the automatic operation mode and
then execute the command again.

( OPTION ERROR PHDQLQJAn attempt was made to use optional equipment designed for a dif-
ferent model.
software. This function is for an other UHPHG\None
type of machine.
( WARNING: NOT ENOUGH HDD PHDQLQJThis alerts the user to danger arising from the remaining capacity of
SPACE the hard disk dropping to less than 10 megabytes.
Free space on Hard Disk is less than FDXVHThere is too much data.
10MB. To avoid the possibility that you
cannot save new data anymore and that
data might get lost, it is best to create,
now, new space on the hard disk. Copy
unused PCB data to floppy, and delete
from the hard disk.
UHPHG\Back up any unnecessary PCB data and delete it from the hard disk.
( ERROR:NOT A MOUNT DATA. PHDQLQJA function which can only be used with the placing information has
been selected although the placing information is not shown on the editing
screen.
This function is available only if OBJECT FDXVHThe placing information is not shown on the editing screen.
is MOUNT.
Please select MOUNT in [A1 MAIN UHPHG\Change the editing screen to show the placing information.
WINDOW] at first.
( HardWare-key is not ready. PHDQLQJ The hard keys provided by the manufacturer have not been con-
nected to the personal computer for which the offline software is designed.
Put HardWare-key to the printer port, FDXVHThe computer does not have the proper hard keys, or the hard keys
and boot again. have not been correctly installed in the printer terminal.
UHPHG\Install the hard keys correctly in the printer terminal.
( You can’t add any more PCB data. PHDQLQJNo more PCB data can be registered.
Copy PCB data to floppy disk, and FDXVHThere is not enough space left on the hard disk, or the number of PCB
reduce the number of PCB data in HDD. data registered exceeds the allowable limit.
UHPHG\Back up any unnecessary PCB data and delete it from the hard disk.
( Only the machine data of the surface PHDQLQJOnly the machine data of the surface mounter and the dispenser can
mounter and the dispenser can be be edited.
edited in this mode.
FDXVHSame as above.
UHPHG\None
( This machine is not UFOS type. PHDQLQJAn attempt was made to carry out UFOS/ VIOS conversion on a
VIOS machine.
Copy into the data area for UFOS FDXVHSame as above.
machine to convert. UHPHG\Switch the screen to a registered UFOS machine and use that screen
for the UFOS/VIOS conversion.
( On PC, PHDQLQJWith the YVOS, floppy disks cannot be used to generate data for
UFOS/VIOS data conversion and VIOS printing data conversion.
UFOS(FD)<->VIOS CONVERT FDXVHThe data to be converted is contained on a floppy disk and not on the
hard disk.
VIOS->PRINT FORMAT(PRT\) UHPHG\Copy the data to be converted from the floppy disk to the hard disk
and then run the conversion function again.
is not able for a data on floppy. Copy into
the data area for UFOS machine in PC.

( Not enough memory to execute. PHDQLQJNot enough memory can be assured to run the program.
FDXVHThere is a problem with the board or another element.
UHPHG\Check to see how often the problem occurs, and contact the manufac-
turer.
( The data [STATIC_COMPONENTS] is PHDQLQJThe data called STATIC-COMPONENTS is called fixed component
component data common for all PCB information and is component information which is common to all PCBs. This
DATA in a machine. data is used with components which are not removed when setups are changed
on the feeder plate or tray changer. This is not an error message.
FDXVHNone
UHPHG\None
( FILE CHECK ERROR PHDQLQJAn error occurred when registering a machine.
There aren’t enough files on the backup FDXVHThe floppy disk used for the registration does not contain enough of the
disk. One of these is displayed down. necessary machine information files.
Press any key to abort.
UHPHG\Update the system data backup disk for that machine and then try the
registration again, using that disk.
( FILE COPY ERROR PHDQLQJAn error occurred when registering a machine.
The files cannot be copied from the FDXVH The machine information files may have been destroyed.
backup disk to hard disk. One of these is
displayed down.
Press any key to abort. UHPHG\ Update the system data backup disk for that machine and then try the
( NOT READY ERROR PHDQLQJThere is a machine for which registration has not yet been com-
pleted.
There is a machine information which FDXVHThere is a machine for which the F8 key has not been pressed on the
isn’t completed. If you abort, this system machine registration screen to complete the registration.
deletes such machine. Press [ENTER] UHPHG\To register the machine, press the F8 key on the machine registration
key to return command menu. To con- screen and follow the displayed instructions to complete the registration. Press-
tinue editing, press [ESC] key. To coming the ESC key deletes the machine without completing the registration.
plete the creation of machine, please
press [F8] key to load machine files.
( DELETE MACHINE PHDQLQJThe registered machine is being deleted. This is not an error mes-
sage
NUMBER: 2 FDXVHNone
NAME: SM112_NO1 UHPHG\To delete the machine, press the Enter key. To cancel the operation
TYPE: VIOS without deleting the machine, press the ESC key.
Press [ENTER] key to delete. Press
[ESC] key to abort.
( E1408 PHDQLQJThe registered line is being deleted. This is not an error message.
DELETE LINE FDXVHNone
NUMBER: 2 UHPHG\To delete the line, press the Enter key. To cancel the operation without
deleting the machine, press the ESC key.
NAME: SM112&YVL80
Press [ENTER] key to delete. Press
[ESC] key to abort.

( Failed to read local badmark data from Please check floppy disk is already inserted or not. If floppy disk is inserted nor-
floppy disk. Please check this. mally, data format may be wrong. Check the data in floppy disk
(1)Inserted floppy disk.
(2)No available data in floppy disk.
( You cannot select this mode, because [Please register machine to YVOS2 in
no machine has been registerd to
YVOS2. It is necessary to register
machine to YVOS2 in
[3/MAINTE/M]-[3/LINE_CONFIG]-[B1 [3/MAINTE/M]-[3/LINE_CONFIG]-[B1 SET MACHINE INF.].
SET MACHINE INF.].
( Fixed component not used.
( This fixed component not used.
( Now machine has been registered. Check the "Serial No." and "M.type" in
You check the Serial No. and M.type in [3/MAINTE/M]-[1/OPTION CONFIG.].
[3/MAINTE/M]-[1/OPTION CONFIG.]. If the machine is HYPER type, check the setting of
If machine is HYPER type, [1/OPTION CONFIG.].
( FILE COPY ERROR PHDQLQJAn error occurred when registering a machine.
There is no line recorded serial number. FDXVHThe machine may be old version.
Your machine may be old version. press
any key to abort.
UHPHG\Update the system data backup disk for that machine and then try the
( PHDQLQJThis is not an error message.
FDXVHNone
(remedy)
( PHDQLQJ This is not an error message.
FDXVHNone
(remedy)
( (meaning)
(cause)
(remedy)
( FILETABLE READ ERROR PHDQLQJ An error occurred when receiving the file table.
A file table cannot be read from a FDXVH The machine is not in the automatic operation mode, or the communi-
machine. cations circuit was disturbed by noise or another problem during reception of the
file table.
To read the file table, operation mode UHPHG\ Change the machine to the automatic mode, or check the communi-
must be in RUNNNING mode. cations circuit.
( COMUNICATION ERROR PHDQLQJAn error occurred in the RS-232C communications circuit.
Error source may be in next lines. FDXVHThere may have been a transmission time out error or a parity reception
data overrun.
¥Time out when sending UHPHG\The settings for the communications parameters are different for the
¥Framing error machine and the YVOS2. Also check the communications circuit connections.
¥Parity error
¥Received data over run
( CANSEL CODE RECIEVED PHDQLQJA cancel code was received from the machine.
Cancel code (0x03) is received from FDXVHDuring communication of an operation being carried out on the
machine. machine, a code was received by the YVOS2 which interrupted the communica-
tion.
UHPHG\Execute the command again.

( PCBFILE OPEN ERROR PHDQLQJThe data file to be used in the communications could not be opened.
Pcb data file cannot be open for commu- FDXVHThe hard disk is full and the data file for the communications could not
nication. Or system cannot make tempo- be created; or the data file to be transferred, such as the PCB data file, has been
rary file for communication. destroyed, so that it was not possible to create a data file for communications.
UHPHG\ Check the amount of space available on the hard disk, and the data to
be transferred.
( ABORT COMUNICATION PHDQLQJCommunications were interrupted by pressing the ESC key.
Because pressing [ESC] key, so com- FDXVHThe ESC key was pressed while communications were in progress.
munication stops.
UHPHG\Do not press the ESC key while communications are in progress.
( ERROR CODE RECIEVED PHDQLQJ An error code was received from the machine.
Error code or illegal code was received FDXVH When an attempt was made to execute the communications command,
from machine. the machine returned an error code indicating that the command could not be
executed.
UHPHG\ Follow the error message instructions from the machine to eliminate
the problem.
( PCB DATA ERROR PHDQLQJThere is an error in the data being sent or received.
There is no pcb name in communication FDXVH There is no PCB name in the data being sent or received; or the speci-
data. fied PCB name is different from the one in the file.
Or specified name is different from a UHPHG\ With VIOS data, update the file table With UFOS data, make sure the
name in the data. file name and the PCB name specified in the file are the same.
( DATA CONVERSION ERROR PHDQLQJAn error occurred when converting data to an ASCII file for trans-
mission.
It cannot be converted to communica- FDXVHThe file containing the original data may have been damaged.
tion file. Data conversion will do before
sending data or after receiving data.
UHPHG\Recover the data.
( SWITCH PCB ERROR PHDQLQJ The PCB being produced on the machine could not be switched
using online commands.
It cannot switch pcb data in machine by FDXVH The machine is in the automatic operation mode.
"@SWI" online command.
UHPHG\ Stop the machine and reset it. Then use online commands to switch
the PCB being produced.
( CMU ERROR PHDQLQJData communication was not possible.
Comunication error happens. FDXVHThere is a problem with the communications circuit.
UHPHG\Check the communications function of the personal computer that
contains the communications circuit.
( Please change communication line to PHDQLQJReconnect the communications cable to the machine which will be
next machine. used for the communications.
NAME: SM112_NO1 FDXVHIf the option settings for the YVOS2 indicate that the switching to the tar-
get machine is to be done manually this message indicates that the switching
should be done at this point.
TYPE: VIOS UHPHG\ If it is not necessary to connect the communications cable, set the
YVOS2 option settings so that the communications circuit is switched automatically.
CMU PORT: COM1
If all OK, press [ENTER] key to con-
tinue.

( AUTO DISTRIBUTION ERROR PHDQLQJ Failed to open the file for line data distribution.
Failed to open auto distribution informa- FDXVH Capacity shortage or defect of HDD.
tion.
Machine YV112 UHPHG\ Move seldom-used PCB data to floppy to increase HDD capacity. If
the problem still happens, Contact the manufacturer.
( AUTO DISTRIBUTION ERROR PHDQLQJ Failed to read the file for line data distribution.
Failed to read auto distribution informa- FDXVH Defect of HDD. Alternate component is used.
tion.
Machine YV112 UHPHG\ Contact the manufacturer. Not use the alternate component.
(1)Check the alternate component.
( AUTO DISTRIBUTION ERROR PHDQLQJFailed to write the file for line data distribution.
Failed to write auto distribution informa- FDXVH Capacity shortage or defect of HDD.
tion.
Machine YV112 UHPHG\ Move seldom-used PCB data to floppy to increase HDD capacity. If
the problem still happens, Contact the manufacturer.
( AUTO DISTRIBUTION ERROR PHDQLQJ No machine can handle the component.
No machine can handle the component (E1603 cause)In the case of tray component, the lack of tray changer can cause
shown below. this. Or Required Nozzle, mount position, AlignmentModule setting can cause
this.
Machine YV112 UHPHG\ Remove those causes described above.
Component 3
Check the component. (Tray Informa-
tion, Alignment type, Nozzle Type,
Mount Position, Dump Way)
( AUTO DISTRIBUTION MESSAGE PHDQLQJ The pickup position of the component is TEACHING. Can the AUTO
DISTRIBUTION move it?
The pickup position of the component FDXVH The setting of "Use feeder opt." Of this component is "Yes" although its
shown below is TEACHING. Is this mov- position is TEACHING.
able?
Machine YV112 UHPHG\ If it is unmovable, press [Esc] key to abort and set "No" for "Use
feeder opt". Or press other key to continue.
Component 3
Component Name R3216
[ESC] key to abort

( AUTO DISTRIBUTION ERROR PHDQLQJ AUTO DISTRIBUTION was aborted by user’s command. Not an
error message.
Aborted by command. (cause)
(remedy)
( AUTO DISTRIBUTION MESSAGE PHDQLQJThe number of mount and component data is so many that it may
cause data error in running mode.
The number of mount and component FDXVH Same as meaning.
data of the machine is so many that it
may cause PCB data error.
Machine YV112 UHPHG\ You had better move some data in 2/DATA/M 2/DATA_GENERATOR
A3 COMPONENT INF. But it can be OK even if you don’t modify data.
Auto distribution will be continued.

( AUTO DISTRIBUTION MESSAGE PHDQLQJ You must teach the pickup position of the stick component and set
"No" for "Use feeder opt." in component data.
The component shown below is stick FDXVH The setting of "Use feeder opt." Of the component is "Yes" although it is
component. Teach the pickup position of stick component.
the component and set "No" for "Use
feeder opt." of the component data.
Machine YV112 UHPHG\ Teach the pickup position at the machine and set "No" for "Use feeder
opt.".
Component 3
Component Name SOP16
( AUTO DISTRIBUTION MESSAGE PHDQLQJ The number of the displayed feeder is so many that it exceeds your
possession and may cause some error.
The number of the feeder is so many FDXVH Same as meaning.
that it may cause some error.
Feeder group Pneumatic type UHPHG\ You had better move some data in 2/DATA/M 2/DATA_GENERATOR
Feeder type 8mmTape A3 COMPONENT INF. But it can be OK even if you don’t modify data.
Auto distribution will be continued.
( AUTO DISTRIBUTION ERROR PHDQLQJ No machine can handle this components.
No machine can handle the component FDXVH The number of feeder is lucked in line, so this component can not move
shown below. each machines.
Component 3 UHPHG\ Remove those causes described above.
Check the feeder number of line.
( FIXED COMPONENT BIT ERROR PHDQLQJ Failed to read the file for fixed component bit.
Failed to read fixed component bit infor- FDXVH Defect of HDD.
mation.
Machine YV112 UHPHG\ Contact the manufacturer.
( FIXED COMPONENT BIT ERROR PHDQLQJ Failed to write the file for fixed component bit.
Failed to write fixed component bit infor- FDXVH Defect of HDD.
mation.
Machine YV112 UHPHG\ Contact the manufacturer.
( FIXED COMPONENT MASK ERROR PHDQLQJFailed to read the file for fixed component mask.
Failed to read fixed component mask FDXVHDefect of HDD.
information.
UHPHG\Contact the manufacturer.
( FIXED COMPONENT MASK ERROR PHDQLQJFailed to write the file for fixed component mask.
Failed to write fixed component mask FDXVH Defect of HDD.
information.
UHPHG\ Contact the manufacturer.
( Will you try cycle time estimation? PHDQLQJWill you try cycletime estimation following to data generation. This is
not an error.
[ESC] : No (cause)
Others: Yes (remedy)
( Will you try line data distribution? PHDQLQJ Will you try data generation following to cycletime estimation. This is
not an error.
[ESC] : No (cause)
Others: Yes (remedy)

( Alternative component error PHDQLQJ The Alignment Type used for alternative components is not the
same type that was used for the original components.
"Alignment Type" is not same as original FDXVH Same as above.
one.
In Static Components, the component UHPHG\ The Alignment Type used for alternative components must match the
data of same name are dealed with the type that was used for the original components.
alternative component.
Each alternative components need to
same the above condition.
( Alternative component error PHDQLQJ The Mount Action used for alternative components is not the same
type that was used for the original components.
"Mount Action" is not same as original FDXVH Same as above.
one.
In Static Components, the component UHPHG\ The Mount Action used for alternative components must match the
data of same name are dealed with the type that was used for the original components.
alternative component.
Each alternative components need to
same the above condition.
(
( FILE TABLE ERROR
Failed to open the "file table" file.
( FILE TABLE ERROR
Failed to read the "file table" file.
( FILE TABLE ERROR
Failed to write the "file table" file.
( FILE TABLE ERROR
Failed to seek the "file table" file.
( FILE TABLE ERROR
The PCB number is out of limit.
( FILE TABLE ERROR
The number of the record in "file table"
file exceeds. limit.
( FILE TABLE ERROR
Tried to write the record beyond the "file
table" file end.
( SYNTAX ERROR
A grammar mistake exists in the pro-
gram.
( DATA ERROR
There is a mistake in the input data for-
mat.
( NUMBER ERROR
There is a mistake in the input number.
There is a mistake in the value of the
expression.
( BIT NUMBER ERROR
A bit number is outside the range 1 to 16

( PORT NUMBER ERROR

There is a mistake in the input/output
port number.
Can not use ’I’ and ’O’ as the port
number.
( TABLE NUMBER ERROR
A table number is outside the range 0 to
9.
( DIGIT NUMBER ERROR
The digit of a binary numeral has
exceeded 16 digits. The decimal
numeral has exceeded 7 digits. The
hexadecimal numeral has exceeded 4
digits.
( ILLEGAL AXIS NAME
There is a mistake in the axis name.
( ILLEGAL ORDER
There is a mistake in bit designation to
the input/output port. Change to ascend-
ing order starting from right.
( OVERFLOW
The value for the "SPEED" command/
the parameter setting command is out-
side the allowable range.
( STACK OVERFLOW
A parenthesis was used 6 times or more
in succession in an expression. A stack
area for checking grammar/execution
overflowed.
( ILLEGAL VARIABLE
In "SEND" command, a variable other
than a global variable was used.
( TYPE MISMATCH
Both sides of expression do not match.
Numeral/variable/expression of the type
which was not allowed was used.
( FOR VARIABLE ERROR
NEXT statement variable terms corre-
sponding to FOR statement does not
match.
( WEND WITHOUT WHILE
No WHILE statement corresponding to
WEND statement.
( WHILE WITHOUT WEND
No WEND statement corresponding to
WHILE statement.

( NEXT WITHOUT FOR

No FOR statement corresponding to
NEXT statement. "NEXT" command
was executed without "FOR" command.
( FOR WITHOUT NEXT
No NEXT statement corresponding to
FOR statement.
( ENDIF WITHOUT IF
No IF statement corresponding to
ENDIF statement.
( ELSE WITHOUT IF
No IF statement corresponding to ELSE
statement.
( IF WITHOUT ENDIF
No ENDIF statement corresponding to
IF statement.
( ELSE WITHOUT ENDIF
No ENDIF statement corresponding to
ELSE statement.
( END SUB WITHOUT SUB
No SUB statement corresponding to
END SUB statement. "END SUB" com-
mand was executed without "SUB" com-
mand.
( SUB WITHOUT END SUB
No END SUB statement corresponding
to SUB statement.
( DUPLICATED VARIABLE
Two or more array variables of the same
name were defined
( DUPLICATED IDENTIFIER
Two or more identifiers of the same
name were defined.
( DUPLICATED LABEL
Two or more the same labels were
defined.
( UNDEFINED ARRAY
Assignment/reference was done for
undefined array.
( UNDEFINED IDENTIFIER
An undefined identifier was used.
( UNDEFINED LABEL
Reference made to undefined label.
( TOO MANY DIMENSIONS
An array exceeding 3 dimensions was
defined.
( DIMENSION MISMATCH
The number of array dimensions does not
match that defined by the DIM statement.

( ARGUMENT MISMATCH

The number of SUB statement argu-
ments does not correspond with the
CALL statement.
( ILLEGAL IDENTIFIER
A reserved word was used as an identi-
fier.
( ILLEGAL COMMAND IN PROCEDURE
Execution of command is impossible
within procedure (between SUB-END
SUB statements).
( ILLEGAL COMMAND OUTSIDE PRO-
CEDURE
outside of procedure (between SUB-
END SUB statements).
( ILLEGAL COMMAND INSIDE IF
inside of IF statement.
( ILLEGAL DIRECT
Independent execution of command is
impossible.
( TOO MANY IDENTIFIERS
Number of identifiers exceeds 500.
( CASE WITHOUT SELECT
No SELECT statement corresponding to
CASE statement.
( END SELECT WITHOUT SELECT
No SELECT statement corresponding to
END SELECT statement
( SELECT WITHOUT END SELECT
No END SELECT statement corre-
sponding to SELECT statement
( CASE WITHOUT END SELECT
No END SELECT statement corre-
sponding to CASE statement.
( ILLEGAL COMMAND LINE
The command statement between
SELECT and CASE statement cannot
be executed.
( COMMAND DOESN’T EXIST
The line is not a command statement.
( ILLEGAL COMMAND
Execution of a nonsupported and non-
executable command was attempted.

( ILLEGAL FUNCTION CALL

An expression of "ON <expression>
GOTO"/"ON <expression> GOSUB"
command was a negative value.
( DEVIDE BY 0
Division command by 0(/0) was
attempted.
( NO POINT
Point does not exist.
( COORDINATES TYPE ERROR
Arithmetic operations of joint coordinate
point data and cartesian point data were
attempted.
( SUBSCRIPT OUT OF RANGE
A subscript of an array variable has
exceeded the range which was defined
in DIM statement.
( RETURN WITHOUT GOSUB
"RETURN" command was executed
without executing "GOSUB" command.
( END SUB WITHOUT CALL
"END SUB" command was executed
without executing "CALL" command.
( EXIT SUB WITHOUT CALL
"EXIT SUB" command was executed
without executing "SUB" command.
( ILLEGAL COMMAND IN ERROR ROU-
TINE
Within an error processing routine a
command which could not be executed
was attempted.
( EXIT FOR WITHOUT FOR
"EXIT FOR" command was executed
without executing "FOR" command.
( SUB WITHOUT CALL
"SUB" command was executed without
executing "CALL" command.
( NOT EXECUTE CALL
"CALL" command was not executed.
( PROGRAM TERMINATED BY HALT
Program execution was completed by
"HALT" command.
( PROGRAM SUSPENDED BY HOLD
Program execution was interrupted by
"HOLD" command.
( SOFT LIMIT OVER
Target position exceeds soft limit posi-
tion.

( SEARCH FOR ORIGIN is not performed

yet. Select SEARCH ORIGIN first by
using the COMMAND LISTS.
( NO PCB DATA
PCB data does not exist.
( PCB NOT SELECLED
PCB name is not selected. Please select
PCB name by "PCBNAME" statement.
( MACHINE DATA SAVE ERROR
Failed to save HDdata to file.
( PCB DATA LOAD ERROR
Failed to LOAD BDdata from file.
( NO ENOUGH MEMORY
Cannot execute because of memory
insufficiency.
( ILLEGAL PROGRAM DATA DURING
RUNNING
Illegal program data during running.
( ILLEGAL POINT DATA DURING RUN-
NING
Illegal point data during running.
( ILLEGAL OBJECT CODE
An object program has been destroyed.
( FILL UP CYLINDER PHDQLQJ This message is explanation for [FULL UP CYLINDER].
######### Now dispensing
##########
_@_@Head No.1
Please continue this command until dis-
pense glue is issued from nozzle of this
head. After that, clean up the dispense
nozzle of that head.
And initialized total consumption of that
head. To finish, press any key.
( DOT STATION PHDQLQJThis massage is explanation for [DOT STATION].
During pressing [Space] key, paper in
"Dot Station" is moved. To return to com-
mand menu, press [ESC] key.
TABLE 5-1

L001:CODE ERROR! Fatal error occurred in servo-card.
--- COUNTERMEASURE ---
Power ON again, Change motor or servo-card, Check earth line and

voltage of power supply.
L002:INTERNAL ERROR! Fatal error occurred in servo-card.

L003:FEEDBACK ERR 0! Servo-motor not responding to commands from servo card.
--- CAUSE ---
Mechanical locking, Illegal soft limit data
Removal of cause, Power ON again, Change motor or servo-card,

Reduce speed of machine.
L004:FEEDBACK ERR 1! Illegal response of electric line around servo.
--- CAUSE ---
Motor power line, Motor encoder line, Mechanical locking
Removal of cause, Power ON again, Change motor or servo-card,

Reduce speed of machine.

L005:OVERLOAD! Too much load has been detected on servo-motor.
--- CAUSE ---
Misadjusted ’Brake Unit’, Illegal softlimit data, Mechanical action is

not smooth.
Removal of cause, Power ON again, Reduce speed of machine.
L006:Tr.OVER CURRENT! Too much electric current has been detected in the Tr. in the servo
card.
Power ON again, Change motor or servo-card.
L007:OVER CURRENT! Electric current is over limit.
Power ON again, Change motor or servo-card, Reduce speed of

machine.
L008:MOTOR OVERHEAT Fatal error occurred in servo-card.

L009:Tr.OVERHEAT! Fatal error occurred in servo-card.


L010:WATCHDOG ERR 0! Fatal error occurred in servo-card.

L011:WATCHDOG ERR 1! Fatal error occurred in servo-card.

L012:DIVISION ERROR! Fatal error occurred in servo-card.

L013:2nd LIMIT EXCEEDED! Axis of servo is beyond mechanical limit.
Move relevant axis to center of axis range.
L014:EMERGENCY STOP! "Emergency Stop" switch is "ON".
Check "Emergency Stop" switches.
L015:M.POWER DOWN! Failure of "Servo-ON".
"Servo-ON" again after pushing "Emergency Stop" switch, Power ON

again, Change motor or servo-card, Check earth line and voltage of
power supply.

L016:PI1 CON. OFF! Controller front panel connector is not connected properly.
--- CAUSE ---
Connector is out of socket.
Removal of cause.
L017:PI2 CON. OFF! Controller front panel connector is not connected properly.
--- CAUSE ---
Connector is out of socket.
Removal of cause.
L018:I/O CMU. ERROR! Fatal error occurred in I/O board.
Power ON again, Check earth line or condition of connector,

Change I/O board.
L019:WRITE PROTECT! Fatal error occurred in servo-card.
Power ON again, Change servo-card, Check earth line and voltage of

power supply.
L020:SERVO NO ACK. Fatal error occurred in servo-card.

power supply.

L021:SRV NOT INSTALLED Fatal error occurred in servo-card.

power supply.
L101:Disk write-protected --- CAUSE ---
This is a DOS error, This floppy disk is write-protected.
Cancel write-protect on this floppy disk.
L102:Drive not available --- CAUSE ---
This is a DOS error.
L103:Drive not ready --- CAUSE ---
This is a DOS error, There is no floppy disk in the drive which you
selected.
Insert a floppy disk in the drive which you selected.
L104:Invalid disk command This is a DOS error.
L105:CRC error This is a DOS error.
L106:Invalid length This is a DOS error.
L107:Seek error --- CAUSE ---
This is a DOS error. Files were read or written from the middle of the
files.
Process files again.

L108:Not an MS-DOS disk --- CAUSE ---
This is a DOS error. Floppy disk which you used is not 1.4M format
disk.
Use 1.4M format disk.
L109:Sector not found --- CAUSE ---
This is a DOS error, Floppy disk which you used is not normal,
Floppy disk which you used is not formatted, Floppy disk which you
used is not 1.4M format disk.
Use new floppy disk, Use 1.4M format disk.
L110:Out of paper This is a DOS error.
L111:Write fault --- CAUSE ---
Floppy disk which you used is not 1.4M format disk.
L112:Read fault --- CAUSE ---
Floppy disk which you used is not 1.4M format disk.
L113:General failure This is a DOS error.

L114:unknown error This is a DOS error.
L115:No such file --- CAUSE ---
This is a DOS error. The file you selected does not exist.
Check the file name which you selected.
L116:Arg list too long This is a DOS error.
L117:Exec format error This is a DOS error.
L118:Bad file number This is a DOS error.
L119:Not enough core This is a DOS error.
L120:Permission denied This is a DOS error.
L121:File exists --- CAUSE ---
This is a DOS error. A file with the name you selected already exists.
Select a new file name.
L122:Cross-device link This is a DOS error.
L123:Invalid argument This is a DOS error.
L124:Too many open files This is a DOS error.
L125:Disk full --- CAUSE ---
This is a DOS error. This floppy disk is full and cannot be written to.
Use a new floppy disk.

L126:Math argument This is a DOS error.
L127:Result too large This is a DOS error.
L128:Resource deadlock This is a DOS error.
L129:Unable to change dir This is a DOS error.
L130:Unable to change drv This is a DOS error.
L131:Directory exists --- CAUSE ---
This is a DOS error. A directory with the name you selected already
exists.
Select a new directory name.
L132:Unable to make dir This is a DOS error.
L133:Unable to remove dir --- CAUSE ---
This is a DOS error. Files exist in the directory which you selected.
Delete files from the directory which you selected.
L134:Unable to rename This is a DOS error.
L212:CPU8344 retry --- COUNTERMEASURE ---
Power ON again.
L237:No answer from servo This is an error in the servo card.
L301:Read File Error This is a DOS error.
L302:Seek File Error This is a DOS error.

L303:Open File Error This is a DOS error.
L304:WriteFile Error This is a DOS error.
L305:Soft Limit Exceeded --- CAUSE ---
Axis of servo is outside "Soft Limit" .
Move relevant axis to center of axis range.
L306:Watch Cat Error This is an error in the VISION card.
L307:Invalid Axis This is an error of communication between the system board and
servo card.
L308:InterLock Error --- CAUSE ---
"InterLock" occurred.
Remove "InterLock" shown in error message.
L309:Mainte.SW.is ON --- CAUSE ---
Machine speed is slowed by "NJ13" switch.
Turn "NJ13" switch "ON" or "OFF".
TABLE 5-2

5.2.2 Pick Up Errors

When there is an error during pick up an error message is displayed on screen.
5.2.2.1 Chip Components
Symptom Possible cause Corrective action Refer to

Pickup error The nozzle does not If the nozzle does not reach the component, Chapter 12
occurs in all reach components, or then readjust the "Z" value on the Feeder
feeders. the pickup point is not PlateOffset screen. When the pickup
correct. position shifts, perform teaching for the
feeder plate.
Pickup error The head offset X, Y or Test-mount components and adjust the
occurs in a Z data is incorrect. "Head offset X, Y" values based on the
specific head. results obtained.
Pickup error The feeder is not Detach the feeder from the feeder plate and Feeder
occurs for a properly installed, or check for tape feed. If tape feed is not manual
specific the tape feeder has a smooth, replace the feeder. Also check that
component. problem. no loose chip components remain at the
feeder set position.
The nozzle tip does not If the nozzle does not reach the component, User
reach the components, increase the "Pick Height" value of the Reference
or the pickup positions PICK & MOUNT parameters in the manual
are incorrect. component information. When the pickup
position shifts, perform reteaching for the
pickup position in the component
information.
The reference pickup Increase the reference pickup vacuum
vacuum level is level. Chapter 15
incorrect.
SP-5C04401-00
TABLE 5-3

5.2.2.2 QFP Components

The head is Air leakage due to the Reduce the "Pick Vacuum" pressure User
picking up uneven surface of the setting in the component information. Reference
components, QFP, or "Vacuum Manual
but "pickup Check" of the PICK &
error" is MOUNT INFO.
indicated. parameters in the
component information
is set to "SPECIAL
CHK" and the vacuum
pressure does not meet
the "Pick Vacuum"
setting level.
Pickup error The "X-CompPitch" Enter the correct component pitch. User
occurs more or "Y-CompPitch" of Reference
frequently as the TRAY INFO. Manual
the head parameters in the
moves away component
from the pallet information is
origin. incorrect.
The tray The component Check the "Tray Height" value of the User
changer head information data or PICK & MOUNT INFO. parameters or Reference
does not machine data on the the "Body Size Z" value of the SHAPE Manual
reach the tray changer is INFO. parameters. If these are correct,
component. incorrect. then increase the "Waiting Pos. Z"
value of the tray changer in
MCH_DATA mode until the head
reaches the component.
The mounter The component height Check the "Body Size Z" value of the User
head does not ("Body Size Z" of the SHAPE INFO. parameters. If incorrect, Reference
reach the SHAPE INFO. increase the "Z" values for "Stations 1 Manual
QFP on the parameters) in the and 2" on the Tray Changer edit screen
traverser component in the MCH_DATA mode, so that the
shuttle. information or the mounter head reaches the QFP.
machine data is
incorrect.
SD-5C04402-01
TABLE 5-4

5.2.3 Mounting Errors


All mounted The coordinates of the Check the fiducial mark User
components fiducial mark or moving coordinates, mark data parameters Reference
shift in the camera are incorrect, or and block repeat coordinates. Also Manual
same the PCB is not properly check that the PCB is properly
direction clamped in the mounting clamped in place.
when a position.
fiducial mark The "X-CompPitch" or If no problem with the above Chapter 14
is used. "Y-CompPitch" of the parameter settings, re-execute the
TRAY INFO. parameters Moving Camera Scale command
in the component and then test-mount components.
information is incorrect.
Mounting The machine data is incorrect Slow down the mount speed and
Chapter 4-9
status is not so that components cannot check the instant at which a
stable. reach the PCB surface or are component is mounted. If there is
The tray pressed excessively onto any problem, adjust the "PCB/Fix.
changer head solder at the instant of TF" parameter setting on the
does not mounting. Position screen.
reach the There is also the possibility If the component is blown away
component. that components may be immediately after it has been
blown away immediately after mounted, reduce the air blow timer
they have been mounted. setting on the Position screen.
The PCB is not properly Adjust the height and position of User
clamped on the conveyor. push-up pins so that the PCB does Reference
not warp. Manual
A particular The component does not Slow down the mount speed and User
chip shifts reach the PCB surface check the instant at which the Reference
from when mounted, which is component is mounted. If it does not Manual
mounting probably caused by reach the PCB surface properly,
position. incorrect parameter check "Body Size Z" of the SHAPE
settings. INFO. parameters or "Mnt Height" of
the PICK & MOUNT parameters in
the component information, and make
the corrections.
The PCB is not properly Adjust the height and position of User
clamped on the conveyor. push-up pins so that the PCB does Reference
not warp. Manual
Chip The mount information Check that the mount information User
mounting data or component data is appropriate. Also check the Reference
errors occur information data is not "Body Size Z" value in the Manual
frequently. appropriate. For example, SHAPE parameters and the "Mnt
the mount data is Height" value of the PICK &
incomplete or set to "skip". MOUNT parameters in the
component information. Make
corrections as necessary.
SP-5C04403-01
TABLE 5-5

Mounted The machine data for Check the mount data. If no problem, Chapter 14
components the mount recalibrate the scale of the moving
always shift coordinates (X, Y), camera, multi-vision camera or single-
in the same moving camera scale, vision camera and then test-mount the
direction. or vision camera components.
scale is incorrect.
Mounting The components do If there is any problem at the instant of User

status is not reach the PCB, or mounting, check the "Body Size Z" Reference
unstable. they are excessively value of the SHAPE INFO. parameters Manual
pressed and displaced or the "Mnt Height" value of the PICK
on solder. & MOUNT INFO. parameters in the
There are also cases component information, and make the
where the mounting corrections if necessary. Also check
speed is too fast or that the PCB is clamped in place. Good
the nozzle is not results may be obtained by reducing
securely attached. "Mount Speed" of the PICK &
MOUNT INFO. parameters.
The PCB is not Also check that the leaf springs used to Chapter 6
properly clamped on hold the nozzle are properly fitted to
the conveyor. the nozzle shaft.
Adjust the height and position of push- User
up pins so that the PCB does not warp. Reference
Manual
SD-5C04404-01
TABLE 5-6

5.2.4 Recognition Errors


Recognition Dust or dirt is on the Wipe the lens surface and half mirror Chapter 6
error frequently camera lens. with a lens cleaner.
occurs with
almost all
components.
Recognition The nozzle is picking If the pickup position is deviated from the Chapter 12
error frequently up the component by center of the component, the nozzle tends
occurs with a the edge. to pick up the component by the edge, so
specific check the tape feeder for operation and
component. installation on the feeder plate.
Recognition The spring-action of Generate a negative pressure for all heads Chapter 6
error frequently the nozzle does not in MANUAL mode, and press the nozzles
occurs with a move smoothly, or up by finger to check the spring action. If
specific head. dirt or debris adheres the nozzle does not return smoothly, then
to the nozzle tip. lubricate. Clean away dirt or debris from
the nozzle as necessary.
Specific The SHAPE INFO. If the SHAPE INFO. parameters are User
components parameters in the incorrect, the component cannot be Reference
cannot be component recognized. Enter correct values for Manual
recognized. information are these parameters.
incorrect, or the Similarly, if the component is supplied
component is in a wrong direction, this also results in
supplied in a wrong recognition errors. The "Pick Angle
loading position with deg" (used for component recognition
respect to the pickup reference) of the PICK & MOUNT
angle setting. INFO. parameters in the component
database is specified as 0 , supposing
that components are supplied in the
horizontally long loading position. So,
if the components are supplied in a
vertically long loading position, set
"Pick Angle deg" to 90 (or -90 ).
SD-5C04405-01
TABLE 5-7


Recognition The component Check the parameter settings in the User
error information is component information, and perform Reference
frequently incorrect. the "PARAM. SEARCH" command in Manual
occurs. the Adjust Assistant mode.
Recognition The pickup position Check the "Feeder Pos_X/Y" of the User
error is deviated from the BASIC INFO. parameters and the Reference
frequently center of components "X/Y-CompPitch" values of the TRAY Manual
occurs. (QFP (the component is INFO. parameters in the component
is not not positioned in the information, and make the corrections.
displayed on center of the vision

the vision monitor during
monitor.) recognition).
Components The direction The "Pick Angle deg" (used for User
cannot be supplying the component recognition reference) of Reference
recognized. component is not the PICK & MOUNT INFO. Manual
correct. (If the supply parameters in the component database
direction is wrong, is specified as 0 , supposing that
the number of leads components are supplied in the
is reversed between horizontally long loading position. So,
the length and width if the components are supplied in a
sides, causing a vertically long loading position, set
recognition error "Pick Angle deg" in the component
even if the SHAPE information to 90 (or -90 ).
data is correct.)
The vision camera Check that "Lighting Selection" of the
light selection is VISION INFO. parameters is set to
incorrect. "Main + Coax".
SD-5C04406-01
TABLE 5-8

5.2.4.3 Mark

Fiducial mark The PCB is not Check that the PCB is secured in User
cannot be clamped in position, position. If no problem, check the mark Reference
recognized. or the mark data and optimize the threshold level Manual
information data is with the "PRAM. SEARCH" command
incorrect, or the mark in the Adjust Assistant mode so that the
shape or size is mark can be clearly viewed. If there is
outside the any noise around the mark, narrow the
specifications. mark detection range (Search Area) or
cut the noise.
Fiducial mark If a solder leveler Readjust the moving camera lighting in User
recognition is mark is used, it the mark information, then optimize the Reference
unstable. cannot be recognized threshold level with the "PRAM. Manual
reliably due to SEARCH" command in the Adjust
diffused reflection. Assistant mode so that the mark can be
clearly viewed.
In FINE The converging Relieve the converging conditions in

mode, the conditions are too MCH_DATA mode or set the
recognition tight. "Algorithm Type" of the Vision Info.
position cannot parameters to "Normal".
converge to the
specified point.
Fiducial mark The FIDUCIAL SEL Set the FIDUCIAL SEL option to
recognition is option was set to "Use" when determining teaching
unstable. "NotUse" when conditions, then reperform fiducial
teaching conditions mark recognition. level.
were determined.
SD-5C04407-00
TABLE 5-9

5.2.5 Conveyor Errors

The PCB hits hard The soft stop does Open the front lower right panel of the Chapter 11
against the main not take effect. machine, and you will see the adjustment
stopper when it is screws for conveyor speed. Turn the "L"
conveyed. screw to the left to slightly reduce
conveyor speed.
The PCB does The soft stop takes The soft stop takes effect too much. Open Chapter 11
not reach the effect too much. the front lower right panel of the machine,
main stopper and you will see the adjustment screws for
when it is conveyor speed. Turn the "L" screw to the
conveyed. right to slightly increase conveyor speed.
PCB transfer error The locate pin will not Loosen the screw for the locate pin Chapter 11
(PCB installation rise adequately for a sensor and slightly lower its position.
error) occurs when thick PCB or a PCB Then, check that the sensor turns on
a thick PCB is having a small when the PCB is secured in place.
conveyed. reference hole, so
that the sensor
remains turned off.
After the PCB has The sensor at the Check the sensor operation in Chapter 11
been conveyed in PCB installation MANUAL mode (input monitor). If
the mounting position is faulty, the sensor is defective, replace it. If
position, the pins or the PCB has a sensitivity seems to be low, adjust
will not rise to cutout area just the installation height or angle.
secure the PCB. above the sensor so
(The conveyor the sensor cannot
keeps turning.) detect the PCB.
The conveyor width A PCB is still on Remove the PCB and then change
cannot be changed. the conveyor. the conveyor width again.
The PCB which The PCB is still in Adjust the position of the PCB Chapter 11
could be detected the mounting sensor so that it detects the PCB User
before being position on the correctly. If the PCB still cannot be Reference
transferred to the conveyor, but is transferred properly, check the Manual
mounting position not detected with conveyor unit setups and/or PCB
cannot be detected the PCB sensor. data settings and make corrections
after transfer. as necessary.
SD-5C04408-01
TABLE 5-10

5.2.6 Feeder Errors

Components are The feeder's supply Correct the supply pitch for the Feeder
not fed properly pitch is not correct. feeder by loosening the screws at Manual
and pickup errors the air cylinder and fitting them in
frequently occur. the proper position.
There is a problem There is a problem with air supply, Feeder

Multi-stick
feeders do not with air supply, power supply, changeover switch, or Manual
function. power supply, feeder installation position.

changeover switch, Check that the air and power are
or feeder installation supplied. Set the changeover switch
position. to the "center" position. Also check
that the position of the positioning
pin is matched with the feeder set
No. in the Component Information.
Pickup error Component supply does not Adjust the ascent and descent speed Feeder
frequently match the timing that the to increase the speed for supplying Manual
occurs with head picks up components, components. Also, check the pickup
multi-stick or the pickup position position and correct it if necessary.
feeders. is not correct.
Pickup position Dust or debris has intruded Detach the feeder from the feeder Chapter 6
error occurs. between the feeder plate plate and remove dust and debris.
and the feeder.
SD-5C04409-00
TABLE 5-11
5.2.7 Nozzle Station Errors

Nozzle The nozzle was Check the angle of the nozzle when the
cannot be head moves to the nozzle station for

attached backwards
changed. nozzle change. If the nozzle is attached

on the head when
(ANC) to the head in a reverse direction, press

you did this manually.
the emergency stop button, then detach
the nozzle and return it with the correct
orientation into the station.
The teaching Perform teaching of correct coordinates Chapter 15
coordinates for the of the nozzle station.
nozzle station are
incorrect.
The nozzle sensor While observing the input monitor Chapter 15
amplifier is not display in MANUAL mode, adjust the
optimally adjusted. amplifier's trimmer.
The leaf springs that Adjust the positions of the right and left Chapter 15
fit the nozzle onto the leaf springs so that their height is
head is not properly equalized.
attached.
SD-5C04410-02
TABLE 5-12

5.2.8 Other Errors

You increasing the The number of retries you set It is not possible to perform retries at a number of
number of retries in the in the component information is times exceeding the Retry Limit setting on the Position
component information, more than the retry setting on screen in MCH_DATA mode. Set the number of retries
but that number of the Position screen in in the component information, which is less than the
retries is not performed. MCH_DATA mode. retry setting on the Position screen.
PCB data error (for The Pos. Definition of the Check the pickup position and make User
example, "Pickup BASIC INFO. parameters in the correction as needed. Reference
position ...") occurs component information is set Manual
when it PCB data is to "Teaching", and a value
loaded. exceeding the software limit is
entered in the Feeder Pos_X or Y.
PCB data error (for The mount data is not Check for the PCB origin and block User
example, "Mount correct. repeat data, as well as mount Reference
position ...") occurs when position data. Manual
PCB data is loaded.
Numeric keypad on The NUMLOCK key is Press the NUMLOCK key at the
the keyboard does unlocked. upper right of the keyboard, and
not function. check that its LED turns on.
When the [ENTER] The CAPSLOCK key is locked. Release the CAPSLOCK key.
key on the keyboard
is pressed to create or
edit data, the cursor
does not move to the
right but moves down
to the lower line.
The number of mount The number of mount data Check the mount information data, User
data points points is too many. block repeat data, local fiducial data Reference
resulted in error. and local bad mark data, then reduce Manual
the number of data points.
An interlock error A head is positioned at a height Raise the head by hand to a height
has occurred. possible causing the nozzle tip where no interference occurs.
to interfere with other parts of the
machine.
Sensor errors have The vertical movement of a head is Check the head decent air valve for
occurred. abnormal. The Pick Height or piston movement inside it or the
Mount Height value of the PICK & nozzle shaft for deformation. Check
MOUNT INFO. parameters is too the Pick Height and Mount
large or the position of the lower Height values and correct them if
end sensor in not appropriate. necessary. Check also the lower end
SD-5C04411-02
TABLE 5-13

5.3 Electrical Diagrams

The following diagrams are given in this paragraph:
)LJXUH ,WHP 3DJH
5.3.1 Overall interconnection diagram XII machines (Power circuit) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-99
5.3.2 Overall interconnection diagram XII machines (Power circuit) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-100
5.3.3 Overall interconnection diagram XII machines (General) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-101
5.3.4 Overall interconnection diagram XII machines (General) (Power circuit) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-102
5.3.5 Overall interconnection diagram (Emergency circuit) All systems. 5-103
5.3.6 Overall interconnection diagram (MCX controller) (Power circuit) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-104
5.3.7 Overall interconnection diagram (MCX controller) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-105
5.3.8 Overall interconnection diagram (Connection board) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-106
5.3.9 Overall interconnection diagram (Connection board) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-107
5.3.10 Overall interconnection diagram (Head I/O) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-108
5.3.11 Overall interconnection diagram (Head I/O) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-109
5.3.12 Overall interconnection diagram (Conveyor I/O A) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-110
5.3.13 Overall interconnection diagram (Conveyor I/O A) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-111
5.3.14 Overall interconnection diagram (Conveyor I/O B) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-112
5.3.15 Overall interconnection diagram (Conveyor I/O B) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-113
5.3.16 Overall interconnection diagram XII machines (Monitor selection I) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-114
5.3.17 Overall interconnection diagram XII machines (Monitor selection I) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-115
5.3.18 Overall interconnection diagram XII machines (Monitor selection II) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-116
5.3.19 Overall interconnection diagram XII machines (Monitor selection II) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-117
5.3.20 Overall interconnection diagram XII machines (Line array camera) All systems. 5-118
5.3.21 Overall interconnection diagram (Power transformer tap settings) All systems. 5-119
5.3.22 Overall interconnection diagram (Feeder structure Fixed 20) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-120
5.3.23 Overall interconnection diagram (Feeder structure Fixed 20) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-121
5.3.24 Overall interconnection diagram (Feeder structure Fixed 50) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-122
5.3.25 Overall interconnection diagram (Feeder structure Fixed 50) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-123
5.3.26 Overall interconnection diagram (Feeder structure FES20) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-124
5.3.27 Overall interconnection diagram (Feeder structure FES20) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-125
5.3.28 Overall interconnection diagram (Safety FES20 front) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-126
5.3.29 Overall interconnection diagram (Safety FES20 front) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-127
5.3.30 Overall interconnection diagram (Safety FES20 rear) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-128
5.3.31 Overall interconnection diagram (Safety FES20 rear) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-129
5.3.32 Overall interconnection diagram (Safety FES20 front & rear) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-130
5.3.33 Overall interconnection diagram (Safety FES20 front & rear) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-131
5.3.34 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (general) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-132
5.3.35 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (general) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-133
5.3.36 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Monitor selection I) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-134

)LJXUH ,WHP 3DJH

5.3.37 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Monitor selection I) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-135
5.3.38 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Power circuit) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-136
5.3.39 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Power circuit) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-137
5.3.40 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Feeder structure FES20 front & rear) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-138
5.3.41 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Feeder structure FES20 front & rear) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-139
5.3.42 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Feeder structure FES20 front) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-140
5.3.43 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Feeder structure FES20 front) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-141
5.3.44 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Feeder structure FES20 rear) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-142
5.3.45 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Feeder structure FES20 rear) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-143
5.3.46 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Feeder structure fixed 20) Systems before Sept. 2002. 5-144
5.3.47 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Feeder structure fixed 20) Systems after Sept. 2002. 5-145
5.3.48 Head I/O logic diagram 5-146
5.3.49 Conveyor I/O logic diagram 5-147
5.3.50 Air diagram Topaz-XII FNC 5-148
5.3.51 Air diagram Topaz-XII SF 5-149
5.3.52 Air diagram Topaz-XiII FNC 5-150
5.3.53 Air diagram Topaz-XiII SF 5-151
5.3.54 Maintenance Support Pendant (MSP) diagram 5-152
5.3.55 Connection board diagram 5-153
5.3.56 MCX box Topaz-XII Series 5-154
5.3.57 MCX box Topaz-XII Series (+ ATS/ LCS) 5-155
5.3.58 D power supply logic diagram 5-156
5.3.59 Mother board logic diagram (1) 5-157
5.3.60 Mother board logic diagram (2) 5-158
5.3.61 Servo board connect interface 5-159
5.3.62 Led driver board logic diagram 5-160
5.3.63 Tray changer (LCS-W) overall connection diagram 5-161
5.3.64 Tray changer (LCS-W) emergency diagram 5-162
5.3.65 Tray changer (LCS-W) power diagram 5-163
5.3.66 Tray changer (ATS-20) overall connection diagram 5-164
5.3.67 Tray changer (ATS-20) emergency diagram 5-165
5.3.68 Tray changer (ATS-20) power diagram 5-166
TABLE 5-14
NOTE: From September 2002 some major changes have been implemented in the
XII-systems, which have consequences for some electrical diagrams!
Therefore a note is displayed on every drawing which indicates if it is for
the ‘old’ machine, ‘new’ machine or both!

Electrical Diagrams
Systems before Sept. 2002
FIGURE 5.3.1 Overall interconnection diagram XII machines (Power circuit)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.2 Overall interconnection diagram XII machines (Power circuit)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.3 Overall interconnection diagram XII machines (General)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.4 Overall interconnection diagram XII machines (General)

Electrical Diagrams
All systems
FIGURE 5.3.5 Overall interconnection diagram (Emergency circuit)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.6 Overall interconnection diagram (MCX controller)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.7 Overall interconnection diagram (MCX controller)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.8 Overall interconnection diagram (Connection board)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.9 Overall interconnection diagram (Connection board)

Electrical Diagrams

FIGURE 5.3.10 Overall interconnection diagram (Head I/O)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.11 Overall interconnection diagram (Head I/O)

Electrical Diagrams

FIGURE 5.3.12 Overall interconnection diagram (Conveyor I/O A)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.13 Overall interconnection diagram (Conveyor I/O A)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.14 Overall interconnection diagram (Conveyor I/O B)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.15 Overall interconnection diagram (Conveyor I/O B)

Electrical Diagrams

FIGURE 5.3.16 Overall interconnection diagram XII machines (Monitor selection I)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.17 Overall interconnection diagram XII machines (Monitor selection I)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.18 Overall interconnection diagram XII machines (Monitor selection II)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.19 Overall interconnection diagram XII machines (Monitor selection II)

Electrical Diagrams
All systems
FIGURE 5.3.20 Overall interconnection diagram XII machines (Line array camera)

Electrical Diagrams
All systems
FIGURE 5.3.21 Overall interconnection diagram (Power transformer tap settings)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.22 Overall interconnection diagram (Feeder structure Fixed 20)

Electrical Diagrams

Electrical Diagrams

Electrical Diagrams

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.26 Overall interconnection diagram (Feeder structure FES20)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.27 Overall interconnection diagram (Feeder structure FES20)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.28 Overall interconnection diagram (Safety FES20 front)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.29 Overall interconnection diagram (Safety FES20 front)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.30 Overall interconnection diagram (Safety FES20 rear)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.31 Overall interconnection diagram (Safety FES20 rear)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.32 Overall interconnection diagram (Safety FES20 front & rear)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.33 Overall interconnection diagram (Safety FES20 front & rear)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.34 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (general)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.35 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (general)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.36 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Monitor selection I)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.37 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Monitor selection I)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.38 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Power circuit)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.39 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Power circuit)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.40 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Feeder structure FES20 front & rear)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.41 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Feeder structure FES20 front & rear)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.42 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Feeder structure FES20 front)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.43 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Feeder structure FES20 front)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.44 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Feeder structure FES20 rear)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.45 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Feeder structure FES20 rear)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.46 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Feeder structure fixed 20)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.47 Overall interconnection diagram XiII machines (Feeder structure fixed 20)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.48 Head I/O logic diagram

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.49 Conveyor I/O logic diagram

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.50 Air diagram Topaz-XII FNC

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.51 Air diagram Topaz-XII SF

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.52 Air diagram Topaz-XiII FNC

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.53 Air diagram Topaz-XiII SF

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.54 Maintenance Support Pendant (MSP) diagram

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.55 Connection board diagram

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.56 MCX box Topaz-XII Series

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.57 MCX box Topaz-XII Series (+ ATS/ LCS)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.58 D power supply logic diagram

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.59 Mother board logic diagram (1)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.60 Mother board logic diagram (2)

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.61 Servo board connect interface

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.62 Led driver board logic diagram

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.63 Tray changer (LCS-W) overall connection diagram

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.64 Tray changer (LCS-W) emergency diagram

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.65 Tray changer (LCS-W) power diagram

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.66 Tray changer (ATS-20) overall connection diagram

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.67 Tray changer (ATS-20) emergency diagram

Electrical Diagrams
FIGURE 5.3.68 Tray changer (ATS-20) power diagram

5.4 I/O Signals

This chapter gives a list with all I/O signals used in the Topaz-XII series and also if
the double shuttle tray changer (LCS) and the ATS.
5.4.1 Conveyor Input Signals

,2&219$
N1000 Y1-AXIS ORIGIN 0:DETECT DI10 CN3
N1001 W1-AXIS ORIGIN 0:DETECT DI11
N1002 PU-AXIS ORIGIN 0:DETECT DI12
N1003 Y1-AXIS OT 0:DETECT DI13
N1004 SPARE DI14
N1005 INT F.1.FEEDER LOCK 0:ERROR DI15 CN8
N1006 INT F.2.FEEDER LOCK 0:ERROR DI16
N1007 INT F.1.FDR-CARRIAGE 0:ERROR DI17
N1010 INT F.2.FDR-CARRIAGE 0:ERROR DI20
N1011 INT F.K.BOARD SERVICE KEY 0:ON DI21
N1012 INT F.AREA 0:ERROR DI22
N1013 L1 UPPER CAMERA4 1:UP DI23 CN7
N1014 L1 LOWER CAMERA4 1:DOWN DI24
N1015 LIGHT D-CAM1 UPPER D-CAM1 1:UP DI25
N1016 SERVO ON 1:ON DI26
N1017 LIGHT D-CAM1 LOWER D-CAM1 1:DOWN DI27
N1020 NOZZLE STATION DOWN 1:DOWN DI30 CN4
N1021 NOZZLE STATION UP 1:UP DI31
N1022 FRONT NOZZLE OPEN 1:OPEN DI32
N1023 FRONT NOZZLE CLOSE 1:CLOSE DI33
N1024 SERVICE KEY 0:ON DI34
N1025 SPARE DI35
N1026 DUMP STATION 1 0:FULL DI36 CN19
N1027 (DC24V OK) DI37
N1030 CONVEYOR ENT. 1:DETECT DI40 CN1

N1031 SUB POS1 OF ENT. 1:DETECT DI41

N1032 SUB POS2 OF ENT. 1:DETECT DI42
N1033 SET POSITION 1:DETECT DI43
N1034 WORK OUT 1:DETECT DI44
N1035 CONVEYOR EXIT1 1:DETECT DI45
N1036 CONVEYOR EXIT2 1:DETECT DI46
N1037 LOCATE PIN1 UPPER 1:DETECT DI47
N1040 LOCATE PIN2 UPPER 1:DETECT DI50
N1041 PUSH UP UPPER 1:DETECT SPARE DI51
N1042 SPARE DI52
N1043 PUSH UP PIN SENSOR 1:SAFE DI53
N1044 L2 UPPER CAMERA3 1:UP DI54
N1045 L2 LOWER CAMERA3 1:DOWN DI55
N1046 LIGHT D-CAM2 UPPER D-CAM2 1:UP DI56
N1047 LIGHT D-CAM2 LOWER D-CAM2 1:DOWN DI57
N1050 F-ACTIVE SWITCH FRONT 1:DETECT DI60 CN18
N1051 F-RUN SWITCH FRONT 1:DETECT DI61
N1052 F-STOP SWITCH FRONT 1:DETECT DI62
N1053 F-ERROR CLEAR SWITCH FRONT 1:DETECT DI63
N1054 F-READY SWITCH FRONT 1:DETECT DI64
N1055 F-RESET SWITCH FRONT 1:DETECT DI65
N1056 SPARE DI66
N1057 SPARE DI67
N1060 F.1. NONSTOP SWITCH 1:off,0:on D:SYLINGE1 DI70 CN22
N1061 UP 1:DETECT D:SYLINGE2 DI71
N1062 FORWARD 1:DETECT D:SYLINGE3 DI72
N1063 SPAER DI73
N1064 F.2. NONSTOP SWITCH 1:off,0:on DI74
N1065 UP 1:DETECT DI75
N1066 FORWARD 1:DETECT DI76
N1067 DUMP STATION 3 0:FULL DI77

,2&219%
N1100 R-RESET SWITCH REAR 1:DETECT DI10 CN3
N1101 SPARE DI11
N1102 SPARE DI12
N1103 RELAY SPARE DI13
N1104 SPARE 0:DETECT DI14
N1105 INT R.1.FEEDER LOCK LEFT 0:ERROR DI15 CN8
N1106 INT R.2.FEEDER LOCK RIGHT 0:ERROR DI16
N1107 INT R.1.FDR-CARRIAGE LEFT 0:ERROR DI17
N1110 INT R.2.FDR-CARRIAGE RIGHT 0:ERROR DI20
N1111 AIR PRESSURE DOWN 0:ERROR DI21
N1112 INT R.AREA 0:ERROR DI22
N1113 R-ACTIVE SWITCH REAR 1:DETECT DI23 CN7
N1114 R-RUN SWITCH REAR 1:DETECT DI24
N1115 R-STOP SWITCH REAR 1:DETECT DI25
N1116 R-ERROR CLEAR SWITCH REAR 1:DETECT DI26
N1117 R-READY SWITCH REAR 1:DETECT DI27
N1120 BUSY IN 1:DETECT DI30 CN4
N1121 SMEMA DISCRIMINATION 1:DETECT DI31
N1122 BA IN 1:DETECT DI32
N1123 COUNT RESET 1:DETECT DI33
N1124 UR IN 1:DETECT DI34
N1125 LR IN 1:DETECT DI35
N1126 DUMP STATION 2 0:FULL DI36 CN19
N1127 (DC24V OK) DI37
N1130 NOZZLE STATION NOZZLE 1 1:DETECT DI40 CN1
N1131 NOZZLE 2 1:DETECT DI41


N1150 NOZZLE 17 1:DETECT DI60 CN18
N1160 R.1. NONSTOP SWITCH 1:off,0:on D:dot st.sens DI70 CN22
N1161 UP 1:DETECT D:dot st.alrm DI71
N1163 SPARE DI73
N1164 R.2. NONSTOP SWITCH 1:off,0:on DI74
N1165 UP 1:DETECT DI75
N1167 DUMP STATION 4 0:FULL DI77
TABLE 5-15

5.4.2 Conveyor Output Signals

,2&219$
T1800 FRONT FEEDER DATA DATA 1
T1801 DATA 2
T1802 DATA 3
T1803 DATA 4
T1804 DATA 5
T1805 DATA 6
T1806 DATA 7 0F:
T1807 DATA 8 01: DO00-07
T1810 FRONT FEEDER SELECT DATA 1 02: DO10-17
T1811 DATA 2 03: DO20-27
T1812 DATA 3 04: DO30-37
T1813 DATA 4 05: DO40-47
T1814 SPARE 06: DO50-57
T1815 SPARE 07: DO60-67
T1816 SPARE 08: DO70-77
T1817 SPARE
T1820 SIGNAL TOWER 0[B/Y] 1:ON ERROR DO80 CN15
T1821 1[W/R] 1:ON EMERGENCY DO81
T1822 2[G] 1:ON RUN DO82
T1823 PU-AXIS BRAKE 1:RELEASE DO83
T1824 W-AXIS BRAKE 1:RELEASE DO84
T1825 5[Option] 1:ON DO85
T1830 BUZZER 1:ON DO90
T1831 BUSY OUT 1:REQUEST DO91
T1832 BA OUT DO92
T1833 UR OUT DO93
T1834 CONV MOVE/ON 1:MOVE DO94
T1835 CONV SPEED LOW 1:LOW DO95

T1836 CONV REVERSE 1:REVERSE DO96

T1837 LR OUT DO97
T1840 FRONT NOZZLE UP 1:UP DO100 CN16
T1841 DOWN 1:DOWN (spare) DO101
T1842 CLAMP 1:CLAMP (spare) DO102
T1843 RELEASE 1:RELEASE DO103
T1844 F.1. NONSTOP UP 1:UP D:dot st.mtr DO104
T1845 DOWN 1:DOWN D:dot st.led DO105
T1846 FORWARD 1:FORWARD (spare) DO106
T1847 BACK 1:BACK (spare) DO107
T1850 F.2. NONSTOP UP 1:UP (spare) DO110
T1851 DOWN 1:DOWN (spare) DO111
T1852 FORWARD 1:FORWARD (spare) DO112
T1853 BACK 1:BACK (spare) DO113
T1854 F.1. NONSTOP SW-LAMP DO114
T1855 F.2. NONSTOP SW-LAMP DO115
T1856 DUMP STATION DO116
T1857 ACTIVE CHANGE 0:FRONT DO117
1:REAR
T1860 F-ACTIVE LED FRONT 1:ON DO120 CN23
T1861 F-RUN LED FRONT 2:ON DO121
T1862 F-STOP LED FRONT 3:ON DO122
T1863 F-ERROR CLEAR LED FRONT 4:ON DO123
T1864 F-READY LED FRONT 5:ON DO124
T1865 F-RESET LED FRONT 6:ON DO125
T1866 SPARE DO126
T1867 SPARE DO127
T1870 FEEDER CTRL FLAG 1


T1880 FEEDER DO 1 1:ON DO00
T18A0 FEEDER DO 17 1:ON DO20
T18B0 FEEDER DO 25 1:ON DO30


T18C0 FEEDER DO 33 1:ON DO40
T18D0 FEEDER DO 41 1:ON DO50
T18E0 FEEDER DO 49 1:ON DO60
T18F0 FEEDER DO 57 1:ON DO70

,2&219%
T1900 REAR FEEDER DATA DATA 1
T1901 DATA 2
T1902 DATA 3
T1903 DATA 4
T1904 DATA 5
T1905 DATA 6
T1906 DATA 7 0F:
T1907 DATA 8 01: DO00-07
T1910 REAR FEEDER SELECT DATA 1 02: DO10-17
T1911 DATA 2 03: DO20-27
T1912 DATA 3 04: DO30-37
T1913 DATA 4 05: DO40-47
T1914 SPARE 06: DO50-57
T1915 SPARE 07: DO60-67
T1916 SPARE 08: DO70-77
T1917 SPARE
T1920 MAIN STOPPER 1:ON DO80 CN15
T1921 CLAMP BOARD 1:ON DO81
T1922 LOCATE PIN 1:ON DO82
T1923 EDGE CLAMP 1:ON DO83
T1924 PUSH IN 1:ON DO84
T1925 STOPPER OF ENTRANCE 1:ON DO85
T1926 STOPPER OF EXIT 1:ON DO86
T1927 COVER LOCK VALVE 1:LOCK DO87
T1930 SP.LIGHT1 UP 1:UP DO90
T1931 SP.LIGHT2 UP 1:UP DO91
T1932 LIGHT D-CAM1 UP 1:UP DO92
T1933 LIGHT D-CAM2 UP 1:UP DO93
T1934 SPARE DO94
T1935 READY OUT 1:ON DO95
T1936 AMF1 DO96

T1937 AMF2 DO97

T1940 SPARE DO100 CN16
T1941 SPARE DO101
T1942 SPARE DO102
T1943 SPARE DO103
T1944 R.1. NONSTOP UP 1:UP DO104
T1945 DOWN 1:DOWN DO105
T1946 FORWARD 1:FORWARD DO106
T1947 BACK 1:BACK DO107
T1950 R.2. NONSTOP UP 1:UP DO110
T1951 DOWN 1:DOWN DO111
T1952 FORWARD 1:FORWARD DO112
T1953 BACK 1:BACK DO113
T1954 R.1. NONSTOP SW-LAMP 1:ON DO114
T1955 R.2. NONSTOP SW-LAMP 1:ON DO115
T1956 SPARE DO116
T1957 SPARE DO117
T1960 R-ACTIVE LED FRONT 1:ON DO120 CN23
T1961 R-RUN LED FRONT 1:ON DO121
T1962 R-STOP LED FRONT 1:ON DO122
T1963 R-ERROR CLEAR LED FRONT 1:ON DO123
T1964 R-READY LED FRONT 1:ON DO124
T1965 R-RESET LED FRONT 1:ON DO125
T1966 SPARE DO126
T1967 SPARE DO127




TABLE 5-16

5.4.3 Head Input Signals

N2300 MEMORY HEAD SEQ HEAD1 1:ACTIVE
N2301 HEAD2 1:ACTIVE
N2310 SPARE EX_DI
N2311 SPARE EX_DI
N2312 SPARE EX_DI
N2313 SPARE EX_DI
N2314 HEAD-SEQ T.O.(DOWN) 1:TIME-OUT EX_DI
N2315 TIMER-SEQ ACTION 1:ACTION
N2316 HEAD SEQ FINISH 1:FINISH
N2317 HEAD TIMER BUSY 1:ACTION
N2320 X AXIS ORGIN 0:DETECT DI20
N2321 Z AXIS ORGIN 0:DETECT DI21
N2322 R AXIS ORGIN 0:DETECT DI22
N2323 HEAD NOZZLE DOWN 0:DETECT DI23
N2324 HEAD NOZZLE UP 0:DETECT DI24
N2325 Z AXIS SAFETY 0:DETECT DI25
N2326 X AXIS OT 0:DETECT DI26
N2327 SPARE DI27
N2330 HEAD DOWN HEAD1 0:DOWN DI30
N2331 HEAD2 0:DOWN DI31
N2340 NOZZLE POS1 HEAD2 DI40

N2341 HEAD4 DI41

N2342 HEAD6 DI42
N2343 HEAD8 DI43
N2344 NOZZLE POS2 HEAD2 DI44
N2345 HEAD4 DI45
N2346 HEAD6 DI46
N2347 HEAD8 DI47
N2350 NOZZLE CLUTCH HEAD2 DI50
N2351 HEAD4 DI51
N2352 HEAD6 DI52
N2353 HEAD8 DI53
N2354 SPARE DI54
N2355 SPARE DI55
N2356 SPARE DI56
N2357 SPARE DI57
N2360 HEAD PICK VACUUM HEAD1 1:PICK OK
N2361 HEAD2 1:PICK OK
N2370 HEAD MOUNT VACUUM HEAD1 0:MNT OK
N2371 HEAD2 0:MNT OK
N2380 SPARE
N2381 SPARE
N2382 SPARE
N2383 SPARE
N2384 SPARE

N2385 SPARE
N2386 SPARE
N2387 SPARE
N4500 VACUUM DATA HEAD1
N4501 HEAD1
N4502 HEAD1
N4503 HEAD1
N4504 HEAD1
N4505 HEAD1
N4506 HEAD1
N4507 HEAD1
N4511 HEAD2
N4512 HEAD2
N4513 HEAD2
N4514 HEAD2
N4515 HEAD2
N4516 HEAD2
N4517 HEAD2
N4521 HEAD3
N4522 HEAD3
N4523 HEAD3
N4524 HEAD3
N4525 HEAD3
N4526 HEAD3
N4527 HEAD3
N4531 HEAD4
N4532 HEAD4
N4533 HEAD4
N4534 HEAD4
N4535 HEAD4
N4536 HEAD4

N4537 HEAD4
N4541 HEAD5
N4542 HEAD5
N4543 HEAD5
N4544 HEAD5
N4545 HEAD5
N4546 HEAD5
N4547 HEAD5
N4551 HEAD6
N4552 HEAD6
N4553 HEAD6
N4554 HEAD6
N4555 HEAD6
N4556 HEAD6
N4557 HEAD6
N4561 HEAD7
N4562 HEAD7
N4563 HEAD7
N4564 HEAD7
N4565 HEAD7
N4566 HEAD7
N4567 HEAD7
N4571 HEAD8
N4572 HEAD8
N4573 HEAD8
N4574 HEAD8
N4575 HEAD8
N4576 HEAD8
N4577 HEAD8
TABLE 5-17

5.4.4 Head Output Signals

T2B00 HEAD VACUUM HEAD1 1:ON DO00
T2B01 HEAD2 1:ON DO01
T2B10 HEAD DOWN HEAD1 1:ON DO10
T2B20 HEAD LIGHT LIGHT1 DO20
T2B21 SPARE DO21
T2B22 HEAD FNC CLUTCH HEAD-2 1:ON
T2B23 HEAD-4 1:ON
T2B24 HEAD-6 1:ON
T2B25 HEAD-8 1:ON
T2B26 SPARE (DO 23~26) DO26
T2B27 HEAD SERIAL CMN OK DO27
T2B30 HEAD BLOW HEAD1 1:ON DO30


T2B40 HEAD SLOW DOWN HEAD-1(B) 1:ON DO40
T2B41 HEAD-2(B) 1:ON DO41
T2B50 FIDOUT WH BRIGHT1 HEAD
T2B51 BRIGHT2 HEAD
T2B52 BRIGHT3 HEAD
T2B53 FIDIN WH BRIGHT1 HEAD DO53
T2B54 BRIGHT2 HEAD DO54
T2B55 BRIGHT3 HEAD DO55
T2B56 FID COAXIAL BRIGHT1 HEAD
T2B57 BRIGHT2 HEAD
T2B60 SPARE EX_DO
T2B61 SPARE EX_DO
T2B62 SPARE EX_DO
T2B63 SPARE EX_DO
T2B64 RESET TIME_OUT ERR EX_DO
T2B65 HEAD SEQ SETUP1 MNT/PICK
T2B66 HEAD SEQ SETUP2 VAC CHECK
T2B67 HEAD SEQ START EX_DO
T2B70 ACTIVE HEAD SEQ HEAD1
T2B71 HEAD2 EX_DO
T2B72 HEAD2 EX_DO
T2B73 HEAD4 EX_DO
T2B74 HEAD5 EX_DO
T2B75 HEAD6 EX_DO
T2B76 HEAD7 EX_DO
T2B77 HEAD8 EX_DO

T2B80 TIMER SET BIT0

T2B81 BIT1
T2B82 BIT2
T2B83 BIT3
T2B84 BIT4
T2B85 BIT5
T2B86 BIT6
T2B87 BIT7
T2B90 TIMER HEAD SEL BIT0
T2B91 BIT1
T2B92 BIT2
T2B93 TIMER PORT SEL BIT0
T2B94 BIT1
T2B95 BIT2
T2B96 SPARE
T2B97 TIMER START
T2BA0 FIDOUT IR BRIGHT1 DO60
T2BA1 BRIGHT2 DO61
T2BA2 BRIGHT3 DO62
T2BA3 FIDIN IR BRIGHT1 DO63
T2BA4 BRIGHT2 DO64
T2BA5 BRIGHT3 DO65
T2BA6 SPARE DO66
T2BA7 SPARE DO67
TABLE 5-18

5.4.5 Double Shuttle Tray Changer / ATS Input Signals

&21933
NQ01 P&P PALLET ORIGIN 0:ERROR DI10 CN3
NQ02 P&P HOOK OPEN 0:DETECT DI11
NQ03 P&P HOOK CLOSE 0:DETECT DI12
NQ04 P&P PALLET STAGE SET 0:DETECT DI13
NQ05 P&P RELAY SPARE DI14
NQ06 SPARE DI15 CN8
NQ07 SPARE DI16
NQ08 P&P INT UPPER DOOR 0:OPEN DI17
NQ09 P&P INT LOWER DOOR 0:OPEN DI20
NQ10 LATCH OPEN 1:DETECT DI21
NQ11 LATCH CLOSE 1:DETECT DI22
NQ14 P&P HEAD2 VACUUM 1:VACUUM ON DI25
NQ15 P&P HEAD1 LOWER 1:DOWN DI26
NQ16 P&P HEAD2 LOWER 1:DOWN DI27
NR01 P&P VAC STATION1 1:VACUUM DI30 CN4
NR02 P&P VAC STATION2 1:VACUUM ON DI31
NR03 P&P VAC STATION3 1:VACUUM ON DI32
NR04 P&P HOOK SAFETY(Zpos) 1:DETECT DI33
NR05 P&P HOOK FORWARD 1:DETECT DI34
NR06 P&P HOOK BACKWARD 1:DETECT DI35
NR07 BOARD DISCRI.HEAD DI36 CN19
NR08 BOARD DISCRI.HEAD 1:+24V OK DI37
NR09 P&P DOOR1 SW 1:ON DI60 CN1
NR10 P&P DOOR2 SW 1:ON DI61
NR11 P&P CONV ENTRANCE 1:DETECT DI62
NR12 P&P CHECK POSITION 1:DETECT DI43
NR13 P&P CONVEYOR EXIT 1:DETECT DI64
NR14 P&P SELECT SWITCH 1:AUTO DI65
NR15 P&P PCB CHECK OK 1:PUSH DI66
NR16 P&P W(Z)-AXIS ORIGIN 0:DETECT DI67
NS01 P&P VAC STATION4 1:VACUUM ON DI40
NS02 P&P FIBER STATION1 1: ON DI41


NS06 DI45
NS07 P&P DOOR OPEN S/W DI46
NS08 P&P CONTACTOR ON/OFF DI47
NV01 P&P LATCH1 LEFT OPEN 1:OPEN DI50 CN18
NV02 CLOSE DI51
NV03 P&P LATCH2 LEFT OPEN 1:OPEN DI52
NV04 CLOSE DI53
NV05 P&P LATCH1 RIGHT OPEN 1:OPEN DI54
NV06 CLOSE DI55
NV07 P&P LATCH2 RIGHT OPEN 1:OPEN DI56
NV08 CLOSE DI57
&21933
NS09 P&P-2 PALLET ORIGIN 0:DETECT DI10 CN3
NS10 P&P-2 HOOK OPEN 0:DETECT DI11
NS11 P&P-2 HOOK CLOSE 0:DETECT DI12
NS12 P&P-2 PALLET STAGE SET 0:DETECT DI13
NS13 P&P-2 RELAY SPARE DI14
NS14 SPARE DI15 CN8
NS15 SPARE DI16
NS16 P&P-2 INT UPPER DOOR 0:OPEN DI17
NT01 P&P-2 INT LOWER DOOR 0:OPEN DI20
NT02 P&P-2 LATCH OPEN 0:DETECT DI21
NT03 P&P-2 LATCH CLOSE 0:DETECT DI22
NT04 P&P-2 HEAD BEAM 1:DETECT DI23 CN7
NT05 P&P-2 HEAD VACUUM 1:VACUUM DI24
NT06 SPARE DI25
NT07 P&P-2 HEAD LOWER 1:UP DI26
NT08 SPARE DI27
NT09 P&P-2 VAC STATION1 1:VACUUM DI30 CN4
NT10 P&P-2 VAC STATION2 1:VACUUM DI31
NT11 P&P-2 VAC STATION3 1:VACUUM DI32
NT12 P&P-2 HOOK SAFETY(Zpos) 1:DETECT DI33

NT13 P&P-2 HOOK FORWARD 1:DETECT DI34

NT14 P&P-2 HOOK BACKWARD 1:DETECT DI35
NT15 BOARD DISCRI.HEAD DI36 CN19
NT16 BOARD DISCRI.HEAD 1:+24V OK DI37
NU01 P&P-2 DOOR1 SW 1:ON DI60 CN1
NU02 P&P-2 DOOR2 SW 1:ON DI61
NU03 P&P-2 CONV ENTRANCE 1:DETECT DI62
NU04 P&P-2 CHECK POSITION 1:DETECT DI43
NU05 P&P-2 CONVEYOR EXIT 1:DETECT DI64
NU06 P&P-2 SELECT SWITCH 1:AUTO DI65
NU07 P&P-2 PCB CHECK OK 1:PUSH DI66
NU08 P&P-2 W(Z)-AXIS ORIGIN 0:DETECT DI67
NU09 P&P-2 VAC STATION4 (YTF) 1:VACUUM DI40
NU10 P&P-2 VAC STATION5 1:VACUUM DI41
NU14 DI45
NU15 P&P-2 DOOR OPEN S/W DI46
NU16 P&P-2 CONTACTOR ON/OFF DI47
NV09 SPARE DI50 CN18
NV10 SPARE DI51
NV11 SPARE DI52
NV12 SPARE DI53
NV13 SPARE DI54
NV14 SPARE DI55
NV15 SPARE DI56
NV16 SPARE DI57
TABLE 5-19

5.4.6 Double Shuttle Tray Changer / ATS Output Signals

&21933
TQ01 P&P LATCH 1:OPEN DO80 CN15
TQ02 P&P HOOK FORWARD 1:FORWARD DO81
TQ03 P&P HOOK CLOSE 1:CLOSE DO82
TQ04 P&P PALLETE SET 1:SET DO83
TQ05 P&P HOOK BACKWARD 1:BACKWARD DO04
TQ06 SPARE(latch1) DO85
TQ07 SPARE(latch2) DO86
TQ08 P&P CONVEYOR ON 1:ON DO87
TQ09 P&P CONVEYOR REVERSE 1:REVERSE DO90
TQ10 P&P DOOR1 LOCK 1:CLOSE DO91
TQ11 P&P DOOR2 LOCK 1:CLOSE DO92
TQ12 P&P DOOR1 LIGHT 1:ON DO93
TQ13 P&P DOOR2 LIGHT 1:ON DO94
TQ14 ATS DOOR LIGHT 1:ON DO95
TQ15 SPARE DO96
TQ16 P&P SERVO ON 1:ON DO97
TR01 P&P VAC.STATION1 1:VACUUM DO100 CN16
TR02 P&P VAC.STATION2 1:VACUUM DO101
TR09 SPARE DO110
TR10 SPARE DO111

TR11 SPARE DO112
TR12 SPARE DO113
TR13 P&P HEAD1 VACUUM 1:VACUUM DO114
TR14 P&P HEAD2 VACUUM 1:VACUUM DO115
TR15 P&P HEAD1 DOWN 1:DOWN DO116
TR16 P&P HEAD2 DOWN 1:DOWN DO117
P&P PALET-INDICATE DATA DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 3
DATA 4
DATA 5
DATA 6
DATA 7
DATA 8
P&P PALET-EMPTY DATA DATA 1 0F:
DATA 2 01: DO00-07
DATA 3 02: DO10-17
DATA 4 03: DO20-27
DATA 5 04: DO30-37
DATA 6 05: DO40-47
DATA 7 06: DO50-57
DATA 8 07: DO60-67
P&P INDICATER SELECT DATA 1 08: DO70-77
DATA 2
DATA 3
DATA 4
(RUNNING1)
(RUNNING2)

&21933
TV01 P&P-2 LATCH 1:OPEN DO80 CN15
TV02 P&P-2 HOOK FORWARD 1:FORWARD DO81
TV03 P&P-2 HOOK CLOSE 1:CLOSE DO82
TV04 P&P-2 PALLETE SET 1:SET DO83
TV05 P&P-2 HOOK BACKWARD 1:BACKWARD DO04
TV06 SPARE DO85
TV07 SPARE DO86
TV08 P&P-2 CONVEYOR ON 1:ON DO87
TV09 P&P-2 CONVEYOR REVERSE 1:REVERSE DO90
TV10 P&P-2 DOOR1 LOCK 1:CLOSE DO91
TV11 P&P-2 DOOR2 LOCK 1:CLOSE DO92
TV12 P&P-2 DOOR1 LIGHT 1:ON DO93
TV13 P&P-2 DOOR2 LIGHT 1:ON DO94
TV14 ATS-2 DOOR LIGHT 1:ON DO95
TV15 SPARE DO96
TV16 P&P-2 SERVO ON 1:ON DO97
TW01 P&P-2 VAC.STATION1 1:VACUUM DO100 CN16
TW02 P&P-2 VAC.STATION2 1:VACUUM DO101
TW09 SPARE DO110
TW10 SPARE DO111
TW11 SPARE DO112

TW12 SPARE DO113
TW13 P&P-2 HEAD1 VACUUM 1:VACUUM DO114
TW14 P&P-2 HEAD2 VACUUM 1:VACUUM DO115
TW15 P&P-2 HEAD1 DOWN 1:DOWN DO116
TW16 P&P-2 HEAD2 DOWN 1:DOWN DO117
P&P2 INDICATER DATA DATA 1 0F:
DATA 2 01: DO00-07
DATA 3 02: DO10-17
DATA 4 03: DO20-27
DATA 5 04: DO30-37
DATA 6 05: DO40-47
DATA 7 06: DO50-57
DATA 8 07: DO60-67
P&P2 PALET-EMPTY DATA DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 3
DATA 4
DATA 5
DATA 6
DATA 7
DATA 8
P&P2 INDICATER SELECT DATA 1 08: DO70-77
DATA 2
DATA 3
DATA 4
(RUNNING1)
(RUNNING2)
TABLE 5-20

Service Manual
Volume 2/2
DOCUMENT DATA
0$18$/7,7/( 0$18$/180%(5 3$180%(56

Service Manual Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII 4022 591 92064 (03.04) PA 1314/01, Topaz-XII with FNC head
PA 1314/02, Topaz-XII with SF head
PA 1314/10, Topaz-XiII with FNC head
PA 1314/11, Topaz-XiII with SF head
PA 1314/03, Opal-XII
+,6725<
,668( '$7( 25'(5180%(5 5(9,6,21&2'( 67$786 5(/($6('2&80(17
First Issue Nov. 2001 4022 591 92061 01.01 Replaced DI-CSM-146
Second Issue May 2002 4022 591 92062 02.02 Replaced DI-CSM-168
Update October 2002 4022 591 92541 02.01 Replaced DI-CSM-173
Third Issue October 2002 4022 591 92063 02.03 Replaced DI-CSM-173
)RXUWK,VVXH $SULO &XUUHQW ',&60
Assembléon Customer Services maintains a Subscribe first to access this information. So

customer site on the internet This site provides complete the Support Request Form on the
the latest information such as bulletins, surveys Assembléon website in its entirety.
about spare parts, manuals and software The Assembléon website:
updates. The status of this document can also
be checked. www.assembleon.com
$ V V H P E O p R Q 1 H W K H U O D Q G V % 9
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced in any form, by print, photoprint, microfilm or any other
means without the written permission from Assembléon.
CONTENTS
Service Manual
VOLUME 1
CHAPTER 2 Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
VOLUME 2
CHAPTER 8 Spare Parts List Topaz-XII/Opal-XII Series . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
CHAPTER 10 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
CHAPTER 12 Feeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
CHAPTER 14 Vision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
4022 591 92064 Service Manual Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII

03.04
HOW TO REPORT DOCUMENT IRREGULARITIES
We have endeavoured to ensure that the information in this document was correct when published. If, when
using this document, errors, omissions or anomalies are discovered, please inform us using the reply-form
attached. We thank you for this service, in advance, as it will help us to ensure that you, the customer,
receive the highest possible quality of information and service.
Manual Title: Service Manual Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII
Manual Number: 4022 591 92064 Please, don’t forget to fill-in this!
PA Number: PA 1314/xx Update Code Manual: . ✍
FROM:
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DOCUMENT IRREGULARITIES:
Page/Paragraph Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erroneous Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..........................................................................
..........................................................................
..........................................................................
Consequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..........................................................................
..........................................................................
..........................................................................
Suggestion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..........................................................................
..........................................................................
..........................................................................
TO:
Document irregularities can also be
Assembléon
reported via the Assembléon website:
Supply Centre Customer Support
P.O. Box 80067 www.assembleon.com
Building BAF 2
5600 KA Eindhoven Subscribed persons only.
The Netherlands
Service Manual
Table of Contents
VOLUME 1/2
1.1 General Introduction of the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 General Introduction of the Service Manual . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 Chapter Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.4 Option Manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
CHAPTER 2 Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 Basic Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.3 Safety Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.4 Cautionary Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.5 Warning Stickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.6 ESD Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.7 Noise Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.8 Liability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.9 Hazard Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.9.1 Oil and Greases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.9.2 Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2.9.3 NSK Grease No 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.9.4 Fomblin Y VAC 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.9.5 Alcopad Cleaning Tissue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.9.6 Molykote 6169 Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.9.7 Daphne Super Multi Oil 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
3.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Ordering Sheet Topaz-XII (FNC) PA 1314/01. . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.1 Standard this Configuration Includes:. . . . . . 3-1
3.2.2 Options Factory Built-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.3 Options Field Retrofit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.5 Additional Nozzles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.6 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3 Ordering Sheet Topaz-XII (SF) PA 1314/02. . . . . . . . 3-12
3.3.4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.3.6 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.4 Ordering Sheet Topaz-XiII (FNC) PA 1314/10 . . . . . . 3-22
3.4.4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.4.6 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.5 Ordering Sheet Topaz-XiII (SF) PA 1314/11 . . . . . . . 3-32
3.5.4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3.5.6 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3.6 Ordering Sheet Opal-XII PA 1314/03. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

3.6.4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.6.6 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2.1 General Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2.2 Electrical Overall Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2.3 Camera Positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3 Power & Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.3.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.3.2 Power Circuits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.3.3 5/12 Volt Power Supply MCX Box . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.3.3.1 Replacing the 5/12 Volt Power
Supply MCX Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.3.4 24 Volt I/O and Emergency Power
Supply (GS21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.3.5 12 Volt Power Supply for Topaz-XiII (GS22) . 4-10
4.3.6 D(river) - Power Assembly (282VDC Power) . 4-10
4.3.7 Measuring and Adjusting Data . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.3.7.1 MCX Controller Box . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.3.7.2 GS21 – 24V Power Supply . . . . . 4-12
4.3.10 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.3.11 Safety Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.4 Vacuum & Pneumatic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4.4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4.4.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4.4.3 Air Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.4.4 Air Pressure Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.4.5 Pressure-drop Detection Level . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.4.6 Measurement and Adjusting Vacuum Levels . 4-18
4.4.9 Pneumatic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

4.4.9.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.4.9.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . 4-18
4.4.9.3 Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII . . . . . 4-19
4.4.9.4 Tray Changer (TC or LCS). . . . . . 4-19
4.4.9.5 Auto Tray Stacker (ATS)
(for Topaz-XII Series only) . . . . 4-19
4.4.9.6 Pneumatical Tape Feeders . . . . . 4-19
4.4.9.7 Air Supply of FES20/LCS,
Reject Station and ATS . . . . . . . 4-19
4.4.9.8 Measuring and Adjusting . . . . . 4-19
4.4.9.9 Performance Checks and
Trouble Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.4.9.10 Maintenance Actions . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.5 Control Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.5.1 MCX-controller Lay-out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.5.2 System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.5.2.1 Fourth Generation System Board 4-21
4.5.3 Application Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.5.4 Flash Board Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.5.5 Servo Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.5.6 Vision Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4.5.7 Mother Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.5.8 Floppy-drive and the Flash Disk . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.5.8.1 Floppy-disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.5.8.2 Flash-disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.5.9 Driver Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.5.10 D(river) - Power Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.5.11 5V / 12V Power Supply Assy’s . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.5.12 LED Driver Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.5.13 I/O Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4.5.13.1 Conveyor I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.5.13.2 Head I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4.5.14 Connection Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4.5.15 Switcher Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4.5.15.1 Old Version Switcher Board
Topaz-XII Series Only . . . . . . . . 4-41
4.5.15.2 Current Version Switcher Board
Topaz-XII Series and Opal-XII. . . 4-42
4.5.16 Operating Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
4.5.16.1 PC Keyboard + Mouse . . . . . . . . 4-43

4.5.16.2 Maintenance Support Pendant
(MSP) (Only Topaz-XII). . . . . . . 4-43
4.5.16.3 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4.5.16.4 Touch Screen (Optional) . . . . . . 4-46
4.5.17 Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
4.6 Servo Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4.6.1 Machine Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4.6.2 Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4.7 Vision Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4.7.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4.7.2 Moving Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4.7.3 Single Vision Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4.8 VGOS Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4.8.1 VGOS, Main Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4.8.2 Machine Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4.8.3 Utilities Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4.8.4 Unit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4.8.5 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4.8.6 Operator Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4.8.6.1 Create Operator. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4.8.6.2 Remove Operator. . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
4.8.6.3 Set/Change Password . . . . . . . . 4-59
4.8.6.4 Level Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
4.9 Installation and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4.9.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4.9.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4.9.3 Installation Position (Work-area Condition). 4-61
4.9.4 Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
4.9.5 Removing the Transportation Locks . . . . . . 4-62
4.9.6 Leveling of the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
4.9.7 Monitor and Keyboard Installation . . . . . . . 4-64
4.9.8 Installation of the Warning Light Tower . . . 4-64
4.9.9 Air and Mains Power Connections. . . . . . . . 4-64
4.9.9.1 Connecting Mains Power. . . . . . 4-64
4.9.9.2 Installing Air Connection . . . . . 4-65
4.9.10 First Time Switch on of a System . . . . . . . . 4-66
4.9.10.1 Change Password. . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4.9.11 Calibration Flowchart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66

4.9.12 Levelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
4.9.12.1 Level the Machine . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
4.9.13 Power and Air Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4.9.14 Back Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4.9.14.1 System Data Back Up . . . . . . . . 4-68
4.9.14.2 Back Up of Component and
Mark Database . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4.9.14.3 Backup of PCB Data . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4.9.15 Origin Machine (Reference). . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4.9.16 Check Conveyor Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
4.9.17 Pre-adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
4.9.17.1 Switch On the Machine . . . . . . 4-72
4.9.17.2 Machine Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
4.9.17.3 Warm - Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4.9.17.4 Machine Coordinates . . . . . . . . 4-75
4.9.18 Additional Pre-adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
4.9.18.1 Teach Nozzle Station Positions
and Init. R Position . . . . . . . . . 4-81
4.9.18.2 Checking the Head Vacuum
Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
4.9.19 Camera Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
4.9.20 R-axis Accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
4.9.21 Introduction to FAMF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4.9.22 Machine Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4.9.23 FAMF Correction Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
4.9.24 Flowchart of the FAMF Procedure . . . . . . . . 4-85
4.9.25 Required Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
4.9.26 General FAMF Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
4.9.26.1 Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
4.9.26.2 Adjust Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
4.9.26.3 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
4.9.26.4 Option Multi MACS. . . . . . . . . . 4-88
4.9.26.5 Option Coord MACS . . . . . . . . . 4-88
4.9.26.6 Multi MACS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
4.9.26.7 Save the data by pressing the
“ floppy“ button and exit the
VmSpec program. The changed
settings will be active only after
reloading a program. . . . . . . . . 4-89
4.9.26.8 Start up the FAMF utility . . . . . 4-89
4.9.27 Saving and Storing Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

4.9.28 FAMF (Full Auto Mount Feedback) Procedure 4-91
4.9.28.1 STEP A1: Head 1 to 8 for Front Line
Array Camera Topaz-XII Series. . . 4-98
4.9.28.6 STEP C1: Head 1 to 8 for REAR Line
Array Camera Topaz-XII Series . . 4-107
4.9.28.15 STEP A1: Head 1 to 4 for Front
Line Array Camera Opal-XII . . . 4-114
Nozzle Type 77 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Nozzle Type 77 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Nozzle Type 77 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Nozzle Type 77 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122

4.9.28.20 STEP C1 - C4: Head 1 - 4 for
Front Line Array Camera
Opal-XII using Nozzle Type 75 . 4-122
Nozzle Type 77 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Nozzle Type 77 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
Nozzle Type 77 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
Nozzle Type 77 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
4.9.28.25 STEP E1 - E4: Head 1 - 4 for
Single Vision Camera Opal-XII
using Nozzle Type 75 . . . . . . . 4-127
4.9.29 Restore Materials Topaz-XII Series and
Opal-XII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
4.9.30 Reset FAMF Settings Topaz-XII Series and
Opal-XII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
4.10 Fine Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.10.1 Fine Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.10.2 Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.10.3 Back-up machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.11 Standard System Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.11.1 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.11.2 Bus Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.11.2.1 ISA-bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.11.2.2 HDLC Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4.11.3 Serial Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
4.11.4 Input and Output Signals Between
Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
4.11.4.1 Previous Interface Circuit . . . . 4-132
4.11.4.2 Next Interface Circuit. . . . . . . 4-133
4.11.5 SMEMA Interface and GATE IN / GATE OUT
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
4.11.5.1 SMEMA Interface . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
4.11.5.2 Gate-in/Gate-out Interface . . . 4-136
4.11.5.3 Relation between Gate-in/Gate-
out and SMEMA. . . . . . . . . . . 4-138

5.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2.1 Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2.2 Pick Up Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
5.2.2.1 Chip Components . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
5.2.2.2 QFP Components . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
5.2.3 Mounting Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
5.2.3.1 Chip Components . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
5.2.3.2 QFP Components . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
5.2.4 Recognition Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
5.2.4.1 Chip Components . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
5.2.4.2 QFP Components . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
5.2.4.3 Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
5.2.5 Conveyor Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
5.2.6 Feeder Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
5.2.7 Nozzle Station Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
5.2.8 Other Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
5.3 Electrical Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
5.4 I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167
5.4.1 Conveyor Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167
5.4.2 Conveyor Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-171
5.4.3 Head Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-179
5.4.4 Head Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-183
5.4.5 Double Shuttle Tray Changer / ATS Input
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-186
5.4.6 Double Shuttle Tray Changer / ATS Output
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-189
VOLUME 2/2
6.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 Oils and Greases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2.2 Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.3 Torque Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.4 Contents of the Spare Part Kit and Service Tools. . . . . 6-4
6.4.1 First Aid Spare Part Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

6.4.2 Service Tool Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.5 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.5.1 Nozzle and Nozzle Holder Inspection . . . . . . 6-5
6.5.1.1 Nozzle Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.5.1.2 Scheduled Specification Check. . . 6-7
6.5.1.3 Nozzle Leaf Spring. . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.5.1.4 Nozzle Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.5.1.5 FNC Nozzle Holder . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.5.1.6 FNC Lock Pin Cleaning . . . . . . . 6-11
6.5.1.7 FNC Nozzle Assembly Cleaning . . 6-18
6.5.2 Head Area Checkpoints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.5.3 X Axis Checkpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.5.4 Y Axis Checkpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.5.5 Conveyer Checkpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.5.6 Feeder Plate Checkpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6.5.7 General Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
7.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 Vision Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.3 Calibration Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.4 Feeder Bar Adjustment Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.5 Feeder Lock Verifier Adjustment Tool (not for
Xi Machines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.6 Head Adjustment Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
8.2.3 Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

8.3.1 Fuse Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.3.2 Power Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8.4 Base Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8.5.1 Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8.6.2 Head Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
8.6.4 Nozzle Types (FNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
8.6.5 Nozzle Types (SF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
8.6.7 ITF Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
8.6.8 Reject Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
8.7.1 X- axis Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
8.7.2 Y- axis Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
8.7.3 R (ϕ) - axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
8.7.4 Z - axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
8.7.5 W- axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
8.7.6 PU - axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
8.8 Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
8.9 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8.9.1 Traychanger LCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8.9.2 Tape Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8.9.3 Tray Changer (ATS-20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8.9.4 FES20XII/XiII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8.9.5 ITF Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58

8.11 Fixation Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
8.11.2 Set Screw. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
8.11.3 Screw Pan Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
8.11.4 Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66
8.11.5 Screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66
8.11.6 Bolts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
9.1 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2 Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
CHAPTER 10 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
11.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.2 Conveyor Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.2.1 Adjusting the Conveyor Belt Tension . . . . . 11-2
11.2.2 Adjusting the Carry-in Conveyor Speed . . . . 11-3
11.3 Main Stopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11.3.1 Adjusting the Ascent/Descent Speeds of
the Main Stopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.3.2 Adjusting the PCB Contact Point on
Main Stopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11.4 Push-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11.5 Locate Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
11.6 Edge Clamp (Not for Opal-XII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
11.7 Push-up Plate (PU Axis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
11.7.2 Software Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
11.8 Board Clamp (Not for Opal-XII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
11.9 PCB Detection Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
11.9.1 Position and Function of PCB Detection
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
11.9.2 Adjusting the PCB Detection Sensors . . . . 11-21

11.9.3 Adjusting the Intermediate Exit Sensor. . . 11-23
11.10Conveyor Section (W-axis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
11.10.1 Checking Conveyor Parallelism. . . . . . . . . 11-24
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
11.10.2.2 Adjusting the Machine
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
11.10.3 Software Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
11.10.3.1 Setting the W-axis Software
Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
11.10.4 Setting W-axis Initial Position . . . . . . . . 11-29
11.11Vacuum and Pneumatics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
11.11.1 Air Specification and Connection . . . . . . . 11-31
11.11.1.1 Air Connection . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
11.11.2 Vacuum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32
11.11.2.1 Measuring the Vacuum . . . . . . 11-33
11.11.2.2 Performance Check and Trouble
Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
11.11.3 Pneumatic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
11.11.4 Double Shuttle Tray Changer (LCS) . . . . . . 11-33
11.11.5 ATS (Not for Opal-XII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
11.11.6 Tape Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
11.11.7 Measuring and Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
11.11.8 Performance Check and Trouble Shooting . 11-34
CHAPTER 12 Feeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1 Feeder Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1.1 Feeder Plate Parallel Adjustment . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1.2 Feeder Plate Spec Information . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12.1.3 Feeder Block Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.1.3.1 Teaching the Feeder Block
Reference Position . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.1.4 Feeder Spec Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
12.1.4.1 Feeder Size and Feeder Drive
Sequence Information . . . . . . . 12-9
12.1.4.2 Feeder Drive Time Information 12-10
12.1.5 Adjusting the Feeder Floating Sensor . . . . 12-12
12.1.5.1 Adjusting the Feeder Floating
Detection, Fibre Sensor type . . 12-12

12.1.6 Component Pick Up Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12.1.7 Feeder Plate Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
12.2 Component Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
12.2.1 Preparing the Mounter for Pneumatic Tape
Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
12.3 ITF Feeders (Not for Opal-XII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
12.4 Double Shuttle Tray Changer (LCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
12.4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
12.4.2 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
12.5 Auto Tray Stacker (ATS 20) (Not for Opal-XII). . . . . 12-23
12.5.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
12.5.2 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
12.6 Reject Station PA2906/10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
12.6.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
12.6.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
12.6.2.1 Hardware Installation . . . . . . 12-26
12.6.2.2 Software Settings . . . . . . . . . 12-27
12.6.2.3 Feeding Pitch and Speed . . . . 12-30
12.7 Operation and Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31
12.8 Manual Tray Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32
12.8.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32
12.8.2 Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32
12.9 Software Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-35
13.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.2 Machine Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.2.1 Check the Machine Reference Settings . . . . 13-2
13.2.2 X Axis Machine Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.2.3 Y Axis Machine Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.3 Secondary Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.3.1 X Axis Secondary Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.3.2 Y Axis Secondary Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.4 Software Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.4.1 X Axis Software Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.4.2 Y Axis Software Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13.5 Dual Drive Y-axis Offset Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.6 Adjusting the X and Y Axis Tension . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

13.6.1 Adjusting the X Axis Tension. . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13.6.2 Adjusting the Y Axis Tension. . . . . . . . . . 13-12
CHAPTER 14 Vision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.2 Vision Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.3 Moving Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.3.1 Adjusting the Rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.3.2 Focus (and Field of View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14.3.3 Black Level and Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14.3.4 Moving Camera Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14.4 Single Vision Camera Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
14.4.2 Focus (and Field of View) . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
14.4.3 Lighting Level Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
14.4.4 Scale Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
14.5 Line Array Camera Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
14.5.3 Focus Adjustment (and FOV (Field Of View))14-23
14.5.4 Brightness Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26
14.5.5 Scale Adjustment (Including Dual
Recognition Offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29
14.5.6 Camera Position Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
15.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
15.2 Head Assembly (FNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
15.3 Pickup/Mount Vacuum Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
15.3.1 Pick Up Vacuum Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
15.3.2 Mount Vacuum Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
15.4 FNC Head Adjustment and Maintenance (Topaz-XII
FNC Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
15.4.1 Nozzle Change Action (FNC Head) . . . . . . 15-11
15.4.2 Clutch Detection (FNC Head). . . . . . . . . . 15-13
15.4.3 Nozzle Position Sensor (FNC Head). . . . . . 15-13
15.4.4 Head Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15
15.4.4.1 The Proximity Detection Sensor 15-15
15.4.4.2 The Laser Beam Detection
Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15

15.4.4.3 Positions of the Sensors . . . . . 15-16
15.4.4.4 Action Overview and Timing
Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
15.4.4.5 Laser Beam Sensors . . . . . . . . 15-18
15.5 Z Axis Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
15.5.1 Z Axis Machine Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
15.5.2 Z Axis Software Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25
15.5.3 Init Z Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25
15.5.5 Moving Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25
15.6 R Axis Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
15.6.1 Machine R Reference Adjustment . . . . . . . 15-26
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
15.6.1.2 Adjustment of Origin Dog . . . . 15-27
15.6.2 R Axis Soft Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-28
15.6.3 Init R Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-28
15.6.4 Adjustment of the R Init Position and
Nozzle Position of the FNC Heads. . . . . . . 15-28
15.6.4.1 Checking the F.N. Clutch Sensors
and the F.N. Position Sensors . 15-29
15.6.4.2 Adjustment of the Initial
Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-32
15.6.4.3 Checking the Detection Area of
the Nozzle Position Sensors . . 15-34
15.6.4.4 Checking the FNC Nozzle
Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-34
15.6.5 R Axis Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-35
15.6.6 R Axis Accuracy Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 15-39
15.7 Setting the Nozzle Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-40
15.7.1 Nozzle Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-40
15.7.2 FNC Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-40
15.7.2.1 Nozzles for Precision Head . . . 15-41
15.7.3 Setting the Nozzle Specification . . . . . . . 15-42
15.7.3.1 Flying Nozzle Information. . . . 15-42
15.7.3.2 Head Specification . . . . . . . . 15-43
15.7.3.3 Mount Nozzle Specification . . . 15-44
15.7.3.4 Pickup Component Type
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-45
15.8 Head Specific Settings in ‘VmSpec’. . . . . . . . . . . . 15-46

15.8.1 Head Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-46
15.8.2 Head Down Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-48
15.8.3 Nozzle Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-49
15.8.4 Measure Height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-50
15.9 Assembling and Disassembling of the FNC Head Assy 15-51
15.9.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-51
15.9.2 Disassembling & Assembling of FNC
Spline Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-51
15.9.3 Disassembling & Assembling of Precision
(SF) Nozzle Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-52
15.10Mechanical Check Head Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-52
15.10.1 Checking the Vacuum Sensor Function . . . 15-54
15.11Head Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-55
15.11.1 Machine Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-56
15.11.2 Settings During Running . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-57
15.12Nozzle Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-58
15.12.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-58
15.12.2 Installing the Nozzle Station. . . . . . . . . . 15-60
15.12.3 Adjusting the Nozzle Sensor Sensitivity . . 15-62
15.12.4 Adjusting the Nozzle Clamp Plate Position 15-65
15.12.5 Adjusting the Nozzle Station Coordinates . 15-65
15.12.6 Nozzle Station Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 15-68
16.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
16.2 System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
16.2.1 Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
16.2.2 Disk Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
16.2.3 Installation Disk Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
16.2.4 Installation of a New Version VGOS
Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
16.2.5 Backup Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
16.2.6 Restore System Data Backup . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
16.2.7 VGOS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
16.2.8 Floppy Disk Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
16.2.9 CD-rom Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
16.2.10 Flash Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
16.2.10.1 Flash Disk Problems (NT Initial
Installation). . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11

16.2.10.2 Windows NT Upgrade . . . . . . . 16-19
16.2.11 Windows Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20
16.2.11.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20
16.2.11.2 Differences between User
Login and Administrator Login 16-20
16.2.11.3 User Login Restrictions . . . . . 16-20
16.2.11.4 Administrator Login. . . . . . . . 16-21
16.2.11.5 Procedure to Boot Up as
“Administrator Login” . . . . . . 16-21
16.2.12 Disable “ Write Filter” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
16.2.12.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
16.2.12.2 Drive Structure of VGOS . . . . . 16-22
16.2.12.3 When do we Need to Disable
the “ Write Filter” . . . . . . . . . 16-22
16.2.12.4 Procedure to Disable the
“ Write Filter” . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22
16.2.13 Change System.time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
16.2.13.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
16.2.13.2 Changing the “ Regional
Settings” Setting . . . . . . . . . 16-23
16.2.13.3 Change the “ Time Zone”
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
16.2.14 Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-24
16.2.14.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-24
16.2.14.2 The Network Connections . . . . 16-24
16.2.14.3 Machine Setting . . . . . . . . . . 16-27
16.2.14.4 Network Drive Setting . . . . . . 16-27
16.2.14.5 How to Use Network . . . . . . . 16-28
16.2.14.6 Network Connection
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . 16-29
16.2.15 Login Recovery Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . 16-29
16.3 PCB File Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-31
16.4 Machine Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-33
16.4.1 Machine Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-33
16.4.1.1 Option Setting:. . . . . . . . . . . 16-34
16.4.1.2 Installation Setting: . . . . . . . 16-35
16.4.1.3 Communication Setting . . . . . 16-38
16.4.1.4 Special Settings . . . . . . . . . . 16-38
16.4.1.5 Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . 16-38

Preventive Maintenance
CHAPTER 6 Preventive Maintenance

6.1 Introduction
This chapter describes:
■ Maintenance aspect for the GEM Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII.
CAUTION
CAUTION: FOR SAFE, EFFECTIVE INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE, BE SURE TO OBSERVE

THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS.
■ PERIODIC INSPECTIONS MUST BE PERFORMED BY OR IN THE PRESENCE OF
A TRAINED SERVICE ENGINEER.
■ ALWAYS TURN OFF THE POWER TO THE MOUNTER BEFORE INSPECTING
MECHANICAL COMPONENTS.
■ IF THE POWER TO THE MOUNTER NEEDS TO BE TURNED ON DURING
INSPECTION OR MAINTENANCE, MAKE SURE THAT NO PART OF ANYONE’S
BODY COMES WITHIN THE MOVEMENT RANGE OF THE HEAD ASSEMBLY.
■ USE ALWAYS THE SERVICE KEY-SWITCHES THE FULL KEY-BOARD ENABLE
SWITCH AND THE EMG BUTTONS WHEN DOING MAINTENANCE ACTIONS.
■ USE ONLY THE LUBRICANTS AND GREASES SPECIFIED BY ASSEMBLÉON.
■ REPLACE PARTS ONLY WITH PARTS APPROVED BY ASSEMBLÉON.
6.2 Oils and Greases

This section gives more detailed information about the greases used in the Topaz-XII
Series.
6.2.1 Overview
The following greases are used in the Topaz-XII Series.
&RGH1XPEHU 6XSSOLHU 7UDGH1DPH $SSOLFDWLRQ 06'6QR
5322 390 20159 NSK NSK1 or Multi- Linear guides, ball screws 10138
temp LRL 03
9965 000 16803 NSK NSA or NSL Linear guide, ball screws X/XII-Series production after sept. 07-597
2002 only, See SI-CSM-576
- ACC Tech HP-Alco pad Cleaning tissues 806H-806
9965 000 11066 Dow Corning Co. Molykote 6169 Rubber packing and O-rings of head (moving) parts, pistons/ 16371
pugs
5322 390 10144 Aussimont Fomblin Only on static parts like valve seals and O-rings. 1RW on mov- 12298
Y-VAC3 ing parts
9965 000 10365 Idemitsu Turbine oil VG32 For spline shaft and FNC parts 32280246
TABLE 6-1 Grease

For the Material Safety Data Sheets of the most common greases refer to chapter 2
of this manual.
The table below gives some information about the current grease LR3:
7\SH 'HVFULSWLRQ
LR3 - Lithium based grease (red)
- For motion and control purposes
- Temperature -40 to 130 degrees C
- Packed in accordion-like tube of 80g.
TABLE 6-2 Grease
If the type of grease used on your machine (this can be identified by looking in the
spare parts kit delivered with the machine) is different from the current stocked
one and there is no more local stock of this grease make sure to clean the parts to
be greased very good before greasing again with the new grease! refer also to the
next section “compatibility”.
6.2.2 Compatibility
In general it is better not to change the type of grease and keep on using the
prescribed types.
If for some reason it is necessary to switch to another type of grease please take
following into account:
1. Assembléon will not be responsible for any damage done to the equipment due
to using a non-prescribed type of grease!
2. When another type of grease is being used make sure to wipe off the current
grease as good as possible by using tissues. DO NOT USE ANY SOLVENTS!
3. Most important when choosing another type of grease is to make sure the
thickener type of the current grease and the grease you want to use are not
reactive. To identify the reactivity of the greases thickener types table 6-4 may
be very helpful.
4. When using greases different then the Assembléon recommended types, it is up
to the user responsibility to have the MSDS sheets available for these greases.
As a replacement for the NSK greases the types shown in table 6-3 can be used.
6WDUWJUHDVHW\SH 16. 16. )RPEOLQ
Replacement 1 Krytox GPL225
Replacement 2 - - -
TABLE 6-3 Grease

&DOFLXP6XOIRQDWH&RPSOH[
3RO\XUHDFRQYHQWLRQDO
$OXPLQLXP&RPSOH[
&DOFLXP+\GUR[\
/LWKLXP+\GUR[\
3RO\XUHDOXEULOLIH
&DOFLXP&RPSOH[
&DOFLXP6WHDUDWH
%DULXP&RPSOH[
&OD\QRQVRDS
/LWLXP&RPSOH[
7KLFNHQHU7\SH
/LWLXP6WHDUDWH
$OXPLQLXP&RPSOH[ I I C I B I I I C I C
%DULXP&RPSOH[ I I C I C I I I I I B
&DOFLXP6WHDUDWH I I C I C C C B C I C
&DOFLXP+\GUR[\ C C C B B C C C C I C
&DOFLXP&RPSOH[ I I I B I I I I C C C
&DOFLXP6XOIRQDWH&RPSOH[ B C C B I I B B C I C
&OD\QRQVRDS I I C C I I I I I I B
/LWLXP6WHDUDWH I I C C I B I C C I C
/LWKLXP+\GUR[\ I I B C I B I C C I C
/LWLXP&RPSOH[ C I C C C C I C C I C
3RO\XUHDFRQYHQWLRQDO I I I I C I I I I I C
3RO\XUHDOXEULOLIH C B C C C C B C C C C
I = Incompatible C = Compatible B = Borderline of compatible/incompatible
TABLE 6-4 Grease, alternatives
6.3 Torque Values

After loosen screws use the following torque values when tighten them again unless
other torque values are specified.
6FUHZVL]H 3LWFKPP 7RUTXH1P
0 0.5 2.0
0 0.7 3.8
0 0.8 7.3
0 1.0 13.2
0 1.25 31.0
0 1.25 65.0
0 1.25 120.0
TABLE 6-5 Torque values

6.4 Contents of the Spare Part Kit and Service Tools

6.4.1 First Aid Spare Part Kit
The first aid spare part kit is standard delivered with a new system:
,WHP 4W\ 1& 7RSD]; )1& 7RSD]; 6) 7RSD];L )1& 7RSD];L 6) 2SDO; 6)
,, ,, ,, ,, ,,
Feeder bar joint 4 5322 526 10649 X X - - X

FNC nozzzle 73F incl. Washer and spring 2 5322 360 10486 X - X - -
Spring 2 5322 492 11487 X X X X X
Nozzle 71 1 9466 029 62471 X X X X X
Nozzle 72 1 9466 029 62481 X X X X X
Nozzle 73 1 9466 029 62451 X X X X X
Nozzle 74A 1 5322 360 10495 X X X X -
Nozzle 76A 1 5322 360 10496 X X X X X
Spring Return 2 5322 492 11794 X X X X X
TABLE 6-6 First aid spare part kit
6.4.2 Service Tool Kit

The following parts are in the service toolbox:
,WHP 4W\ 1& 7RSD]; )1& 7RSD]; 6) 7RSD];L )1& 7RSD];L 6) 2SDO; 6)
,, ,, ,, ,, ,,
Hexagon Wrench set 1 n.a. X X X X X

Screw drivers 2 n.a. X X X X X
Vernier calipers 1 n.a. X X X X X
Spanner 1 n.a. X X X X X
Cleaner, lens 1 n.a. X X X X X
Swab 1 n.a. X X X X X
Blower 1 n.a. X X X X X
Grease pack (white tube) 1 n.a. X X X X X
Air filter (SZ65111) 16 5322 360 20081 X X X X X
O-ring (SZ65112) 4 5322 530 51297 X X X X X
O-ring 12 5322 530 10474 X X X X X
Leaf spring 16 5322 492 11793 X X X X X
Screw for leaf spring 16 5322 502 60165 X X X X X
Washer for leaf spring 16 5322 532 12794 X X X X X
Screw, nozzle 50 9965 000 04821 X - X - -
Screw 200 5322 502 14663 X - X - -
Seal, index 50 9965 000 09496 X - X - -
Spring 8 5322 492 11797 X - X - -
O-Ring(P4 : B-P4) 8 5322 530 51373 X X X X X
Smema connectors 2 5322 320 11928 X X X X X
Cleaning kit 1 9965 000 10366 X X X X X
Syringe oil 1 9965 000 10365 X X X X X
Needle assy 1 n.a. X X X X X
Feeder brush 1 n.a. X X X X X
TABLE 6-7 Content of the service toolbox

6.5 Maintenance
Five levels of preventive maintenance are defined:
■ Daily (by a trained operator).
■ Weekly (by a trained operator).
■ 500 hours (by a qualified service engineer). This means:
• 12 weeks interval for 1shift (= 8 hours a day)
• 6 weeks interval for 2 shifts (= 16 hours a day)
• 4 weeks interval for 3 shifts (= 24 hours a day)
• 36 weeks interval for 1 shift.
• 18 weeks interval for 2 shifts
• 72 weeks interval for 1 shift.
In Appendix one of the Operating manual the daily and weekly inspection and
cleaning schedule is given.
This chapter describes the parts of the machine that need to be checked and main-
tained and where to apply grease every 500, 1500, and 3000 production hours.
To make sure that maintenance is done on the following intervals.
8WLOL]DWLRQ 'DLO\ :HHNO\ K K K
2QHVKLIWRSHUDWLRQ - - 12 weeks 36 weeks 72 weeks
7ZRVKLIWRSHUDWLRQ - - 6 weeks 18 weeks 36 weeks
7KUHHVKLIWRSHUDWLRQ - - 4 weeks 10 weeks 20 weeks
TABLE 6-8 Recommended maintenance intervals, based on average operating conditions in weeks
6.5.1 Nozzle and Nozzle Holder Inspection

This chapter describes the maintenance related to the nozzle and head.
6.5.1.1 Nozzle Tip
If solder adheres to the nozzle tip, the nozzle can be recognized as a component. To
remove solder from the nozzle tip, dip the nozzle tip in IPA (alcohol) and clean it
with a wire brush.

In the VGOS machine software a special vision algorithm and a component intensity
parameter is implemented to prevent a contaminated nozzle tip to be recognized as
a chip component. Refer to Service Information SI-CSM-535 (described for VIOS, but
also valid for VGOS).
If the nozzle tip is nicked, pickup errors tend to occur frequently. Replace a broken
nozzle with a new one.
Nicked
Solder adhesion
FIGURE 6-1 Nozzle tip inspection point SD-3c04201A
Check operation of spring-action type nozzles (71 + 72). If the return operation is
not smooth, clean as explained in figure 6-2.
Apply alcohol to the removed nozzle (the nozzle cannot be disassembled) and clean
it. Apply a thin coat of machine oil between the sleeve and the nozzle tip. Take care
that no oil enters the nozzle hole.
Apply alcohol
and clean
Shrinking hose
Sleeve
Spring-action Apply machine
oil
FIGURE 6-2 Checking spring action type 71 + 72 nozzle

Checking spring action FNC type nozzles.
Spring-action
Nozzle mounting screws
FIGURE 6-3 Checking FNC nozzle spring action
To remove the nozzles on Heads 2, 4, 6 and 8 of the Topaz-XII Series, remove the
nozzle mounting screws as shown above.
Dip the removed nozzle tip in alcohol and clean it.
Apply a thin coat of machine oil around the nozzle tip. Take care that no oil enters
the nozzle hole.
Reassemble in reverse order.
After the nozzles have been cleaned, the low level and the high level for each head
and for each nozzle type (optional) must be determined again. Please refer to
section 15.2.
CAUTION
CAUTION: WHEN REMOVING THE NOZZLE FIXATION SCREWS BE CAREFUL NOT TO

DAMAGE THE FIXATION SCREWS.
6.5.1.2 Scheduled Specification Check
Scope
Using a machine safely with high reliability, regular machine maintenance is very
important. So it is required to check the machines condition at regular intervals
according to the preventive maintenance schedule given in table 6-10. The
scheduled specification check function contributes to this approach by executing

some simple machine condition checks automatically at regular intervals. The

function realizes two actions:
,WHP &RQWHQWV
Nozzle check This function checks the tip of the nozzles on dirt using the camera recognition. It
uses some of the database numbers where the characteristics of the nozzle tips in
question are stored. This check prevents the nozzle mis-recognition and as such
keeping a high accuracy.
Vacuum check This action executes a vacuum check and compares the result with a predefined
setting. If not within this specification an error is generated. With this action the
valve condition, vacuum sensor condition and/or nozzle (shaft) plugged is
checked.
TABLE 6-9 Check Items
Settings
The parameter settings are described as shown below. The settings are checked only
when the machine is booting up. So if the settings are changed they only will have
effect after the system is rebooted.
1. Common parameters
SCREEN 6-1 Common parameters
a) Check Item
Select the item for which you want to set the parameters.
b) Check execution
Set this parameter if the check selected at Check Item needs to be executed
regularly.
c) Executive Condition
This parameter sets the timing at which the check is executed.

This parameter sets the trigger after which the machine will check if it’s time to
carry out the check. Whether or not it's time is based on the ‘Cycle Condition’.
d) Cycle Condition
This parameter sets the period to execute the check.
This parameter sets the frequency by which the check should be carried out.
In the case of Table 6-9, the vacuum check is executed when the first reset
action is done which passed 12:00 every day.
e) Last Date
This shows the date when the check was executed the last time.
2. Unique parameter
• Vacuum Check
SCREEN 6-2 Parameters which are characteristic for vacuum check
a) Nozzle Type
The vacuum check is executed with the nozzles set here.
b) Error Detection Rate
This parameter sets the rate to detect the error. If the measured vacuum level
is XX%(Error Detection Rate) higher by the low level which is set at vacuum
level in machine data , the machine shows an error message.
The percentage that the nozzle vacuum is allowed to increase above the cali-
brated pick level before an error is shown.
• Nozzle check (* This setting influences the Check Nozzle Utility on Setup
monitor)
SCREEN 6-3 Parameter which is characteristic for nozzle check

a) Nozzle Type
b) Execute
Nozzle check is executed with the nozzles clicked here.
c) Database No.
This Database No. is used to recognize the nozzle. In see SCREEN 6-3,
Database No. 961 is used to check the Nozzle Type71.
6.5.1.3 Nozzle Leaf Spring
If the nozzle lead springs cannot hold the nozzle securely, this adversely affects all
pickup, recognition and mounting operations. Check the leaf springs for fatigue,
gaps between the spring and nozzle and excessive deformation. If a leaf spring is
worn replace it with a new one.
Deformed
Gap
FIGURE 6-4 Checking nozzle leaf spring
6.5.1.4 Nozzle Holder

Check the nozzle holder spring action. If the spring is not returning very smoothly
clean it with alcohol and apply some machine oil as indicated in figure
Apply alcohol and

clean
Apply machine oil
3 C04 20 6- 00
FIGURE 6-5 Nozzle holder maintenance

6.5.1.5 FNC Nozzle Holder

The lowest part of the FNC nozzle holder see figure 8-14, must be cleaned every
three months in an ultra sonic bath with alcohol, to guarantee proper working.
Otherwise the holes can be clogged with solder paste or debris from the feeder. How
to dismantle the FNC lower part is shown in the picture 8-14. Loosen and remove
screw 30 and take out bracket 29. After that remove pin 28 and take out the nozzle
holder item 39. Clean this part and reassemble in reverse order. Make sure that the
dots on the nozzle holder and spline are in one line.
6.5.1.6 FNC Lock Pin Cleaning
The following procedure describes the cleaning of the FNC lock pin. This procedure
should be executed after every 3600 hours of production. It is advised to perform
the next procedure , Nozzle Cleaning Assembly chapter 6.5.1.6, as well.
Required tools:
■ Philips screwdriver
■ Tissues and fluff free cotton swabs
■ Alcohol (IPA or ethanol)
■ Hook tool (9965 000 09095)
■ Tool E-ring (9965 000 09094)
■ Wire tool (9965 000 10364)
Required parts:
■ Black index holder stickers (9965 000 09496)
■ Circlip E0.8 (9965 000 09048)
■ Turbine oil VG32 (9965 000 10365)
■ Screw block stopper, M2×4 flat head (5322 502 14662)
Cleaning procedure:
Before starting the procedure:
■ Origin the machine
■ Make sure the centre nozzle is selected; type 72F (for X/XII machine) or type
71F(for Xi/XiII machine).
■ Press the emergency button

■ Move the head assembly to a position where you can easily access the FNC head.
&$06
FIGURE 6-6
1. Lower the head pneumatically in Input/Output Monitor in Manual Mode.

2. Turn the R-axis belt to rotate the head to a preferred position, and remove the
E-rings (0.8mm) from the shaft assy, which fix the cams on 2 locations of each
head. Use the Hook Tool (9965 000 09095).
NOTE: The E-ring cannot be used again. Use a new E-ring (0.8mm):
9965 000 09048.
3. Shift out the cam pins using the hook tool, small pliers or tweezers, and take
out the cams.
4. Move the head upwards again. Remove the black sticker covering both screws of
the stopper block.
5. Remove the screws, by using an exact fitting Philips-type screwdriver with a firm
handgrip, to avoid damage to the screw heads.
FIGURE 6-7

6. Remove the stopper block by sliding it out.

7. Carefully pull out the flying nozzle shaft with the bevel gear horizontally.
Watch for falling parts during disassembly of the FNC unit.
8. Remove the nozzle holder block assembly by carefully pulling it down.
FIGURE 6-8
9. Remove the locate pin and spring. Watch for falling parts, as they will come
loose at this point.
FIGURE 6-9
10.Clean the locate pin, spring, cam pins and cams by wiping them with a tissue
dampened with alcohol and blow the air into the air passage with an air gun.

REFERENCE: Cleaning the spline shaft at this point with the lock pin removed will make
the inside of the shaft more clean.
11.Using a fluff-free cotton swab dampened with alcohol, clean where the lock pin
is to be inserted thoroughly.
FIGURE 6-10
NOTE: At this point it is strongly advised to clean the FNC nozzle assembly, bevel
gear and shaft etc. as well. Refer to the next chapter 6.5.1.7 Nozzle
Assembly Cleaning.
12.Oil the locate pin (Turbine oil VG32). Avoid the vacuum through hole.
$SSO\DVLQJOHGURSRIRLOKHUHRQO\
FIGURE 6-11
NOTE: Use a minimal amount of oil on the marked sections only!!

13.Insert the spring and locate pin into the index holder. Set the centre nozzle of
the nozzle holder assy down and re-install while pushing the locate pin up.
FIGURE 6-12
14.Insert the shaft and bevel gear. Make sure the mark (dot) on both the index
holder and bevel gear are correctly aligned.
FIGURE 6-13
15.Install the stop block to fixate the nozzle assembly.

16.Apply a single drop of oil on the cams and re-install both cams carefully in the
holder index.
&$0
FIGURE 6-14
17.Insert both the cam pins.

18.Set a new E-ring(0.8mm) (9965 000 09048) on the E-ring installing tool 9965
000 09094.
FIGURE 6-15
19.While pressing the pin cam on one side, carefully install the E-ring on the pin
cam on the other side.

20.Now press down both pin cams by finger slowly and simulate the nozzle
exchange by turning the large index bevel gear. Feel the nozzle block rotating
smoothly without friction.
FIGURE 6-16
21.Move the head to its upper position again.

22.Fix the block stopper with 2 screws using an exact fitting Philips screwdriver.
Apply a force with a maximum of 0.12 Nm to the screws.
SCREEN 6-4

23.Install a new black index holder sticker on both screws of the stopper block, or
blacken them with a Marker.

FIGURE 6-17
24.In Manual Mode, execute a nozzle change to check if it functions smoothly.

6.5.1.7 FNC Nozzle Assembly Cleaning
The following procedure describes the cleaning of the FNC nozzles. This procedure
should be executed after every 10 to 20 hours of production.
Required tools:
■ Philips type screwdrivers
■ Air gun
■ Needle cleaning tool (9965 000 10360)
■ Needle assy (9965 000 10539) for needle cleaning assy.
■ Ultrasonic cleaner
■ Toothbrush
■ Alcohol (IPA or ethanol)
Required parts:
■ Black index holder sticker (9965 000 09496)
■ Turbine oil VG32 (9965 000 10365)
■ Screw block stopper, M2×4 flat head (5322 502 14662)
Cleaning procedure:
Before starting cleaning:
■ Origin the machine
■ Make sure the centre nozzle is selected; type 72F (for X/XII machine) or type
71F(for Xi/XiII machine).
■ Press the emergency button
■ Move the head assembly to a position where you can easily access the FNC head.

1. Peel off the black sticker from the FNC index holder.

FIGURE 6-18
2. Remove both screws fixing the block stopper, by using an exact fitting (to
prevent damage to the screws) Philips type screwdriver with a firm handgrip.
FIGURE 6-19
NOTE: When using different screws, during re-installation make sure they are the
correct size (screws may vary in size depending on the supplier).

3. Remove the block stopper by sliding it out.
FIGURE 6-20
4. Carefully pull out the shaft with the bevel gear by holding the nozzle index
holders. Watch for falling parts during the disassembly. Next, pull down the
nozzle assembly.
FIGURE 6-21

CAUTION
CAUTION: Store each nozzle assembly and the shaft with the bevel gear of each indi-
vidual head separately, so that they can be re-installed properly to the
same head from which they were removed. The shaft and nozzle block of
each head are a matched pair and may not be mixed!!
5. Remove each nozzle installed on the index holder, using a Philips screwdriver.
Take care not to loose the springs used for buffing. Clean the nozzles as follows:
a) Put the nozzles, springs, nozzle holder from which the nozzles were removed,
bevel gear and shaft in a container filled with alcohol (leave them in the
alcohol for 10 minutes), or use other cleaning solvents. When using an
ultrasonic cleaner, put the parts for 5-10 minutes in the bath.
FIGURE 6-22

b) While the above parts are left in the alcohol, clean the hole for the shaft to
install the nozzle assembly, using a cotton swab (fluff free) moistened with
alcohol. Then blow air to it, using an air gun
FIGURE 6-23
6. Use a toothbrush or a fluff free cotton swab moistened with alcohol, and clean
both the index gear and bevel gear, finally blow some air to it with an air gun.
Switch on the blow off function in Manual Mode, to clean the inside of the shaft.
Do NOT lubricate these parts.
FIGURE 6-24

7. Take the nozzle holder, bevel gear and shaft out of the alcohol.
Clean the holes in the nozzle holder using e.g. a needle.
FIGURE 6-25
8. Clean holes, gear itself and other parts of the bevel gear using e.g. a cotton swab
or tooth brush.
FIGURE 6-26

9. After taking the nozzles, springs, bevel gear and shaft out of the alcohol bath,
clean them using some air pressure.
FIGURE 6-27
10.Check the tip end of the washed nozzle for clogging, chipping, foreign matter
being attached and check the buffing condition.
• If clogging exists at the tip end, wash it again or clean it with a needle-
cleaning tool (9965 000 10360).
• If chipping off is found or a foreign matter has been attached, replace the
nozzle.
• If the buffing condition is poor, apply a small amount of oil (turbine VG32) a
few times and blow off the oil with an air gun. If the buffing action is still
not smoothly after this, replace the nozzle.
11.Re-install the nozzles to the nozzle index holder. Apply a force with a maximum
of 0.05 Nm, when installing the nozzles to the nozzle index holder.

12.Oil the bevel gear and shaft on the marked sections only. Make sure there is no
oil on the vacuum through hole. Use Turbine VG32 oil (9965 000 10365).
$SSO\DVLQJOHGURSRIRLOKHUHRQO\
FIGURE 6-28
13.DO NOT oil or grease the teeth of the bevel gear.
NOTE: Use a minimal amount of oil on the marked sections only!!

14.Lower the head pneumatically in Manual Mode.

15.Turn the R belt to rotate the head to a position where it can easily be accessed
for installation of the nozzle index holder. Bring the mark (dot), at the centre of
the index holder, to the front.
FIGURE 6-29
16.Bring the slot of the nozzle assembly to the front, set the 72F (for X/ XII) or 71F
(for Xi/XiII) nozzle down, and move in the nozzle assembly while pressing the
locate pin a little.
17.Insert the shaft and the bevel gear from the front while aligning the mark (dot)
on the index holder and the bevel gear.
FIGURE 6-30
CAUTION
CAUTION: Be sure to install the nozzle assembly, shaft and bevel gear only to the
head where it came from. Changing the matched combinations may cause
wear, and/or a lower pickup level.

18.Insert the block stopper to fixate the nozzle assembly.
FIGURE 6-31
19.Now press down both pin cams by finger slowly and simulate the nozzle
exchange by turning the large index bevel gear. Feel the nozzle block rotating
smoothly without friction. If there is still friction, exchange the parts involved.
20.Move the head to its upper position again.
21.Fix the block stopper with 2 screws using an exact fitting Philips screwdriver.
Apply a force with a maximum of 0.12Nm to the screws.
FIGURE 6-32
22.In Manual Mode, execute a nozzle change to check if it functions smoothly.

6.5.2 Head Area Checkpoints

The table below shows a list of checkpoints for the head area.
,QVSHFWLRQORFDWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ 'DLO\ :HHNO\ K K K
Nozzle 1 Using an air gun, verify that the - Clean Clean Clean Clean
adsorption path is clear. (off line)
Nozzle holder 2 Check the movement of buffing parts, Check / Check / Check / Check / Check /
looseness of holder and leaf spring replace replace replace replace replace
fatigue.
Replace if necessary.
FNC Nozzle holder 2A Check the movement of buffing parts, Check / Check / Check / Check / Check /
looseness of holder fatigue. replace replace replace replace replace
Replace if necessary.
Leaf spring 3 Check spring on attachment, if there is Check / Check / Check / Check / Check /
no up/down play when nozzle is replace replace replace replace replace
attached to the holder.
If necessary replace
Vacuum line - Check and clean the vacuum - Check Check Check Check
Ejector filter 4 Remove dirt with vacuum cleaner, or - - Check / Check / Check /
wash it or replace filter if necessary replace replace replace
Z axis ball screw - Remove old grease. Lightly apply - - Check Check / Check /
NSK#1 to the ball screw. Do not over grease grease
grease.
Z axis guide - Remove old grease and lightly apply - - Check Check / Check /
new grease nsk#1. Do not over grease grease grease
Vision camera 5 Check for dust and clean if necessary - - Check / Check / Check /
clean clean clean
Moving camera LED 6 Check if each LED illuminates suffi- - - - - Check /

unit ciently, if not replace the whole unit replace
TABLE 6-10

NOTE: When cleaning the camera do not touch the focus lens. The procedure how
to clean and maintain the ejector assy is described in chapter 15 head
assembly.
29 93001601.eps
32
30
25 24
1
21 19
22 20 41 33 A
35 16
26 42
5
27 6 14
38 7 7 28
17
23 15 43
11 31
4 39
10 36
34
18 40
2
3 13
9
12
8
44 37
9 30 016 01
FIGURE 6-33 Oil and grease points for the head assembly.

6.5.3 X Axis Checkpoints

X axis ball screw 1 Check and clean the ball screw make sure that Check Check/ Check/ Check/
there are no chips or other debris. Grease Grease Grease
Remove old grease and apply NSK#1, do not
over grease.
X axis guide 3 Check and clean the guides. Check/ Check/ Check/ Check/
Remove old grease and slightly apply NSK#1, Grease Grease Grease Grease
do not over grease.
TABLE 6-11
FIGURE 6-34 Grease and oil checkpoints for X axis.

6.5.4 Y Axis Checkpoints

Y axis ball screw 1 Check and clean the ball screw make sure Check Check/ Check/ Check/
that there are no chips or other debris , Grease Grease Grease
over grease.
X axis guide 3 Check and clean the guides. Check Check/ Check/ Check/
Remove old grease and slightly apply Grease Grease Grease
NSK#1, do not over grease.
TABLE 6-12
1
1
2
1
1
FIGURE 6-35 Y-axis Grease and oil check points.

6.5.5 Conveyer Checkpoints

Ball screw 1 Check and clean the ball screw make sure that Check Check Check / Check /
are no chips or other debris , grease grease
over grease.
Linear guide 2 Check and clean the spline, remove old grease Check Check Check / Check /
and slightly apply NSK#1, do not over grease. grease grease
Conveyer belt 3 Check for belt wear, fatigue, tension and Check / Check / Check /
replace if necessary. replace replace replace
Conveyer width tim- 4 Check for belt wear, fatigue, tension and Check / Check / Check /
ing belt replace if necessary. replace replace replace
TABLE 6-13
2
3
3
3
4
FIGURE 6-36 Conveyer width

6.5.6 Feeder Plate Checkpoints

Feeder plate 1 Check and clean the feeder plate, making sure that Check / Check / Check / Check / Check /
there are no chips or debris present clean clean clean clean clean
Feeder plate joint 2 Check to make sure that the joint is not detached and Check Check / Check / Check /
that there are no air leaks, replace if necessary replace replace replace
Feeder valve 3 Check if the air valves are working correctly, replace Check / Check / Check /
if necessary replace replace replace
Air hose 4 Check to make sure that are no cuts or cracks in the Check / Check / Check /
air hose, replace if necessary replace replace replace
Tape feeder Supposed to be maintained off line For details see relevant Feeder manual.
TABLE 6-14
3
3
FIGURE 6-37 Feeder plate assy.

6.5.7 General Parts

,QVSHFWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ 'DLO\ :HHNO\ K K K
*(1(5$/
Vacuum pres- Check the vacuum pressure and adjust if neces- Check / Check / Check /
sure sary. adjust adjust adjust
Air pressure Check the air pressure and adjust if necessary. Check / Check / Check /
adjust adjust adjust
Water traps on Check if there is no water in the filter, drain if nec- Check / Check / Check /
air and vacuum essary drain drain drain
Air filter com- Check the air filters and replace if necessary Check / Check / Check /
pressed air replace replace replace
&21752//(5
Keyboard Check if the keyboard works properly if not Check /
replace. Clean the keyboard clean
Maintenance Check if the Maintenance Support Pendant works Check /

Support Pen- properly, if not replace. Clean the hand held key- clean
dant board
Monitors Clean the monitors with a towel Clean
Floppy disk Check if the floppy disk drive works properly and Check /
drive clean it clean
Cooling fans Check and clean the cooling fans in the MCX box Check /
clean
TABLE 6-15

Required Tools and Materials
CHAPTER 7 Required Tools and Materials

7.1 Introduction
For proper machine performance it is necessary to maintain the machine well and to
calibrate the machine on certain intervals. See chapter 6 Maintenance and chapter
4-9 calibration. For calibration and maintenance some special tools are required
which are described in this chapter. For code numbers, please refer to chapter 8.
7.2 Vision Tools

To adjust the cameras and lighting systems three tools are used.
The light adjuster tool 1 has two different sides, a white one and a dark/light gray
one. The tool is used to calibrate the moving camera and the main and coaxial light
of the side illumination unit. The light adjuster tool 2 is translucent and is used to
calibrate the side light of the side illumination unit.
Light adjuster plate 1 Light adjuster plate 2
FIGURE 7-1 Light adjuster tools
The focus adjuster tool is a tool used to adjust the focus of the line array and single
vision camera. It is a metal ruler attached to a triangle block. This tool is not used
for the fiducial camera.
FIGURE 7-2 Focus adjuster tool

7.3 Calibration Tools

To calibrate the machine we use the auto mount procedure as described in chapter
4-9. To do so we use a glass PCB and glass QFP’s.
The glass QFP’s are mounted on the glass PCB, after mounting the machine will
check the coordinates and corrects the position of camera and heads.
QFP 208
Position Glass
Position Small Components QFP 68
Components
FIGURE 7-3 Glass QFP and glass PCB
To let the machine pick the glass QFP components there is a stand available. This
can be mounted on the feeder bar and can store up to 4 QFP’s.
These glass calibration tools do not need a periodic re-calibration because there
are no moving parts involved which can influence its function in time. If the
glass components are damaged (e.g. bad markers) new ones have to be
purchased. It is strongly advised to treat these glass components with extreme
caution and clean them only with a soft tissue with alcohol. Always wear soft
lint-free gloves when using these glass components and make sure that the
markers on the glass QFPs can be recognized without the use of inner and outer
cut of noise.

7.4 Feeder Bar Adjustment Tool

The feeder bar adjustment tool is used to calibrate the feeder pick positions
(chapter 12). For the XII machines, as well as the XiII machines a tool is
available at PCS.
FIGURE 7-4 Feeder bar adjustment tool
A periodic re-calibration of the feeder bar adjustment tool is not needed because
there are no moving parts involved which can influence its function in time. If the
top-plate is disassembled (loosen or taken off), please check with your local service
organization if it can be send-in for re-adjustment otherwise a new tool needs to be
purchased.
7.5 Feeder Lock Verifier Adjustment Tool (not for Xi

Machines)
FIGURE 7-5 Feeder lock verifier adjustment tool.
The feeder lock verification tool does not need a periodic re-calibration because
there are no moving parts involved which can influence its function in time.
If the tool is damaged, a new one must be purchased.

7.6 Head Adjustment Tools

For the alignment of the head assy the following tools are used:
1. Alignmnent tools
This tool is used to align all R positions of the heads. Within the shaft of each
head a hole is applied. After loosening the R motor belts from the head in case
of a R motor problem or a R belt problem, the shafts can be rotated separately.
Rotate the heads so that the hole is located at the front side and fixate the tool
by means of two short M2 bolts. Adjust the belt tension and fix the belt tension
blocks again. Loosen the R alignment tool again.
A periodic re-calibration of the R-alignment tool is not needed because there are
no moving parts involved which can influence its function in time. If the tool is
damaged or disassembled a new one needs to be purchased.
FIGURE 7-6 R alignment tool

2. Shaft assemble/ disassemble tool
FIGURE 7-7 Shaft assemble / disassemble tool
This tool is used to unscrew the inner from the outer shaft of the head assy.
3. Tool E-ring
FIGURE 7-8 Tool E-ring
After removing a circlip it might be difficult to bring it back. This tool can be
used for that. Place the circlip in the fork and push it back on the position.
4. Tool hook
FIGURE 7-9 Tool hook
This tool can be used for removing circlips, especially the camrod E-rings at the
FNC head.

5. Head Sensor adjustment jigs
FIGURE 7-10 Jigs
These 3 jigs are used to align the 3 head sensors to its correct position.
Every jig is used for a certain sensor.
These jigs do not need a periodic re-calibration because there are no moving
parts involved which can influence its function in time. If the jig is damaged, a
new one must be purchased.
6. Needle cleaner assy
This tool is used for cleaning the nozzle hole.

Spare Parts List Topaz-XII Series
CHAPTER 8 Spare Parts List Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII

Table of Contents
8.2.3 Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.3.1 Fuse Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.3.2 Power Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8.4 Base Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8.5.1 Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8.6.2 Head Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
8.6.4 Nozzle Types (FNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
8.6.5 Nozzle Types (SF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
8.6.7 ITF Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
8.6.8 Reject Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
8.7.1 X- axis Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
8.7.2 Y- axis Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
8.7.3 R (ϕ) - axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52

8.7.4 Z - axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52

8.7.5 W- axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
8.7.6 PU - axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
8.8 Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
8.9 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8.9.1 Traychanger LCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8.9.2 Tape Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8.9.3 Tray Changer (ATS-20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8.9.4 FES20XII/XiII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8.9.5 ITF Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8.11 Fixation Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
8.11.2 Set Screw. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
8.11.3 Screw Pan Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
8.11.4 Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66
8.11.5 Screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66
8.11.6 Bolts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67

8.1 General Information

This chapter of the Service manual describes the spare parts, which are available at
PCS (Philips Consumer Services). Prices and standard packing units are not included
in this Chapter. Please consult your regional Customer Support representative for a
Spare Parts Price list and repair possibility. The spare parts list is given per system
module. The lists uses the following abbreviations:
Item no.: This number consists of the module number and identification
numbers so it can be easily identified in the drawings.
Figure no Is indicating the figure no. where the item in question can be
located. Normally this is the next page, but sometimes a
reference will be made to other parts (pages) of this manual. E.g.
figure 8-1 means: page 8-4 and 8-5 .
Service code This is the ordering code number that must be used when
ordering a spare part (12nc) at PCS.
Description: This is a short description of the part in question. For customs
purposes harmonised description is used (International stand-
ardised). These descriptions must always be used on invoices.
Qty/Mod.: Quantity per module. This is the quantity of the part in the
particular module.
PI indicator: This is the priority indicator. This is our advice as to the partís
priority in the module in question. If a part is indicated with a
PI, this column is marked with a “Y”. For example see paragraph
8.1.2 of this chapter. If this field is left blank, then it automat-
ically considered as a “No”.
Repair: Repairable parts are marked with “Y”. In principle those parts
have to be returned to PCS for repair. For details on repair
procedures with PCS, please contact your local Customer Support
representative.
Remarks: This column gives additional information of the part in question.

8.1.1 Ordering Spare Parts

These service code numbers are exclusively to be used when ordering spare parts.
For parts not having a service code number please contact your Customer Support
representative. All spare parts of this chapter can be ordered through the ORDER-
DESK of your Customer Support representative. The order must include: the 12nc
service code number, the quantity, the purchase order number, the delivery address
and the invoice address.
At the following address spare parts can be ordered:
8.1.1.1 Regional Center Europe
Building HVM
P.O. Box 218
5600 MD Eindhoven
7KH1HWKHUODQGV
Telephone: +31.40.2766300
Fax: +31.40.2766541
8.1.1.2 Regional Center Americas
5110 McGinnis Ferry Road
Alpharetta, GA 30005
86$
Telephone: +1.770.751.4420
Fax: +1.770.751.4450
Address of the Assembléon Internet Website:
http://www.assembleon.com
NOTE: Articles on service stock are to support the customers in case this support
is needed. Service stock should NEVER be used for commercial use.
8.1.2 Regional Stock Keeping

The required up-time for SMD placement systems must be very high. Break down of
equipment can never be excluded but in the event of it happening we have to be
organised to keep the downtime as short as possible.
In addition to proper training and service manuals, the availability of spare parts is
extremely important. The principle here is "the right part in the right place at the
right time". For that reason we have made a selection of items (so called Priority
Items - PI), which can be stocked regionally under certain conditions.
The selection made has been based on various criteria such as: critical for the func-
tioning of the equipment, expected failure rate figures, time required to replace the

part during in-line repair actions, stopping of the flow-line, needed for diagnostic
reasons and unsafe conditions in case of failure.
It is obvious that in the course of time this selection may change to reflect actual
failure figures, etc. It will be kept up to date and the changes will be published
when necessary.
We also appreciate that every customer has his own specific situation and
requirements. Please ask for more specific advice your Customer Support repre-
sentative.
NOTE: Some of the drawings are showing the right to left PCB flow.
Not all item numbers are intended to be a spare part, when it is needed to
order one of the parts which are not coded please contact your local service
organization.

8.2 Module 1: System Principles

8.2.1 MCX Control Unit, Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII
,WHP )LJXUH 6HUYLFHQXPEHU1& 'HVFULSWLRQ 4W\PRG 5HSDLU 3, 5HPDUNV 2SDO; ,,
2 8-1 9965 000 09075 Mother board assy 1 Y Mother board assy X
3 8-1 9965 000 09080 Servo board assy 1 Y Servo board assy (also LCS/ATS) X
4 8-1 9965 000 09072 System unit assy 1 Y System unit assy X
5/6 8-1 5322 216 04688 Driver board assy 1 Y Driver board (for ATS option)
5/6 8-1 5322 216 04689 Driver board assy 1 Y Driver board (for LCS option) X
5/6 8-1 5322 216 04691 Driver board 1 Y Driver board for main machine (-K4x version) X
7 8-1 9965 000 09073 Vision board assy 1 Y Vision board (VICS 3200) X
8 8-1 9965 000 09074 Capacitor (CAP1) 2 Y CAP1,4700UF 450V X
8 8-1 9965 000 09083 D POWER ASSY 1 D powers assy (version-up of previous version) X
12 8-1 9965 000 09070 Fan Motor 3 Fan motor assy X
13 8-1 9965 000 09086 Power supply 5V 1 Y SW power 5V DC X
14 8-1 9965 000 09087 Power supply 12V 1 Y SW power 12V DC X
16 8-1 9965 000 09085 Flash board assy 1 Y Flash board assy X
17 8-1 9965 000 09082 APPL Board assy 1 Y Application board assy X
X X 9965 000 09084 Flash disk 1 Y Flash disk 256 Mb X
X X 9965 000 09071 Transformer 1 1 Transformer 1 assy X
X X 5322 320 12771 HARNESS PWM/FDBK1 1 Harness power/feedback 1 X
X X 9965 000 09077 HARNESS PWR FAIL 1 Harness power fail X
X X 9965 000 09076 HARNESS SW PWR1 1 Harness X
X X 9965 000 09079 HARNESS, IDE (FLASH) 1 Harness to flash board assy X
X X 9965 000 09078 HARNESS, IDE (CDROM) 1 Harness to Cdrom player X
X X 9965 000 10359 HARNESS 1 Harness pos/enc X
X X 5322 320 12754 HARNESS PWM/FDBK2 1 Harness power/feedback X
TABLE 8-1

8
12 1 8
12
12
15
13
14 5
10
6
2
9
11
3
7 4
16 17
FIGURE 8-1 MCX Control unit

8.2.2 Maintenance Support Pendant (MSP)

MSP 8-2 9965 000 09024 Maintenance Support Pendant 1 Complete Maintenance support pendant
X X 9965 000 09035 Harness, MSP short 1 Harness to short circuit the MSP connector
(EMG circuit)
TABLE 8-2

FIGURE 8-2 Maintenance Support Pendant (MSP)

8.2.3 Harnesses
J43 X 996500010336 Harness 1-14 1 Y-flex-duct Power head I/O X

J44 X 996500010337 Harness 1-15 1 X-flex-duct Power head I/O X
J108 X 996500010338 Harness 4-6 1 Y-flex-duct I/O X
J114 X 996500010346 Harness HNS,CMN HEAD 1 X-Flex-duct X
J115 X 996500010339 Harness 4-7 1 Z-flex-duct Harness 4-7 X
J124 X 9965 000 09228 Harness 5-4 1 Servo 1B, Z,R,W X
J125 X 996500010347 Harness HNS,PI-X,Z 1 Y-flex-duct X
J128 X 996500010340 Harness 5-8 1 X-flex-duct R and Z X
J129 X 5322 320 12739 Harness 5-7 1 X-axis servo motor harness X
J136 X 996500010348 Harness HNS,RP 1 Z-Flex-duct X
J143 X 996500010341 HNS,MO X Y1 Y2 PU 1 Harness 6-3 X
J144 X 996500010342 Harness HNS,MO Z1 R1 W 1 X-flex-duct X
J145 X 996500010343 Harness 6-5 1 Y-flex-duct Harness for X motor X
J146/147/148 X 996500010349 Harness HNS,ZM RM 3 Y-flex-duct X
J149 X 996500010344 Harness 6-8 1 X-flex-duct Harness 6-8 X
J152 X 996500010350 Harness HNS,RM 1 Z-flex-duct X
J171 X 996500010345 Harness 2-11, HNS,OT HEAD 1 Y-flex-duct Origin X
J172 X 996500010351 Harness HNS, OT HEAD 1 X-flex-duct X
J173 X 996500010352 Harness HNS, OT HEAD 1 Z-flex-duct X
J182 X 9965 000 09041 HNS,REAR OPE.SW 1 Harness X
J183 X 9965 000 09034 Harness, switch ACTIVE 1 Y Active button harness for operation panel X
J184 X 9965 000 09033 Harness, switch READY 1 Y Ready button harness for operation panel X
J185 X 9965 000 09036 Harness, switch RUN 1 Y Run button harness for operation panel X
J186 X 9965 000 09039 Harness, switch STOP 1 Y Stop button harness for operation panel X
J187 X 9965 000 09038 Harness, switch ERROR CLR 1 Y Error Clear button harness for operation panel X
J188 X 9965 000 09037 Harness, switch RESET 1 Y Reset button harness for operation panel X
J501 X 996500010353 Harness 501 (L=6m) 1 Y-flex-duct Harness fiducial camera X
J510 X 996500010354 Harness 510 (L=1.7m) 1 X-flex-duct Harness fiducial camera X
SQ61 X 9965 000 09040 Harness, switch FES20 1 Y Clamp on/off switch + harness FES20 X
X X 5322 268 40427 Connector 1 Connector SMR-03V-B (male 3 pins) X
X X 5322 268 10315 Pins 1 Pins used in connector SMR-03V-B X
X X 5322 268 40425 Connector 1 Connector SMP-03V-BC (female 3 pins) X
X X 5322 268 20198 Pin (bus) 1 Pin (bus shape) used in connector SMP-03V-BC X
TABLE 8-3

See for cable harness location the overall interconnect diagram in chapter 5

8.2.4 Cover Assembly Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII

9 8-3 996500010331 Cover 9-1 (front) 1 Front cover X

9 8-3 996500010329 Cover 9-1 (rear) 1 Rear cover X
9 8-3 996500010330 Cover 9-1 (ITF front/rear) 1 Front /rear cover Xi-II
9 8-3 996500010332 Cover 9-1RL (1ATS) 1 Rear cover left with 1 ATS installed
9 8-3 996500010333 Cover 9-1RR 1 Rear cover right with 1 ATS
9 8-3 996500010334 Cover 9-1RR (H-ATS) 1 Rear cover right with ATS landscape
9 8-3 996500010335 Cover 9-1RL (H-ATS) 1 Rear cover left ATS landscape
21 8-3 5322 417 11366 Hinge 2 1 Hinge 2 X
25 8-3 5322 500 10515 Shoulder bolt 4 Bolt to fix the gas spring X
31 8-3 5322 693 22792 Magnet catch 1 Magnet catch (TL-152-2) X
32 8-3 5322 526 20189 Magnet catch 1 Magnet catch 4 (TL-77S) X
38 8-3 5322 529 10351 Gas, spring 4 Gas damper X
TABLE 8-4

23 16-R 28
20 22
10
31 28
32
8 22
13
35 25
9-R
11 21 18
19
2 30 4 17 20
6
25
5 32 31 25
30 23
10 11 21
23 21 29
25 3
3132 7 11
25 28 15
18 21 29
20 10
28
17 32 31 1
11 10
25
14 30
16-F
9-F 26 27
38
22 5
20 25
30
19
22
12
24
FIGURE 8-3 Cover assemble Topaz-XII series

8.2.5 General Machine Parts

1 8-4 5322 693 11197 VGOS Monitor 1 Y Philips Brilliance SVGA monitor. (Systems X
before March 2003.)
1 8-4 9965 000 17549 VGOS Monitor 1 Y View Sonic SVGA monitor. (Systems after
March 2003.)
1 8-4 9965 000 09022 12.1SVGA Touch LCD 1 Y Touch screen X
2 8-4 9965 000 09025 Mouse holder (pocket) 1 Plastic mouse holder X
3 8-4 9965 000 09021 Keyboard 1 Y Small VGOS keyboard X
4 8-4 9965 000 09023 Mouse 1 Y Mouse X
5 8-4 5322 418 10227 Tape dump box 1 Dump box for tape feeder waste 630x300x400 X
5 8-4 5322 418 10228 Tape bin 1 Dump box for tape feeder waste (50 position X
standard)
6 8-4 5322 218 12096 Light 1 assy 1 Y Light tower complete assembly X
FDD 5322 693 91639 Floppy Disk drive 1 Y Floppy disk drive X
J113 996500010370 Cable VGA monitor 1 Harness to connect SVGA to MCX X
X X 9965 000 09081 CD-ROM drive 1 Y CD-Rom drive (left side of MCX box) X
X X 5322 361 10875 Cooling fan (fan motor assy) 1 Cooling fan X
X X 5322 320 11928 Set of 2 SMEMA connectors 1 SMEMA connectors X
X X 5322 320 11927 Harness SMEMA next inside the machine 1 SMEMA next harness X
X X 5322 320 11926 Harness SMEMA previous inside the machine 1 SMEMA previous harness X
X X 4022 591 74361 VGOS software 1 Y Latest VGOS software X
X X 5322 418 10402 Component dump box 1 Dump box for components X
X X 9965 000 07776 Component dump box 1 Dump box for components (double ATS)
X X 9965 000 09031 Console Emulator Box 1 Console Emulator box (keyboard+mouse sim-
ulation)
X X 9965 000 09026 Switcher Board assy 1 Y Switcher board
X X 9965 000 15405 Console Emulator &Switcher Board 1 Y 1HZYHUVLRQ function board. In Production X
after 1 oct. 2002, see SI-CSM-577
X X 4022 591 74521 Windows NT+RTX 1 System software(latest version)
TABLE 8-5

FIGURE 8-4 General machine parts

8.3 Power and Safety Circuits

8.3.1 Fuse Box
NF11 8-5 9965 000 01331 Noise Filter 1 X

QF11A 8-5 9965 000 10934 Main fuse 6-3A 1 Y X
QF11 8-5 9965 000 10933 Main fuse 10A Y X
QF21 8-5 5322 252 11241 Fuse 5A 1 Y X
QF22 8-5 9965 000 10369 Fuse 7A 1 Y X
QF31 8-5 5322 252 11238 Fuse 10A 1 Y X
QF32 8-5 5322 280 30073 Fuse 2A 1 Y X
TABLE 8-6

QF11 10A QF11A 6.3A
QF21 QF22 QF24

5A 7A 2A
QF31 QF32
10A 2A
L1 L2 L3 PE
XB11
FIGURE 8-5 Fusebox

8.3.2 Power Box

TM11 5-1 5322 146 11182 3 Phase transformer 1 Y Transformer (motor power) X
GS21 5-1 9965 000 09495 24V Power Supply 1 Y Power supply 24V – 600W X
KM10 8-6 5322 280 10392 Pilz relay 1 Y PN0Z3 safety relay X
KM11/12 8-6 5322 280 10393 Contactor 1 2 Y Contactor 1 X
KM11A/12A 8-6 9965 000 09032 Contactor 2 2 Contactor 2 X
QS11 5-1 5322 276 14123 3 Phase main switch 1 Y Main Switch X
S11,S12 8-6 5322 218 12106 Spark killer 2 Spark killer X
SB1/12 5-6 5322 276 13692 Emergency switch 2 X
TC11 5-10 9965 000 09029 Power transformer 1 Transformer (control logic power) X
SQ150 5-2 9965 000 09027 Safety switch 2 Cover safety switch X
SQ151
- - 9965 000 09028 Safety switch key 1 Y Schmersal key X
P40 8-6 9965 000 09030 Connection board 1 Y Connection board X
GS22 8-6 9965 000 03803 12V Power supply 1 Y 12V power for Xi only
QF41/42 5-1 5322 252 11377 Fuse 3A 1 Y Fuse 3A for Xi only
QF51/52 5-1 9965 000 03875 Fuse 5A 1 Y Fuse 5A for Xi only
P24 5-7 5322 216 04674 I/O board conveyor 2 Y Conveyor I/O board RQO\XVHWKH;ERDUGVRU X
XSJUDGH;ZLWK,2VRIWZDUHYHUVLRQRUKLJKHU
X X 9965 000 11067 I/O Core Board 1 Y Conveyor/Head separate Core board X
TABLE 8-7

QF41 QF42
CONNECTION BOARD ASSY P40 P24
SPEED
CONTROLLER
GS22
TM11
GS21
FIGURE 8-6 Powerbox Topaz-XII Series

8.4 Base Assembly

7 8-7 5322 535 10653 Manifold 2 Manifold X

9 8-7 5322 480 20142 Air filter 1 Filter (F300) X
9A - 5322 480 10241 Element filter 1 Air filter element X
10 8-7 9965 000 09013 Mist filter 1 Y Filter (MF400) X
10A - 9965 000 08086 Element filter 1 Y Air filter element X
12 8-7 5322 693 91774 Regulator 1 Regulator X
13 8-7 5322 395 90969 Joint 1 Joint X
14 8-7 5322 395 90971 Joint 1 Joint X
15 8-7 5322 360 10462 Valve 1 Valve X
16 8-7 5322 349 20152 Pressure gauge 1 Y Pressure gauge X
28 8-7 5322 395 90943 Joint 2 Joint (SL12-03) X
29 8-7 5322 528 11353 Joint 1 Joint (SLY10-03) X
30 8-7 5322 352 30467 Joint 1 Joint X
31 8-7 5322 538 11352 Joint 1 Joint (TL4-02) X
32 8-7 5322 395 90972 Joint 1 Joint (UEDW+8) X
34 8-7 5322 395 90593 Joint 1 Joint (SL8-01) X
36 8-7 5322 395 90946 Joint 12 Joint (TSS4-01) X
37 8-7 5322 395 90945 Joint 2 Joint (TSH8-01) X
39 8-7 9965 000 09012 Leveling bolt assy 6 Leveling bolt X
41 8-7 5322 360 10172 Muffler 1 Muffler (KM-23) X
42 8-7 5322 360 50913 Valve 1 Y Valve exhaust X
44 8-7 5322 360 60241 Muffler 1 Muffler (KM-11) X
- - 5322 528 11355 Manifold 1 manifold X
- - 5322 395 90722 Joint 1 Set of 10 joint UY8 X
- - 5322 530 10541 Air hose 1 Urethane tube (red 8 mm) X
- - 5322 526 40774 Joint 1 Joint (UP10) X
- - 5322 530 10542 Air hose 1 Air hose (red 4 mm) X
- - 5322 526 40884 Joint 1 Joint X
- - 5322 530 20878 Air hose 1 Air hose (orange 4 mm) X
- - 5322 530 20823 Air hose 1 Air hose (black 4 mm) X
TABLE 8-8 Base assembly

37 36
55 34
54 26
28 15
33 10 7
32 11 52
9 4 5
14 44 3
56 40
29 13
12 18
43 31
6 48
42 41 50
38
28 17
16
30 21 46
37
53 51
47
7 49 27
36 27
45 40 8 1
41 22
39 25
23 24
20 2
FIGURE 8-7 Base assembly

8.5 PCB Transport System

8.5.1 Conveyor
10 8-8 9965 000 10355 Guide 2 Guide (445) X

10 8-8 9965 000 10357 Guide 2 Guide (250) X
10 8-8 9965 000 10356 Guide 2 Guide (385) X
16 8-8 5322 520 40308 Bearing 1 Bearing (6200ZZ) X
17 8-8 5322 535 10664 Ballscrew 1 Ballscrew (445) X
29 8-8 9965 000 16795 Guide 1, End 2 Guide conveyor entrance/exit X
30 8-8 5322 463 11222 Guide 2, End 2 Guide conveyor entrance/exit X
34 8-8 5322 358 10276 Belt (conveyor) 2 Belt conveyor X
39 8-8 5322 520 10768 Bearing 1 X
40 8-8 9965 000 02790 Motor assy (belt) 1 Y Belt motor X
41 8-8 5322 132 00056 Sensor 1 Y Sensor 1-3 (L=1150) X
44 8-8 5322 463 11281 Guide 1 Guide X
46 8-8 5322 358 10278 Belt (1305-3GT-6) 1 Y Belt movable locate pin (machine without ATS) X
46 8-8 9965 000 10374 Belt (1374-3GT-6) 1 Y Belt movable locate pin (machine with ATS) X
56 8-8 9965 000 06136 Sensor 1 Y Sensor 1-3 (L=1400) X
57 8-8 9965 000 10373 Pulley 1 Pulley conveyor (shaft included) X
59 8-8 5322 535 10668 Spline 1 1 Spline 1 (445) X
59 8-8 5322 535 10669 Spline 1 1 Spline 1 (250) X
59 8-8 5322 535 10671 Spline 1 1 Spline 1 (385) X
61 8-8 5322 528 11151 Pulley 1 Pulley motor X
62 8-8 5322 358 10277 Belt 1 Y Belt motor X
63 8-8 5322 528 50357 Pulley 1 spline 1 Pulley 1 spline X
64 8-8 9965 000 10375 Collar, conveyor 1 Collar conveyor X
68 8-8 5322 528 50373 Pulley 3 1 Pulley 3 width axis X
69 8-8 9965 000 09062 AC servo motor 1 Y AC servo motor (W-axis) X
72 8-8 5322 520 20762 Bearing 1 Bearing X
73 8-8 9965 000 06108 Collar BRG 2 Collar bearing X
74 8-8 5322 358 10145 Belt 1 Y Belt for width axis X
75 8-8 5322 132 00132 Sensor 1 Y Sensor W origin X
TABLE 8-9

25 18
30 75
57 28
24 7
25 39 3 39
34
30 57 57 23 76 33 3
36 19 9 18 33
28 37 10
11 9
34 38 1 26
39
77 56 38 17 8
79 76 37 21 28 12
57 36 5
23 27 19
65
28 1
6 32 41 25
14 10
20 57 24 29
15 26 11
42
25 17 58 22
13 55 57 57
67
2 1 44 54 24
43 58 5631
15 69
6152
5350 29 57 34
46 47 34
62 48 7271
45 57 32 57 35 63
68 70 73 14
64
15 59
74 49
15 22
13 60
66 1
39 2
74 61 40
13
62 4
FIGURE 8-8 Conveyor

8.5.2 Main-stopper and Locate-pin Assy

0$,167233(5$66<
18 8-9 5322 360 10463 Cylinder, main stopper 1 Y Cylinder of main stopper (normal) X
18- 8-9 9965 000 09063 Cylinder, main stopper 1 Y Cylinder of main stopper (when ATS installed) X
19 8-9 5322 463 11285 Guide, main stopper 1 Guide of main stopper X
21 8-9 5322 535 92541 Speed controller 2 Speed controller SC4-M5A X
22 8-9 5322 528 11368 Joint 1 Joint (UEF) X
(;,767233(5 X
3 8-9 5322 360 10464 Cylinder 1 Y Cylinder of exit stopper X
6 8-9 5322 395 90723 Joint 1 Joint SL4-M5 X
12 8-9 9965 000 06136 Sensor 1-2 2 Y Sensor X
/2&$7(3,1$66< X
4 8-9 9965 000 09064 Locate pin 1 1 Locate pin X
5 8-9 9965 000 09065 Locate pin 2 1 Locate pin X
6 8-9 5322 360 10463 Cylinder, locate pin 2 Y Cylinder of locate pin X
- 8-9 9965 000 09066 Cylinder assy 1 Cylinder assy including sensor X
7 8-9 5322 463 11286 Guide locate pin 2 Guide rail for locate pin X
11 8-9 5322 535 92541 Speed controller 2 Speed controller SC4-M5A X
61 8-9 9965 000 09067 Sensor, 1-2 2 Y Sensor locate pin up/down X
TABLE 8-10

5 28
15
2 15 16
12 4
7
15
2 19 28 24
12 12 14 29 20
16 7
1 17 25 26
13 9 12
12 17
8 16
17
14 17 21
1 9 12
13 16 27 23 18
3
8
17
13 22
16 0$,167233(5
13
10
6
10
6
11
11
/2&$7(3,1
(;,767233(5
FIGURE 8-9 Locate pin, exit stopper and main stopper.

8.5.3 Edge Clamp and Push-in

('*(&/$03
X X 9965 000 09069 Cylinder edge-clamp 9 Y Edge clamp cylinder (old type with 9 cylinders)
X X 5322 526 41094 Joint cylinder 18 Joint cylinder (old type with 9 cylinders)
X X 5322 360 10465 Cylinder edge-clamp 2 Y Edge clamp cylinder (new type with 2 cylinders)
386+,1 X
8 8-10 5322 520 10871 Bearing 1 Bearing if ATS installed X
9 8-10 5322 360 10466 Cylinder 1 Y Cylinder X
9 8-10 5322 360 10467 Cylinder 1 Y Cylinder if ATS installed X
11 8-10 5322 535 92541 Speed controller 1 Speed controller X
&/$03%2$5'$66<
9 8-10 5322 360 10468 Cylinder 2 Y Board clamp cylinder X
14 8-10 5322 528 11371 Joint cylinder 2 Joint to the cylinder X
TABLE 8-11

14 5
13
9 48
12 10 13
15 1
11 18 2 16 14
8 19 13
17 6 20 16 2
10
75 19 18 16
1 3 15
56 2
3
7 7
8 18 16 6
20 12
19 9
5 6 11
47
CLAMP BOARD (NEW TYPE)
FIGURE 8-10 Clamp and Push-in

8.5.4 Sub-stopper and Push-up

68%67233(5$66< X
3 8-11 5322 360 10464 Cylinder sub stopper 1 Y Cylinder of sub stopper assy X
5 8-11 5322 132 00056 Sensor, 1-3 2 Y Sensor, 1-3 board detect X
6 8-11 5322 395 90723 Joint 2 Joint SL4-M5 X
X
386+83 X
6 8-11 9965 000 09068 AC Servo motor 1 Y AC servo motor (Push up plate) X
20 8-11 5322 528 11369 Roller tension 1 Roller tension X
21 8-11 5322 52010866 Bearing 3 1 Bearing X
28 8-11 5322 132 00129 Sensor 1 Y Sensor 1 assy X
31 8-11 5322 358 10279 Belt 1 Belt L 1299 X
X X 996500010371 Push-up pin assy 8 Push-up pin assy X
X
TABLE 8-12

FIGURE 8-11 Sub stopper and Push up

8.6 Component Transport System

8.6.1 Nozzle Station Topaz-XII Series
2 8-12 9965 000 05411 Plate clamp 1 Plate for SF and FNC2QO\7RSD]; -
,,
EXLOGEHIRUH$SULO
4 8-12 9965 000 10372 Joint cylinder 1 Joint cylinder X
5 8-12 5322 360 10491 Air cylinder assy 1 Y Cylinder clamp X
11 8-12 5322 360 10492 cylinder up/down 1 Y cylinder up/down X
12 8-12 5322 528 11004 Joint cylinder up/down 1 X
16 8-12 5322 130 10062 Sensor 12 Y Nozzle detect sensor X
TABLE 8-13

6 6
2
19
7
1
20
3 21
16
13
10
17 13
15
10
12
18
4 8 9
5 14
11
FIGURE 8-12 Nozzle station

8.6.2 Head Assembly

,WHP )LJXUH 6HUYLFHQXPEHU1& 'HVFULSWLRQ 4W\PRG 5HSDLU 3, 5HPDUNV )1& 6) 2SDO; ,,
2 8-13 5322 492 11798 Spring main 1 Spring main X X

4 8-13 5322 535 10679 Ball screw 1 Z axis ball screw X X
7 8-13 5322 463 11287 Guide Z axis 1 Guide Z-axis X X
8 8-13 9965 000 09044 Belt R 1 Belt R motor X X
9 8-13 9965 000 09043 Pulley motor 1 Pulley R motor X X
15 8-13 5322 520 30554 Bearing Bearing X X
16 8-13 5322 528 11374 Coupling Coupling X X
18 8-13 9965 000 09045 AC servo motor 1 Y AC servo R motor X X
19 8-13 9965 000 09046 AC servo motor 1 Y AC servo Z motor X X
21 8-13 9965 000 09059 CCD camera 1 Y CCD camera X X
22 8-13 5322 381 12109 Lens 95 1 Lens 95 X X
23 8-13 5322 218 12099 Fiducial light assy 1 Y Fiducial light assy X X
23 8-13 5322 216 04679 LED Board assy 1 Y Fiducial LED PCB board assy X X
47 8-13 9965 000 09053 Marker pin 2 Head marker X X
43 8-13 5322 216 04676 I/O board P21 1 Y Head I/O (RQO\XVHWKH;ERDUGV X X
RU;ZLWKRUKLJKHU,2VRIWZDUH)
43a 8-13 9965 000 11067 I/O core board 1 Y Head I/O core boardRQO\XVHRU X X
KLJKHUVRIWZDUHVHH6,&605
TABLE 8-14

FIGURE 8-13 Head assembly

8.6.3 Head Assy SF, Continue

2 8-14 5322 530 51347 Packing 28 Y Packing (MYA-4) X X X

3 8-14 5322 532 12545 Packing 4 Y Packing (MYA-10A) X X X
4 8-14 5322 532 12546 Packing 4 Y Packing X X X
5 8-14 5322 360 10479 Piston plug assy 4 Y Piston plug 2-3-4-6 X
6 8-14 5322 532 13169 Packing 4 Packing (MYA-12,5) X
7 8-14 5322 530 10289 O-ring 4 O-ring,3 (in plugs) X X X
8 8-14 5322 462 11201 Plug assy 4 Y Plug assy 1-3-5-7 X X X
8 8-14 9965 000 03801 Plug assy 4 Y Plug assy 2-4-6-8 X
9 8-14 5322 360 10481 Piston assy 4 Y Piston assy X X
10 8-14 5322 532 12547 Packing 4 Packing X X X
14 8-14 5322 492 11793 Leaf spring 8 Y Leaf spring X X X
15 8-14 5322 502 60165 Screw steel 8 Y Screw steel X X X
16 8-14 5322 532 12794 Washer 8 Y Washer X X X
18 8-14 5322 520 10804 Bearing 24 Bearing MF128ZZS X X X
19 8-14 9965 000 09057 Pulley 4 Pulley X X X
20 8-14 5322 492 11794 Spring Return 4 Spring return, length=48mm X X X
22 8-14 5322 520 10802 Bearing 4 Bearing X X X
23 8-14 5322 530 70526 Circlip 4 Y Circlip X X X
24 8-14 5322 532 12818 Washer 4 Washer trust X X X
26 8-14 5322 492 11795 Spring return 4 Spring, length=57.5mm X
27 8-14 5322 492 11796 Spring Locate 4 Spring, Locate X
28+39 8-14 9965 000 11068 Shaft+nozzle block (without noz- 4 Y Shaft+nozzle block (matched X
zles!) pair)
30 8-14 5322 502 14662 Screw, nozzle 4 Y Screw M2x4 flat head X
30A 8-14 9965 000 09496 Seal tape 4 Tape to cover screws item 30 X
31 8-14 5322 535 10677 Pin, Locate 4 Pin, Locate X
TABLE 8-15

81b
81a 2 75
78 95 61
60 74
104 106 58
103 106
24 23 2
80a107 97
105
59 22 26
65 6
104106 59 66
77 103 78 21 19
1 5 8
111 18
79 4 7
12 11 25 3
46 3
18 71 4 4
79 49 44 9 9
64 63 11 76
77 71 4 4
80b 24 10
41 10
44 11 76 42 23 7
44 7
18 71 40 22 62
18 67 11 62
44 38 20 7
43 94 7
18 76 37 21 3
52 47 3
84 33 65
54 93 91 27 18
53 48 32 31 109 19
36 35 108
51 29 17
12 68 72
73 96
32 36 15
56 69 92 35
50 34 30 14
55 88 13
90 28
56 82 86 16
81 16
57 70 90 39
45 14 15
82 82 87
85 89 98 99

32 8-15 9965 000 09050 Cam 8 Cam X

33 8-15 9965 000 09049 Bevel gear 1 4 Y Bevel gear 1 X
34 8-15 5322 522 10781 Bevel gear 2 4 Bevel gear 2 X
35 8-15 9965 000 09051 Pin, Cam 8 Pin, Cam X
36 8-15 9965 000 09048 Circlip, E-ring 0.8 16 Circlip, E-ring 0.8 X
37 8-15 9965 000 09052 Washer 4 Washer X
38 8-15 5322 532 11915 Circlip 4 Circlip large X
39+28 8-15 9965 000 11068 Shaft+nozzle block (without 4 Y Shaft+nozzle block (matched pair) X
nozzles!)
40 8-15 9965 000 15432 Bearing, Holder 4 Bearing holder with indexing pin X
59 8-15 5322 528 11373 Valve 4 Y Valve clutch X
60 8-15 5322 532 13171 Packing 4 Packing X
62 8-15 5322 462 10762 Plug 2 assy 4 Plug 2 assy containing items 62, 3, 7 X X
64 8-15 9965 000 09055 Belt, head 2 Y Belt head X X X
66 8-15 5322 530 10292 O-ring 12 O-ring air inlets 5x1.0 X X X
67 8-15 9965 000 03812 Sensor 4 Y 1 sensor E2S-Q22 L=350 for clutch X
68 8-15 9965 000 03813 Sensor 4 Y 1 sensor E2S-Q22 L=300 for head down sensor 2,4,6,8 X X X
69 8-15 9964 000 03810 Sensor 4 Y 1 sensor E2S-Q22B L=300 for head down sensor 1,3,5,7 X X
68+69 8-15 5322 132 00138 Sensor 4, complete assy 1 Y Head down sensors, (4xE2S-Q22, 4xE2S-Q22B) X X X
70 8-15 5322 132 00139 Sensor 5, assy 1 Y Nozzle position sensors (8 x E2S-Q12) X
71 8-15 9965 000 10927 Sensor 3 Y Sensor head assy for head down sensing X X X
72 8-15 9965 000 09058 Sensor 3, assy 1 Y R-origin sensor X X X
77 8-15 5322 360 20106 Muffler 7 Muffler KM-05 X X X
78 8-15 5322 528 11375 Joint 2 Joint $SLH8-01 X X X
79 8-15 5322 528 11376 Joint 2 Joint $SLH6-01 X X X
80A 8-15 9965 000 03808 Valve speed select 8 Y Up/down speed X X X
80B 8-15 9965 000 03807 Valve up/down 8 Y Up/down select X X X
81A 8-15 9965 000 09042 Single ejector 8 Y Single ejector X X X
81B 8-15 5322 360 10209 Blow off valve 8 Y Blow off valve X X X
81B 8-15 9965 000 03806 Blow off valve kit 8 Blow off incl packing and screw X X X
TABLE 8-16

81b
81a 2 75
78 95 61
60 74
104 106 58
103 106
24 23
107 105
26 2
80a 97 59 22
65 6
104106 59 66
77 103 78 21 19
1 5 8
111 18
79 4 7
12 11 25 3
46 3
18 71 4 4
79 49 44 9 9
64 63 11 76
77 71 4 4
80b 24 10
41 10
44 11 76 42 23 7
44 7
18 71 40 22 62
18 67 11 62
44 38 20 7
43 94 7
18 76 37 21 3
52 47 3
84 33 65
54 93 91 27 18
53 48 32 31 109 19
36 35 108
51 29 17
12 68 72
73 96
32 36 15
56 69 92 35
50 34 30 14
55 88 13
90 28
56 82 86 16
81 16
57 70 90 39
45 14 15
82 82 87
85 89 98 99

86 8-16 9965 000 09054 Gear 1 1 Y Gear 1, R axis X X X

87 8-16 9965 000 09056 Gear 2 1 Y Gear 2, R axis X X X
97 8-16 5322 216 04673 Vacuum sensor board 8 Y Vacuum sensor board X X X
98 8-16 9965 000 10930 Shaft head assy 4 Y Shaft head assy (FNC head 2-4-6-8) X X
99 8-16 9965 000 10929 Shaft head assy 4 Y Shaft head assy (head 1-3-5-7)for SF and FNC X X X
machine
99a 8-16 9965 000 10928 Shaft head assy 4 Y Shaft head assy (head 2-4-6-8) only for SF X X
machine
103 8-16 5322 462 11025 Cap metal 2 Y Metal cap X X X
104 8-16 5322 530 51297 O-ring metal 2 Y O-ring X X X
105 8-16 5322 530 10474 O-ring plastic cap 6 Y Plastic cap X X X
106 8-16 5322 360 20081 Filter 8 Y Filter X X X
107 8-16 5322 462 11024 Cap plastic 6 Y Plastic cap X X X
108 8-16 9965 000 02791 Sleeve 4 Y Sleeve X
109 8-16 9965 000 02792 Nut 4 Y Lock nut X
111 8-16 5322 530 51359 O-ring 8 O-ring X X X
TABLE 8-17

81b
81a 2 75
78 95 61
60 74
104 106 58
103 106
24 23 2
80a107 97
105
59 22 26
65 6
104106 59 66
77 103 78 21 19
1 5 8
111 18
79 4 7
12 11 25 3
46 3
18 71 4 4
79 49 44 9 9
64 63 11 76
77 71 4 4
80b 24 10
41 10
44 11 76 42 23 7
44 7
18 71 40 22 62
18 67 11 62
44 38 20 7
43 94 7
18 76 37 21 3
52 47 3
84 33 65
54 93 91 27 18
53 48 32 31 109 19
36 35 108
51 29 17
12 68 72
73 96
32 36 15
56 69 92 35
50 34 30 14
55 88 13
90 28
56 82 86 16
81 16
57 70 90 39
45 14 15
82 82 87
85 89 98 99

8.6.4 Nozzle Types (FNC)

1 8-17 5322 360 10486 Nozzle 73F 4 Y Nozzle 73F assy (PA 2962/40) X
4 8-17 5322 502 14663 Screw 24 Screw M1.4x0.3 X
5 8-17 9965 000 11068 Nozzle block + shaft 4 Y Nozzle block + shaft (matched pair) X
6 8-17 5322 492 11797 Spring 8 Spring for nozzle type 71F and 72F X
7 8-17 5322 360 10483 Nozzle assy + shaft 4 Y Complete nozzle assy.Please change nozzles 71F and 72F X
positions in case of an XiII machine!
TABLE 8-18

FIGURE 8-17 Block nozzle assy

8.6.5 Nozzle Types (SF)

1 8-18 9466 029 62471 Nozzle 71 (PA 2962/47) 1 Y Nozzle 71 for all machines X
2 8-18 9466 029 62481 Nozzle 72 (PA 2962/48) 1 Y Nozzle 72 for all machines X
3 8-18 9466 029 62451 Nozzle 73 (PA 2962/45) 1 Y Nozzle 73 assy (new type) X
3 8-18 9965 000 09096 Nozzle 73 Sp 1 Special 73A (90 degree rotated tip to match the 73F on the FNC X
head) refer to SI-CSM-556
4 8-18 5322 360 10495 Nozzle 74A (PA 2962/44) 1 Y Nozzle 74A assy Not for Opal-XII
6 8-18 5322 530 51373 O-ring 1 Y O-ring P4 for nozzle types 74 and 77 X
7 8-18 5322 360 10496 Nozzle 76A (PA 1962/46) 1 Y Nozzle 76A assy X
8 8-18 9965 000 17608 Nozzle 75 (PA2962/49) 1 Y Nozzle 75 Not for Topaz-XII-Series X
9 8-18 5322 530 51374 O-ring 1 Y O-ring P9 for nozzle type 75 X
10 8-18 9965 000 17607 Nozzle 77 (PA2962/50 1 Y Nozzle 77 Not for Topaz-XII-Series X
TABLE 8-19

Type 71 Type 72 Type 73 Type 74A Type 76A
1 2 5
4
3 7
Type 75 Type 77
8 10
9 6
FIGURE 8-18 Nozzle types and nozzle holder

8.6.6 Feeder Holder Assembly

8 8-19 9965 000 09832 Valve 20 Valve (fixed 20 or 50 pos. feeder bar) X
8 8-19 9965 000 09833 Valve 20 Y Valve FES20X clamp
9a 8-19 5322 528 11254 Air joint 20 BF4B4-M3-70W X
10 8-19 5322 528 11255 Air coupling 20 Joint BF4BU (M5) X
11 8-19 5322 395 90947 Joint 4 Joint TTB-01 X
12 8-19 5322 395 90944 Joint 1 Joint TL8-01 X
13 8-19 5322 693 91716 Muffler 5 Muffler KM-06 X
17 8-19 5322 526 10649 Air joint 20 Y Complete set X
19 8-19 5322 530 51323 O-ring 20 O-ring X
20 8-19 5322 466 62416 Packing 20 Packing X
26 8-19 5322 466 11133 Gasket 20 Gasket X
- - 996500010377 Transmitter feeder floating 3 Y Transmitter sensor 50 positions X
- - 996500010378 Sensor (receiver) feeder floating 1 Y Receiver sensor 50 positions X
- - 9965 000 09093 Feeder floating assy 2 Y Feeder floating assy 20 positions
- - 5322 693 11205 Dummy feeder 5 Dummy feeder for safety (one piece) X
TABLE 8-20

15
3
19
20 14
25 17
15 20
19
1
23
21 10 15
26 14
27
15 7
4 11
7 24 22
9a 13
9 15
16
12 25
16 15
21
6 23
2 8
18
16 5
FIGURE 8-19 Feeder-bar assembly (20 & 50 pos.)

8.6.7 ITF Interface

1 8-20 5322 360 10417 Air joint 20 Air joint for ITF feeder (Xi only)
- - 9466 029 23101 Dummy feeder Xi (PA 2923/10) 10 Dummy feeders Xi (set of 10)
- - 9965 000 05430 Waste bin 1 Waste bin for Xi
- - 9965 000 10379 Feeder floating sender 4 Feeder floating transmitter
- - 9965 000 10377 Feeder floating transmitter 4 Feeder floating sender.
TABLE 8-21

FIGURE 8-20 ITF interface

8.6.8 Reject Station

1 8-21 5322 358 10282 Belt 1 Belt X

2 8-21 5322 360 10471 Cylinder 1 Y Cylinder X
3 8-21 9965 000 10358 Sensor 1-6 1 Y Sensor 1-6 X
4 8-21 5322 535 92541 Speed controller 2 Speed controller X
5 8-21 5322 360 10472 Valve 1 Valve X
6 8-21 9965 000 10535 S/F board assy 1 S/F board assy X
9 8-21 9965 000 10406 Harness 1 Harness 11-3 (for XII machines) X
9 8-21 5322 530 12755 Harness 1 Harness 11-3 (for XiII machines)
10 8-21 5322 526 41081 Joint 3 Joint SLH4-M5 X
TABLE 8-22

S/F
9 4 2 10 5 6
FIGURE 8-21 Dump station

8.7 X, Y, Z, R (ϕ) ,W and PU Axes

8.7.1 X- axis Systems
4 8-22 5322 528 11354 Coupling X axis 1 Coupling X axis X

12 8-22 5322 520 10862 Bearing 1 Bearing angular X
14 8-22 5322 535 10654 Ball screw 1 Ball screw X axis X
15 8-22 9965 000 09016 AC servo motor 1 Y AC Servo motor (90K56-87174X) X
16 8-22 5322 132 00129 Sensor X origin 1 Y Sensor 1 assy X
17 8-22 5322 132 00131 Sensor X Over Travel 1 Y Sensor 2 assy X
18 8-22 5322 535 92546 Guide 1 Guide
19 8-22 5322 530 10543 Cable duct 1 Flexible cable duct X
26 8-22 9965 000 09018 Damper 1 Damper (right side of x-axis)
26 8-22 9965 000 1 6 7 4 8 Damper 14 assy 1 Damper (right side of x-axis) production sept. 2002 X
onwards (see SI-CSM-576)
27 8-22 9965 000 09015 Damper 1 Damper (left side of x-axis)
27 8-22 9965 000 16792 Damper 105 assy 1 Damper (left side of x-axis) production sept. 2002 X
onwards (see SI-CSM-576)
33 8-22 9965 000 06084 Tape 1, X duct 1 Tape foil X
34 8-22 9965 000 06085 Tape 2,X duct 1 Tape foil X
39 8-22 5322 492 11788 Coil spring 1 Coil spring X
42 8-22 5322 505 11268 Lock nut 1 Nut X
46 8-22 9965 000 06086 Tape 3, X duct 1 Tape foil X
47 8-22 9965 000 06087 Cover, duct assy 1 Cover X
54 8-22 9965 000 05439 Support unit 1 X
TABLE 8-23

35 67
32
47 30
19 7 67
65 57 35
34 52 31
9 59
33 8 20
6 5 24
46 13
9
21
59 50
15 3
4 53 59
16 24
44
25
45
66 10 17
58
64 18 43
49 1
27
60 29
51 23 5
54 22
56
28 48
56 23
40 49
38 51
40 56 5
41 41 66
12 2
14 37 36 39 44
42 48
26 62 45 43 50
63 11
55
28 61 66 29
FIGURE 8-22 X - axis

8.7.2 Y- axis Systems

3 8-23 5322 535 10655 Ball screw 1 Ball screw X

4 8-23 5322 505 11268 Lock nut 1 X
9 8-23 5322 520 10862 Bearing 1 Angular bearing X
10 8-23 9965 000 06098 Coil spring 6 Spring tension X
11 8-23 9965 000 06099 Oil seal 4 Oil seal X
12 8-23 9965 000 06100 Spacer 6 Spacer X
13 8-23 9965 000 09014 Damper 27 1 Damper Y axis front side X
14 8-23 9965 000 09019 Damper 54 1 Damper Y axis rear side X
26 8-23 5322 132 00132 Sensor 1 Y Sensor 1 assy (origin) X
27 8-23 5322 132 00133 Sensor 1 Y Sensor 2 assy (secondary limit) X
28 8-23 9965 000 06094 Tape, Y axis 1 Tape, Y axis X
29 8-23 9965 000 06095 Tape, Y duct 1 Tape, Y duct X
30 8-23 9965 000 06096 Tape 2, Y duct 1 Tape 2, Y duct X
34 8-23 5322 530 10544 Guide, cable Y 1 Flexible cable duct X
35 8-23 9965 000 09020 AC Servo motor 1 Y AC servo motor X
36 8-23 5322 463 11277 Guide Y axis 2 Linear guide NSK LS201180ALC2-05P63
36 8-23 9965 000 16794 Guide Y axis 2 Linear guide new type, production sept. 2002 onwards(see SI-CSM-576) X
37 8-23 5322 528 11219 Coupler 1 Coupler Y axis X
45 8-23 9965 000 06097 Tape 3, Y duct 1 Tape 3, Y duct X
46 8-23 9965 000 05439 Support unit 1 X
- 8-23 5322 526 10729 Grease nipple 1 Grease nipple X
TABLE 8-24
8.7.3 R (ϕ) - axis

For spare parts of the R axis please see chapter 8.6 component transport system
8.7.4 Z - axis
For spare parts of the Z axis please see chapter 8.6 component transport system.
8.7.5 W- axis
For spare parts of the W axis please see chapter 8.5 PCB transport system.
8.7.6 PU - axis
For spare parts of the PU axis please see chapter 8.5 PCB transport system.

52
23
57
21 6 10 52
4 40
55 7
119 11
14 12 22
12
8
61 47
19
59
56 44 41
37 15 33 53
46 13 43 36 31
3 2 49
47 57 10 24
53 6 40
40 49 4 51
35 7
5 31 119
55 11
61 60 32 12
28 14 12
41 8
38 42 36 47
34 39 43 1
45 56 20 58
48 50
15 25
29 46 13 16
3 59 50
30 17
47
18
35 40 38
5 26
39 27
61 54
FIGURE 8-23 Y-Axis\

8.8 Vision
8.8.1 Line Array Camera
8.8.1.1 Line Array Camera Assy
27 8-24 9965 000 09060 Camera cable 1 Camera cable X

32 8-24 9965 000 09831 Line array camera (32 mm) 1 Y Line array camera FOV 35
32 8-24 9965 000 09637 Line array camera (45 mm) - Y Line array camera FOV 50 X
TABLE 8-25
8.8.1.2 Light Assy for Line Array Camera

3 8-24 9965 000 09602 Diffuser 2 1 Diffuser X

11 8-24 9965 000 09596 Cylinder assy 1 Cylinder assy X
18 8-24 9965 000 09595 Valve 1 Valve X
20 8-24 9965 000 09856 Main light side assy 1 Main light side assy X
21 8-24 9965 000 09600 Main light main assy 1 Main light main assy X
24 8-24 9965 000 09497 Coaxial light assy 1 Coaxial light assy X
34 8-24 9965 000 09092 LED driver board 1 Y PCB located inside light unit X
28 8-24 9965 000 09636 Diffuser 1 1 Diffuser X
29 8-24 9965 000 09061 Diffuser 4 Diffuser X
31 8-24 9965 000 09601 Speed control (air) 1 $TSC0-L X
FIGURE 8-24 Light Assy for Line Array Camera

9
23
5
22
21 17
8 25 24
20 30
10 34
7 8
16 16
13 4
12 29 1
15
8 33 2 18
11
13 31
12 28
19
14
6 35 32
27
26
FIGURE 8-25 Line array camera assy

8.8.2 Single Camera Assy

8.8.2.1 Single Camera Assy
24 8-25 9965 000 09059 Camera 1 Y CCD camera single vision X

25 8-25 9965 000 09872 Camera cable (5m) 1 Cable to single vision camera X
26 8-25 9965 000 09855 Lens 37S 1 Lens for the single vision camera (FOV37) X
26 8-25 9965 000 09088 Lens 50S 1 Lens for the single vision camera (FOV50) X
TABLE 8-26
8.8.2.2 Light Assy for Single Vision Camera

2 8-22 9965 000 09636 Diffuser 1 1 Diffuser 1 X

4 8-25 9965 000 09856 Main light side assy 1 Main light side assy X
8 8-25 9965 000 09875 S. Light main board assy 1 X
9 8-25 9965 000 09090 S. light main board assy 1 X
17 8-25 9965 000 09091 S. light coax board assy 1 X
19 8-25 9965 000 09092 LED driver board 1 Y PCB located inside light unit X
TABLE 8-27

7
1
29
10 9 9 10
26,27,28 9 8
10 10 4
23 13
14
24
17
12 3
5 15 16
2
11 5
25 5 18
22 6
20 21
19
FIGURE 8-26 Single camera assy

8.9 Options
This module exists out of the following sections:
8.9.1 Traychanger LCS
For the spare parts list of this option please refer to the option manual Traychanger: 4022 591 93961
8.9.2 Tape Feeders
For the spare parts list of this option please refer to the option manual Tape feeders: 5322 871 61605
8.9.3 Tray Changer (ATS-20)
For the spare parts list of this option please refer to the option manual ATS 20 : 4022 591 93221
8.9.4 FES20XII/XiII
For the spare parts list of this option please refer to the option manual FES20XII/XiII: 4022 591 92521
8.9.5 ITF Feeders
For the spare parts list of this option please refer to the option manual Tape feeders: 5322 871 61605
8.10 Maintenance Tools
8.10.1 Adjustment Tools
1 8-26 5322 395 10274 Tool light adjustment 1 Light adjust tool X
2 8-26 5322 395 10275 Tool focus adjustment 1 Focus adjustment tool X
3 8-26 5322 395 10824 Glass component 8 Glass QFP with sticker X
4 8-26 5322 395 10814 Glass PCB board 1 Glass PCB board X
5 8-26 5322 395 10845 Feeder bar adjustment tool 1 Adjustment tool for feeder pick up positions (X-machines) X
6 8-26 5322 395 10685 Feeder floating jig 2 Adjustment jig for the feeder floating sensors X
X 8-26 5322 256 10459 Tool QFP tray 1 Small tray for 4 glass QFP’s (X machine) (one block!!) X
X X 4022 591 74251 Tool QFP tray 1 Small tray for 4 glass QFP’s (Xi machine)
X X 5322 395 10876 Light adjustment tool 1 Translucent light adjustment tool X
X X 5322 395 10825 PA 1912/00 1 Complete calibration kit (PCB + 16 Glass QFP + holder) X
X X 2622 150 04004 Adjustable wrench 1 Adjustable wrench (46mm) X
X X 5322 466 11514 CLC foil 1 Foil for calibrating chips X
X X 5322 214 91385 Assembleon acceptance board - CT-346 test PCB X
TABLE 8-28


/,*+7$'-867(5722/ )2&86$'-867(5722/ */$664)3&20321(17 %2$5')25*/$664)3

FIGURE 8-27 Adjustment tools.

8.10.2 Special Tools and Wrenches

1 8-27 5322 395 10877 Shaft assemble/disassemble tool 1 X

2 8-27 5322 395 10879 R alignment tool 1 X
3 8-27 2622 150 22106 Circlip fork 1 X
4 8-27 9965 000 10366 Cleaning kit 1 Plastic bottle with hose and needle to clean X
inside spline
5 8-27 9965 000 10361 jig1 1 Adjustment of head sensor (for down sensor X
No. 1)
5 8-27 9965 000 10362 jig2 1 Adjustment of head sensor (for down sensor X
No. 2)
5 8-27 9965 000 10363 jig3 1 Adjustment of head sensor (for up sensor) X
6 8-27 9965 000 09095 Tool, hook 1 For removing circlip (E-ring 0.8mm)
7 8-27 9965 000 09094 Tool, E-ring 0.8 1 For installing circlip (E-ring 0.8mm)
8 8-27 9965 000 10376 Tool for lock-pin FNC 1 Lock-pin FNC assembly tool
9 8-27 9965 000 10364 Wire tool 1 Used as a guide for inserting pin cam.
10 8-27 9965 000 10360 Needle cleaning tool 1 Tool to clean inside nozzle with wire X
X X 9965 000 10539 Wire 100 Wire used in the needle cleaning tool. X
TABLE 8-29


FIGURE 8-28 Adjustment tools.

8.10.3 Grease Gun and Extensions

*UHDVH*XQ ;
Complete 8-28 9965 000 02737 Grease gun MG 70 1 Grease gun with all extensions X
Type H 8-28 9965 000 02775 Extension type H Extension X
Type N 8-28 9965 000 02738 Extension type N Extension X
Type P 8-28 9965 000 02766 Extension type P Extension X
Type L 8-28 9965 000 02767 Extension type L Extension X
Type U 8-28 9965 000 02768 Extension type U Extension X
X X 9965 000 05410 Extension Yamaha Extension X
*UHDVHV ;
1 8-28 9965 000 10365 Oil (1ml) 1 Turbine oil VG32, 1ml in syringe X
2 8-28 5322 390 20159 Grease Pack NSK No.1 1 For X/Y ball screws, linear guides
X X 9965 000 16803 NSA grease 1 For new type linear guides, ball screws. Pro- X
duction after sept.2002 (See SI-CSM-576)
X X 5322 390 10144 Fomblin RT15 1 For static vacuum parts (QRW on moving parts) X
X X 9965 000 11066 Molykote 6169 1 For rubber packing and o-rings of head parts, X
piston and plugs.
TABLE 8-30

FIGURE 8-29 Grease gun and extensions.

8.11 Fixation Parts

8.11.1 Bolt Hexagon Socket
1&QXPEHU 'HVFULSWLRQ
4822 502 13573 M3 x 5
4822 502 11139 M3 x 6
4822 502 10064 M3 x 8
4822 502 11141 M3 x 10
4822 502 11078 M3 x 12
4822 502 10066 M4 x 5
4822 502 10067 M4 x 8
4822 502 10069 M4 x 12
5322 500 10437 M4 x 14
4822 502 10071 M4 x 15
4822 502 10071 M4 x 16
5322 500 1439 M4 x 45
5322 500 1439 M4 x 50
4822 502 10075 M5 x 10
4822 502 10076 M5 x 12
4822 502 10077 M5 x 16
5322 500 10403 M5 x 60
4822 502 10081 M6 x 10
4822 502 10082 M6 x 12
4822 502 10083 M6 x 16
5322 500 10468 M6 x 18
4822 500 10084 M6 x 20
TABLE 8-31

8.11.2 Set Screw

5322 502 30768 M2 x 3
5322 502 30769 M3 x 2
5322 502 80042 M3 x 3
5322 502 30706 M3 x 4
5322 502 80041 M3 x 5
5322 502 13402 M3 x 6
5322 502 30707 M4 x 3
5322 502 60153 M4 x 4
5322 502 80084 M4 x 5
5322 502 30704 M4 x 6
5322 502 21501 M5 x 5
TABLE 8-32
8.11.3 Screw Pan Head

5322 502 30708 M2 x 3
5322 502 60134 M3 x 6
4822 502 13402 M3 x 6
5322 502 80072 M4 x 6
TABLE 8-33

8.11.4 Washers
1&QXPEHU 'HVFULSWLRQLQQHURXWHUWKLFNQHVV
5322 530 70593 M3 (3.3 – 6.0 – 0.5)
4822 532 10333 M4 (4.5 – 10.0 – 0.8)
4822 530 70594 M5 (5.3 – 10.0 – 1.0)
5322 530 70587 M3 (3.2 – 8.0 – 1.0)
5322 530 70546 M6 (6.2 – 11.0 – 1.0)
5322 530 70592 M6 (6.2 – 11.0 – 1.0)
5322 530 805 78 M8 (9.0 – 15.0 – 0.5)
5322 530 70547 M12 (12.1 – 16.5 – 0.5)
5322 530 70548 M12 (12.1 – 16.5 – 0.5)
5322 532 11959 M8 (8.2 – 12.5 – 1.6)
TABLE 8-34
8.11.5 Screws
5322 502 60087 Binding head M4 x 6
5322 502 60134 Pan head M3 x 6
5322 502 60165 Sunken head M2 x 3
TABLE 8-35

8.11.6 Bolts
4822 502 13573 M3 x 5
4822 502 11139 M3 x 6
4822 502 10064 M3 x 8
4822 502 11141 M3 x 10
4822 502 11078 M3 x 12
4822 502 10066 M4 x 5
4822 502 10067 M4 x 8
4822 502 10069 M4 x 12
4822 500 10437 M4 x 14
5322 500 10429 M4 x 15
5322 502 10071 M4 x16
5322 500 10439 M4 x 50
5322 502 11146 M4 x 45
4822 502 10075 M5 x 10
4822 502 10076 M5 x 12
4822 502 10077 M5 x 16
4822 500 10403 M5 x 60
4822 502 13574 M6 x 8
4822 502 10081 M6 x 10
4822 502 10082 M6 x 12
4822 502 10083 M6 x 16
4822 500 10468 M6 x 18
4822 502 10084 M6 x 20
5322 502 13381 M6 x 40
4822 502 10086 M6 x 30
TABLE 8-36


Abbreviations and Conventions
CHAPTER 9 Abbreviations and Conventions

9.1 Abbreviations
This chapter describes common used abbreviations in this manual in alphabetic
sequence.
$EEUHYLDWLRQ ([SODQDWLRQ
A Ampere
AC Alternating current
ASAP As Soon As Possible
ATS Auto Tray Stacker, tray handling device
B/W Black and white
BGA Ball Grid Array
CE Comité Europièn
CN Connector
COB Chip on board
COG Centre Of Gravity
CPU Central processing unit
CS Customer Support
CSM Compact Surface Mounter
CSP Chip scale package
DC Direct current
DO/DI Data output / Data input
DI Document Information
DIL Dual In Line, chip package
EMC Electro Magnetic Compatibility
EMG Emergency
ESD Electro Static Discharge

FD Floppy Disk
FES Feeder Exchange System
FNC head Flying Nozzle Change head
FV Full Vision
GD1 Good
GEM Product line : Topaz, Emerald, Sapphire

Emerald-X & Topaz-X, Emerald-XII Series & Topaz-XII Series
HDD Hard Disk Drive
IM Installation Manual
ISA International Standard Architecture
ISO International Standard Organization
ITF Intelligent Tape Feeder
LCS Large Component Sequencer, Also called trayfeeder.
LED Light Emitting Diode
MSP Maintenance Support Pendant
MTF Manual Tray Feeder
NEN Nederlandse norm
NNI Nederlands normalisatie instituut
OM Operator Manual
P1 Priority 1 indicator,
PA Philips Article
PU axis Push up axis
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PCP Product Creation Process
PCS Philips Consumer Services, worldwide stock for Assembléon
QFP Quad Flat Package

SDLC Synchronous Data Link Control
SF head Super Fine head
SI Service information
SM Service Manual
SOP Single Outline Package,
SVS Setup Verification System
TBD To be defined
TBW To Be Written
TC Tray Changer, Tray handling device
TI Technical Information
TPD Technical Product Documentation
TSOP Top Single Outline Package,
UM User Manual
UP Under Progress
URS User Requirement Specification
VGOS Visual Graphical Operating System
VIOS Vision Integrated Operating System
TABLE 9-1

9.2 Conventions
3K\VLFDOTXDQWLW\ 6,V\PERO &RQYHUVLRQIDFWRU
Length M 1 cm = 0.4 inch
1 inch = 2.54 cm
1 metre = 39.37 inches
1 mile = 1.609 km
Volume M3 1 imp. gall. = 4.55 l
1 US gall = 3.79 l
1 litre = 1.76 pints
1 Nl = 1 l at 0o C and 1 atm.
1 Nl = 0.035315 N cubic feet
Mass Kg 1 kg = 2.2 lb
1 lb = 455 gm
1 oz = 28.35 g
Force N 1 N = 1 kg.m/s2
1 kgF = 9.8 N
Pressure Pa (N/m2) 1 atm = 1013.25 mbar
0.1 dyne/cm2 L Torr = 1 mm mercury
1 mbar = 100 Pa
1 PSI = 6900 Pa
Work / Energy J (Nm, Ws) 1J = 107 ergs
1 cal. = 4.1868 J
Power W (J / s) 1 HP = 735.5 W
Temperature OC = 5/9 x (OF – 32)
OF = (9/5 x OC) + 32
TABLE 9-2

Index
CHAPTER 10 Index
A FNC head adjustment and

Abbreviations 9-1 maintenance 15-10
Air and Mains Power Connections 4-64
Application Board 4-23 G
Auto Tray Stacker (ATS 20) 12-23 General Safety 2-1
B H
Backup creation 16-9 Head adjustment tools 7-4
Base and transport 11-1
I
Installation and Calibration 4-60
C
Calibration Flowchart 4-66 Installation of a New Version
Calibration tools 7-2 VGOS 16-4
Cautionary Remarks 2-2 I/O Boards 4-34
Change System.time 16-23 I/O signals 5-167
Connection Board 4-37
Conventions 9-4
L
LED Driver Board 4-33
Conveyor belt 11-2 Liability 2-4
Line array camera adjustment 14-20
D
Disable “Write Filter” 16-21 Login Recovery Procedure 16-29
Double shuttle tray
changer (LCS) 12-21
M
Machine Axis 4-47
Dual drive Y-axis offset 13-10 Machine configuration 16-33
Main stopper 11-5
E
Edge clamp 11-13 Maintenance Support Pendant
Electrical diagrams 5-97 (MSP) 4-43
Electrical overall block diagram 4-2 Manual tray feeder 12-32
Error messages 5-1 MCX-controller lay-out 4-20
ESD Precaution 2-3 Mother Board 4-28
Moving camera 14-2
F
FAMF (Full Auto Mount Feedback) 4-91 N
Feeder 12-1 Network Connection 16-24
Feeders 12-17 Noise Level 2-3
Feeder bar adjustment tool 7-3 Nozzle and nozzle holder
Feeder lock verifier adjustment inspection 6-5
tool 7-3 Nozzle station 15-58
Feeder plate 12-1
Flash Board Assy 4-24
O
Oil and Greases 2-4
Flash Disk 4-29 Operating Devices 4-42
Flash disk problems 16-11 Operation Panel 4-45
Floppy-drive 4-29

Index
P
PCB detection sensors 11-20
PCB File handling 16-31
Pickup/mount vacuum levels 15-3
Power circuits 4-4
Preventive maintenance 6-1
Push-in 11-8
Push-up plate 11-14
R
Reject station 12-25
Removing the Transportation
Locks 4-62
Robots X-Y 13-1
S
Safety Circuit 4-14
Servo Board 4-24
Single vision camera adjustment 14-10
SMEMA 4-135
Standard System Principle 4-128
Switcher Board 4-41
System board 4-21
System Configuration 3-1
System Software 16-1
System trouble shooting 5-1
V
Vacuum & pneumatic systems 4-16
VGOS Software 4-49
Vision Board 4-27
Vision tools 7-1
W
Windows Login 16-20

Base and Transport
CHAPTER 11 Base and Transport

11.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the PCB transport system. The PCB transport system
transports the PCB into the mounting area and secures it onto the mounting
position. The PCB transport system, shown in figure 11-1 below, consists of:
■ The conveyor belt to transport the PCB to the mount position.
■ The main stopper to stop the PCB at the mounting position.
■ The push-in to set the PCB at mount position.
■ The locate pins (2) to fix the PCB by means of holes in the PCB.
■ The edge clamp cylinders (9) to fix the PCB whenever the locate pins cannot be used.
Not for Opal-XII.
■ The push-up plate with push-up pins to support the PCB during mounting.
■ Sensors to detect the PCB at different positions on the transport system.
The PCB flow direction of European and American systems is most common from left
to right, in Asian countries the right to left PCB flow is most common.
For the electrical connections of these items we refer to the overall interconnection
diagram in chapter 5 of this manual. The mechanical items and the dismantling of
those items are explained in the next chapters.
Each item of the transport system is arranged along the conveyor rails as shown in
FIGURE 11-1 below. The air solenoid valve of each item is located inside the lower right
panel on the rear-side of the machine.
Main stopper
Edge clamp
Entrance stopper
Push-in
Locate pin
Push-up plate
Movable conveyor rail
Fixed conveyor rail
FIGURE 11-1 PCB transport system (top view), flow from left to right

Base and Transport
11.2 Conveyor Belt

The conveyor belt transports the PCBs by belt in (for mounting) and out (when
mounted) the PCB. On a standard machine, PCBs are conveyed in the left-to-right
direction while the conveyor width is adjusted by sliding the rear rail (the front rail
is fixed). These specifications cannot be changed after the machine has been
shipped.
11.2.1 Adjusting the Conveyor Belt Tension

If the conveyor belts are too loose, they may slip on the pulleys causing unstable
transfer. If the belts are too tight, they may break or wear excessively. Both the
tension of each belt on the fixed and movable rails should be adjusted evenly.
If necessary, adjust the tension as follows (see FIGURE 11-2):
1. Press the emergency stop button.
2. Loosen the tension adjusting bolt.
The tension adjusting bolt is located on the right side of the conveyor rails and
is linked to the idler. Use a hex wrench to loosen the bolt (but do not remove it).
3. Adjust the belt tension by sliding the tension adjusting bolt towards the outer
side of the machine to increase the tension or towards the inner side to reduce
the tension.
4. Re-tighten the tension adjusting bolt.
5. Check the tension by hand and run the conveyor belt in manual mode (“Unit-
conveyor”). Check that the motor pulley does not slip.
Idler
Tension
adjustment bolt
Conveyor belt
FIGURE 11-2 Adjusting the conveyor belt tension

Base and Transport
11.2.2 Adjusting the Carry-in Conveyor Speed

The conveyor speed varies according to the frequency of the power supply and the
weight of the PCBs on the conveyor. You can adjust the carry-in conveyor speeds
by using the two adjusting screws located inside the lower right panel on the
front side.
The carry-in conveyor moves at two speeds: a high speed (H) for reducing the
transfer time of PCBs and a low speed (L) for minimizing impact when the PCB hits
the entrance or main-stopper. To adjust these speeds, prepare typical PCBs and use
the procedure below.
CONVEYOR
SPEED ADJUSTMENT
– + – +
Low speed High speed
L H
FIGURE 11-3 Carry-in conveyor speed adjusting screws
1. Adjust the conveyor width according to the size of the PCB. To adjust the
conveyor width, the Unit utility in the Main Area will be convenient.
2. Open the output monitor screen and turn on the conveyor (see SCREEN 11-1)
• Use the arrow keys to line up the cursor with output bit “ T1834”
(CONVEYOR ON).

Base and Transport
• The output monitor digit reads “ 1” when the conveyor is on, and “ 0” when it
is off.
SCREEN 11-1 Output monitor screen, activate conveyor
3. While running the conveyor, switch the speed as follows (see SCREEN 11-2)
• Use the arrow keys to line up the cursor with output bit “ T1835” (CONVEYOR
SPEED LOW).
• The output monitor digit reads “ 1” when the conveyor is at low speed, and
reads “ 0” when it is at high speed.
SCREEN 11-2 Output monitor screen, conveyor speed
4. Adjust the high speed while running the conveyor at high speed, adjust The
speed by turning the “ H” screw. Do not set the speed too high, as this may
hamper switching response. Position the “ H” screw at a point slightly slower
than the maximum speed.

Base and Transport
5. Raise the Main stopper:

• Use the arrow keys to line up the cursor with output bit “ T1920” (CONVEYOR
1 STOPPER).
• Monitor digit reads “ 1” when the main stopper is at the raised position, and
reads “ 0” when it is at the lowered position.
6. Adjust the low speed while running the conveyor at low speed and carrying in a
PCB, adjust the speed by turning the “ L” screw. Position the “ L” screw so that
PCBs are not subjected to a strong impact when they hit the entrance stopper.
7. Check for switching from high to low speed while carrying in a PCB, check that
the conveyor speed smoothly changes from high to low speed. This can be done
by clicking the “ Conveyor in” button in the Units menu.
11.3 Main Stopper

When the conveyor belt transports a PCB into the Topaz-XII/Opal-XII the main
stopper will stop the PCB at the mounting position.
The ascent/descent speeds of the main stopper and the PCB contact point can be
adjusted. (see FIGURE 11-4).
Air valve
manual button
T1920
Ascent speed adjuster
Orange tube
Descent speed adjuster Rear right side

of the Topaz-X II
Black tube
FIGURE 11-4 Main stopper and air solenoid valve

Base and Transport
11.3.1 Adjusting the Ascent/Descent Speeds of the Main Stopper

1. Open the output monitor screen and operate the main stopper (see SCREEN 11-3)
• Use the arrow keys to set the cursor at output bit “ T1920” (MAIN STOPPER).
• The output monitor digit reads “ 1” when the main stopper is the raised
position, and reads “ 0” when it is at the lowered position
SCREEN 11-3 Output monitor screen, activate main stopper
2. Check the ascent and descent speeds. Both speeds should be around one second
(at this speed the components which are pre-mounted on the PCB will not shift).
3. Press the emergency stop button, then adjust the ascent/descent speeds.
Turning the speed adjuster knob for the orange tube adjusts the ascent speed,
while turning the speed adjuster knob for the black tube adjusts the descent
speed.
If the main stopper does not work normally in Step 1, manually check the
operation without using the output monitor, as follows:
■ Press the emergency stop button.
■ Press the manual button of the air solenoid valve (marked “ T1920” ) with a
narrow screwdriver or similar tool having a pointed tip, to raise the main
stopper.
If this method works, there will probably be a problem with the electric circuit for
the air solenoid valve. Check the following points.
■ Electromagnetic coil breakage
■ Loose harness connectors
■ Trouble with the DC24V supply
■ I/O board output errors, etc.

Base and Transport
If pressing the manual button does not allow normal operation, there is a problem
with the air supply, air piping or valves (damage, clogging and adhesion of foreign
matter). Check the air supply line of the main stopper.
For any replacements on the main stopper please refer to see FIGURE 11-5.
28
15
16
19 28 24
14 29 20
25 26
17
21
27 23 18
22
FIGURE 11-5 Main stopper exploded view
11.3.2 Adjusting the PCB Contact Point on Main Stopper

The stopper of the main stopper is an steel “ washer” with an out-centred fixation
hole enabling the PCB contact point to be adjusted.
If the positioning hole of the PCBs used has an offset to the typical position, you
can adjust the orientation of the stopper in such a way that the locate pin can be
exactly aligned with the PCB positioning hole, following steps indicate how, please
refer to see FIGURE 11-6 below.
1. Adjust the conveyor width according to the size of the PCB.
To adjust the conveyor width, the “ Unit” utility in the main area will be very
convenient.
2. Raise the main stopper by using the Units utility or the output-monitor.
3. Press the emergency stop button, set the PCB in the mounting position.
Place the PCB against the main stopper, and determine the offset between the
PCB positioning hole and the fixed locate pin.
4. Loosen the bolt securing the stopper by using the hex wrench, loosen the bolt
but do not remove it to allow turning of the stopper.
5. Adjust the orientation of the stopper by slightly rotating the stopper so that the
locate-pin can exactly be aligned with the PCB positioning hole.
6. Re-tighten the bolt to secure the stopper.

Base and Transport
CAUTION
CAUTION: When using PCBs having typical positioning holes, you must return the
above adjustment to the original setting.
Hex socket
head bolt
PCB contact point
FIGURE 11-6 Adjusting the PCB contact point
11.4 Push-in
The push-in mechanism presses the PCB against the main stopper, securing it in the
position for mounting. To adjust the speeds of the push-in mechanism, proceed as
follows, refer to see FIGURE 11-7.
Air valve
manual button
Press-in speed
adjuster knob
T1924
Orange tube
Black tube
Rear right side of
the Topaz-XII
Release speed adjuster knob
FIGURE 11-7 Push in and air solenoid valve

Base and Transport
1. Open the Units menu (see see SCREEN 11-4) and operate the push-in mechanism.
• Select the Push-in button.
SCREEN 11-4 Push-in button
2. Check the press-in- and release-speeds. Both speeds should be around one
second (the speed at which pre-mounted components on the PCB will not shift).
3. Press the emergency stop button, then adjust the press-in/release speeds.
Turning the speed adjuster knob for orange tube adjusts the press-in speed, and
turning the speed adjuster knob for black tube adjusts the release speed.
If the push-in mechanism does not work normally in Step 1, manually check the
operation, without using the output monitor, proceed as follows:
■ Press the manual button of the air solenoid valve (marked “ T1924” ) with a
narrow screwdriver or similar tool having a pointed tip, to make the Push-in
mechanism active.
If pressing the manual button does not allow normal operation, there is another
problem with the air supply, air piping and pipette valves (damage, clogging and

Base and Transport
adhesion of foreign matter). Check the air supply line of the push-in mechanism.
For any replacements of the push in assembly please refer to the see FIGURE 11-8.
5
48
13 1
16 14
13
10
16
2 15
3
7
6
12
9
11
FIGURE 11-8 Push-in arrangement
11.5 Locate Pin

Two locate pins are available along the conveyor rail: one fixed and one movable.
These pins engage with the positioning holes of the PCB to secure it in place ready
for mounting. To adjust the ascent/descent speeds of the locate pins, proceed as
follows, please refer to see FIGURE 11-9 and see FIGURE 11-10.
Movable locate pin Fixed located pin Clamp lever

Main stopper
Push-in
Entrance stopper
Locate pin slide dial
FIGURE 11-9 Locate pin

Base and Transport
Air valve manual button
Locate pin
T1922
Upper end
sensor
Ascent speed adjuster
Air cylinder
Orange tube
Rear right side of

Black tube the Topaz-XII
Descent speed adjuster

1. Open the Units menu (see SCREEN 11-4) and operate the Locate pin mechanism.
• Select the Locate pin button
SCREEN 11-5 Push-in button
2. Check the ascent and decent speeds. Both speeds should be around one second
(the speed at which pre-mounted components on the PCB do not shift).

Base and Transport
3. Press the emergency stop button, then adjust the ascent/descent speed.
Turning the speed adjuster knob for the orange tube adjusts the ascent
speed, and turning the speed adjuster knob for the black tube adjusts the
descent speed.
4. Check the input monitor status from the upper limit sensor. Open the input
monitor screen and select the input bit ‘N1037’ and ‘N1040’.
SCREEN 11-6 Input monitor screen
When the upper limit sensor is properly attached, the input monitor digit for
‘N1037’ / ‘N1040’reads as follows:
■ ‘1’ when the locate pins are at the raised position.
■ ‘0’ when the locate pins are at the lowered position.
If the locate pins do not work normally in Step 1, manually check the operation
without using the output monitor, as follows:
■ Press the manual button of the air solenoid valve (marked “ TN03” ) with a narrow
screwdriver or similar tool having a pointed tip, to raise the Locate pins.
If pressing the manual button does not allow normal operation, there is a problem
with the air supply, air piping or pipette valves (damage, clogging and adhesion of
foreign matter). Check the air supply line of the locate pins.

Base and Transport
For any replacement of the locate pin please refer to see FIGURE 11-11
5
2 15
12 4
7
2 15
12 12
16 7
1 17
13 9 12
8 12 16
17
14 17
1 9 12
13 16
3
8
17
13 16
13
10
6
10
6
11
11
11.6 Edge Clamp (Not for Opal-XII) Edge clamp
Another PCB clamping method is the use of the edge

clamp cylinders, whenever the locate pins cannot be
used the edge clamp cylinders can be used to press the T1923
PCB against the front conveyor rail and so fix it to the

mounting position.
The edge clamp cylinders do not have any adjustment
possibilities. Of course the edge clamps can be
activated by means of the output monitor T1923
(please refer to see FIGURE 11-12) or in the Units
Rear right side of
utility. II
the Topaz-X
FIGURE 11-12 Air solenoid rear right side of Topaz-XII Series

Base and Transport
1
14
7
9 17 15
3 18
10 11
4 2
8
1
12
5
30
9 17
13
6 7
14
8
FIGURE 11-13 Exploded view edge clamp assembly
11.7 Push-up Plate (PU Axis)

The push-up plate is located directly underneath the component mounting
position. The push up plate is servo controlled (PU axis). The support pins, attached
by magnets on the surface of the push-up plate, support the PCB during the
mounting process.

Base and Transport
Push-up pin
PCB
Initial position
64mm
Push-up plate
115mm
Lock nut
Stopper bolt
FIGURE 11-14
11.7.1 Machine Reference

The machine reference for the push up plate must be set between 40 and 60%.
To check the machine reference:
■ Start-up the MchSetup (Utilities) utility
■ Select the Axis adjustment procedure
■ Set the Adjust Item parameter to “ Motor reference” and press Execute.
The machine starts to origin.
SCREEN 11-7 MchSetup screen

Base and Transport
The machine comes up with the machine reference values. If the value is not within
50% ±10% adjust the push up plate machine reference.
Slightly loosen the origin dog and move it up or down a little and do search for
origin again. When it is not possible to reach the machine reference within specifi-
cation follow the next step.
Loosen the tension from the belt and pull the belt a little bit further. One tooth is
±3 a 4%. Bring the tension back on the belt and check for machine reference again.
Do not move the belt too far. Repeat until the machine reference is within 50 ±10%.
11.7.2 Software Limits
FIGURE 11-15
To set the software limits follow the next steps.

1. Perform an origin
2. Adjust the height of the push up plate
Loosen the lock nut located under the push up plate and turn the stopper bolt
to adjust the height.
The distance between the surface of mounter frame and the upper surface of the
push up plate must be ± 115 mm.
3. Prepare a PCB.
Prepare a PCB and adjust the conveyor width to match the PCB width. Using
Units utility command will be convenient. Measure the thickness of the PCB in
advance. Set the PCB on the conveyor, use the locate pins to clamp the PCB.
4. Set push up pins on the push up plate.
The height of the push up pins must be 64 mm. Adjust when necessary.
Set two pins near the moveable rail and one in a position where you can easily
check the pin tip and PCB.

Base and Transport
5. Raise the push up plate.

Use the MSP to move the push up plate up and down and check the value when
the tips of the push up pins make contact with the PCB. This value can be
determined as follow:
• Start-up the MchSetup utility
• Select the Axis adjustment procedure
• Set the axis to “ PU1”
• Set the Adjust Item parameter to “ Soft limit”.
SCREEN 11-8 Soft limits
Write down this height.

6. Finding the software limits.
This can be determined as follow:
• Set the axis to “ PU1”
Determine the two mechanical limits (using the MSP) in the Current Pos box and fill
in the software limits.
+ side = height at where pins are touching the PCB from the origin + PCB thickness
+ 1mm
- side = 1 mm before the hard stop
7. Enter the values for initial pos and initial movement
Line up the cursor with init. pos in the window and fill in the value of the initial
position which is the height (step 5)+ PCB thickness.
The value of the initial movement is the value of the initial position minus 35
mm. The initial movement is the movement of the pushup plate when the
machine is resetted.

Base and Transport
8. Save the settings.

Press the Save data button, press Close if the data need not be saved. The data
can be checked in the VmSpec (Machine button in Main Area) as displayed in see
SCREEN 11-9.
SCREEN 11-9 Saving the settings
CAUTION
CAUTION: When you set the push-up pins on the push-up plate, make sure that the
push-up pins do not interfere with the conveyor rails and edge clamp cylinder.
11.8 Board Clamp (Not for Opal-XII)

Another PCB clamping method is the use of the board clamp which is an option and can
only be ordered factory built-in. When board clamp has been installed in the machine,
there are no edge clamp and locate pin systems available in the machine any more.
The board clamp can be activated via the I/O monitor or via the “ Unit – Conveyor”
window. Activate the board clamp with bit T1921 or with the Board Clamp. The
valve on the rear side of the machine activates the board clamp pneumatically.
%RDUGFODPS7
5HDUULJKWVLGHRIWKH7RSD]; ,,
FIGURE 11-16

Base and Transport
When a PCB is not well clamped the board clamp can be adjusted as follows.
1. Make sure you have a PCB at hand.
2. Adjust the conveyor width to fit the PCB.
3. Clamp the PCB (with the board clamp system) and check the play between the
PCB and the board clamp system at each corner.
&+(&.7+(3/$<2)
7+(%2$5'&/$0381,7
FIGURE 11-17
4. Loosen the M4 bolt at the corner where there is some offset.
/226(17+(
0%2/7
FIGURE 11-18
5. Adjust the bracket and fasten the M4 bolt (while push-up and board clamp units are
activated) when the play between the PCB and board clamp unit has been disappeared.
)$67(17+(0%2/7
:+,/(386+83$1'
%2$5'&/$0381,76
$5($&7,9$7('
FIGURE 11-19
6. Check the PCB flow over the conveyor unit to make sure that there are no
obstructions caused by the board clamp unit.

Base and Transport
11.9 PCB Detection Sensors

11.9.1 Position and Function of PCB Detection Sensors
In the conveyor assy there are five PCB detection sensors arranged along the front
rail of the conveyor. The sensors each has LED’s mounted on the side, which are
normally lit. When the sensor detects the presence of a PCB, the LED turns off,
please refer to figure 20.
Exit stopper
N1030 N1036
Sub stopper Main stopper
N1032 N1033 N1035
N1034
N1031
FIGURE 11-20 Position of PCB detection sensors
TABLE 11-1 shows the PCB detection sensors and their function:
6HQVRUFRGH /RFDWLRQ 5HPDUNV
N 1 0 3 0 A t e n tra n c e o f c o n v e y o r F o r P C B d e te c
N 1 0 3 1 A t 4 cm b e fo re s u b s to p p e r F o r co n ve yo r
N 1 0 3 2 A t s u b s to p p e r 1 F o r P C B d e te c tio n
N 1 0 3 3 A t P C B c la m p in g p o s itio n F o r P C B d e te
N 1 0 3 4 A t in te r m e d ia te e x it o f c o n v e y o r
N 1 0 3 5 A t e x it o f c o n v e y o r F o r co n ve yo r sp e
N 1 0 3 6 A t e x it o f c o n v e y o r F o r P C B d e te c tio
TABLE 11-1 PCB detection sensors

Base and Transport
11.9.2 Adjusting the PCB Detection Sensors

The sensors may not detect a PCB (see figure 21) due to such factors as the orien-
tation, distance and angle at which it is attached. The sensors may also be affected
by strong extraneous light, excessive dust, and the shape (hole or notch) and
colour of the PCB. Using PCBs on which you actually mount components, check that
the sensors can detect them reliably.
,UUHJXODUVKDSH3&% 0LVGHWHFWLRQGXHWR
FKDQJHLQGLVWDQFHWR3&%
FIGURE 11-21 PCB sensors detection errors
1. Prepare the PCB you will actually use for component mounting.
2. Adjust the conveyor width according to the size of the PCB.
To adjust the conveyor width, you can use the Conveyor Unit utility in the Data
Manager.
3. Press the emergency stop button and place the PCB on the conveyor.
4. Open the input monitor and check the detection status, see figure 11-22.
• Select the I/O input monitor screen and select the input bit.

Base and Transport
• The input monitor digit reads “ 1” when the PCB is detected, and reads “ 0” when
not detected. Check that the digit of each sensor reads “ 1” (N1030 to N1036).
SCREEN 11-10
5. Place a PCB over each sensor along the conveyor and check if they are OK. To
secure the PCB in the mounting position over the sensor N1033, the Unit utility
will be convenient
6. If necessary, adjust the position of the PCB detection sensor. Loosen the screws
securing the sensor, and adjust the position, orientation or angle at which it is
attached.
7. Remove the PCB from the conveyor.
FIGURE 11-22 Adjusting the position of the PCB detection sensor

Base and Transport
11.9.3 Adjusting the Intermediate Exit Sensor

The intermediate exit sensor is installed at a position between the main stopper
and the exit stopper for conveyor speed reduction. When a PCB on which
components have been mounted reaches above the intermediate exit sensor, the
PCB which is stand by at the entrance stopper is carried in to the main stopper. This
means that the PCB carry in timing can be adjusted by adjusting the installation
position of the intermediate exit sensor. To speed up the carry in timing, move the
installation position towards the main stopper. To delay the timing, move the
installation position towards the exit sensor for a lower speed. In normal operation,
the intermediate exit sensor should be installed at a distance longer then the PCB
length from the carry out side of the main stopper. (α = ± 5 cm)
+α
PCB length
Entrance stopper PCB sensor Intermediate exit sensor

in mounting position
Main stopper Exit sensor for conveyor
speed reduction
FIGURE 11-23 Installation position of intermediate sensor
CAUTION
CAUTION: If the intermediate sensor is positioned too close to the main stopper, a
PCB may be detected simultaneously by the PCB sensor in the mounting
position and the intermediate exit sensor when the PCB is carried out after
component mounting. If this happens, the next PCB will not be carried in
to the mounting position.

Base and Transport
11.10 Conveyor Section (W-axis)

The conveyor transports the PCB in and out of the machine. To mount PCB smoothly
it is necessary to set some parameters like machine reference, software limits etc.
11.10.1 Checking Conveyor Parallelism

It is also wise to check the conveyor parrallelity. Do this by moving a PCB over the
conveyor and check if there is a difference between the left (entrance) and right
(exit) side of the conveyor.
11.10.2 Machine Reference

The built-in motor encoder of each axis issues a “ 0” pulse each time one turn is
complete.
When return-to-origin is performed, there will be a difference in distance between
the position where the origin signal is detected and the point at which the next
encoder “ 0” pulse is received (the origin position actually set). This is called the
machine reference and is usually expressed in percentages, with 100% being equal
to one full turn of the motor.
0$&+,1(
5()(5(1&(
25,*,16,*1$/ ;<5$;,6
0$&+,1(5()(5(1&(=$;,6
25,*,1
6(1625
6,*1$/
(1&2'(5
6,*1$/
$%3+$6( 3+$6( 02725527$7,21

Base and Transport
11.10.2.1 Check the Machine Reference Settings

The machine reference for the W-axis must be set between 40 and 60%. To check
the machine reference:
■ Start-up the MchSetup utility
■ Select the Axis adjustment procedure
■ Set the Adjust Item parameter to “ Motor reference” and press Execute.
SCREEN 11-11 Machine reference settings
The machine starts to origin

The machine comes up with the machine reference values. If the value is not within
50% ± 10% adjust the W-axis.
Use the following procedure to adjust the machine reference.
The W-axis is driven by ball screw at a lead of 5.00mm per turn of the motor. The
conveyor width is adjusted by sliding the rear rail (The front rail is fixed.). The
origin signal is output when the origin sensor, which is located near the inner end
of the W-axis ball screw, has detected the origin dog attached to the movable rail.

Base and Transport
11.10.2.2 Adjusting the Machine Reference

1. Loosen the bolt securing the origin dog and slide it slightly.
• To increase the machine reference: Slide the dog in the width enlarging
direction.
• To decrease the machine reference: Slide the dog in the width reducing
direction.
FIGURE 11-25 Adjusting machine reference
NOTE: The machine reference will be adjusted to about 20% for every 1mm
movement of the origin dog. Be sure to slide the dog slightly (a maximum
of 2.5mm). When sliding it too far, a “0” pulse in a different cycle may be
received, causing the origin position to shift
2. Re-tighten the bolt to secure the origin dog.
Make sure that the machine reference is set within the tolerance range.

Base and Transport
11.10.3 Software Limits

When an axis moves to a target position, the software limit is used to restrict
movement to avoid interfering with the mechanical stoppers located at the both
ends of the axis. If the target position exceeds the software limit, the error message
“AXIS SOFT LIMIT OVER” appears and axis movement is prohibited.
The W-axis software limit should be set to 0.50mm inside the mechanical stopper,
for both the “ plus” side (width enlarging direction) and the “ minus” side (width
reducing direction).
When the software limit settings are correct, this meets the specifications for the
minimum (50.00mm) and maximum (440.00mm) widths of PCBs that can be
transferred.
F
0.50 mm
C $ 6WUXFWXUDOPRYDEOHUDQJH
D
% $OORZDEOHPRYHPHQW
UDQJH
& ´SOXVµVLGHVRIWZDUHOLPLW
B A UHDU
' 2ULJLQSRVLWLRQ
( ´PLQXVµVLGHVRIWZDUH
OLPLWIURQW
E ) 0HFKDQLFDOOLPLW
0.50 mm
F
FIGURE 11-26 W-axis movement range
11.10.3.1 Setting the W-axis Software Limit

1. Determine the mechanical limits of the W-axis as follow:
• Set the axis to “ W”

Base and Transport
SCREEN 11-12
• Because there is a brake on the W-axis in the Topaz-XII Series machines, you
need to put 24V on the brake to make it possible to move it by hand. This can
be done in the output monitor with bit T1824.
• Manipulate the joystick on the MSP or move by hand the W-axis conveyor
width. To set the “ plus” side software limit, move the axis in the width
enlarging direction. To set the “ minus” side, move the axis in the width
reducing direction. Check in the Current Pos field or on the MSP the positions
of the W-axis.
• Move the conveyor rail (very low speed!!!) against the hard limits. When the
movable rail is positioned in contact with the mechanical stopper, the
maximum conveyor width is approximately 440.00 mm and the minimum
width is approx. 47.00 mm. Check the width by measuring with a square or
tape measure.
2. Calculate the software limit values and fill them in the fields. Subtract 0.50 mm
from the mechanical limit on the “ plus” side, or add 0.50 mm to the mechanical
limit on the “ minus” side.
3. Save the data by pressing the Save data button, or press Close without saving.

Base and Transport
11.10.4 Setting W-axis Initial Position

The W-axis initial position is the distance between the conveyor rails when the W-
axis is in the return-to-origin position, expressed as a minus value.
To set the W-axis initial position, follow these steps.
1. Perform return-to-origin.
3. Determine the initial position.
a) Measure the conveyor width W (distance between the fixed and the
movable rail).
b) Subtract 0.5 mm from this width as a clearance margin and then prefix a
“ minus” sign to this value. This is the W-axis initial position.
5
4
3
W
2
1
0.5
FIGURE 11-27 Conveyor width measurement and initial position
4. Enter the initial position. Do this as follow:

• Set the axis to “ W”

Base and Transport
SCREEN 11-13
• Fill the calculated value (step 3) in the Init Pos. field.

Press the Save data button, press Close if the data need not be saved. The data
can be checked in the VmSpec (Machine button in Main Area) as displayed
below.
SCREEN 11-14 Saving the settings

Base and Transport
11.11 Vacuum and Pneumatics

This paragraph will explain the air and vacuum used in the machine
11.11.1 Air Specification and Connection

The Air supply of the Topaz-XII Series must fulfil the following requirements:
3UHVVXUHDWV\VWHP ![3D
F lo w 3 5 0 N l/m in u te
F l o w w i t h d o u b l e s h u t t e r 4t r 0a 0y N
c hl /amn ign eu rt e
O il c o n te n t <3 0 . 1 m g / m
D e w p o in t < 2 5°PC a a t 7 x 1 0
< 4 ° C a t 75 .P2 a x 1 0
D u s t p a r tic le s s iz e < 1 0 ìm
TABLE 11-2
NOTE: The pressure specified must remain within specification at maximum flow.
Compressed air supply that does not meet the above specifications will
increase the frequency of carrying out the following maintenance actions:
Cleaning of the vacuum system and the micro-ejectors (ventures) if the oil
content exceeds the permissible level.
Draining the water from the mist filter (MF400-03-A) if the water vapour
content exceeds the permissible level.
Cleaning of the air filter (F300-03-BG-A) if the dust content exceeds the
permissible level.
In such cases, the compressed air supplier must take measures by
installing gas filters, etc. as required.
11.11.1.1 Air Connection
For the air supply connection to the system please refer to the Air circuit diagram
in chapter 5 of this manual. Use for the connection with the main compressed air
circuit of the site a non-metallic flexible hose to prevent electrical earth loops. The
hose inner diameter must be 8mm or more. The coupling to the Topaz-XII Series can

Base and Transport
be done via a joint type 40SH (manufacturer: Nittoh koki) which is supplied with
the system. The air connection is located at the left lower side of the machine.
Pressure control valve knob

Air connection
Pressure bleed off knob
FIGURE 11-28 Air connection
11.11.2 Vacuum
The vacuum pumps of the Topaz-XII Series and tray changer are based on the use of
ejectors. An ejector uses compressed air to create a vacuum. Each head of the
Topaz-XII has its own ejector which can be switched on and off via an air-valve
inside the ejector pump. As can be seen in the total overview airflow in chapter 5,
the compressed air for the vacuum section is fed from the regulator and is sent via
a hose and a coupling to the ejector assembly.
The vacuum level is, sensed at the I/O-1 headboard, see interconnect I/O-1 head
assy (chapter 5). The ejector can be switched on/off via the signals TH01 - TH02 on
the I/O-1 headboards.
The LCS vacuum system uses 6 ejector units, 4 on the shuttle and two ejectors +
valve (YV11) for the pick-up head located on the head. The vacuum on the shuttle
pads can be switched on via the valves TR01 - 02. The vacuum on the head can be
switched by signal TR13 (YV11)
The Topaz-XII Series has two separate air pressure regulators. One is used for the
ejectors and one is used for the air solenoids of the system. The air pressure
regulator for the vacuum-line is located behind the lower left panel at the left side
of the machine

Base and Transport
11.11.2.1 Measuring the Vacuum

The measurement of the vacuum level is done via vacuum sensors (transducer)
which are located on the I/O head assy boards. Each head has its own sensor and
can be adjusted and calibrated independent from each other. For the Adjustment of
the sensing circuit please refer to the head section chapter 15.
11.11.2.2 Performance Check and Trouble Shooting
In order to get a correct vacuum level from each ejector, make sure that the air-
pressure is at a correct level (>5.5 bar). Make also sure that the hoses to and from
the ejector are not contaminated.
Each ejector has its own air-filter that needs to be checked at regular intervals (500
Hours). If the filter is contaminated it is advisable to replace it by a new one.
11.11.3 Pneumatic Systems

The Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII machine contains a number of pneumatic solenoid
valves and cylinders. The air solenoid valves controls the air flow to certain air
pressure lines. The pneumatic driven cylinders are used for the locate-pin, push-up,
push-in, edge clamps and head-down movement.
The air solenoid valves are controlled electrically by a 24V signal coming from the
I/O boards. The air cylinders are activated by air pressure which are controlled by
electrical solenoids.
Air solenoid valves control the pneumatic cylinders.
11.11.4 Double Shuttle Tray Changer (LCS)

The air solenoid valves of the tray-changer are controlled by the I/O conveyor board
inside the tray changer. For the connections between the I/O-board and the various
solenoids, please refer to the overall TC interconnect diagram in chapter 5.
The air pressure for the LCS air valves is supplied via the main machine.
11.11.5 ATS (Not for Opal-XII)

The air solenoid valves of the tray-changer are controlled by the I/O conveyor board
inside the ATS. For the connections between the I/O-board and the various
solenoids, please refer to the overall ATS interconnect diagram in chapter 5.
The air pressure for the ATS air valves is supplied via the main machine.
11.11.6 Tape Feeders

The tape feeders do not have air solenoids valves so they do not contain electrical
connections.

Base and Transport
11.11.7 Measuring and Adjusting

Check and if necessary adjust at regular intervals (quarterly) the 24 volts, which is
used to control the various valves of the pneumatic system.
The power supply GS21 is located at the left lower side of the system.

No specific actions are done for the performance check. If some valves are not
working please first check the 24 volt power supply, then check if the I/O signal is
OK, check this by activating manually the I/O signal via the manual I/O setting
screen.

Feeding
CHAPTER 12 Feeding
This chapter gives a short explanation of the feeding tools used to handle the
components of the Topaz-XII series machine.
12.1 Feeder Plate

This section describes how to adjust the position of the feeder plates and their
machine data in order that each head properly picks up a component. Also
explained are adjustments to feed pitch of tape feeders. Correct adjustment of the
feeder plates is essential to the proper working of the system. Improper adjustment
will reduce the component pickup rate of each head.
12.1.1 Feeder Plate Parallel Adjustment

The feeder plate is secured to the feeder base of the main unit by bolts. Under
normal working conditions, the feeder plate will not require parallel adjustment.
However, if you need to remount the feeder plate for some reasons, first make the
parallel adjustment as follows. (Fine adjustments to feeder positions will be
performed in section 12.1.3 "Feeder Block Position".)
FIGURE 12-1 Feeder plates (top view)

Feeding
1. Check if a nozzle is attached to a head.

A nozzle for small chip components (example: type 72) is recommended.
3. Temporarily fasten the feeder plate to the feeder base.
Finger tighten the bolts, in the center position of each counter bored hole so
that the feeder plate can be swiveled when making the parallel adjustment.
4. Set the two feeder-bar adjustment blocks on the feeder plate.
Set the two blocks far apart as possible as long as you can access the bolts
securing the feeder plate (for example, 2 or 3 points inside the both ends of the
feeder plate).
5. Go with the head to one block and lower the nozzle by hand (or use the fiducial
camera) to the middle of the cross and check the position.
Note the position of the nozzle tip relative to the chip component, especially in
the Y direction.
6. Then, move the head assembly by hand to the other block.
Making sure that the nozzle does not interfere with the blocks, move the head
assembly only in the X direction so that it is positioned above the feeder.
CAUTION
CAUTION: Do not move the head in Y direction when moving to the other feeder block.
If the head is moved in the Y direction, the feeder plate adjustment will be
unreliable.
7. Lower the nozzle by hand and check the position (or use the fiducial camera).
Look at the position of the nozzle tip relative to the middle of the block, espe-
cially in the Y direction.
8. Compare the above two positions.
If the two positions are nearly the same in the Y direction, no further
adjustment is needed at this point. If shifted too far, the plate is not parallel
with the X-axis. Proceed with Step 11. (Fine adjustments will be performed in
section 12.1.3 "Feeder Block Position")
9. Adjust the orientation of the feeder plate.
Loosen the bolts that temporarily fasten the feeder plate, then carefully slide
the plate so that it is set parallel to the X-axis.
10.Re-tighten the bolts securely.
Then, advance to the next step in 12.1.2.
12.1.2 Feeder Plate Spec Information

When the Plate Specification in the VmSpec (Machine settings) program is selected,
feeder plate spec information is displayed showing which type of feeders can be
installed to each feeder set number on the feeder plate.

Feeding
This symbol means the feeder can be installed.

This symbol means it can not be installed
SCREEN 12-1 Machine settings
CAUTION
CAUTION: Incorrect settings will cause faulty data optimisation or cause data check
errors when the PCB data is loaded for automatic operation.
12.1.3 Feeder Block Position

On a Topaz-XII on the rear side 50 feeder set positions (pick positions) are provided,
unless 2 times FES20 has been installed so there are 2 times 20 feeder set positions.
On the front side the Topaz-XII has 2 times 20 positions.
On a Topaz-XiII on both, the rear and front, sides 2 times 20 feeder set positions are
provided.
On a Opal-XII on both the rear and the front sides, 2 times 50 feeder set positions
are provided, unless 2 times FES20 has been installed (front side only).
These pickup positions are divided into some feeder blocks per plate. Each feeder
block is comprised of eight feeder positions (the picture below shows the Topaz-XII

Feeding
configuration situation). The first feeder set position of each feeder block is
specified as a reference position.
149 141 133 125 117 109 101
N o.15 N o.14 N o.13 N o.12 N o.11 N o.10 N o.9
8 8 8 8 8 8 2
When a feeder plate is divided into 7 b locks (a total of 14 blocks)
1 9 17 21 29 37
Camera
N o.1 N o.2 N o.3 N o.4 N o.5 N o.6
8 8 4 8 8 4
When a feeder plate is divided into 6 blocks (a total of 12 blocks)

FIGURE 12-2 Feeder block arrangement (Topaz-XII)
CAUTION
CAUTION: Due to the configuration design of the Topaz-XII head assembly, the feeder
set positions that can be actually accessed by each head for example for
the Topaz-XII are limited. Position 1 is only accessible by head 8, position
2 by head 8 and 7, etc. On the other side it is the other way around;
Position 40 is only accessible by head 1, position 39 by head 2 and 3, etc
for Topaz-XII. Position 50 is only accessible by head 1, position 39 by head
2 and 3 for Opal-XII.
The reference feeder numbers have specified on the Position utility in the Utility
(machine adjustment) program. The “Current Value” column on this screen shows

Feeding
information of the feeder positions that is allotted to each feeder plate block
section in the Plate No. column.
FIGURE 12-3 Feeder block arrangement (Opal-XII)
In the ‘Std Number‘ field the reference number of the feeder block section is
displayed.
SCREEN 12-2

Feeding
CAUTION
CAUTION: In the Total Num line , the correct number of feeder set positions is
applicable to each feeder plate block (feeder plate 1 to 16) is displayed.
12.1.3.1 Teaching the Feeder Block Reference Position
To perform teaching for the reference position of each feeder block, proceed as
follows using head 1 or the moving camera (for reference feeder plate positions
where head 1 can not be reached, use head 2 and calculate the offset in regards to
head 1). For the determination of the pick position a special pick block (5322 395
10845 for the XII- machines 4022 591 74271 for the XiII- machines) or, when not
available, use a ‘golden’ feeder.
1. Check if a nozzle is attached to the head.
A nozzle for small chip components (example: type 72) is recommended.
3. Set a tape feeder or the pick block at a reference feeder position.
4. Open the shutter of the tape feeder (only when a feeder is used).
Select the feeder in the feeder menu (tab in the unit menu).
SCREEN 12-3
5. Move the head assembly by hand to over the tape feeder or pick block.
While lowering the nozzle, position the head assembly so that the nozzle tip is
at the center of the component pickup position.

Feeding
6. Press the TEACH button.

After pressing the Teach button a separate window is started.
SCREEN 12-4
7. Set teaching conditions.

a) Select the teaching unit.
b) Select any speed from “ 10%” to “ 100%”.
8. Press OK when the teaching unit has been set correctly above the component or
pick block.
9. Confirm if the data has to be saved.
SCREEN 12-5

Feeding
10.Perform teaching the Z coordinate

The Z coordinate has to be taught in the in the same menu only the Z-axis has
to be chosen. Perform the teaching on a ‘golden’ feeder with components of the
reference feeder position.
SCREEN 12-6
11.Press the Teach button after which the Z coordinate can be taught.
It is easy to turn on the vacuum, so you can hear when the nozzle picks up the
component
12.Manipulate lower the head with the arrows and stop it when the nozzle tips
makes contact with the component.
13.Repeat the process for all reference feeder position.
14.Perform the component pickup test to check the settings.
This test should be performed for all reference feeder positions. Perform a pick
up test (see 12.1.6). If any offset is found, correct it on the feeder plate offset
screen.

Feeding
12.1.4 Feeder Spec Information

When the Feeder Specification in the VmSpec (Machine settings) program is
selected the feeder specification appears for several feeder information.
SCREEN 12-7 Feeder information
12.1.4.1 Feeder Size and Feeder Drive Sequence Information

When selecting Feeder Size from the feeder spec submenu box, some feeder infor-
mation is displayed. On this screen the “ left” column shows the distance to the left
edge of the feeder from the center of the feeder installation hole. Like wise the
“ right” column shows the distance to the right edge of the feeder from the center
of the feeder installation hole. The “ X shift” column specifies an X axis direction
offset of the selected feeder pick up point relative to a standard 8 mm feeder pick
up point. The left direction offset is specified as minus and the right direction
offset as plus. The “ Z shift” column specifies a Z axis direction offset of the selected
feeder pickup point relative to a standard 8 mm feeder pick up point. The
downwards direction offset is specified as plus. In the “ Sequence” column, the
feeder drive sequence is specified according to each feeder type. This setting is
protected on some feeders to prohibit editing.

Feeding
SCREEN 12-8
12.1.4.2 Feeder Drive Time Information

When selecting Feed Timer, Minimum Timer and Down Timer from the VmSpec
program the feeder drive time information is displayed.
The Feed Timer menu shows the time necessary to load components continuously
from the same feeder set per feeder pitch.
SCREEN 12-9
The Minimum Timer menu specifies the minimum time required for the feeder per
feeder pitch to advance the tape. For feeders other than bulk feeders, this can be

Feeding
set in 10 msec steps from 0 to 750 msec. For bulk feeders this setting indicates the
air blow time necessary for proper feed of components and can be set in 1 msec
steps from 0 to 75 msec.
SCREEN 12-10
The Down Timer menu shows the time delay when the head assembly begins to
move down after the feeder shutter has opened.
SCREEN 12-11

Feeding
12.1.5 Adjusting the Feeder Floating Sensor

Adjust the Feeder Lock Verifier in following way.
Use three tools (only XII machines : feeder floating adjustment tool 5322 395
10685) or 3 ’golden’ feeders to adjust it.
1. Remove all feeders of the feederbar.
2. Place the first tool at the outer left side of the feederbar.
3. Place the second tool in the middle of the feederbar.
4. Place the third tool at the outer right side of the feederbar.
5. Adjust the laser transmitter in such a way that the beam can travel through the
holes of all tools without being obstructed. Tip; the laser beam can be made
visible by obstructing the beam with a piece of white paper.
6. Adjust the receiver in such a way that it detects the laser beam. For the 20
position feeder bar the detection is made visible by an orange light on the feeder
floating transmitter (LED ON is detection OK). For the 50 position feeder bar the
detection is made visible by a red light on the receiver (LED ON is detection OK)
7. Remove the tools and place some feeders on the feederbar to check if the
adjustment is done right. If it is not OK check if the clamping lever of the
feeders is pushed downwards all the way. If this is OK repeat the adjustment
ones more.
12.1.5.1 Adjusting the Feeder Floating Detection, Fibre Sensor type
This type is only used on 22positions feeder bar.
Adjust the Feeder Lock Verifier in the following way:
Use two adjust tools 5322 395 10685.
1. Setting the adjust tools.
• Set the adjust tools to No.2 and No.19 feeder position for front left.
• Set the adjust tools to No.22 and No.39 feeder position for front right.
Adjust tool for

Feeder
Floating
Detections
FIGURE 12-4

Feeding
2. Open the plastic cover plate from the sensor indicator unit.
3. Set the 3-position slide switch to “ SET”. The orange LED indicator will be off now
and on the sensor a tiny red light will slowly switch on/off. From the sensor
indicator unit the receiving sensitivity level will be shown.
Sensor Indicator Unit
Slide S/W RUN mode SET mode
FIGURE 12-5
4. Adjust sensor position until the shown receiving

• sensitivity level is higher than 50, with
• the adjust tools installed.
FIGURE 12-6

Feeding
5. Check the sensitivity level with the adjust tools removed from the feeder bar,
this must be higher than 500. If not, clean the sensor receiver and transmitter
openings.
FIGURE 12-7
6. Reset the 3 position slide switch back to “ RUN” mode.
FIGURE 12-8
NOTE: You can check the threshold level by selecting “ADJ” mode (middle
position). Both large orange push knobs can be used for changing this
value. Usually this is set at 100.
7. Close the plastic cover plate.

Feeding
12.1.6 Component Pick Up Test

To check component pickup position or pickup function, you can use the
component pickup test command. Install in advance a tape feeder in the feeder set
position where you want to perform the component pickup test. It’s recommended
performing the test with the smallest available component (0201)
1. Create a new board program or take an existing program
2. Go to the Parts menu
3. Insert a component into the Parts database
4. Enter the feeder set number in the tab PICK
5. Perform the Adjust utility
6. Pick up the component
Set the correct head and press the Pick Up button. The head will move to the
selected feeder and pick up the component
SCREEN 12-12

Feeding
7. Check the component pickup position.

Look at the position of the nozzle tip relative to the component.
If any offset is found in the X and Y directions, enter the offset on the feeder
plate offset editing (VmSpec program) screen..
FIGURE 12-9
NOTE: In both the X and Y directions, if the nozzle tip is shifted to the machine
origin side with respect to the center of the component, then this is a plus
offset. If shifted in the opposite side, this is a minus offset.
8. Dump the component.
Select the Dump button and the component will be dumped.
Ensure safety because the head moves to the discard point and dumps the
component automatically.
12.1.7 Feeder Plate Maintenance

Check on a weekly basis the wear of the feeder-plate. Replace the air-joint if wear is
noticed or if air leakage is noticed. Also a malfunction feeder can be caused by a
bad air supply or bad coupling. Clean the inner part of the air coupling and apply
little grease on the inner-packing of the air-joint.
Check the feeder alignment every three months. Proceed with the description given
in the previous paragraph if needed.

Feeding
12.2 Component Feeders

The tape Feeder is designed to supply electronic components to a mounter.
Component supply devices vary according to electronic components being used and
the orientation at which components are being supplied.
There are largely two types of component supply devices; feeder-type and tray-
type. Tray-type devices are used when the components are supplied from a tray
feeder. Feeder-type devices are installed on a feeder plate of a mounter.
Working with and adjusting the several feeders is described in the feeder manual
(5322 871 61605). Only the preparation with the machine are described in this
chapter.
FIGURE 12-10 CL tape feeder
12.2.1 Preparing the Mounter for Pneumatic Tape Feeders

After the tape feeder has been installed on a mounter, the mounter needs to be
prepared for operation. The component feed orientation and pickup height must
be set.

Feeding
REMARK: Please refer to the User Reference Manual for each mounter for its detailed
operation instruction.
■ Setting the component feed status
Set the “ Comp. Package” and the “ Feeder Type” in the “ BASIC” sub window.
1. Select a mount program
2. Select the Parts menu
3. Select a part
After selecting the part, the line will color up.
SCREEN 12-13
4. Select the tab BASIC.

5. Select in the Package box “ Tape”
6. Enter the correct feeder type in the Feeder Type box.

Feeding
■ Setting the pickup height

The pickup height is set in the VGOS software of the mounter.
1. Select the tab PICK
SCREEN 12-14
2. Enter the pick up height.

“ 0” is usually entered here. Enter an extra height if an embossing feeder is used
and where the components are lower than the pickup point.
■ Confirming the movement
After the Tape Feeder is set on the mounter, check for a correct operation.
1. Select the Units menu
2. Select the tab FEEDER
SCREEN 12-15

Feeding
Select the desired feeder position.

After selecting, the air will be turned on, and this selected feeder will index.
Move the cursor to the feeder plate number in which the Tape Feeder you wish to
move is set, and press the button.
Press the button several times to confirm that there are no errors.
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27 48
26
47
46
45
43
42
41
F eeder Plate Numbers

29
28
27
26
25
24
23
FIGURE 12-11 Feeder plate numbers
12.3 ITF Feeders (Not for Opal-XII)

Tape feeders can be installed on the front and rear feeder plate of the machine.
These feeders operate electrically by a 12 Volt power supply in the mounter.
A standard Xi machine has four 20 position feeder plates, two at the front and two
at the rear side. Each feeder set position is designated by number as ‘feeder set
number’ from 1 to 40 on the front side and 101 to 140 on the rear feeder plate,
when viewed from the front of the machine.
REMARK: When an optional ATS is installed, available feeder set positions will be
limited. See the specification sheet for the machine you ordered.

Feeding
FIGURE 12-12 ITF feeder
For more information please look in the Feeder Manual 5322 871 61605.
12.4 Double Shuttle Tray Changer (LCS)

12.4.1 Introduction
This chapter gives a short description of the double shuttle tray changer option for
the GEM Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII machine. Extended user and service instruction
are described in the option manual tray changer with order number 4022 591
93211.

Feeding
The Tray Changer (LCS) is an additional pallet sequencer feeding parts from a tray.
This feeder can be equipped with a maximum of 40 pallets, each being able to hold
different trays.
FIGURE 12-13 LCS Tray Feeder (Topaz-XII version).
Two components are picked up from the tray and placed on a shuttle. This shuttle
transports the components into the machine for pick-up and mounting by the
placement heads.
The tray changer has two shuttles when one is in the machine the other one is in
the tray changer.
A part rejected by vision will be dumped in the dump box or on the reject conveyor
if installed.
The instructions for the reject conveyor is written in paragraph 12.6
The PCB buffer conveyor on the Tray Feeder offers the possibility for visual PCB
inspection and allows linking with downstream machines.
The tray container is separated into two magazines with each 20 pallets. This allows
tray replenishment while the machine is running.

Feeding
12.4.2 Specifications
75$<&+$1*(563(&,),&$7,216
*(1(5$/
Max. Tray size (L x W): 350 mm x 440 mm (13.7" x 17.3")
Power and air supply: Delivered by main machine
LCS Tray feeder dimensions: Length: 920 mm (3.0 ft)
Height: 1005 mm (2.7 ft); with top cover open 1042 mm (3.4 ft)
Width: 1650 mm (5.4 ft); with door open 2300 mm (7.5 ft)
Topaz-X II + Tray feeder dimen- Length: 2423 mm (8.0 ft)
sions: Height: 1865 mm (6.1 ft)
Width: 1818 mm (6.0 ft); with door open and feeders on 2791 mm
(9.2 ft)
Weight: ±250 kg (551 Lbs)
$33/,&$%/(&20321(176
Min. Component dimension 8 mm × 8 mm (0.31" x 0.31") Mold size
Max. Component dimension: 54 x 54 mm (2.1" x 2.1")
Max. Tray height included compo- 8.5 mm (0.33") from pallets at pitch of 12.5 mm (0.49"), total 40 pal-
nent height: lets possible
Max. Tray height included compo- 21 mm (0.83") from pallets at pitch of 25 mm (0.98"), total 20 pallets
nent height: possible
)(('&$3$&,7<
Nozzles on shuttle: 2 times 2
67$1'$5'&20321(17&$3$&,7<
Max. number of component types: 80
Number of pallets: Standard 40 pallets included (additional pallets available PA 2981/15)
TABLE 12-1
12.5 Auto Tray Stacker (ATS 20) (Not for Opal-XII)

12.5.1 Introduction
This chapter gives a short description of the auto tray stacker option for the CSM
Topaz-XII Series machine. Extended user and service instruction are described in the
option manual auto tray stacker with order number 4022 591 93221.
The ATS 20 Tray Feeder is a new additional internal pallet sequencer, allowing high-
speed feeding of tray components. This feeder can be equipped with a maximum of
20 pallets, each being able to hold different trays.

Feeding
FIGURE 12-14 ATS (Auto Tray Stacker)
On the Topaz-XII it is possible to install one or two portrait tray changers.

A part rejected by vision will be placed back in its original tray position; this means
no loss of expensive parts.
12.5.2 Specifications
$7675$<)(('(563(&,),&$7,216
*(1(5$/
Max. Tray size (L × W) 350 mm × 220 mm (13.7" × 8.6")
Pallet exchange time: Changing from pallet 1 to 20; 5 seconds
However, in practice no time is lost because of the simultaneous operation of
the ATS 20 Tray Sequencer and Topaz-XII Series; while the machine is pick-
ing from on-board feeders, the pallet brings in new components
Power and air supply Delivered by main machine
Topaz-XII + ATS 20 Tray Length: 1655 mm (5.4 ft)
feeder dimensions: Height: 1865 mm (6.1 ft)
Width: 1761 mm (5.8 ft); with ATS 20 door open: 2267 mm (7.4 ft)
Maximum board size 250 mm (9.8") and second line array camera or single view camera
Topaz-XII Series: possible
$33/,&$%/(&20321(176
Max. Tray height included 8.5 mm (0.33") from pallets at pitch of 12.5 mm (0.49"), total 20 pallets
component height: possible.
Max. Tray height included 16 mm (0.63") from pallets at pitch of 25 mm (0.98"), total 10 pallets
component height possible.
67$1'$5'&20321(17&$3$&,7<
Number of pallets: Standard 20 pallets included (additional pallets available PA 2981/35 for portrait)
TABLE 12-2

Feeding
12.6 Reject Station PA2906/10
NOTE: This option has been replaced by 9466 920 10921.
12.6.1 Introduction
The reject station is used to temporarily store expensive components like QFP when
they have recognition errors.
Instead of dumping the components in the dump box the components are placed on
the conveyor.
The reject station is placed on the feeder bar.
3
S/F
9 4 2 10 5 6
FIGURE 12-15 Reject station
Because the newer type of dump station has only one type of connector, this one
can not be used anymore on the X- machines, unless an extra adapter has been used
(see SI-CSM-565). The same is applicable for the ‘older’ dump station which can not
be used on the XI I- machines.
However the XiI I-- machines still use the ‘old’ type connector.

Feeding
12.6.2 Installation
12.6.2.1 Hardware Installation
Before placing the reject station on the feeder bar make sure that the machine is
switched off and that the surrounding area is safe.
■ Place the reject conveyor on the feeder bar at the same way as the feeders are
placed on the feeder bar (position 9, 29, 109 or 129 only).
■ Connect the orange air hose to the air coupling coming from the front base section.
■ Connect the harness from the dump station to the five -pole connector right
below the feeder bar (in case of XI I). There is one 5 pole connector per feeder
block. In case of an XiI I-- machine connect the dump connector to the DUMP 1/
2/3/4 connector which is lying in the side cable duct.
FIGURE 12-16 Harness connection (example XiII)
■ Set the changeover switch at the middle position (in operation standby).
FIGURE 12-17 Change over switch reject station
The change over switch is usually set to the middle position. When the change over
switch is raised to the upper position and then returned to the middle position, the
machine feeds one stroke.
When the switch is set at the bottom position the reject station will not operate.

Feeding
12.6.2.2 Software Settings

■ Change in the VmSpec (Machine data) program the parameter “ Dump Station” to
exist.
SCREEN 12-16
■ Teaching the dump station

Teach the position of the dumpstation in ‘Utilities, Position, item: dumpstation’,
select axis ‘XY’ and press the “ Teach” button.
SCREEN 12-17

Feeding
■ Teaching the reject station position.

Select the ‘XY’ tab and move the head above the position on the reject station
where the components have to be dumped. Press close when done.
SCREEN 12-18
• Select the ZR tab and lower the head (make sure head1 is pneumatically sent
out first) and teach the Z coordinate.
Determine the Z coordinate.
SCREEN 12-19

Feeding
• Check the X, Y and Z coordinate in the VmSpec (Machine data) program as

displayed below. The Set parameter is the feeder position where the reject
station is positioned. This is the lowest numbered position (9, 29, 109, (129))
of the feeder block. When no reject station is installed, this is set to 0.
SCREEN 12-20
• Save the data

■ Set the discard method.
• Select the Program in the Setup menu
• Select the Parts menu.
• Go to the component that uses the reject station select tab BASIC.
SCREEN 12-21

Feeding
• Select the ‘Station’ values in the Dumpway field.

• Do this for all the components, which use the reject station.
• save the data
12.6.2.3 Feeding Pitch and Speed

Set the component feeding pitch. Change the cylinder attachment position according
to the following table to set the travel distance after a component is dumped on the
conveyor.
1 2 3 4 5 6
FIGURE 12-18 Setting the feeder pitch
6HWSRVLWLRQ 6WURNHPP
1 47
2 40
3 34
4 28
5 23
6 17
TABLE 12-3
The speed can be adjusted via the adjustment knob on the cylinder.
Turn the speed adjustment knob to adjust the speed as shown in the figure.
Overflow sensor
Speed adjustment knob

FIGURE 12-19

Feeding
12.7 Operation and Check

After installation please check the following items before using the reject station.
Overflow sensor
■ Check if the overflow sensor works well.
■ Open the input monitor in the Units menu.
SCREEN 12-22
■ Check that the “ 1” in N1026, N1126, N1067 or N1167 (depending on the position
where the reject station has been set) changes to “ 0” after placing a component
at the overflow detection position.
Operation check
■ Check if the reject station operates by moving the operation change over switch
from mid to top position and back to the middle position. The reject station
should make one step.
■ Set the switch at the middle position.
After completing the above checks, create an actual program for discarding
components and check that the machine stops during an error at the overflow
position and that an error message pops up.

Feeding
12.8 Manual Tray Feeder

12.8.1 Introduction
The manual tray feeder is a station with one palette.
The tray feeder guide is mounted on the feeder bar and the tray is attached to the
moving conveyor.
So the tray moves in and out with the conveyor.
12.8.2 Hardware Installation

When installing the manual tray feeder, follow the next steps.
■ Mount the four spacers to the plate holder with screw M3 × 6 and mount the
plate holder to the moving conveyor.
■ Against the plate holder comes the holder use screws M5 × 10
■ Place the block on the feeder bar and secure it with the two arm clamps.
■ Mount the two covers to the stay cover and mount the assy on the block, also
the shaft comes on the block.
■ Mount the pad slide against the palette and mount the palette on the holder.
,WP 'HVFULSWLRQ 4QW\ ,WP 'HVFULSWLRQ 4QW\ ,WP 'HVFULSWLRQ 4QW\

1 Support tray 1 13 Knurled screw 2 25 Washer plain M4 4
(M5 × 15)
2 Plate 1 14 Locate pin 2 26 Washer M4 4
3 Pad slide 1 15 Plate holder 1 27 Nut hex M4 3
4 Holder 1 16 Spacer plate 4 28 Screw Flat H. M3 × 6 4
5 Shaft 1 17 Stay cover 1 29 Screw Flat H. M4 × 10 3
6 Block 1 18 Cover 1 30 Screw Flat H. M5 × 10 4
7 Arm clamp 2 19 Bolt hex M4 × 10 2 31 Screw bind H. M4 × 10 4
8 Guide tape 1 20 Bolt hex M3 × 6 4 32 Cover 1
9 Lever clamp 4 21 Bolt hex M4 × 10 4 33 Bolt hex M4 × 15 4
10 Nut clamp 4 22 Bolt hex M5 × 14 2 34 Collar 4
11 Pad clamp 4 23 Bolt hex M6 × 10 4 35 Bolt hex M4 × 12 1
12 Knurled screw 4 24 Bolt hex M6 × 12 7
(M3 × 8)
TABLE 12-4

Feeding
FIGURE 12-20 Manual tray feeder

Feeding
FIGURE 12-21 Manual tray feeder

Feeding
12.9 Software Settings

The M.T.F. doesn’t need any testing or adjustment, but the initial component
position must be taught within the PCB mount program.
Define the pick up position the following way:
Enter the Parts menu for each mount program and determine which components are
going to use the M.T.F. Change the fields listed below for each component.
■ Comp Package into Tray (tab BASIC)
■ Feeder type into Fix. TF (tab BASIC)
SCREEN 12-23
■ Pos. Definition into Teaching (tab PICK)

■ Teach the initial X and Y position (tab PICK)
SCREEN 12-24

Feeding
■ Determine the tray matrix that is used for each component and fill in the X and
Y amount of the components and determine the X and Y pitch, that is the
distance between two components (tab Tray)
SCREEN 12-25
NOTE: The conveyor width needs to be adjusted before teaching the pick position
because the M.T.F. moves in and out with the conveyor.
X
A
FIGURE 12-22

Robots X-Y
CHAPTER 13 Robots X-Y

13.1 Introduction
To move the head assembly from pick position to mount position the Topaz-XII/
Opal-XII uses four axes. The X-axis (left to right movement), the Y-axis (front to
rear movement), the rotation (R axis) and the up and down movement (Z-axis).
How to adjust all parameters for the R and Z axis is written in chapter 15
(placement head)
This chapter explains the procedures of how to adjust all parameters for the X and Y
movement.
!
WARNING: MAKE SURE TO TAKE ALL NECESSARY SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WHEN DOING
MECHANICAL ACTIONS AT THE SYSTEM. ALWAYS SWITCH OFF THE MACHINE
IF MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY OR DISASSEMBLY ACTIONS ARE CARRIED OUT.
13.2 Machine Reference

The built-in motor encoder of each axis issues a “0” pulse each time one turn is
complete.
encoder “0” pulse is received (the origin position actually set). This is called the
to one full turn of the motor
0$&+,1(5()(5(1&(
25,*,16,*1$/ ;<5$;,6
0$&+,1(5()(5(1&(=$;,6
25,*,1
6(1625
6,*1$/
(1&2'(5
6,*1$/
$%3+$6( 3+$6( 02725527$7,21

Robots X-Y
13.2.1 Check the Machine Reference Settings

1. Startup the MchSetup (Utilities) program
2. Select the sub menu Axis. The following window pops up.
SCREEN 13-1
3. Select the following settings

Set the Adjust Item parameter to ‘Motor reference’
4. When the settings are set, release the emergency circuit and press the Execute
button.
SCREEN 13-2
5. After pressing OK the machine will start to origin. Make sure there is a safe
situation (no obstacles).
6. When origin has been finished the reference values per axis are displayed in the
Motor Reference column.
13.2.2 X Axis Machine Reference

The X-axis performs the right-to-left and left-to-right movement of the head
assembly. It is driven by ball screw at a lead of 20.00 mm per turn of the motor. The
origin signal is output when the grey origin sensor (item 16), which is attached to
the bottom of the X-axis slide plate, has detected the origin dog (item 22) located
on the left side of the X-axis. To adjust the X-axis machine reference, proceed as
follows.

Robots X-Y
2. Adjust the machine reference as follows.

• Loosen the screw securing the X-axis origin dog and slide it slightly.
• To increase the machine reference: slide the dog to the right.
• To decrease the machine reference: slide the dog to the left.
35 67
32
47 30
19 7 67
65 57 35
34 52 31
9 59
33 8 20
6 5 24
46 13
9
21
59 50
15 3
4 53 59
16 24
44
25
45
66 10 17
58
64 18 43
49 1
27
60 29
51 23 5
54 22
56
28 48
56 23
40 49
38 51
40 56 5
41 41 66
12 2
14 37 36 39 44
42 48
26 62 45 43 50
63 11
55
28 61 66 29
FIGURE 13-2 Adjusting the X-axis machine reference
NOTE: The machine reference will be adjusted to about 10% for every 2mm of
of 10mm). If you slide it too far, a “0” pulse in a different cycle may be
received, causing the origin position to shift.
3. Re-tighten the screw to secure the origin dog.
Make sure that the machine reference is set within tolerance. For the X-axis this
is between 40% and 60%.

Robots X-Y
13.2.3 Y Axis Machine Reference

The Y-axis performs the forward and backward movement of the head assembly. It
is driven by ball screw at a lead of 20.00mm per turn of the motor. The origin
signal is output when the grey origin sensor (item 27), which is attached to the
bottom of the right-hand Y-axis slide plate, has detected the origin dog (item 16)
located on the forward end of the Y-axis. To adjust the Y-axis machine reference,
proceed as follows.
2. Adjust the machine reference as follows.
• Loosen the screw securing the Y-axis origin dog and slide it slightly.
• To increase the machine reference: Slide the dog backwards (towards rear
feeder plate).
• To decrease the machine reference: Slide the dog forwards (towards front
feeder plate))
52
23
57
21 6 10 52
4 40
55 7
119 11
14 12 22
12
8
61 47
19
59
56 44 41
37 15 33 53
46 13 43 36 31
3 2 49
47 57 10 24
53 6 40
40 49 4 51
35 7
5 31 119
55 11
61 60 32 12
28 14 12
41 8
38 42 36 47
34 39 43 1
45 56 20 58
48 50
15 25
29 46 13 16
3 59 50
30 17
47
18
35 40 38
5 26
39 27
61 54
FIGURE 13-3 Adjusting the Y-axis machine reference

Robots X-Y
NOTE: The machine reference will be adjusted about 10% for every 2mm
of 10mm). If you slide it too far, a “ 0” pulse in a different cycle may be
received, causing the origin position to shift.
3. Re-tighten the screw to secure the origin dog.
Make sure that the machine reference is set within the tolerance range. For the Y
axis this is between 40% and 60%.
13.3 Secondary Limits

When the head assembly runs into the secondary limit area over the software limit,
the servo control immediately stops to avoid colliding with the mechanical stopper
a (light impact may occur however, depending on the running speed).
The secondary limit area is provided for the X and Y axes, and can be adjusted by
sliding the position of the secondary limit dog located at the both ends of the
movement range.
13.3.1 X Axis Secondary Limits

Usually the X-axis secondary limits are set to a point 1.00 mm inside the
mechanical stopper (hard limit).
1. Select the axis.
Specify in advance the axis whose co-ordinates need to be displayed in Step 5.
Open the Axis menu in the VmSpec (Utilities) program, select the Softlimit
parameter and select the X-axis. Check in the Current Pos field the actual position
of the X-axis. It is also possible to use the MSP for checking the actual position.
SCREEN 13-3

Robots X-Y

Then loosen the screws for the secondary limit dog (item 17 in figure 13-2). The
secondary limit dogs (item 23 in figure 13-2) are located at both ends of the X-
axis. Slightly loosen the screws so that you can just slide the dog (do not remove)
3. Move the head assembly to the end of the axis.
Move the head assembly by hand until it makes contact with the mechanical
stopper for the secondary limit dog with the bolt loosened. A error message
“ Secondary limit over” will appear.
4. Move back the head assembly to 1.00mm inside the mechanical stopper.
To do this, open the output monitor screen, and while observing the X co-ordinate
value indicated on the operation monitor or MSP, stop the head at a position
approximately 1.00 mm from the mechanical stopper (i.e., from the hard limit).
This position is the secondary limit of the X-axis.
NOTE: Make a Note of the X-axis co-ordinates displayed on the monitor. This is
used as a reference for the X-axis software limit settings.
5. Adjust the position of the secondary limit dog.
With the head assembly left at the position of Step 4, slide the position of the
secondary limit dog so that the secondary limit sensor just detects it.
Find the optimum position while checking the sensor detection LED in the input
monitor on input bit N2326 (bit will change to ‘0’).
SCREEN 13-4 Secondary limit in input monitor
6. Re-tighten the screws of the secondary limit dog.

Use the same procedure from Steps 4 to 6, for the other secondary limit.
After the adjustment is complete, move the head assembly by hand to within the
allowable movement range.

Robots X-Y
13.3.2 Y Axis Secondary Limits

The Y-axis secondary limits are set to approximately 1.00 mm inside the mechanical
stopper (hard limit). Since this adjustment procedure is exactly the same as for the
X-axis, refer to the previous section. The locations of the Y-axis secondary limit
dogs are shown in picture 13-3 (secondary limit dogs item 20 and the secondary
sensor is item 30).
NOTE: To make settings for the Y-axis secondary limits, use the same procedure
as for the X-axis
13.4 Software Limits

When an axis moves to a target position, the software limit is used to restrict
movement to avoid interfering with the mechanical stoppers located at the both
ends of the axis. If the target position exceeds the software limit, the error message
“... AXIS SOFT LIMIT OVER” appears and axis movement is prohibited. You can use
the joystick on the MSP within the software limit range.
13.4.1 X Axis Software Limits

The X-axis software limit should be set to 1.00 mm inside the secondary limit (or
2.00 mm inside the mechanical limit), for both the “ plus” side (right direction) and
the “ minus” side (left direction).
A Mechanical stopper
$: Structural movable range
1 1 B 1 1
%: Allowable movement range
&: Software limit
': Secondary limit
(: Origin position
): Mechanical limit
F D C C D F
E
FIGURE 13-4 X-axis movement range

Robots X-Y
NOTE: To set the X-axis software limit, use the X-axis secondary limit values you
have made a note when adjusting the secondary limits.
1. Open the software limit screen
parameter and select the X-axis. Check in the Current Pos field the actual
position of the X-axis.
SCREEN 13-5
2. Enter the software limit.

Move the head manual (when the emergency is active) against the mechanical
stoppers and determine the position in the Current Pos field.
On the “ plus” side you enter a value in the ” + limit” field which is 2.00 mm
subtracted from the mechanical. On the “ minus” side you insert a value in the ‘-
limit’ field which is 2.00 mm added to the mechanical limit.
Save the changes by pressing the Save Data button.

Robots X-Y
13.4.2 Y Axis Software Limits

As with the X-axis, the Y-axis software limit should be set to 1.00 mm inside the
secondary limit (or 2.00 mm inside the mechanical limit), for both the “ plus” side
(right direction) and the “ minus” side (left direction).
< Rear >

D 1 mm
C 1 mm
B A
Return-to-origin
direction
E
C
D 1 mm
1 mm
< Front >
FIGURE 13-5 Y-axis movement range
NOTE: To set the Y-axis software limit, use the Y-axis secondary limit values you
have made a note when adjusting the secondary limits.
1. Open the software limit screen.
parameter and select the Y-axis. Check in the Current Pos field the actual
position of the X-axis.
2. Enter the software limit.
Move the head manual (when the emergency is active) against the mechanical
stoppers and determine the position in the Current Pos field.
On the “ plus” side you enter a value in the ‘+ limit’ field which is 2.00 mm
subtracted from the mechanical. On the “ minus” side you insert a value in the ‘-
limit’ field which is 2.00 mm added to the mechanical limit.
Save the changes by pressing the Save Data button.

Robots X-Y
13.5 Dual Drive Y-axis Offset Adjustment

To check if both Y motors are in line check the Y axis offset parameter. To check if
the offset is within specification follow the next procedure.
2. Select the sub menu Axis.
The following window pops up after selecting the Dual Drive offset parameter.
SCREEN 13-6
3. Make sure there are no obstacles present on the conveyor rails and linear guides,
because the machine starts to origin after the next step.
Release the emergency.
4. Press the Execute button. The machine will origin after confirmation.
SCREEN 13-7
5. After the origin, Y2 value is displayed in the window. The values should be between
15000 and 17000 pulses.
SCREEN 13-8
6. Save the data when there are changes which have to be kept.
7. Adjust the tension (see section 13.6.2) if these criteria are not reached

Robots X-Y
13.6 Adjusting the X and Y Axis Tension

The let the machine run smoothly it is possible to adjust the tension on the X and Y
axis ball screw. The following paragraphs describe the procedure for it.
13.6.1 Adjusting the X Axis Tension

■ On the X-axis it is possible to adjust the tension
35 67
32
47 30
19 7 67
65 57 35
34 52 31
9 59
33 8 20
6 5 24
46 13
9
21
59 50
15 3
4 53 59
16 24
44
25
45
66 10 17
58
64 18 43
49 1
27
60 29
51 23 5
54 22
56
28 48
56 23
40 49
38 51
40 56 5
41 41 66
12 2
14 37 36 39 44
42 48
26 62 45 43 50
63 11
55
28 61 66 29
FIGURE 13-6 X-axis exploded view

Robots X-Y
When it is needed to adjust the X-axis tension follow the next steps.
!
WARNING: WHEN IT IS NEEDED TO ADJUST THE X AXIS TENSION PLEASE CALL YOUR
LOCAL SERVICE ORGANISATION BECAUSE IT IS A VERY PRECISE AND
IMPORTANT ADJUSTMENT
The X-axis ball screw has six coil springs (39) which control the tension of the X-
axis movement. Refer to see FIGURE 13-7.
1 2
3
6
4
5
FIGURE 13-7 Sequence of tightening
1. Tighten all six hexagon bolts (62) so the coils (39) are completely compressed.
First 1-4, then 2-5 and at the end 3-6
2. Loosen all six bolts one full turn (-360 degrees). First 1-4, then 2-5 and at the
end 3-6.
13.6.2 Adjusting the Y Axis Tension

■ To increase the speed and accuracy of the Topaz-XII Series machines, the
machines are equipped with two Y-axis ball screws. It is important to have the
same tension on both sides of the machine. When the tension between the two
sides are different the machine comes into emergency stop and comes up with an
error message.)

Robots X-Y
52
23
57
21 6 10 52
4 40
55 7
119 11
14 12 22
12
8
61 47
19
59
56 44 41
37 15 33 53
46 13 43 36 31
3 2 49
47 57 10 24
53 6 40
40 49 4 51
35 7
5 31 119
55 11
61 60 32 12
28 14 12
41 8
38 42 36 47
34 39 43 1
45 56 20 58
48 50
15 25
29 46 13 16
3 59 50
30 17
47
18
35 40 38
5 26
39 27
61 54
FIGURE 13-8 Adjusting the Y-axis machine reference
When it is needed to adjust the Y-axis tension please proceed as follow.
!
WARNING: WHEN IT IS NEEDED TO ADJUST THE Y AXIS TENSION PLEASE CALL YOUR
LOCAL SERVICE ORGANISATION BECAUSE IT IS A VERY PRECISE AND
IMPORTANT ADJUSTMENT

Robots X-Y
Both Y-axis ball screws have six coil springs (10) which control the tension of the Y-
axis movement. Refer to see FIGURE 13-9.
1 2
3
6
4
5
FIGURE 13-9 Sequence of tightening
1. Tighten all twelve hexagon bolts finger tight only (both Y-axis ballscrews). First
1-4, then 2-5 and at the end 3-6
2. Make two full turns extra for all twelve bolts. First 1-4, then 2-5 and at the
end 3-6.
3. When the Y-axis ball screws (still) emit noise because of oscillation, make max.
2.5 extra turns for the six bolts of the left Y axis ball screw (Y2) only.
NOTE: Front view of the machine: Right axis ballscrew is Y1, left ballscrew is Y2.
The actual adjustment is in the back of the machine. The coupling of the
left Y-axis (Y2) is black in the middle part and has 2 x 5 plates. The
coupling of the right Y-axis (Y2) is green and has 2 x 4 plates in the
middle part.

Vision
CHAPTER 14 Vision
14.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the vision systems that are used in the Topaz-XII Series.
14.2 Vision Systems

The Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII uses an analog moving camera to recognize PCB
fiducial marks and perform teaching. The camera is attached to the head. To
recognize a component there are two different types of cameras in the Topaz-XII
Series; a digital line array camera (1) and an analog single vision camera (2, see
figure 14-1).
The cameras use the side illumination unit to illuminate the component. With this
unit it is possible to recognize BGA, µBGA and CSP.
FIGURE 14-1 Line array and single vision camera Topaz-XII Series layout.

Vision
14.3 Moving Camera

Press the ‘Moving Camera’ button from the Main Menu of the Utilities (MchSetup)
utility
SCREEN 14-1
This utility is used to calibrate the moving camera which is located on the head
assembly and used to recognize PCB fiducial marks and perform teaching. The rotation,
the focus/FOV, the lighting level and the scale of the moving camera can be adjusted.
14.3.1 Adjusting the Rotation

To check if the rotation of the moving camera is minimal, go with the moving
camera to the fixed conveyor. Check on the vision display if the cross is parallel to
the fixed conveyor. The cross on the vision display can be seen when you use the
Adjust utility in the Mark main menu.
SCREEN 14-2
Turn on the light of the light unit on the moving camera, to get a better view.
Rotate the moving camera if it is not aligned.

Vision
14.3.2 Focus (and Field of View)

First the focus for the moving camera has to be set. When the fiducial is in focus,
automatically the Field of View is set correctly. For this adjustment you need the
glass plate PCB. You have to use the PCB fiducial. When the fiducial is in focus,
automatically the Field of View has been set correctly.
1. Prepare a glass PCB
Bring the glass PCB into the machine and secure it well using the push-up plate
and push up pins. Do this with the utilities in the Units menu.
SCREEN 14-3
2. Move the moving camera above the PCB fiducial or above the letters on the PCB.
Check if they are displayed sharply. If not, move the camera up or down. Secure
the camera well, after the focus is correct.
14.3.3 Black Level and Brightness

Before the brightness level of the light unit is calibrated, the black level of the
camera has to be calibrated (VGOS V1.04 onwards):

Vision
Black Level
1. Turn off all light sources of the moving camera light unit in [Unit]-[Conveyor]-
[Axis]-[Light].
SCREEN 14-4
2. Start the Moving Camera adjustment utility. (Utilities/Moving Camera)
SCREEN 14-5
3. Select “ Brightness” and select “ KM1-M8806-0XX”

Vision
4. Press the Emergency Button.

5. Take a piece of black paper and hold it under the light unit of the moving
camera.
6. Select the “ Black Level Measurement” button to start the adjustment of the
black level of the moving camera.
SCREEN 14-6
7. Select the OK button when the black level value is 8 ± 5. The black level has
been calibrated now.
Brightness
8. Take the light adjuster tool 1 (5322 395 10274) and clamp the tool under the
fixed locate pin with the dark/light gray side upwards. To activate the locate
pins, press the “ unknown” button in the “ Moving Camera” menu (Screen 14-5).
FIGURE 14-2
9. Move the moving camera above the light gray side of he light adjuster tool. This
can be checked by using the “Adjust” utility in the “ Mark” menu. Make sure that
only the light gray side is displayed.
10.Open the “ Moving Camera” menu (Utilities/Moving Camera)
11.Select “ Brightness” and select “ KM1-M8806-0XX”

Vision
12.Select one of the light sources.
SCREEN 14-7
13.Press the Execute button to start the measurement.
SCREEN 14-8
14.Check if the result is according to table 14-1.

3RWHQWLRPHWHU /('W\SH 9DOXH
VR1 White Outer (Black level + 35) ± 1
VR2 White Inner (Black level + 40) ± 1
VR3 White Coaxial (Black level + 7)
VR4 IR outer (Black level + 35) ± 1
VR5 IR inner (Black level + 35) ± 1
TABLE 14-1

Vision
15.If necessary, adjust the potentiometer on the head assy to get the correct value
for the selected light source. To reach the potentiometer, the head I/O Board
cover has to be removed first (Figure 14-3). The red bar of screen 14-8 disappears
when the current value is within the specified interval.
II LED trimmer
Topaz-X YV
VR1
VR2
VR3
VR4
VR5
I O board cover
FIGURE 14-3
16.Perform the same measurement and adjustment for the other light sources.
17.Remove the light adjuster tool, put back the head cover and continue with the
moving camera scale procedure (14.3.4)
General information:
Below are some basic settings to start with for recognizing different types of marks:
■ Unknown mark………………………………………… Lights on all rings
■ Copper mark…………………………………………… IR light on
■ Mark under coating…………………………………… IR light on
■ Mark plated by solder………………………………… . White light on
■ Highly reflective mark………………………………… Coaxial light on
■ Dark colored mark on white ceramic PCB………… ..... Only white outer light

Vision
14.3.4 Moving Camera Scale

The adjustment procedure for the moving camera scale is as follows:
■ Load in VGOS the program “ MCH_SETUP” which is located in the directory D:/
Machine/No1/. The file will be displayed in the status area of VGOS.
■ Activate the Scale parameter and select Mark No 1 when the PCB fiducial on the
glass plate is used (PA1912/00). This mark number is the mark which is
registered in the Mark database of the program “ MCH_SETUP” on position 1.
■ The distance parameter is set to 1.50 and should not be changed. This is the
stroke from the center to the corner of the four recognition points.
SCREEN 14-9
■ Clamp the glass plate securely with the utilities in the Units menu.
SCREEN 14-10

Vision
■ Position the moving camera so that the PCB fiducial of the glass plate is in the
center of the vision display. You can do this in the Adjust utility in the Mark
menu.
■ Open the “ Mark/Adjust” menu and perform a vision test to check if the mark is
recognized correctly.
■ Return to “ Utilities” and press Execute and the measurement will start. The
moving camera moves in both X and y directions. The amount of movements on
the vision display is calibrated and the results are displayed on the screen.
SCREEN 14-11
■ The correct values for the moving camera are:

0RYLQJFDPHUD ;<VFDOHYDOXH 5RWDWLRQ
10.5 ± 0.2 µm/pixel 0 °± 0.5°
TABLE 14-2
If the scale is not within the limits move the camera up or down and do the scale
again.
If the rotation is off, rotate the camera and do the scale again.
■ Save the data when they are ok.
■ Press Close after the measurement

Vision
14.4 Single Vision Camera Adjustment

Press the ‘Single Camera’ button from the Main Menu of the Utilities (MchSetup)
utility.
SCREEN 14-12
This section describes the complete calibration and adjustments of the single vision
camera and illumination unit.
The camera structure in the machine regarding the several cameras is as follows:
&DPHUD1XPEHU 'HVFULSWLRQ
Analog camera 1 Moving camera
Analog camera 2 Analog Single vision camera 1
Digital camera 1 Digital line array camera 1 (front)
Digital camera 2 Digital Line array camera 2 (rear)
TABLE 14-3
For the calibration of the single vision camera and light unit the following
adjustments have to be performed:
■ Focus adjustment (and Field of View)
■ Lighting Level adjustment
■ Scale adjustment
The procedure below describes the calibration of one single vision camera (camera 2).
NOTE: After adjusting the single vision camera scale and position, perform the R-
axis accuracy and FAMF procedure too (see section 4.9.20 and 4.9.21).

Vision
14.4.1 Software Settings

The coordinates and settings of the camera are displayed in the VmSpec (Machine
button main area). Make sure that the lighting type of the single vision camera
light unit is set to ‘Type I’. In the Max XY the maximum component size is displayed.
In the max Z, the maximum Z (maximum height) has to be set (see table below).
SCREEN 14-13
0DFKLQH =UHFRJQLWLRQKHLJKW 6L]H0D[FRPS6L]H 0D[=PD[KHLJKW

Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII PCB height 32 mm 7 mm
Topaz-XII Series PCB height 45 mm 7 mm
TABLE 14-4
NOTE: With a 45mm camera in a Topaz-XII it is not possible to recognize large

components with head 7 & 8 (distance to fiducial camera restriction).

Vision
14.4.2 Focus (and Field of View)
NOTE: Never adjust the focus ring on the camera. The camera and lens are already
prepared at the factory.
This procedure describes how to adjust the focus (and Field Of View (FOV)).
When the focus is set, also the FOV is set (because of a fixed lens).
To adjust the focus of the single vision camera the existing focus adjuster tool
(5322 395 10275) has to be used and follow the next steps:
■ Press the EMG button.
■ Set the several settings:
• Set Adjust item parameter to ‘Focus’
• Set the Camera parameter to “Analog Single 1”
• Set the thickness to “ 0”
SCREEN 14-14
■ Make sure a big nozzle like 74 (Topaz-XII Series) or 77/75 (Opal-XII) is attached
to head 1.
■ Release the EMG in case it is not yet done during nozzle change.

Vision
■ Press the Pickup button and set the feeder position to attach the special cali-
bration tool onto the head. Chose an empty feeder position. Make sure there is
a safe situation, because the head starts to move after pressing OK.
SCREEN 14-15
■ Confirm when the head arrived at the pickup position.

■ Press the EMG button and attach the focus adjuster tool to the head on the
position as marked on the picture below. Release EMG again.
FIGURE 14-4
■ Press Execute to start the focus measurement. The head will go to the camera
and start scanning.
SCREEN 14-16
■ After the measurement check if the middle of the focus adjuster tool is sharp.
This can be done in the Vision sub window of the Monitor menu.

Vision
Do not look at the focus results (like focus index, max. index, etc.).
SCREEN 14-17
■ Move the camera physically up or down when the middle (0 of the focus tool) is
not in focus. After moving, perform the measurement again. Make sure that the
EMG circuit is active during this adjustment.
FIGURE 14-5
■ When the calibration is correct, press the EMG button and remove the calibration
tool from the head.
NOTE: It is also possible to perform a vision test (“Adjust”) for a component

(mount mode is FINE, component thickness is 0.00) and then attach the
focus tool to the head. Check if the tool is in focus at 0.
When the focus has been set it is wise to check the field of view.
This can be done by performing the adjust assistant utility, pick up the ruler and
bring it above the single vision camera.

Vision
To move the ruler over the single vision camera, the following settings have to be
made:
■ The thickness of the component which you are using is set to 0
■ The mount action of the component which you are using is set to “ Fine”
■ The other single camera (if applicable) has to be disabled, by changing the Type
parameter form ‘Single’ to ‘------------’ in the VmSpec program (see picture above).
NOTE: Do not forget to set these parameters to its original setting after the cali-
bration!!!
SCREEN 14-18
The ruler is displayed in the vision display. Adjust the maximum component size by
shifting the camera up or down (tape feeder cover has to be removed for this) till
the size on the vision screen is according to the table below. The aperture is already
OK because the lens has a fixed diaphragm.
&DPHUD 6L]HRQWKHYLVLRQVFUHHQ
32 mm 37 mm ± 1 mm
45 mm 50 mm ± 1 mm
TABLE 14-5
If something has been changed, check the focus again.

Vision
14.4.3 Lighting Level Adjustment

The light unit used with the single vision camera is the side illumination unit and
has three light sources:
■ Main light
■ Coaxial light
■ Side light: Sidelight is developed to recognize CSP components. During scanning
the part with the sidelight comes up and illuminates the component from the side.
To adjust the lightning level, two tools are needed:
■ Light adjuster tool 1 (5322 395 10274) (white side and dark /light gray side)
■ Light adjuster tool 2 (5322 395 10876) (translucent glass)
FIGURE 14-6

a) Set Adjust item parameter to ‘Brightness’
b) Set the Camera parameter to “Analog Single 1”
c) Set the Light parameter to ‘Main’
d) Set the thickness parameter to ‘4.0’
SCREEN 14-19
■ Make sure a big nozzle like 74 is attached to head 1 (77/75 for Opal-XII).

Vision
bration tool onto the head. Chose an empty feeder position. Press OK when the
feeder position is set.
Make sure there is a safe situation, because the head starts to move after
pressing OK.
■ Confirm when the head has arrived at the pre dump position.
■ Press the EMG button and attach the light adjuster tool 1, with the dark/light
gray side downwards, to head 1. The light adjustment is based on the light gray
part of the tool, so make sure that the complete light gray part of the tool is
located straight under the nozzle. Confirm when done.
FIGURE 14-7
■ Release the EMG button and press Execute to start the measurement after confir-
mation that the right tool is under the head. The head waits about 5 seconds,
after that the head starts to move.
SCREEN 14-20
■ The results are shown in the table. For the main light the value should be 128±2.
■ Press the EMG button and remove the calibration tool from the head. Also turn
off the vacuum.
■ Save the measured data.

Vision
■ Perform the same steps for the Coax and Side light sources.
Only change the light parameter and use and other adjustment tool;
• Coaxial light: Use light adjuster tool 1 with the white side facing down. Make
sure the thickness parameter is set to 4.0. The lighting level should reach 40±2.
• Side light; Use light adjuster tool 2 with the translucent side facing down.
Make sure that the thickness parameter is set to “ 0”. The lighting level should
reach 120±2.
14.4.4 Scale Adjustment

The single vision camera scale represents an actual measurement (in microns)
equivalent to one pixel. The scale must be calibrated correctly for accurate recog-
nition of components.
For this scale adjustment the best is to use the glass component with sticker. For
the recognition of the glass component the Adjust Mode parameter has to be set to
‘Adjust mode 2’.
NOTE: Do not forget to set it to its original setting after the scale adjustment!!!
This setting can be made in the VmSpec program after selecting the Machine button
in the VGOS main area. After changing these settings, you have to save the data
and leave the program. Reload the selected mount program again, to be sure
changed settings are activated.
SCREEN 14-21
Perform a vision check, to be sure that the component is recognized. Perform also
“ Find Best” to get the optimal component data.
If the glass component is not available, use a good QFP100 and enter the correct
values in the database of this component. For this component you do not have to
change the Adjust Mode parameter.
The Scale adjustment procedure is as follows:
■ (Re)Load in VGOS the program “ MCH_SETUP” which is located in the directory
D:/Machine/No1/. The file will be displayed in the status area of VGOS.

Vision

a) Set Adjust item parameter to ‘Scale’
b) Set the Camera parameter to ‘Analog Single 1’ (first single vision camera)
c) Enter the Comp No. parameter to ‘12’ (=glass QFP, component 12 in program
‘MCH_SETUP’)
d) Set the Distance parameter to ‘3.00’
SCREEN 14-22
to head 1.
■ Press Pickup and the head starts to move to the pickup position which has been
set in the Parts information of the component. Confirm when the component has
been attached to the head
■ Press the EMG button and attach the glass QFP to the head.
■ Release the EMG button, press Execute and the head moves with the component to
the camera and rotates so that the camera scale, position and angle are calibrated.
SCREEN 14-23

Vision
■ The results of the test are displayed in the table in the Result column.
SCREEN 14-24
■ The correct scale values are as shown in table 14-6:

0D[&RPS6L]H ;<VFDOH &DPHUDDQJOH
32 mm 77.15 - 8 0.35 µ m/pixel 18 0 ±1.0
°
45 mm 103.2 - 107.2 µ m/pixel* 18 0 ±1.0°
*. Other parameters are no criteria for the camera calibration.

TABLE 14-6
■ When the calibration is correct, press the EMG button and remove the glass
component from the head. Also turn off the vacuum.
14.5 Line Array Camera Adjustment

Press the ‘Multi Camera’ button from the Main Menu of the Utilities (MchSetup)
utility.
SCREEN 14-25

Vision
The line array camera is a camera with one line of pixels. During transport of
components from the pick up positions the components are scanned on the flight.
The camera structure in the machine regarding the several camera’s is as follows:
&DPHUD1XPEHU 'HVFULSWLRQ
Analog camera 1 Moving camera
Digital camera 1 Digital line array camera 1 (front)
Digital camera 2 Digital Line array camera 2 (rear)
TABLE 14-7
For the calibration of the line array camera and lighting unit the following
adjustments have to be performed:
■ Focus adjustment
■ Brightness adjustment
■ Scale adjustment (including dual recognition offset!)
■ Camera Position adjustment
The procedure below describes the calibration of the front line array camera (Digital
camera 1). The same procedure has to be done when the rear line array camera
(Digital camera 2) also has been installed.
NOTE: After adjusting the line array camera scale and position, perform the Head
Offset and R-axis accuracy procedure and FAMF too (see section 4.9.20
and 4.9.21).
14.5.1 Software Settings

The coordinates and settings of the camera are displayed in the VmSpec program.
Make sure that the lighting type of the line array camera light unit is set to ‘Type

Vision
H’. In the Max XY field the maximum component size is displayed. In the Max Z, the
maximum Z height has to be set (see table below).
SCREEN 14-26
0DFKLQH 0D[FRPSVL]H;< 0D[= )29

Topaz-XII Series 31 mm 7 mm 35 ± 1 mm
Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII 45 mm 7 mm 50 ± 1 mm
TABLE 14-8
NOTE: With a 45 mm component camera on a Topaz-XII it is not possible to recognize

large component with lead 7 and 8 (distance to fiducial camera restriction).
Check also the following parameters:
■ Speed has to be “ 1100”.
■ Division has to be “ 7Pulse” (for 31 mm camera) and “ 10Pulse” (for 45 mm camera).

Vision
14.5.2 Recognition Height

In case the light unit has been replaced/installed, first the recognition height has
to be set. Do this as follows:
■ Bring the side light in upper position in the I/O monitor
■ Move the head above the camera
■ Move head1 (with nozzle 71 servo controlled) down, and carefully touch the
light unit
■ Determine the Z values when the head just touches the light unit.
■ Determine the recognition height according to the table below (subtract the Z
coordinate - 5.3).
0DFKLQH =UHFRJQLWLRQKHLJKW +HLJKWRIVLGHXQLWZKHQUDLVHG
Topaz-XII series/Opal-XII 5.3 mm above the side unit in upper 260.5 mm
position
TABLE 14-9
■ Fill in the correct recognition height in the Machine (VmSpec) utility
SCREEN 14-27
14.5.3 Focus Adjustment (and FOV (Field Of View))

To adjust the focus at the line array camera a special focus adjuster tool (under
development) must be used. Temporarily use the existing focus adjuster tool (5322
395 10275).
• Set Adjust item parameter to ‘Focus’
• Set the Camera parameter to “ Digital Multi 1” (for the front line array camera)

Vision
• Set the Thickness to 2.
SCREEN 14-28
■ Make sure nozzle 74 (Topaz-XII Series) or 77/75 (Opal-XII) is attached to head 1.

■ Activate the servo system if not yet done during nozzle change.
bration tool onto the head. Chose an empty feeder position. Make sure there is a
safe situation, because the head starts to move after pressing OK.
SCREEN 14-29
■ Confirm that the head arrived at the pick position.


Vision
■ Attach the focus adjuster tool to the head on the position as marked on the
picture below.
FIGURE 14-8
■ Activate the servo system again.

■ Press Execute to start the focus measurement. The head will go to the camera
and start scanning.
SCREEN 14-30
■ During the measurement check if the middle of the focus adjuster tool is sharp.
This can be done in the Vision sub window of the Monitor menu.

Vision
Do not look at the focus results (like Focus index, Max. index, etc.). Stop the
measurement by pressing the CANCEL button.
SCREEN 14-31
■ Move the camera physically up or down (while EMG is active) when the middle (2
of the focus tool) is not in focus.
FIGURE 14-9
■ When the calibration is correct, press the EMG button and remove the calibration
tool from the head
■ Check if FOV (Field OF View) is according to the table above. (Use a ruler in Y-
direction.)
14.5.4 Brightness Adjustment

The light unit used with the line array camera is the side illumination unit and has
three light sources:
■ Main light
■ Coaxial light
■ Side light: Sidelight is developed to recognize CSP components. During scanning
the part with the sidelight comes up and illuminates the component from the side.

Vision
To adjust the brightness level, two tools are needed:

■ Light adjuster tool 1 (5322 395 10274) (white side and dark /light gray side)
■ Light adjuster tool 2 (5322 395 10876) (translucent glass)
FIGURE 14-10
The lighting level is adjusted automatically by the adjustment program. There is no

need to adjust pot meters.
• Set Adjust item parameter to ‘Brightness’
• Set the Camera parameter to “ Digital Multi 1” (for the front line array camera)
• Set the Light parameter to ‘Main’
• Set the thickness to “ 4.0“.
SCREEN 14-32

Vision
■ Make sure a big nozzle like type 74 (Topaz-XII Series) or 77/75 (Opal-XII) is
attached to head 1.
■ Activate the servo system if not yet done during nozzle change.
bration tool onto the head. Choose an empty feeder position. Press OK when the
feeder position is set.
NOTE: Make sure there is a safe situation, because the head starts to move after
pressing OK.
SCREEN 14-33
■ Confirm when the head has arrived at the pickup position.

■ Press the EMG button and attach the light adjuster tool 1, with the dark/light
gray side downwards, to head 1. The dark gray side has to face to the right!
FIGURE 14-11

Vision
■ Press Execute to start the measurement after confirmation that the right tool is
under the head. The head waits about 5 seconds, after that the head starts to
move.
SCREEN 14-34
■ The results are shown in the table. For the main light the lighting level should
reach the value 128±2.
■ Press the EMG button and remove the calibration tool from the head.
■ Save the measured data.
■ Perform the same steps for the Coax and Side light sources. Only change the
light parameter and use an other adjustment tool;
• Coaxial light: Use light adjuster tool 1 with the white side facing down. Make
sure that the thickness parameter is set to “ 4.0“. The lighting level should
reach the value 40±2.
• Side light; Use light adjuster tool 2 with the translucent side facing down.
Make sure that the thickness parameter is set to “ 0.0“. The lighting level
should reach the value 120±2.
14.5.5 Scale Adjustment (Including Dual Recognition Offset)

The line array vision scale represents an actual measurement equivalent to one
pixel. The scale parameter must be calibrated correctly for accurate recognition of
components.
For this scale adjustment the best is to use the glass component with sticker. For
the recognition of the glass component the Adjust Mode parameter has to be set to
‘Adjust mode 2’.
NOTE: Do not forget to set it to its original setting after the scale adjustment!
This setting can be made in the VmSpec program after selecting the Machine button
in the VGOS main area. After changing these settings, you have to save the data

Vision
and leave the program. Best is to reload your selected mount program again, to be
sure changed settings are active.
SCREEN 14-35
Perform a vision check, to be sure that the component is recognized. Optimize the
data with the “ Find Best” utility.
If the glass component is not available, use a good QFP100 and enter the correct
values in the database of this component. For this component you do not have to
change the Adjust Mode parameter.
The Scale adjustment procedure is as follows:
• Set Adjust item parameter to ‘Scale’
• Set the Camera parameter to “ Digital Multi 1” (for front line array camera)
• Set the Comp No. parameter to ‘11’ (when the glass QFP is used for the front
camera)
• Set the Distance parameter to ‘3.00’ (It can happen that 3.00 is too big. Start
with 1.00 and increase this value after some measurements.)
SCREEN 14-36

Vision
to head 1.
■ Press Pickup and the head moves to the pickup position which has been set in
the Parts information of the component. Confirm when the component has been
attached to the head.
■ Press execute.
■ The head moves with the component to the camera and rotates so that the
camera scale, position and angle are determined.
SCREEN 14-37
■ The results of the test are displayed in the table.
SCREEN 14-38
The results should be approximately:

00&$0(5$ 00&$0(5$
Camera angle 0 ± 1.0° 0 ± 1.0°
Scale X 34.18 µ m/pixel (fixed) 47.78 µ m/pixel (fixed)
Scale Y 34.18 ± 0.68 µ m/pixel 47.78 ± 0.9 8 µ m/pixel
Dual rec offset * *
Delta scale X 0 ± 15 µ m 0 ± 15 µ m
Delta scale Y 0 ± 15 µ m 0 ± 15 µ m
Delta pos X * *
Delta pos Y * *
*. These parameters are no criteria for the camera calibration.

TABLE 14-10

Vision
■ When the calibration is correct, press the EMG button and remove the glass
component from the head.
14.5.6 Camera Position Adjustment

This utility is to determine:
■ The position of the markers on the head. So make sure that the Multi Macs
parameter is set to “ MultiMacs 1&2”
■ The XY camera position.
Follow the next procedure flow:
■ Warm up the machine for at least 10 minutes.
■ Go to the menu “ Utilities” - ” Multi Camera”.
• Set Adjust item parameter to ‘Camera Pos.’
• Set the Camera parameter to “ Digital Multi 1” (in case of the front line array
camera).
• Set the Comp No. parameter to ‘11’ (in case of the front line array camera)
and ‘14’ (in case of the rear camera).
SCREEN 14-39
to head 1.

Vision
■ Activate the servo system.

■ Make sure that the Adjust mode parameter is set to ‘AdjustMode2’
■ Press the Pickup button. The head moves to the pickup positions of the
component which has been defined in “ Parts”. Confirm when the head arrived.
■ Attach the QFP glass component to head 1.
Head 1 QFP
FIGURE 14-12

■ Press the Execute button. The head starts to move over the camera after a few
seconds!
SCREEN 14-40

Vision
■ Check the results in the table.

The measurements should be approximately:
Camera pos X Depends on configuration
Camera pos Y Depends on configuration
MACS 1 + X *
MACS 1 + Y *
MACS 1 - X *
MACS 1 - Y *
MACS 2 + X *
MACS 2 + Y *
MACS 2 - X *
MACS 2 - Y *
*. These parameters are no criteria for the camera calibration.
TABLE 14-11
■ Press the EMG button, remove the glass QFP from the head and turn off the
vacuum.

Placement Head
CHAPTER 15 Placement Head

15.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the head assy system and all related machine parts that are
responsible for transporting components.
FIGURE 15-1 Topaz-XII (FNC) head assembly
15.2 Head Assembly (FNC)

The head assembly (figure 15-1) of the Topaz-XII Series consists of eight in line
heads. The Opal-XII has four in line heads. This chapter describes how to check,
adjust and optimize air-driven mechanical movements, vacuum generation, machine
data related to the head assembly and adjustment of the FNC heads, see the table
below.

Placement Head
$VVHPEOLQJDQGGLVDVVHPEOLQJRIWKHKHDGDVV\
FNC head adjustment Alignment of the FNC head after replacement
Head descent movement Check that each head descends smoothly
Head lower end detection Check that the lower end is correctly detected when each head descends.
Vacuum generation Check that the vacuum ejector provides adequate vacuum levels.
Vacuum sensor function Check that the vacuum sensor display levels are correct.
Machine coordinates These coordinates include the stand-by point for the head and discard
(position) point for components
Pick and mount vacuum The reference vacuum pressure is used to determine whether each head
levels has picked up or mounted a component.
R-axis accuracy (rotation)* Angular offset for the R-axis that rotates each nozzle shaft.
Head offset* The position of the heads related to fiducial camera
*. These parameters are automatically corrected when you perform

mount feedback described later in chapter 4.9 “Calibration”.
TABLE 15-1
FIGURE 15-2 Topaz-XII series head assembly

Placement Head
15.3 Pickup/Mount Vacuum Levels

Vacuum pressure used to pick up a component is digitally detected by vacuum
sensors on a scale of 0 to 255 levels (the larger the value, the higher the vacuum
intensity).
FIGURE 15-3
The pickup/mount vacuum levels are the reference vacuum pressures that
determine whether or not a component is being picked up by a nozzle. The pickup
vacuum level determines whether a nozzle has picked up a component, while the
mount vacuum level determines whether a nozzle has mounted a component
(whether the component has separated from the nozzle).
When opening the VmSpec (Machine data) program and selecting in the system tree
the window “ Vacuum Level” , the current settings for the pick and mount vacuum
level are displayed.
SCREEN 15-1

Placement Head
In the left window the pick and mount level per head is displayed. But when
marking the “ Level by Nozzle” parameter in the window, in the right window the
level per nozzle can be displayed.
NOTE: It is advised to determine the vacuum level per nozzle.
SCREEN 15-2 Vacuum Level screen
The pickup/mount vacuum levels can be optimized by using the Vacuum Level
adjustment utility explained in the following paragraphs.
Components have their own pickup/mount vacuum levels that are registered in the
database or component information. These pickup/mount vacuum levels are added
to those of the head (explained in this section) in order to determine whether a
component is being picked up by a nozzle or mounted on the PCB during automatic
operation.
NOTE: If only a certain nozzle tends to dump components, then the pickup/mount
pressure levels for that nozzle need to be corrected. In contrast, if only a
certain type of component tends to be dumped, then the pickup/mount
vacuum levels for that component need to be corrected.

Placement Head
15.3.1 Pick Up Vacuum Level

When a nozzle descends and picks up a component, no air is allowed to enter the
nozzle so the detected value of the vacuum sensor increases. When this detected
level becomes higher than the preset pickup vacuum level, the machine determines
that the nozzle has picked up a component. The pickup vacuum level should be
preset for each head, at a level slightly higher (offset value: 5) than the minimum
vacuum level maintained when the nozzle is open (no component at the nozzle).
With the following utility the pickup vacuum level per head per nozzle can be
determined. For only one head and one nozzle the procedure is explained:
1. Open the ‘MchSetup’ (Utilities) program and login as service engineer.
2. Select the “ Vacuum Level” button
SCREEN 15-3
3. Set the several parameters

• Set the specific head (or all heads)
• Set the Table parameter to 'Table A'
• Set the Measuring parameter to 'Each nozzle'
• Set the Adjust Item parameter to 'Picking level'

Placement Head
• Set the nozzle type to nozzle 71
SCREEN 15-4
• Make sure the selected nozzle is attached to the head. This can be done by
selecting the Nozzle Change button (only when FNC and/or nozzle station is
available). If needed, the nozzles will be changed. Else it has to be done by hand.
• Make sure the nozzle tips holes are open. Press ok when this is done. The
measurement starts after pressing OK.
SCREEN 15-5
• Press the Execute button and the pick level measurement will start.
• The results of the test are shown in the table
SCREEN 15-6
• Save the data
SCREEN 15-7

Placement Head
• Confirm if you want to turn off the vacuum.
SCREEN 15-8
• Do the same steps for all nozzle types and all heads which are applicable for
the system.
• The pickup vacuum level should be approximately:
1R]]OH 9DFXXPORZOHYHO

71 <190
72 <125
73 <70
74 <70
76 <100
71F <185
72F <115
73F <95
75 <70
77 <70
TABLE 15-2
15.3.2 Mount Vacuum Level

When a nozzle descends to mount a component on the PCB, the vacuum pressure at
the nozzle is instantaneously inverted to a positive pressure, so the detected value
of the vacuum sensor decreases. When this detected level becomes lower than the
preset mount vacuum level, the machine determines that the component has been
separated from the nozzles and mounted on the PCB.
The mount vacuum level should be preset for each head and nozzle, at a level
slightly lower (offset value: 5) than the maximum vacuum level maintained when
the nozzle opening is closed.
With the following utility the mount vacuum level per head per nozzle can be
determined. For only one head and one nozzle the procedure is explained:
1. Open the MchSetup (Utilities) program and login as service engineer.

Placement Head
2. Select the “ Vacuum Level” button.
SCREEN 15-9
3. Set the several parameters

• Set the specific head (or all heads)
• Set the Table parameter to 'Table A'
• Set the Measuring parameter to 'Each nozzle'
• Set the Adjust Item parameter to 'Mounting level'
• Set the nozzle type to nozzle 71
SCREEN 15-10
• Make sure the selected nozzle is attached to the head. This can be done by
selecting the Nozzle Change button (only when FNC and/or nozzle station is
available). If needed, the nozzles will be changed. Else it has to be done by hand
• Press the Execute button and the mount level measurement will start.

Placement Head
• Close the nozzle tips with your finger tips (or some feeder topfoil) to make
sure no air can enter the nozzle. Press ok when this is done. The meas-
urement starts after pressing OK.
SCREEN 15-11
• The results of the test are shown in the table
SCREEN 15-12
• Save the data
SCREEN 15-13
• Confirm if you want to turn of the vacuum
SCREEN 15-14
• Do the same steps for all nozzle types and heads which are applicable for the
system.
• The mount level (high level) should be approximately:
Topaz- XII SF/Opal-XII >195
Topaz- XII FNC >185
TABLE 15-3

Placement Head
15.4 FNC Head Adjustment and Maintenance (Topaz-XII FNC Series)

This paragraph will explain the principal of the FNC head nozzle holder (head 2,4,6
and 8). The principle of the clutch up/down is explained in the next FIGURE 15-4
SD-9300115k
FIGURE 15-4 Clutch up/down
The spline shaft pulls up the complete FNC head. The cam lifts up the clutch, so the
nozzle holder can rotate and change a nozzle. The R motor forces the nozzle change.
FIGURE 15-5 FNC head

Placement Head
15.4.1 Nozzle Change Action (FNC Head)
L3UHVHQWQR]]OHFKHFN LL$VFHQW,QGH[
21
21
LLL1R]]OHFKDQJH LY'HVFHQW,QGH[
FIGURE 15-6 Nozzle change action
■ First the R-axis is set to Init. Position, the nozzle bevel gear is in front so all the
FNC cam gear notches are properly aligned with the fixed index pin on the head
housing.

Placement Head
■ Then the correct nozzle height (sensor N2324) and the present nozzle type
(N2340~2347) are checked.
■ After that the Flying Nozzle head clutch valve is de-activated, which lets out the
air in the upper chamber, see figure 15-7 below. During normal operations this
chamber is filled with air to keep the Upper piston plug in the lower position
hence to keep the Piston assy in its normal travel range (0-15.5mm). The Head
Up/Down valve is also activated in order to move both the piston assy and the
upper piston plug upwards. Consequently, with help of the return spring the
spline assy is moved another 2.5mm upwards to the clutch position (+/-18 mm)
so that its locate pin is freed from the nozzle block.
■ When the upper clutch position is confirmed by the F.N. Clutch sensor, the R-
motor will rotate the nozzle block for a fixed amount. This is the actual flying
nozzle change movement.
■ To de-activate the clutch action, the upper chamber is filled with air again and
the lower chamber is released.
■ By pushing the upper piston plug and piston assy down, the spline assy is also
pushed down to its upper limit resting position again (15.5mm).
833(5
3,67213/8*
3$&.,1*
833(5
&+$0%(5
3,6721$66<
/2:(5
&+$0%(5
5(7851
635,1*
FIGURE 15-7 Clutch action.

Placement Head
15.4.2 Clutch Detection (FNC Head)

If the clutch is in the upper or down position is detected by the clutch position
sensor (see also table below)
,2 &OXWFKLQXSSHUSRVLWLRQ &OXWFKGRZQ
Clutch position sensor N2350 (head 2) 1 (led ON) 0 (led OFF)
N2351 (head 4)
N2352 (head 6)
N2353 (head 8)
TABLE 15-4
Both nozzle sensors do not

)1&FOXWFKLVLQ
$ detect any metal (LED is ON)
which indicates that the FNC
clutch is correctly activated
If one or two nozzle sensors do

detect metal (LED is OFF), this
% indicates that the head is
returned to its normal position
)1&FOXWFKLVRXW
VHQVRUGRHVQRWGHWHFWPHWDOV
FIGURE 15-8 Clutch detection
15.4.3 Nozzle Position Sensor (FNC Head)

The nozzle position sensor is located at the position as shown in FIGURE 15-9. Each
FNC head has 2 nozzle detect sensors and depending on the R position the sensors

Placement Head
can detect which nozzle is underneath the head. While adjusting the nozzle
position it is very important to have the correct nozzle at the correct position see
also FIGURE 15-10.
FIGURE 15-9 Topaz-XII (FNC) head assembly
In the next paragraphs is explained how the correct nozzle position can be checked
and adjusted.
+HDGLVPRYLQJ
+($',6029,1*
25,1&/87&+326,7,21
) ) )
DGMXVWVHQVRUSRVLWLRQQRWWRGHWHFW
$'-8676(1625326,7,2112772'(7(&70(7$/6
PHWDOV
VHQVRUGRHVQRWGHWHFW
6(1625'2(6127'(7(&7
O
FIGURE 15-10 Nozzle sensor position
TABLE 15-5 shows which sensor must be active at which nozzle position.
If a metal is detected, the sensor LED is off.
+($'1R +($' +($' +($' +($'
front rear front rear front rear front rear
I/O No. N2340 N2344 N2341 N2345 N2342 N2346 N2343 N2347
TYPE 71 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
TYPE 72 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TYPE 73 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
TABLE 15-5 Nozzle sensor adjustment (Topaz-XII Series)

Placement Head
!
WARNING: IF THE NOZZLE SENSORS ARE NOT WELL ADJUSTED AND OR SHIFTED, IT CAN
HAPPEN THAT ONE OF THE FNC HEADS IS ROTATED COMPARED TO THE OTHER
FNC HEADS. FOLLOW THE STEPS IN 15.6.4.1 TO CORRECT THIS.
NOTE: The table above describes the situation for an XII-machine. For the Topaz-
XiII, the type 71 and 72 nozzles on the FNC head 2,4,6 and 8 are exchanged.
15.4.4 Head Sensors

For detecting the physical position of a spline assy in the head unit of the Topaz-XII
Series/Opal-XII machines we use two different types of sensors.
15.4.4.1 The Proximity Detection Sensor
This type of sensor can be used for detecting position of the spline, origin dog or
determine the type of selected FNC nozzle.
This device has a coil at the detecting zone. When it detects a metal surface the
sensor is electrically activated. A red light on the sensor will turn on or off,
depending on the sensor, when activated. Depending on the situation the VGOS
program will transform this into a logic value ‘1’ or ‘0’ and mark it “ detect” or “ not
detect” , see according objects in the Input/Output Monitor. Most of them are
configured as a type ‘normally closed’ (logic ‘1’) and are ‘0’ on detection for safety
reasons; in case a sensor wire breaks the machine will stop immediately.
However there are two proximity sensor types, which act reversely; the F.N. Clutch
sensor, see (1) in figure 15-11 and the R-axis origin dog sensor (not in drawing).
The red light on this sensor will light as soon as any metal surface is outside the
physical detection range. It will be at logical “ 1” as soon as any metal surface is not
detected anymore.
15.4.4.2 The Laser Beam Detection Sensor
This type of sensor is used to check if all splines are simultaneously at a certain
position during their vertical travel.
This consists of two separate part assemblies. The laser-transmitter transmits a
small laser beam and has a two-wire cable. The photo-receiver detects the laser
beam, it has a dual LED indicator and a separate 3-wire cable. There is also an
adjustable amplifier near the end of this cable. The detection range can be set with
the potmeter at this amplifier. The interpretation of the interrupted or non-inter-
rupted laser beam signal is similar to the proximity sensor mentioned above.

Placement Head
15.4.4.3 Positions of the Sensors

Figure 15-11 below shows the positions of the various sensors:
)1&OXWFKSUR[LPLW\
)1&OXWFKVHQVRU
DGMXVWPHQWXSSHUSODWH
1R]]OH'RZQ6DIHW\
ODVHU1

)O\LQJ1R]]OH
8S1
+HDG8S'RZQ
ODVHU SUR[LPLW\
1R]]OH'RZQ6DIHW\
ODVHU1
PP
)13RVLWLRQSUR[LPLW\
QGVHQVRUQRWVKRZQ
PP
3&%KHLJKW
FIGURE 15-11 Sensor positions.

Placement Head
15.4.4.4 Action Overview and Timing Diagram

The timing diagram of the sensors and actions during the vertical pneumatic
movement of the spline is as follows:
We assume the nozzle is descending to mount a component. Corresponding numbers
refer to figure 15-12 (below)
Pos. 5 At 1mm height above the PCB the Head Up/Down sensor (5.) is detected. The
vacuum switches to blow off. The component is mounted at the land pattern
PCB height=0 (component height and mount height are determined by the Z
motor action and not taken in account here). Now the head down valve is
disengaged and the spline assy starts ascending again. At 1 mm clearance
from the PCB height the Head Up/Down sensor (5.) is de-activated and a
timer is started to detect sensor (4.)
Pos. 4 At 4mm height from the PCB the Nozzle Down No.1 sensor (4.)is detected.
When detected, the head is allowed to move in both X&Y directions provided
that the component height was less than 4mm.
Pos. 3 At 11mm height from the PCB the Nozzle Down No..2 sensor (3.) is detected.
When both sensor (4.) and (3.) are logical 1, the head is allowed to move in
both X&Y directions when component height was larger than 4mm. This sensor
(3), is also used when a component is picked from an ATS or Fixed Tray Feeder.
At 13.5mm the F.N. position sensors (6.) are within detection range and
allowed to be checked.
Pos. 2 At 14.5mm height from the PCB the Nozzle up sensor (2.) is detected.
Provided that both sensor (3.) and (2.) are logical 1, the Flying Nozzle
Position sensors are now checked.
Now the head is at its upper limit rest position (15.5mm) and this ends the
normal vertical pneumatic spline movement after placement of a component.
Pos.1 Clutch position, see paragraph 15.4.1.
Clearance from PCB
17.5-18mm
14.5mm
11mm Height
from
PCB
1mm 4mm in mm
5 4 3 2 1
FIGURE 15-12 Action overview.

Placement Head
NOTE: 6.F.N. Pos. 1,2, sensor are not shown.

1DPH +HDG8S'RZQ 1R]]OH'RZQ1R 1R]]OH'RZQ1R 1R]]OH8S )1&OXWFK
6HQVRU N2330~2337 N2323 N2325 N2324 N2350~2353
'HW Proximity Laser beam Laser beam Laser beam Proximity
TABLE 15-6
)1&OXWFK
1a
1R]]OH8S
1
1R]]OH'RZQ
1R1
1R]]OH'RZQ
1R1
+HDG
8S'RZQ
1a
)13RV
1a +HLJKW)URP
3&%LQPP

8SSHUOLPLWUHVWSRVLWLRQ
FIGURE 15-13 Timing diagram
15.4.4.5 Laser Beam Sensors

The LED indicators on the receivers of the Nozzle Down and Nozzle Down No.2
receiver are on the left side of the head assembly. In order to reach these, both the
moving camera and a blank metal cover plate need to be removed first. The LED
indicator of the Nozzle Up sensor is located on the right side and easy to find. The
according amplifier adjustment potmeters are located in the cable bundles near the
top of the head assembly.

Placement Head
Figure 15-14 shows the sensors on the left side of the head assembly.
1RWH/HIWVLGHRIWKH
PDFKLQH7KHPRYLQJ
FDPHUDDQGVHQVRUPHWDO
FRYHUSODWHKDYHEHHQ
UHPRYHGLQWKLVSLFWXUH
1R]]OH8S
7UDQVPLWWHU1
+DUQHVVEORFNLQJ
WKHYLHZIURPIURQW
RIWKHPDFKLQH
1R]]OH'RZQ1R
5HFHLYHU1
/(',QGLFDWRU
&DQQRWEHVHHQIURP
IURQWRIWKHPDFKLQH
/('LQGLFDWRU
&DQMXVWEHVHHQIURP
WKHIURQWRIWKHPDFKLQH
1R]]OH'RZQ1R
5HFHLYHU1
FIGURE 15-14 Laser detection sensors.
The following concerns all 3 laser beam detection sensors ;

■ Nozzle up (N2324),Nozzle Down No.1 (N2323),Nozzle Down No.2 (N2325).
■ If a new assembly has been installed, initially set the sensor amplifier potmeter
at 2 o’clock position.
■ Remove the left metal cover plate which hides the sensors or use a small mirror
to see the LED’s.
REMARK: Detection is bad or unreliable, when only the red LED is on, or only the
green LED is on. Detection is good when both the red and green LED’s are on.

Placement Head
Adjustment of the laser beam detection sensor amplifier, initial setting.
Sensor Cable sleeve
N2323 Safety 1
N2324 N-Up
N2325 Safety 2
FIGURE 15-15 Detail potmeter of the sensor amplifier and cable sleeve description.
The figure above shows a detail of the setting of the potmeter and the descriptions
you will find on the white cable sleeve near the sensor amplifier. Both can be found
in the cable bundles near the top of the head assy.
■ Make sure the laser beam is not obstructed and has a clear path.
■ Watch the LED indicator on the receiver while turning the adjustment potmeter
on the amplifier.
■ Carefully turn up from 7 o’clock position until both the red and green LED’s are
just fully on. This optimal point lies somewhere between 12 and 3 o’clock
position (not critical).
7RRKLJKDGMXVWHG
1RGHWHFWLRQSRVVLEOH
2XWSXWDOZD\V¶·
7RRORZDGMXVWHG
6HWWLQJ
1RGHWHFWLRQSRVVLEOH
9ROXPHSRWPHWHU
2XWSXWDOZD\V¶·
2SWLPXPVHWWLQJ
FIGURE 15-16 Adjustment potmeter sensor amplifier.
The gray portion of the drawing in figure above shows the area in which detection
is possible. The optimum setting point mentioned earlier is clearly marked. Outside
this area detection is not possible or might be wrong. If the setting is too low the
output signal will stay at logic ‘0’. In some cases if the setting is too high, the
output will stay at logic ‘1’.

Placement Head
NOTE: after one hour of use the temperature of the potmeter casing will rise ±20
degrees Celsius above ambient temperature.
Wrong adjustment of the sensor amplifier potmeter will induce incorrect detection.
To check for correct adjustment perform the following:
■ Open the I/O monitor screen in and select target N2323 (Nozzle Down No.1),
N2324 (Nozzle Up) or N2325 (Nozzle Down No.2).
■ Carefully pull down any spline assy and watch the I/O monitor screen. The
according logical values can be derived from both the timing diagram and table
15-7 (see below).
'HVFULSWLRQ 1R]]OH'RZQ1R 1R]]OH8S 1R]]OH'RZQ1R
6SOLQHSRVLWLRQ 1 1 1
Fully up 1 (NOT) 1 (DET) 1 (NOT)
Almost up 1 (NOT) 0 (NOT) 1 (NOT)
Middle (longest travel) 1 (NOT) 0 (NOT) 0 (DET)
Almost down 1 (NOT) 1 (DET) 0 (DET)
0 (DET) 1 (DET) 0 (DET)
Fully down 0 (DET) 1 (DET) 1 (NOT)
TABLE 15-7
Fine adjustment using special Jigs

For control and fine adjustment of the Laser Beam Detection Sensors on the indi-
vidual head use the special jigs:
-LJ2YHUYLHZ
9965 000 10361 Jig Head Down Sensor No.1 KV8-M71J7-A00 Jig 1 Head Sensor
(for Head Down Sensor No. 1)
9965 000 10362 Jig Head Down Sensor No.2 KV8-M71J8-A00 Jig 2 Head Sensor
(for Head Down Sensor No. 2)
9965 000 10363 Jig Head Up Sensor KV8-M71J9-A00 Jig 3 Head Sensor
(for Head Up Sensor)
TABLE 15-8
These jigs can be inserted in two ways simulating both physical logical states
(detecting/non-detecting)

Placement Head
Perform the following action.

■ Loosen the 2 bolts of the support bracket #82, which supports the head down
(and clutch sensors for FNC) sensors , remove the support bracket and bend the
sensor assy away from your working area.
■ Pull spline shaft of either head 4 or 5 downwards by hand.
■ Insert the proper jig for the specific sensor you want to check between the
thrust washer #24 and the head housing, watch the markings on the jig.
■ Test both directions and re-adjust the corresponding preamplifier setting if necessary.
1
1R]]OH'RZQ
6DIHW\
1
1R]]OH'RZQ
6DIHW\
1
)O\LQJ
1R]]OH8S
FIGURE 15-17
■ Perform the check also with head 2 and 7. Head 1 and 8 cannot be tested but are
ok if the result of head 2 and 7 were all right.
■ Make sure that at all 3 positions left (H7), middle (H4) and right (H2), both red
and green receiver indicators respond correctly (see FIGURE 15-16).
The following checks and adjustments have to be done after installation/alignment
of one of the laser beam sensors:
■ Check Head I/O operation
■ Adjust Moving camera focus and scale (since moving camera has been removed)
■ Perform FAMF adjustment step A1

Placement Head
15.5 Z Axis Adjustments

15.5.1 Z Axis Machine Reference
SCREEN 15-15
3. Select the following settings.

• Set the Adjust Item parameter to ‘Motor reference’
button.
SCREEN 15-16
Motor Reference column. The Z-axis machine reference must be between 40%
and 60%.

Placement Head
To adjust this, follow the next steps.
FIGURE 15-18
1. Remove the rear bracket of the nozzle recognition sensors.

2. Fix the Z axis ball screw with a screw driver (A)
3. Loosen the lower screws in the coupling with an allen wrench (B) & (C)
4. Rotate the Z axis ball screw with the screw driver (A) and tighten the screws in
the coupling again.
5. Check the machine reference again and repaet it until the machine reference is
within 40-60%.

Placement Head
15.5.2 Z Axis Software Limits

The Z axis soft limits are the most upper and lower positions minus 1mm.
Perform as follows:
1. Press the EMG button
2. Move the head to a position where it can be moved in Z-direction freely
3. Go to Utilities -Axis
4. Select parameter Soft Limit
5. Select the Z-axis
6. Move the head up and write down the coordinates when the head touches its
mechanical limit
7. Move the head down and write down the coordinates when the head touches its
mechanical limit
8. Fill in the software limit:+ side: value step 7 - 1.0 mm
- side: value step 6 + 1.0 mm
15.5.3 Init Z Position

The init Z position of the Topaz-XII Series is the position in which the head is in
rest position. It cannot be taught in the machine. Only the recognition height must
be taught. This is the height at which the machine recognizes the component above
the camera and is related to the top of the illumination unit.
15.5.4 Recognition Height

The recognition height is the height at which the component is recognized above
the camera. How to adjust this height is described in chapter 14.
15.5.5 Moving Height

The moving height is the height at which the machine is allowed to move the X and
Y-axes. This parameter which is shown in the positions screen is not used any more
in the Topaz-XII Series.

Placement Head
15.6 R Axis Adjustments

15.6.1 Machine R Reference Adjustment
The built-in motor encoder of the R axis issues a “ 0” pulse each time one turn is
complete.
encoder “ 0” pulse is received (the origin position actually set). This is called the
to one full turn of the motor.
0$&+,1(5()(5(1&(
25,*,16,*1$/ ;<5$;,6
0$&+,1(5()(5(1&(=$;,6
25,*,1
6(1625
6,*1$/
(1&2'(5
6,*1$/
$%3+$6( 3+$6( 02725527$7,21

SD-10043601
15.6.1.1 Check the Machine Reference Settings

SCREEN 15-17

Placement Head
3. Select the following settings

• Set the Adjust Item parameter to ‘Motor reference’
button.
SCREEN 15-18
Motor Reference column. The R-axis machine reference must be between 40%
and 60%.
15.6.1.2 Adjustment of Origin Dog
To adjust the origin dog the set screws “A” in figure 15-12 must be loosened. Adjust
the origin dog so that it is detected after an origin has been performed.
SD-930014a4
FIGURE 15-20 Origin dog “A”

Placement Head
15.6.2 R Axis Soft Limit

2. Select the sub menu Axis.
3. Set the following settings
• Adjust item to “ Soft limit”
• Axis to “ R”
SCREEN 15-19
4. Fill in the + limit field +360° which is the maximum rotation offset anti
clockwise from the origin position that the head can turn
5. Fill in the - limit field -360° which is the maximum rotation offset clockwise
from the origin position that the head can turn
15.6.3 Init R Position

This is the head rotation in degrees at which the nozzle attached to the head will
be aligned. To teach/adjust the INIT R position follow the procedure described in
section 15.6.4.2.
15.6.4 Adjustment of the R Init Position and Nozzle Position of the

FNC Heads
The Topaz-X(i)II Series has a new FNC adjustment program (“ Utility-FNC” ).
The functions of this program are:
1. Checking if the F.N. Clutch sensors and F.N. Position sensors are working
correctly
2. Checking if the FNC nozzle change is working correctly.
3. Checking the detection area of the F.N. Position sensors.
4. Adjustment of the Initial Position.

Placement Head
All the items above can be performed in the sub menu FNC in the menu Utilities.
All the FNC heads must be set on nozzle 72 for a Topaz-XII and on nozzle 71 for a
Topaz-XiII. After confirming that the correct nozzles are set, the following screen
will be shown.
SCREEN 15-20
15.6.4.1 Checking the F.N. Clutch Sensors and the F.N. Position Sensors
This section describes how the F.N. Clutch sensors and the F.N. Position sensors can
be checked. The following steps have to be taken:
■ Step 1
Turn the heads in the R initial position using the following procedure:
■ Press the emergency button.
■ Turn the heads manually by pulling the R axis belt till the value shown in A is
the same (tolerance ±0.10) as in B.
SCREEN 15-21

Placement Head
■ Release the emergency button and press the Ready button on the operator panel.
The heads are now in the Init. pos.
■ Step 2
• Activate the clutch valve.
The Clutch valves can be activated per individual head by marking the fields or the
clutch valves can be activated all together by pressing the button “All On” (see
picture below).
SCREEN 15-22
■ Step 3
View the table on the screen to check if the head is in the clutch position and if the
sensors are working correct:
SCREEN 15-23
■ If a field, for example Clutch-H2, is showing a “ 0” then the F.N. clutch sensor for
Head2 is not activated, in this situation the sensor detects metal. If a “ 1” is
showed then the clutch sensor is activated (light on sensor is on) and in this
situation the sensor does not detect metal.
■ If a field, for example Sensor1-H2, is showing a “ 0” then F.N. Position Sensor1
for Head2 is not activated, in this situation the sensor still detects metal. If a
“ 1” is showed then F.N.Position Sensor1 is activated (light on sensor is on) and
in this situation the sensor does not detect metal.
■ If a field, for example Sensor2-H2, is showing a “ 0” then F.N.Position Sensor2 for
Head2 is not activated, in this situation the sensor still detects metal. If a “ 1” is
showed then F.N.Position Sensor2 is activated (light on sensor is on) and in this
situation the sensor does not detect metal.
Activate I or more clutch valves and check the clutch table on the screen.

Placement Head
The following situations can occur:

1. The head is in the clutch position, all sensors are working correctly.
)1&OXWFKVHQVRU )13RVLWLRQVHQVRU )13RVLWLRQVHQVRU
1 1 1
2. The head is in the clutch position but sensor1 and/or sensor 2 is not working
correctly..
1 0 0
1 1 0
1 0 1
Possible errors:
■ Wrong position of the F.N.Pos. sensor1 and/or 2. (see 15.6.4.4)
■ A broken cable to the F.N.Pos. sensor1 and/or 2.
3. The head is not in the clutch position and the sensors 1 and 2 are not working
correctly.
0 0 0
Possible errors:
• The heads are not in the R initial position (see 15.6.4.2)
• The head can not move up/down because of too much friction
• Broken cables to the sensors
• A broken cable to the clutch valve
• The clutch valve is damaged.
4. The head is not in the clutch position and the sensors 1 or 2 are not working
correctly.Possible errors:
0 1 0
0 0 1
• The heads are not in the R initial position (see 15.6.4.2)

• The head can not move up/down because of too much friction
• Broken cables to the sensors
• A broken cable to the clutch valve
• The clutch valve is damaged.

Placement Head
15.6.4.2 Adjustment of the Initial Position

Check if all FNC heads have nozzle 72 for Topaz-XII or nozzle 71 for Topaz-XiII.
Mark in Adjust Item “ Init.pos.” and mark in Start pos. Init.pos.
SCREEN 15-24
If the Init pos. has been marked, the adjustment starts from the current initial
position.
During the first part of the measuring the “ Range screen” is shown. If the clutch
sensor does not detect metal the cells are marked red which indicates a correct
clutch.
SCREEN 15-25
When the measurements are finished the result screen is automatically shown:
For each head at 0 and 180 degrees 4 values are shown:
1. Minimal angle
2. Maximal angle
3. Range
4. Minimum angle

Placement Head
The meaning of these value can be explained as follows:
SCREEN 15-26
During and after measurement it is possible to switch between the “ Range screen”
and “ Result screen” by marking the wanted screen in “ Result Expression” :
SCREEN 15-27
After the init pos adjustment has finished the new value is automatically shown in
Result
SCREEN 15-28
Confirm if the measured data must be saved or not and run the same step again. All
minimum angle values should be more than 1.99. Also the R init pos. should be
between -60 and +60.
If this minimum angle is below 1.99 degrees, readjust the physical R-position of the
head involved, see section 15.6.5. Try fine adjustment first; see step 16 section 15.6.5.

Placement Head
15.6.4.3 Checking the Detection Area of the Nozzle Position Sensors

Check if all FNC heads have nozzle 72 for Topaz-XII or nozzle 71 for Topaz-XiII.
Mark in Adjust Item “ Detect Area” and press “ Execute”.
SCREEN 15-29
The program starts measuring the position of the F.N. Position sensors.
During the first part of the measuring the “ Range screen” is shown. If a sensor does
not detect metal the cells are marked red.
During the measurement the screen switches automatically to the “ Result screen” :
For each head and F.N. Pos. sensor 7 values are shown in the “ Result screen” :
1. The minimal detection angle (around 0° )
2. The maximum detection angle (around 0° )
3. The detection range (around 0° )
4. The minimal detection angle (around 180° )
5. The maximum detection angle (around 180° )
6. The detection range (around 180° )
7. The minimum angle
The minimum detection angle should be 15±2 degrees (13 to 17 degrees). If this value
is too small, the sensor is to far. When this value is too big, the sensor is too near.
During and after measurement it is possible to switch between the “ Range screen”
and “ Result screen” by marking the wanted screen in “ Result Expression” :
SCREEN 15-30
15.6.4.4 Checking the FNC Nozzle Change

Press ‘FNC test’ and the following menu will be shown:
Mark the nozzles that have to be changed, set the changing speed (default 60%),
set the amount of nozzle change sequences. Press the start button, the nozzles are
automatically changed.
If all nozzles have been selected the following change sequence will be made:
■ Nozzle 71 to 73; 73 to 71; 71 to 72; 72 to 73; 73 to 72; 72 to 71.

Placement Head
■ If nozzle type 71 and 72 are selected the following change sequence will be
made: Nozzle 71 to 72; 72 to 71.
Before continuing the adjustment change the nozzles back to type 72 (only for
Topaz-XII), this can be done by marking nozzle 72. After pressing the test button 2
times, all the heads have nozzle 72 and the heads are now in the Initial position.
Before continuing the adjustment change the nozzles back to type 71 (only for
Topaz-XiII), this can be done by marking nozzle 71. After pressing the test button 2
times, all the heads have nozzle 71 and the heads are now in the Initial position.
15.6.5 R Axis Alignment

If one or more heads are rotated, all heads must be aligned again. After adjustment
also the FAMF program must be performed again. Sometimes it happens that only
one of the FNC heads is rotated compared to the others.
This procedure describes how to do the R adjustments for all heads.
CAUTION
CAUTION: BE AWARE THAT THIS PROCEDURE IS VERY TIME CONSUMING AND THAT THE
FAMF GLASS PLATE PROCEDURE MUST BE PERFORMED AFTERWARDS.
NORMALLY THIS PROCEDURE IS ONLY NEEDED IN CASE OF A HEAD
REPLACEMENT, BELT REPLACEMENT OR R MOTOR PROBLEM.
The FAMF program has to be performed again for all heads and all cameras. See
chapter 4.9.27.
■ R adjustment and head belt tension procedure:
a) For the FNC machine make sure all 4 FNC heads have the center nozzle
selected (71 for Xi,72 for other machines), otherwise change nozzles first.
b) Perform origin. Set R-axis to initial R-position by making a point move to the
current initial R-value.
NOTE: If its value is not near 0 ± 60 degrees it has to be corrected during this
procedure.

Placement Head
c) Loosen the 2 bolts of the bracket which supports the head down (and clutch
sensors for FNC) sensors, see FIGURE 15-21. Remove the support bracket and
bend the sensor assy. away from your working area.
FIGURE 15-21 Loosening the sensor bracket
d) Loosen both belt tension brackets item 46 and 47 (both SF and FNC head),
see FIGURE 8-14. Move this assembly away from your working area.
e) Loosen both Allen set screws of item 21 (see FIGURE 8-14) from each spline.
f) Align all 8 heads in such a way that the alignment holes (including FNC
reference holes) are in one line at the front position. FNC heads with all
reference marks (small dots on bevel and cam gear) in front, and the SF heads
with the nozzle springs in parallel with the conveyor rail, see FIGURE 15-22.
g) Install the R-alignment tool (5322 395 10879) by positioning it in the
alignment holes. Fixate it using two screws. Now all 8 heads are temporally
fixated.
FIGURE 15-22 R aligning holes

Placement Head
h) Unscrew item 21 with help from the shaft disassemble tool (5322 395 10877)
from each spline.
i) If the initial R position was outside the ± 60 degrees range, loosen the bolts
on the R-axis motor and carefully reposition the motorbelt. For correct
tension of the R-Axis motorbelt; press with your thumb and allow a slack of
3-5 mm.
j) Re-install and check the position of both head belts on the R-axis pulley item
43 (see FIGURE 8-14) carefully in order to maintain the correct initial R
position.
k) Fixate the brackets for the belt tensioning again. Use a belt frequency meas-
urement device to adjust the belts at 400-500Hz, or place your finger at the
middle of the belt and press lightly. Allow a slack of max. 3 mm.
l) Turn the R-axis motorbelt by hand a few turns back and forward. This allows
distribution of the developed tension on both head belts.
m) Fix item 21 (see FIGURE 8-14) again with the shaft disassemble tool (5322
395 10877).
n) Remove the R-alignment tool (5322 395 10879) and fixate the setscrews on
item 21 of each spline.
o) If the R-Axis motorbelt was repositioned re-adjust the origin dog, see section
15.6.1.2.
p) Set all heads at the correct initial R position by hand and teach the Initial R
position using the program FNC program in utilities, see section 15.6.4.2. In
case any FNC head is still slightly out of position preventing from finding an
optimum init R value here, unscrew both bolts on item 40 and slightly rotate
it until the fixed index pin and the cam gear now are properly aligned.
Normally this is not necessary, as it is factory aligned. See fig. 15-24.
q) Run the FAMF program in chapter 4.9.
NOTE: After changing the value of R initial pos. you must correct the “ R-axis”
value of each individual pick up position at the Nozzle station.
After the FNC heads are correctly positioned, test the mechanical clutch movement:
■ Move the R-axis to the initial R position. Now all heads are aligned with the
nozzle bevel gears in front.
■ Set the centre nozzle to Topaz-X: type 72, Xi: type 71.
■ Open the I/O monitor screen and select target TB22 ~ TB25 Flying Nozzle
(2,4,6,8) Clutch.
■ Activate the target and watch the FNC head move upwards to the clutch
position.

Placement Head
■ Switch between input and output monitor screen and select the according F.N.
Clutch sensor (N2350~2353). Watch the logic value being “ 1” and check if on the
sensor itself the LED indicator is on.
NOTE: Detection takes place on the bearing of the spline assy, but the proximity
sensor is only activated when it does not see metal anymore.
To check and adjust the correct F.N. Clutch detection perform the next following
actions:
■ After the FNC head is clutched, press the EMG switch.
■ Watch the input monitor screen while carefully pulling down the FNC head by
hand.
■ It should take between 0 and 0.5mm travel from upper limit before the F.N.
Clutch sensor is logical “ 0”. Please note this concerns “flank detection” only and
such might be very difficult to notice in critical situations.
■ If this is more than 0.5mm the Clutch sensor upper plate, on which all 4 sensors
are mounted, has to be shifted in position. On its position on the Head Up/Down
sensor bracket, there is 0.3~0.6mm stroke. Loosen the 3 bolts and carefully set it
as close to the spline assy bearing as possible. This adjustment affects the point
of detection in the timing diagram and thus the clutching action.
Optimum Area Bearing Clutch
of Detection Spline Assy Stroke
F.N. Clutch
Sensor
F.N. Clutch
N2350~2353
16 17 18
2.5mm
Shift Upper Mount

Clutch movement
Plate for Adjustment
Upper Limit Normal Upper Limit
Spline Travel After Clutch
FIGURE 15-23 Clutch stroke.

Placement Head
■ Check for close contact of the Bevel Gear and the Bearing Holder at the clutch
position.
#40 Bearing Check for close contact;

Holder parts must touch.
#33 Bevel
Gear
FIGURE 15-24 Bearing Holder contact to Bevel gear.
If there is any space left:

■ Check clutch alignment (Init-R, Bearing Holder and Clutch stroke)
■ Check for friction of spline travel.
■ Check clutch valve, pistons and o-rings
15.6.6 R Axis Accuracy Adjustment

After adjusting the head, the R-axis accuracy procedure has to be done for both SF
and FNC heads. Fine adjustment for the SF heads is done during performing the
FAMF procedure, see section 4.9.20.
CAUTION
CAUTION: THE R-AXIS ACCURACY ADJUSTMENT FOR THE TOPAZ-XII MUST BE PERFORMED
BEFORE DOING THE AMF GLASS PLATE CALIBRATION.
NOTE: THE R-AXIS PROCEDURE CHANGES THE ROTATION PARAMETERS IN THE

MACHINE DATA. THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT CHANGE THE R-AXIS ACCURACY
PARAMETERS. MAKE SURE THAT THESE R-AXIS ACCURACY PARAMETERS ARE
SET TO “ 0.00“ .

Placement Head
15.7 Setting the Nozzle Configuration

15.7.1 Nozzle Types
In the Topaz-XII Series machine we can distinguish two type of nozzles. Those
meant for the FNC (flying nozzle change) head and those meant for the precision
head. Those two types can not be exchanged by each other.
15.7.2 FNC Nozzles

We distinguish 3 different FNC nozzles: type 71F, 72F and 73F. (F means meant for
Flying Nozzle Change)
SD-9300115z
FIGURE 15-25 Nozzles for the FNC head
The drawings below give also an indication of which components can be picked up
with the FNC nozzle. For the exact measures of components size etc. we refer to the
operating manual of the Topaz-XII Series
Metric ➔ Inch
0603 ➔ 0201
1005 ➔ 0402
9300115y
1608 ➔ 0603
2125 ➔ 1206
3216 ➔ 0805
9300115x
4525 ➔ 1608
9300115w
FIGURE 15-26 Nozzle + components

Placement Head
15.7.2.1 Nozzles for Precision Head

We distinguish 7 different precision head nozzles; type 71, 72, 73, 74A, 75, 76A,
and 77. These nozzle types can be used in the following machines:
■ Topaz-XII Series: 71, 72, 73, 74A, 76A
■ Opal-XII: 71, 72, 73, 75, 76A, 77
NOTE: The 74A Nozzle cannot be used in the Opal-XII. Both 75 and 77 nozzles
cannot be used in the Topaz-XII- Series.
TYPE 71 TYPE 72 TYPE 73 TYPE 74A/77 TYPE 76A

SD-9300115v
FIGURE 15-27 Nozzle types for precision head
The drawings below give also an indication of which components can be picked up
with the precision nozzle. For the exact measures of components size etc. we refer
to the operating manual of the Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII.
Metric ➔ Inch
0603 ➔ 0201
1005 ➔ 0402
9300115u
71
1608 ➔ 0603
2125 ➔ 1206
3216 ➔ 0805
72 9300115t
4525 ➔ 1608
73
9300115s

Placement Head
9300115r
9300115q
15.7.3 Setting the Nozzle Specification

The nozzle specification parameters are stored in the ‘Head Specification Infor-
mation’ window in the ‘VmSpec’ (machine data) program. All items of ‘Head Specifi-
cation Information’ are specified to match the machine you ordered prior to
shipment. It is unlikely that you will need to change these items. However, if
special nozzles are added afterwards then make the necessary modifications. The
following sections explain how to set the major items relating nozzles.
15.7.3.1 Flying Nozzle Information
When the ‘FNC specification’ window is selected, flying nozzle information is
displayed showing which head uses which types of flying nozzles. (This is available
only for the Topaz-XII FNC Series) The FNC column specifies whether to use flying
nozzles. On the Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII, Heads 2, 4, 6 and 8 are set to “ Use” and
Heads 1, 3, 5 and 7 are set to “ NotUse” , The Dia. column shows the outside diameter
of the nozzle unit (in tenths of a millimetre).
NOTE: Nozzle 1 and 2 are swapped for Topaz-XiII and Topaz-XII.

Placement Head
SCREEN 15-31 Flying nozzle information screen (Topaz-XiII)
15.7.3.2 Head Specification

When window ‘Head Specification’ is selected, head spec information is displayed
showing which types of nozzles can be attached to each head.
Digit ã means the nozzle is attachable, digit p means not attachable.
SCREEN 15-32 Head spec information screen

Placement Head
CAUTION
CAUTION: HEAD SPEC INFORMATION IS ALREADY SPECIFIED TO MATCH THE MACHINE

YOU ORDERED PRIOR TO SHIPMENT. DO NOT MAKE UNNECESSARY CHANGES.
INCORRECT SETTINGS WILL CAUSE FAULTY DATA OPTIMIZATION OR CAUSE
FAULTY OPERATION OF THE MACHINE.
15.7.3.3 Mount Nozzle Specification
When window ‘Nozzle Data’ is selected, individual nozzle information is displayed as
show below.
SCREEN 15-33 Nozzle Data screen Topaz-XII Series
The “ Buffing” parameter has to be set to “ use” for the spring loaded nozzles.
The “ Length” parameter is the reference length of the nozzle.
The “ Diameter” parameter is the diameter of the nozzle.

Placement Head
15.7.3.4 Pickup Component Type Information

When you select window ‘Nozzle type’, component types that can be picked up by
each nozzle are displayed as show below.
Digit ã means the component can be picked up, digit p means it cannot be picked
up by this nozzle type.
SCREEN 15-34 Nozzle type screen example Topaz-XII Series
CAUTION
CAUTION: SPECIFY (ONLY) ONE NOZZLE TYPE FOR EACH INDIVIDUAL COMPONENT TYPE.
OTHERWISE, THE MACHINE MAY NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY. ASSEMBLÉON
STANDARD NOZZLES FOR THE TOPAZ-XII SERIES ARE 71,72,73,74 AND 76.
FOR THE OPAL-XII 71,72,73,75,76 AND 77. IF YOU USE CUSTOM NOZZLES,
THEY SHOULD BE SPECIFIED FROM 7A TO 7Q AND THEIR COMPONENT/NOZZLE
NAMES (“ SP.NOZZLE A” TO “ SP.NOZZLE F” ) SHOULD BE SPECIFIED IN THE
COMPONENT INFORMATION.

Placement Head
15.8 Head Specific Settings in ‘VmSpec’

15.8.1 Head Offset
SCREEN 15-35 Head offset parameters
■ Head offset X is the distance in millimetres in X direction between the center of

the head and the center of head 1. This setting is always 0 for head 1.
■ Head offset Y is the distance in millimetres in Y direction between the center of
the head and of rotation of head 1. This setting is always 0 for head 1.
■ Head offset Z is the height difference in millimetres between the tip of a
standard nozzle attached to the head and the tip of a standard nozzle attached
to head number one. This setting is always 0 mm for head 1. With the “ measure
height“ utility the Z offset can be determined (see 15.8.4).
For the Topaz-XII there is a utility to determine (roughly) the X and Y offset
between the different heads. Fine adjustment is done during FAMF.
NOTE: Make sure the ‘Camera Position adjustment’(section 14.5.6) for the Front
Line Array Camera is performed first.
1. Open the MchSetup (Utilities) program and login as service engineer.
2. Select the “ Head Offset” button

Placement Head
3. For this utility the best is to use the glass component (Make sure the Adjust
Mode parameter in the VmSpec program is set to ‘adjust Mode2’)
For the FNC heads small components can be used. First this component has to be
created in the parts database of the ‘MCH_SETUP’ program (the Adjust Mode
parameter does not have to be changed).
4. Load in VGOS the program “ MCH_SETUP” which is located in the directory D:/
Machine/No1/. The file will be displayed in the status area of VGOS.
5. Change the several settings:
• Set the several parameters in the MchSetup program
• Set the specific head
• Set the component parameter to 11 (when the glass QFP with sticker is used)
• Set the camera to digital multi 1 (front line array camera)
SCREEN 15-36
6. Press the pick up button. The head will move to the position defined in
‘MCH_SETUP’.
7. Confirm when the head has arrived.
SCREEN 15-37

Placement Head
8. Press EMG and attach the component to the head.

9. Release EMG and press Execute. The measurement starts.
Press Execute to start the measurement.
10.After the measurement, the results are shown in the table
16.000
SCREEN 15-38
11.Confirm if you want to save the data

12.Press the EMG button and remove the glass component from the head. Perform
the same step for the other heads (as mentioned in step 3).
13.Release the Emergency and confirm when the components have to be dumped.
The head will move to the component dump box.
15.8.2 Head Down Offset

This value is a correction of the X and Y coordinates when picking a component.
SCREEN 15-39 Head down offset

Placement Head
These values should always be “ 0.000“. The effect of these parameters is currently
under investigation.
■ Head type
This must be set to fore, which means that the head uses fore lighting to
recognize the component.
■ Fine mode
This must be set to possible when the head has to mount in fine mode too (SF
heads only), which means the head can place a component in fine mode.
15.8.3 Nozzle Correction

This value is a correction of the X and Y coordinates offset caused by the rotation
(inbalanced centre).
These parameters have to be set to “ 0.000“. The effect of these parameters is under
investigation.
SCREEN 15-40 Nozzle correction

Placement Head
15.8.4 Measure Height

In Utility there is a procedure to check if there is an offset in Z direction between
the 8 heads. This offset has to be registered in the machine data (because it can
e.g. cause pick and mount problems) in the Head offset window in the Z column.
This Z offset can be determined as follows:
1. Make sure all heads have nozzle 71 attached to the head.
2. Start the “ Measure Height” utility.
SCREEN 15-41
3. Select head 1.
4. Move the complete head above the front (fixed) conveyor rail.
5. Turn on the vacuum (“ On” -button). Check the vacuum level.
6. Move the head pneumatically down (“ Down” -button)
7. Move the head servo controlled down with the “ Down 0.03” (fine movement) and
“ Down 0.50” (rough movement).
8. Listen (or check the vacuum level) when the head touches the conveyor rail.
9. Write down the Z1Height value on a piece of paper.
10.Perform the same procedure for all other heads.
11.Calculate the difference of all heads in regards to head 1. This offset has to be
filled into the Z column of the head offset window. Make sure that this value is
“ 0.000” for head 1!!!!

Placement Head
15.9 Assembling and Disassembling of the FNC Head Assy

15.9.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the assembling and disassembling of the head splines of the
Topaz-XII (FNC). FIGURE 15-30 gives the exploded view of the head assembly.
81b
81a 2 75
78 95 61
60 74
104 106 58
103 106
24 23 2
80a107 97
105
59 22 26
65 6
104106 59 66
77 103 78 21 19
1 5 8
111 18
79 4 7
12 11 25 3
46 3
18 71 4 4
79 49 44 9 9
64 63 11 76
77 71 4 4
80b 24 10
41 10
44 11 76 42 23 7
44 7
18 71 40 22 62
18 67 11 62
44 38 20 7
43 94 7
18 76 37 21 3
52 47 3
84 33 65
54 93 91 27 18
53 48 32 31 109 19
36 35 108
51 29 17
12 68 72
73 96
32 36 15
56 69 92 35
50 34 30 14
55 88 13
90 28
56 82 86 16
81 16
57 70 90 39
45 14 15
82 82 87
85 89 98 99
FIGURE 15-30 Head assembly Topaz-XII (FNC).
15.9.2 Disassembling & Assembling of FNC Spline Assy

In the following paragraphs is explaining how to disassemble the head assy.
The complete spline with FNC head attached can be removed by removing the circlip
item number 23. Be very careful not to damage the spline shaft (See number 98 in
FIGURE 15-30).
CAUTION
CAUTION: IF THE CIRCLIP ITEM 23 IS REMOVED THE SPLINE AND FNC HEAD ARE LOOSE
FROM THE HEAD ASSY AND CAN FALL DOWNWARDS.

Placement Head
While replacing those parts, it is very important to have the reference hole straight
underneath each other, like shown in FIGURE 15-31
SD-9300115j
FIGURE 15-31 Reference holes
15.9.3 Disassembling & Assembling of Precision (SF) Nozzle Holder

The complete spline can be removed by removing the circlip item number 23. (See
number 99 in FIGURE 15-30.)
CAUTION
CAUTION: IF THE CIRCLIP ITEM 29 IS REMOVED THE SPLINE AND HEAD ARE LOOSE FROM
THE HEAD ASSY AND CAN FALL DOWNWARDS.
15.10 Mechanical Check Head Assembly

This chapter describes how to check the air driven mechanical movements and
vacuum generation in the head assembly.
A. Checking the up/down movement
First make sure to the head is in such a position that it cannot hit anything when
lowered. Lower the head as follows:
■ Open the output monitor. Then select the target head T2B10 to T2B17.
■ Press the enter key to lower the target head, the output monitor position reads
“ 0” when lowered and “ 1” when the head is raised.
B. Checking the lower end detection sensor
While the head is lowered, check the input screen and move the cursor to the head
up/down sensor input N2330 to N2337 for each separate head. If one of the heads is
lowered also N2323 will be “ 0”. (displayed as “ nozzle down sensor” )
■ Check the status of the input.

Placement Head
■ When the head is lowered (T2B10~17 =” 1” ) the input monitor should read
“ 0” (N2330~37 =” 0” ) The opposite situation is valid when the head is raised.
NOTE: The head end-lower sensor that are used are of the type “ normally closed”
For safety reasons. When a sensor wire breaks the machine will detect a
head in the lower position and will stop immediately.
NOTE: If the head does not move normally during the above testing, check the
operation of the head manually as follows;
■ Press the emergency button.
■ Press the manual button (red button on top of the air valve) of the air
valve that is the most close to the nozzles by means of a narrow screw
driver.
When the head lowers in this situation the circuitry that should operate the valve is
defect. Points to check are following;
■ Damaged valve
■ Loose harness connectors,
■ DC24V power supply
■ I/O-board etc.
When performing manual operation does not move the head down there is a
problem with the pneumatic installation. Check following;
■ Air supply
■ Air filters
■ Air piping
■ Air valves
C. Checking the vacuum generation
This chapter explains how to check the vacuum generation of Heads 1 to 8. You can
also find whether maintenance (cleaning or replacement) is required by measuring
the vacuum intensity of the vacuum ejector.
Measuring the vacuum generation of the desired head:
■ Open the output monitor screen. Then select the target head T2B00 to T2B07.
1. Press the key to generate the vacuum in the selected head.
The output monitor digit changes to “ 1” when the vacuum ejector is on.

Placement Head
2. Check the vacuum generation

Check that the pickup vacuum is generated, by placing your finger over the
nozzle tip opening of the target head and feeling the suction.
If the vacuum generation does not work normally, check the operation without
using the output monitor, as described below:
• Press the emergency stop button.
• Press the manual button of the air valve, use a screwdriver or a similar tool.
When this method works, the electric circuit for the air valve is probably defective.
Check the following points; connector misconnection, electro-magnetic coil
breakage, loose harness -connectors, trouble with the DC24V supply, I/O board
output errors, etc.
Whenever pressing the manual button does not allow normal operation, there is a
problem with the air supply, air piping and pipette valves (damage, clogging and
adhesion of foreign matter). Check the vacuum ejector air supply line.
Check for air leakage (drop in vacuum) in each head by connecting a vacuum gauge
with air tube to the type 73 nozzle. Measure the vacuum intensity (mm Hg), the
vacuum intensity is satisfactory when “ -500 mm Hg” or higher.
If the vacuum intensity measured with the vacuum gauge is lower than “ -500mm
Hg” , the vacuum generation line (nozzle shaft, air hose, etc.) may be clogged. If no
clogging is observed, the vacuum ejector causes the problem.
15.10.1 Checking the Vacuum Sensor Function

To check the vacuum sensor function of the desired head the following has to be done:
1. Press the Emergency button
2. Open the Units screen and select the tab Head
SCREEN 15-42

Placement Head
3. Turn on the vacuum of the heads which have to be checked.

4. The current vacuum levels of all heads are displayed in the monitor.
5. Check the vacuum sensor function. Make sure that the vacuum level (bar graph
and numerical value) of the selected head changes when you place the finger
over the nozzle tip opening and then remove it. The vacuum level increases
when the nozzle tip opening is closed.
6. Turn off the vacuum.
15.11 Head Markers

One part of the MACS (Multiple Accuracy Compensation System) system to achieve a
higher and more reliable accuracy is the head markers. Two head markers per head
can be found on an XII Series machine.
The initial head markers positions are automatically calibrated when the position of
the line array camera is determined. This head marker position is calculated from
head 1.
During production the position of the head markers are measured when the heads
moves across the line array camera. When an offset is found this offset will be
added to the mount position. When both head markers are used the expansion of
the head is also measured and used for better placement.
FIGURE 15-32

Placement Head
15.11.1 Machine Settings

The following parameters must be set to run the machine with the head markers
checked.
1. Enter the machine configuration via the machine button.
2. Select the “ Machine information – Installation” setting.
To enable the head markers set the “ Multi MACS” parameter to “ MULTI MACS
1&2”. In this case head marker one and two are used.
SCREEN 15-43
For the head markers some parameters have to be set.

3. Enter the machine configuration via the machine button.
4. Go to “ Precision - Multi MACS”.
The following values are default:
0DFKLQH 0XOWL0$&6QR 2IIVHW; 2IIVHW< :LQGRZ 'DWDEDVH 7LPHU
Topaz-XII Series Multi 1 -45.0 0 8 980 / 981 * 1
Multi 2 182.0 0 8 980 / 981 * 1
*. 980 for round and 981 for QFP type marker.
TABLE 15-9

Placement Head
SCREEN 15-44
Offset X - Y :Position of the head marker measured from head 1.

Window :Window size of the head marker.
Database :Component database number of head marker.
(980 for round and 981 for QFP type marker).
Timer :Recognition timer for the head marker
0 means check every time.
255 means check every PCB
1 to 254 means check every ## minute
15.11.2 Settings During Running

The following parameters are used when mounting components.
■ Set the “ Multi MACS” parameter to “ MULTI MACS 1&2”
■ Set the timer for the head marker check to 1 minute.
When the timer of the head marker is set 0 (check every time) the output will drop
with ± 5%, when set to 1 minute the output will drop with ± 0.3% depending on
the application. All compared to Multi MACS OFF.

Placement Head
15.12 Nozzle Station

15.12.1 Overview
The nozzle station of the Topaz-XII Series can hold a total of 18 nozzles. The nozzle
station is optional and must be ordered separately.
Automatic nozzle change can be performed with heads 1,3,5 and 7. Nozzle change
on heads 2,4,6 and 8 can be done on the flight for nozzle type 71F, 72F and 73F
(FNC only).
To perform a smooth nozzle change, the following items should be adjusted
correctly.
■ Nozzle clamp plate position
■ Amplifier gain for nozzle sensor
■ Nozzle station coordinates
FIGURE 15-33 shows a top-view of the nozzle station and the nozzle station
positions.
SD-930015a1
FIGURE 15-33 Nozzle station layout
Table 15-10 shows the head, the nozzle type and the nozzle sensor belonging to
each nozzle station position.
In case of a Topaz-XII FNC (nozzle 73F on heads 2, 4, 6 and 8) and the additional
requirement of nozzle 73 for heads 1, 3, 5 and 7, make sure to order nozzle 73 Sp
(refer to SI-CSM-556).

Placement Head
326,7,21 6(1625 +($' 12==/(7<3(

1 N1130 3 TYPE 74
2 N1131 5 TYPE 74
3 N1132 7 TYPE 74
4 N1133 1 TYPE 71
5 N1134 3 TYPE 71
6 N1135 5 TYPE 71
7 N1136 7 TYPE 71
8 N1137 - SPECIAL/TYPE 73
12 N1143 1 TYPE 74
13 N1144 - SPECIAL
14 N1145 7 TYPE 76
15 N1146 1 TYPE 72
16 N1147 3 TYPE 72
17 N1150 5 TYPE 72
18 N1151 7 TYPE 72
TABLE 15-10 Positions for the Topaz-XII nozzle station
SD-930015b1
FIGURE 15-34 Nozzle station, positions and sensors

Placement Head
15.12.2 Installing the Nozzle Station

The nozzle station can be factory built in but it can also built in later. This section
describes all actions needed when installing the nozzle station later. Use the elec-
trical diagrams of chapter 5 for reference.
1. Check contents of PA number (PA 2963/24):
When receiving the kit, check if the kit is complete. Use the following list as a
reference.
3DUW 4XDQWLW\
Complete nozzle station 1
Sensor & amplifier 18
Mounting rail 1x19 cm
Stopper for mounting rail 2
Hexagon bolt M6x30 2
Bolt M4x10 3
Ring M4 3
Spring ring M4 4
Air valve 1
Tie-wraps 5
Air hose orange 2x 4 metres
Air hose black 2x 4 metres
TABLE 15-11
2. Remove the tape guide at the rear side.

Remove the tape guide at the rear side for better access.
3. Place the nozzle station.
Place the nozzle station on the correct position and tighten it with the M6 bolts.
4. Connect harnesses.
Connect harness N1020 to harness N1020, harness N1021 to harness N1021,
N1022 to harness N1022 and connect harness N 1023 to harness N 1023. These
harnesses are located in the cable ducts.

Placement Head
5. Connect air hoses.

Connect the orange and black air hose to the nozzle station. The connection
points are located underneath the clamping plate. Then guide the air hoses
through the cable ducts to the air valves which are located behind the right
handed lower door as seen from the back of the machine. One valve is already
mounted on the manifold and has connector T1843 (Clamp / Unclamp) already on
it. Mount the second valve on the manifold and connect T1840 (Up / Down) on it.
FIGURE 15-35 Manifold and valves.
6. Place the mounting strip.

Place the mounting strip, tighten it with the two screws and place the amplifiers
on it.
FIGURE 15-36 Amplifiers.

Placement Head
7. Remove cover.
Harness J256 is located in the cable duct that is behind one of the side covers.
Guide this harness through the cable duct and connect it with the cables coming
from the amplifiers.
FIGURE 15-37 Position of harnesses J256.
8. Software changes.
Open the “ VmSpec” menu (Setup/Machine) and set the Nozzle station to:
“Atable exist” in “ Installation Setting”.
15.12.3 Adjusting the Nozzle Sensor Sensitivity

Each nozzle holder in the nozzle station has a sensor that detects the presence of
the nozzle, allowing the machine to identify which type of nozzle is currently
attached to each head. The nozzle sensor is separated from its amplifier unit that is
installed inside the machine near the conveyor unit. Since a gain control is
provided on the amplifier, the nozzle sensor sensitivity can be checked and
adjusted if necessary, as described below.
FIGURE 15-38 Nozzle sensor amplifier

Placement Head
1. Open the I/O monitor (SCREEN 15-45).

2. Select the nozzle station parameters (NSTA) for both output and input monitor
(SCREEN 15-46).
3. Select bit T1843 (nozzle station clamp).
SCREEN 15-45 I/O monitor
4. Open the clamp plate by selecting “ ON/OFF”.

The output monitor bit reads “ 0” when the clamp plate is closed and reads “ 1”
when it is open.
SCREEN 15-46 Nozzle station clamp free

Placement Head
5. Check if the input monitor bit N1022 reads “ 0“ when the clamp plate is closed
and reads “ 1“ when it is open.
6. Check if the input monitor bit N1023 reads “ 1“ when the clamp plate is closed
and reads “ 0“ when it is open.
7. Check if the input monitor bits N1130 through N1151 read “ 1“ when the nozzle
station is empty (no nozzles).
8. Press the emergency stop button and insert a nozzle into the nozzle holder to be
checked.
9. Select the correct nozzle sensor digit in the input monitor.
• Refer to figure 15-33 and table 15-10 to find the input monitor bit belonging
to each nozzle holder (nozzle station position).
SCREEN 15-47 Nozzle sensor digits in input monitor
10.Check the input status of the selected sensor. The digit reads “ 0” when the
nozzle is stored in the holder, but reads “ 1” when it is not. If the digit reads “ 1”
when the nozzle is in the holder, the amplifier gain for the nozzle sensor is too
low. Gradually turn the gain control of the amplifier clockwise until the digit
reads “ 0”. To ensure a reliable nozzle sensor detection, make sure both the red
and green LEDs of the amplifier are on.
11.Take the nozzle out of the holder and check the input status. Check if the digit
has changed to “ 1”. If not, the amplifier gain is set too high. Turn back the gain
control of the amplifier slightly to the left so that the digit reads “ 1”.
If adjusting the gain control of the amplifier does not give satisfying results, the
position of the nozzle sensor may be incorrect.
Remove the guide plate (figure 15-34), loosen the hexagon key of the nozzle
sensor to be adjusted and change the position of the sensor a little.

Placement Head
CAUTION
CAUTION: DO NOT CHANGE THE AMPLIFIER’S MODE SELECTOR SETTING. WITH THIS
SETTING, THE RED AND GREEN LED’S OF THE AMPLIFIER ARE BOTH LIT WHEN
THE NOZZLE IS IN THE HOLDER, AND ONLY THE GREEN LED IS LIT WHEN NOT
IN THE HOLDER.
15.12.4 Adjusting the Nozzle Clamp Plate Position

The nozzle clamp plate is located on the top surface of the nozzle station (figure
15-34). It opens to allow a head to extract a nozzle from the nozzle station, or
closes to lock a nozzle in place and extract it from the head.
The nozzle clamp plate opens and closes by means of an air cylinder while the
position of the plate (air cylinder) is detected by a sensor. If the position is not
correct trouble may occur during the nozzle change. If necessary adjust the clamp
plate as follows:
■ Open the clamp plate by activating T1843 (nozzle station clamp) in the output
monitor. The bit should read “ 1” when the clamp plate is open.
■ Press the emergency button and loosen the clamp plate bolts (see figure 34).
■ Adjust the position of the clamp plate by using the play of the mounting holes.
The position is correct when the nozzle holders are exactly aligned with the
holes in the clamp plate.
■ Tighten the bolts in the clamp plate firmly.
■ Check the status of the clamp plate input bits N1022 and N1023 when the clamp
plate is open and closed (section 15.12.3).
15.12.5 Adjusting the Nozzle Station Coordinates

The position of each nozzle holder in the nozzle station is defined as a set of X, Y, Z
and R coordinates. The head moves according to these coordinates to extract a
nozzle from or deposit a nozzle into the nozzle holder. These coordinates are set at
the factory prior to shipment. There will be no need for adjustment under normal
conditions. If the nozzle station is built in later, please follow the next procedure.
CAUTION
CAUTION: ALL NOZZLE HOLDER POSITIONS (X, Y, Z AND R) ARE TAUGHT USING HEAD
1 AS THE TEACHING UNIT. FOR TRACING AND ADJUSTING THE X, Y, Z AND R
COORDINATES THE HEAD BELONGING TO EACH NOZZLE HOLDER IS USED.
Let’s for example adjust the coordinates of the first nozzle station position.

Placement Head
1. Select “ Utilities” , enter the password, select the “ANC” menu and select
“ teaching” in the “Adjust Item” menu (SCREEN 15-48). According to Figure 15-24
and Table 15-6 nozzle type 74 of head 3 belongs to the first nozzle holder
position. The current coordinates of this nozzle holder are displayed in the first
line of the table.
2. Attach nozzle 74 to head 3 and make sure that nozzle holder 1 is empty.
3. Select the first line of the table.
4. Make sure that the nozzle station is down and that none of the heads is lowered
pneumatically.
5. Select “ Trace” in the “ Teach Trace” menu, select Head 3 as the tracing unit and
press “ Execute”. The moving camera can also be used as tracing unit but in that
case only the X and Y coordinates can be checked.
6. Open the nozzle station by selecting “ Release” in the “ANC device” menu.
7. Move the nozzle station up by selecting “ Up” in the “ANC device” menu.
8. Lower head 3 pneumatically by selecting “ 3” and “ Down” in the “ Head” menu.
9. Press the Emergency Stop button.
10.Lower Head 3 by hand and check if the nozzle clicks smoothly into place in the
nozzle holder.
11.If not, gently turn the coupling of the X-axis or Y-axis or rotate the head a little
until the exact right X, Y and R coordinates have been found.
12.When adjusting the R coordinate, make sure that the R value shown is between -
90 and +90 degrees.
13.Release the Emergency Stop button and re-activate the servo system.
14.The Z-coordinate can be determined with help of the MSP. De-activate the front
side of the machine and activate the MSP. Select the “ Z1” coordinate in the
display of the MSP and lower the head slowly until the nozzle just touches the
bottom of the nozzle holder (just before the nozzle spring/spline spring becomes
active.
15.De-activate the MSP and activate the front side of the machine.
16.Select “ teach in the “ Teach Trace” menu, select head 1 as the teaching unit and
press “ Execute”. The new X,Y, Z and R coordinates are displayed in the table.
17.Press the “ Save Data” button.
18.Put the nozzle back in the nozzle station and check if it can be picked smoothly
by selecting “ Head 3” , “ Type 4” (nozzle 74) and “ Nozzle Change”.
19.Teach the other nozzle station positions in the same way. Do not forget to
change the nozzle type and head number for the other nozzle holders.
20.Select “ Nozzle Change” in the “Adjust Item” menu to perform any desired combi-
nation of nozzle changes.

Placement Head
21.The Nozzle station coordinates can also be checked in Setup/Machine/Nozzle

Sation (Screen 15-49)
SCREEN 15-48
SCREEN 15-49

Placement Head
15.12.6 Nozzle Station Maintenance

Check at a regular interval (quarterly) the following functions of the nozzle station.
■ Check if the nozzles are going smoothly in and out of the nozzle holder. If the
coordinates need to be adjusted, refer to section 15.12.5.
■ Check if the sensing of the nozzle is done in a proper way. Use the adjustment
procedure of section 15.12.5.
■ Check for wear and debris in and around the nozzle station. Clean the station
and apply a little grease on the moving surfaces of the clamp-plate.

Machine Software
CHAPTER 16 Machine Software

16.1 Introduction
This chapter in the service manual describes issues related to the machine system
software Embedded Windows-NT, the application software VGOS V1.xxx and PCB
software files. The installation and back-up procedures will be described as well as
the use of several utilities. The final part is an overview of system configuration
issues.
A basic knowledge of the Windows-NT operating system is recommended.
The above-mentioned software packages may only be used in accordance with terms
of the software License agreement.
16.2 System Software

16.2.1 Operating System
The disk operating system used by the system, is the Embedded Windows-NT version
1.0x. This operating system is installed at the factory on the flash disk drive C:\
which is write protected to avoid accidental damage (power-dip, etc). The VGOS
application software which is the software that controls the various machine parts
(Servo, Vision, I/O, etc) is installed on the D:\ drive in the directory: /Machine and is
read/write able. Since a number of processes in the system must be real-time (servo,
vision) a real-time module (RTX) is installed between the Windows-NT and the VGOS.
16.2.2 Disk Organization

The flash disk of 256Mb is divided into 2 partitions, the C:/ (40Mb) and D:/
(216Mb) drives. Basically they are organized as shown below:
ROOT C:\
68%GLUHFWRU\ 68%68%GLUHFWRU\ )LOH ([SODQDWLRQ
Recyl
Temp
VDS
Program Files Many sub-directoryís
WinNT Many sub-directoryís
Boot.ini Start-up information file
NT-detect.com Command file needed during start up
Ntldt.com Command file needed during start up
TABLE 16-1

Machine Software
ROOT D:\
68%GLUHFWRU\ 68%68%GLUHFWRU\ )LOH ([SODQDWLRQ
MchSetupLog Information about the changes in machine data.
Sysver System version
Machine Brand.sys Brand name of the system
Ftable.bin File table for VIOS action specs
Mcxconf.sys Machine configuration file
Mcxtype.sys Machine type file
VgUPS UPS configuration setting file
VgwApplications Language configuration setting file
VgwColor.ini Colour definition for Assembléon GUI
VgwHourMeter.ini Total running hours log file
Vgwmain.ini Main machine configuration setting file
VgwSystem.ini Machine COM-port configuration setting file
VtLibraries XML Library configuration setting file
KG2-42S8.00A
KG2-42S9.005
KM5-42S8.040
KM5-58d9.058
KW3-58d9.023
KW7-44d0.4c8
KW7-44d1.4c8
D_Base Database Assembléon VIOS Database
My History ConveyorLog Machine history ñconveyor- file
ErrLog Error history file
FeederLog_local Machine history ñ feeder file
HeadLog_local Machine history ñ head file
LotLog Overall board data history file
NozzleLog_local Machine history ñ Nozzle file
PartsLog_local Parts history file
PcbLog Board data history file (each board)
My Libraries Mark XML mark library
Parts XML parts library
My Programs …..XML Default file location for XML board data
No0 Used for optimiser
No1 User.ed Machine data
User.hd Machine data
MCHSERIAL Machine serial number
NzlAcc.dat Accuracy data of each nozzle
Xmap_a.dat Mapping data of Xñaxis
Ymap_a.dat Mapping data of Y-axis
CT.sts Cycle time file
FdrPlate.sts Feederplate specifications file
Fnc_nzl.sts FNC nozzle configuration file
Hed_nzl.sts Head specification file
Nzl_tim.sts Nozzle specification file
Vachigh.sts Vacuum high file for each nozzle
Vaclow.sts Vacuum low file for each nozzle
Version.sts Machine version file
Fes_Fid.txt Feederbar Fiducial position file

Machine Software
Opt Sub directory used by optimiser

Ramd Temporary file directory
Result Result.dat FAMF result file
Mchsetup\ Mchsetup.log Log file with detailed information of all changes in
machine data
Status
System Application files All main VGOS executable program files
Xg-rate.ini Configuration setting
YvosX-VT.ini Configuration setting
CompAssignInfo_ Tray component info
current.sts
Master-VtLevelSetting.txt Configuration setting
VtItem.txt Configuration setting
VtItemEnglish.txt Level items
VtLevelSetting.txt Level configuration setting
VtOperatorDef.txt Login script definitions
Txt Contains text messages used in VGOS
Typ Contains all machine parameter tables
Temp
TABLE 16-2
16.2.3 Installation Disk Contents

With the system there will delivered 3 items regarding the software:
■ System data disk
■ Application VGOS software
■ Operating System embedded Windows NT and RTX.
The system data disk is very important because it contains the MACHINE
PARAMETERS files USER.ED and USER.HD in the /No1 directory. The USER.ED
contains the machine configuration (equipment data) and the USER.HD all the
machine parameters (hardware data).
CAUTION
CAUTION: Before re-writing the software or flash disk always check if there is a
system backup on disk. It is strongly recommended to make a backup via
the VGOS software immediately after the system is unpacked and set-up.
Keep the backup on a safe place from the machine.

Machine Software
16.2.4 Installation of a New Version VGOS Application Software
NOTE: For special language software a separate PA no is available.

This paragraph describes how to upgrade your VGOS application software.
1. Start up the machine regarding the normal procedure
2. Make a system data backup as described in section 16.2.5. It is also wise to
make a backup of all the program (PCB) data and component and mark database.
3. Restart the machine.
4. Press the ‘Windows Mode’ button at the following startup window.
SCREEN 16-1

Machine Software
5. Insert the VGOS CD-Rom in the cd-rom player which is located at the left of the
MCX-box.
6. Press the ‘OK’ button or the VGOS administrator password at the next window.
You are in window mode now.
SCREEN 16-2
7. Chose the VersionUp program in ‘Start -> Programs -> VgMachine’.

The VGOS installation program is started now.
8. Choose the English language in the ‘Choose Setup Language’ window and press OK.
SCREEN 16-3
9. A display is shown which indicates that the installation program (InstallShield

Wizard) is getting started
SCREEN 16-4

Machine Software
10.The installation program is started now. Please read the steps carefully the steps
to be taken.
SCREEN 16-5
11.Press ‘Next>’ at the startup window
SCREEN 16-6

Machine Software
12.The Licensee agreement is displayed here. Press the Yes button when you want
to continue.
13.After that the Standard VgMachine Setup is displayed. VGOS is installed on the
D-drive of the machine in the directory D:\Machine. Check if the setup infor-
mation is OK and press ‘Next>’.
SCREEN 16-7
14.The new VGOS software is installed now. In the window the progress of the
installation is shown.
SCREEN 16-8

Machine Software
15.Press ‘Finish’ at the following window. The installation has been completed
SCREEN 16-9
16.Remove the CD-rom from the cd-rom player

17.Shut down the machine by pressing the YVshutdown program in ‘Start->
Programs -> VgMachine’.
18.Start up the machine regarding the normal procedure
19.Check in VGOS if the software has been installed correctly by checking the
version in the VGOS program. Press the ‘Version’ button and check the software
version.
SCREEN 16-10

Machine Software
16.2.5 Backup Creation

It is recommended and safe to make at regular times back-ups of the system data
(e.g. after a re-calibration). This can be done as follows:
The following steps have to be performed to create a correct system data backup.
2. Make a system data backup by pressing the ‘System Backup’ button in the
working area of the Setup Main Button.
3. Choose the ‘Backup’ button to start the back up procedure of the system backup.
SCREEN 16-11
4. Press ‘OK’ after inserting an empty floppy disk (or a disk reserved for the
backup) into the floppy disk drive. A backup on the floppy disk is created now.
SCREEN 16-12
5. The following message is shown during the backup procedure
SCREEN 16-13

Machine Software
6. Press Close when the backup has been finished.
SCREEN 16-14
7. Keep the backup of the system data on a safe place.

When needed (e.g. installation of complete new flash disk with software), the
system data can be restored. This can be done as follows:
16.2.6 Restore System Data Backup

The following steps have to be performed to restore a correct system data backup.
2. Restore the system data backup by pressing the ‘System Backup’ button in the
working area of the Setup Main Button.
3. Chose the ‘Restore’ button to start the restore procedure of the system backup.
4. Press ‘OK’ after inserting the system data backup disk
5. The message with the progress of restoring is displayed.
6. Press ‘Close’ when the restore procedure has been finished.
NOTE: Restart the machine to activate the restored data.
16.2.7 VGOS Configuration

In VGOS the MCX config and .ini files are used for the configuration of the machine.
16.2.8 Floppy Disk Problems

The floppy disk drive in the Topaz-XII Series is a standard 3.5” , 1.4Mbyte floppy disk
drive which uses the standard IBM formatted 3.5î disks (720 Kbytes or 1.4 Mbytes.)
If the VGOS system has problems when reading from or writing to the floppy disk
drive, perform the following actions:
■ Check the floppy disk by checking it at an other PC (can it be read and/or written)
■ If the disk is OK at the PC, format the floppy disk on the Topaz-XII series system
and check if this is OK. Then try to read/write to/from the disk
■ If it is still not possible to read or write, check the connections to the drive and
check the 5 and 12V power.
■ Swap the floppy drive if the connections and voltages are OK.

Machine Software
16.2.9 CD-rom Problems

The CD-rom player inside the Topaz-XII Series is used for installing new software
(Windows and VGOS), and for reading the HELP file during production.
If the VGOS system has problems with reading from the CD-rom, perform the
following actions:
■ Check the CD-rom by checking it in another PC (can it be read)
■ If the CD-rom is OK at the PC, check if Windows can see the CD-rom player in
Windows Explorer (Utilities menu).
■ Check if the light on the CD-rom player is turned on while reading from the CD-rom
■ If it is still not possible to read, check the connections to the drive and check
the 5V and 12V power.
■ Swap the CD-rom player if the connections and voltages are OK.
16.2.10 Flash Disk

The Topaz-XII are delivered with a so called FLASH disk, which is mounted on the
flash board assembly. The flash disk has a capacity of 256 Mbyte. The disks, when
ordering at PCS, are normally already formatted with the Windows NT system
already installed.
This means that no installation of the Windows-NT system is needed when ordering
the 12NC for the flash disk of flash disk board.
The flash disk can be removed very easily from the front of the MCX controller.
Never do this while power is on. Also take care of the correct position when
inserting the disk.
16.2.10.1 Flash Disk Problems (NT Initial Installation)
In case there are problems with the flash disk, an initial installation of Windows NT
can be done.
In case the flash disk has to be changed make sure you use ESD protection during
swapping the flash disk.
Make sure you have the following at hand:
■ Backup disk of system data
■ Backup of component and mark database
■ Backup of PCB data.
■ Application VGOS software latest released version (cane be ordered at PCS)
■ Operating System embedded Windows NT and RTX (delivered with machine)
NOTE: During installation of windows NT, all current data on c:\ and d:\ will be lost.

Machine Software
Follow the procedure:

1. Insert the empty flash disk.
2. Power on the machine
3. Press ‘CTRL+ALT+DEL’ when the following window is displayed. The message ‘non
system disk’ or ‘disk error’. Replace and press any key when ‘ready’ is displayed.
This happens when there is no or empty flash disk (please check if there is no
floppy disk in the disk drive).
SCREEN 16-15
4. The factory default setting is such that the machine starts from a flash memory
disk. Change the system BIOS so that the machine start from the CD-rom. When
the following message appears on the second line from the bottom, press the
[DEL] key.
SCREEN 16-16

Machine Software
5. Wait for a while after pressing the [DEL] key. The system BIOS setup screen
appears.
SCREEN 16-17
6. Line up the cursor with [BIOS FEATURES SETUP] and press the [Enter] key.
SCREEN 16-18
7. Change [Boot sequence}, from [C only] to [CDROM, C,A].
After changing:
SCREEN 16-19

Machine Software
8. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the machine.

The CD-ROM is labelled with ‘VGOS System CD (E)’.
FIGURE 16-1
9. Press [ESC] to return to the initial screen.

Line up the cursor with [SAVE & EXIT SETUP] and press the [Enter] key.
When the check message appears press [Y] or [Enter] key.
The mounter will restart.
SCREEN 16-20

Machine Software
10.When the ‘EasyRestore’ screen appears as shown below, select [Continue… .].
SCREEN 16-21
11.When the check message ‘operation system will be restored to the default
settings’ appears, select ‘Yes’.
SCREEN 16-22

Machine Software
12.Files will be automatically copied (this will take about 10 to 15 minutes). If you
select ‘Cancel’ during copying and then return to the installation, an error message
appears.
SCREEN 16-23
13.Now the SID has to be set and the machine has to be restarted. The serial
number should be up to 5 (for NT 1.04 or lower) or 7 (for NT 1.05 or higher)
alphanumeric characters (Machine ID). After entering the serial number, if a
message appears in the center of the screen and is frozen there, select ‘Y’ twice.
NOTE: Choose a unique number that has not been used before in an other XII
machine. This to avoid problems when the machine is linked to a network.
SCREEN 16-24

Machine Software
14.After a while the machine the machine will restart automatically.
SCREEN 16-25
15.Now the BIOS setting has to be changed again to startup from flash disk again.
After the machine has started when the following message appears on the
second line from the bottom, press the [DEL] key.
SCREEN 16-26

Machine Software
16.Wait for a while after pressing the [DEL] key. The system BIOS setup screen then
appears. Line up the cursor with [BIOS FEATURES SETUP] and press the [Enter]
key. Change the [Boot Sequence], from [CDROM,C,A] to [C only].
SCREEN 16-27
17.Use the same procedure as step 9 to complete the change. Windows will startup
after ‘Save & Exit’ has been completed. Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM- drive.
18.A short-cut error occurs immediately after Windows has started. Select OK.
SCREEN 16-28
NOTE: In case the system found an other .exe program file a message appears that
the system wants to use that other .exe file instead of VgWmain.exe. Select
”No” and press enter then.
19.Now the VGOS application software has to be installed. Restart the machine and
follow the procedure as explained in paragraph 16.2.4 ‘Installation of New
Version VGOS application software’. The only difference now is that you have to
select the correct machine (YV100Xg=Topaz-XII Series) and select the type of
machine (SF or FNC). The software has to be installed in directory D:\Machine.
20.Restore the system data backup disk.
21.Restore the PCB data
22.Restore the component and mark database.
23.Restart the machine.

Machine Software
16.2.10.2 Windows NT Upgrade

Follow the next procedure to upgrade the current Windows NT version installed on
the machine. The current version Windows NT can be checked in VGOS in the
“ Version” menu in the system box.
NOTE: Make sure the machine is disconnected from any network before
performing an upgrade.
Always make sure that you have the following at hand before starting the upgrade:
■ Backup of system data
■ Backup of component and mark database
■ Backup of PCB data
■ Application VGOS software latest released version
■ Operating system embedded Window NT and RTX.
There is a relation between the NT version and the upgrade procedure to be
followed.
In case NT 1.03 or higher has been installed:
1. Start machine and disable “ Write Filter” (see section 16.2.12)
2. When the Assembléon startup window appears (see screen 16-1) press the
“ Windows mode” button
3. Enter the VGOS administrator password
4. Insert the Windows NT installation disk in the Cdrom drive
5. Select “ Start – Programs – System – Version up”
6. Select “ English” and after that the Installation Shield Wizard starts
7. Press “ Next” at the Welcome window of the Installation Shield Wizard for KGA
System software
8. Press “ Yes” at the license agreement window. Then the Windows NT upgrade
installation starts.
9. After the installation has been completed press “ Yes” to restart the machine.
The upgrade has been completed now.
10.Check in the “ Version” menu of VGOS if the correct Windows NT version has been
installed.
In case NT 1.01 or 1.02 has been installed:
1. Start machine and disable “ Write Filter” (see section 16.2.12)
2. Logon as NT administrator (see section 16.2.11.5)
3. When the Assembleon startup window appears (see screen 16-1) press the
“ Windows” mode button

Machine Software
4. Enter the VGOS administrator password

5. Insert the Windows NT installation disk in the Cdrom drive
6. Select the “ Start – Run” menu and select the Z:\setup.exe file
SCREEN 16-29
7. Follow step 6 until 10 from the “ NT 1.03 or higher” procedure.
16.2.11 Windows Login

The VGOS software of the XII series machine is restricting the user interface to avoid
any damage that can occur by using Window commands inadvertently. However
when you need to change the settings of Windows system it is needed to have
access to the complete interface. Therefore it is necessary to execute the Adminis-
trator login.
16.2.11.2 Differences between User Login and Administrator Login
When you normally boot up the machine, the system automatically starts as “ User
login”. When you boot up the machine as “ User login” , the C:/ drive, control panel
and so on do not appear and are protected. If you boot up the machine as “Admin-
istrator login” , all functions of Windows NT are available and visible.
16.2.11.3 User Login Restrictions
After User login the following restrictions are valid:
Start menu “Shut down”, “Logoff”, “Setting” and “Find” are not displayed on start
menu. Some of short cut menu’s on “Program” are not displayed.
Desktop menu Icons on desktop are not displayed.
Context menu (Right click) Context menu when you click right button of mouse at desktop or task bar
are not displayed
C: drive Directory structure of the C: drive is not displayed.
Ctrl + Alt + Del command System menu when you press “Ctrl + Alt + Del” is not displayed.
Write filter Write filter to protect the C:/ drive is enabled (if the Yshutdown command is
given at the proper moment)
TABLE 16-3

Machine Software
16.2.11.4 Administrator Login

After the administrator login is carried out the following actions are possible:
■ It is possible to change the settings to connect the machine to customer’s
network.
■ It is possible to do a version up of the operating software (Windows NT)
■ “Administrator login” is selected during version up the application software
(VGOS).
16.2.11.5 Procedure to Boot Up as “ Administrator Login”
Perform the following steps to login as Administrator:
1. Switch on the machine.
2. Press “ Shift” key when the color of the screen display changes from “ Blue” to
“ Green”.
Continue to press the “ Shift” key till the login dialog window appears. When the
time to press “ Shift” key is passed (5 sec), the machine is booting up normally
and the procedure must be tried again.
3. Input “Administrator” as user name and “Administrator” as password.
CAUTION
CAUTION: Software distinguishes between capital and non-capital letters.

4. Windows NT is starting without any restriction.
Machine application (VGOS) is starting normally when booting up as “Adminis-
trator login”.
5. When you shut down the machine, select the “YShutdown ” command (also
when VGOS has been started).
CAUTION
CAUTION: ■ If you shut down the machine without selecting “ YShutdown” , the next
time the machine is not booting up correctly.
■ When you are logged in as “ Administrator” the “ Write Filter” is still
enabled! So no write actions are possible to the C:/ drive.
16.2.12 Disable “ Write Filter”

The application software VGOS of the XII Series machine is running on the
Embedded Windows NT 4.0 operating system. To avoid damage of this operating
system or accidental disabling of the machine start up, the drive where this

Machine Software
operating system is installed on (C:/ drive also called system drive) is protected by
a so called “ Write Filter”. This “ Write filter” is a function of the Embedded Windows
NT operating system. This function inhibits the file writing function. So, if a write
command to this C:/ drive is given, the “ Write Filter” is activated and apparently
the file is written to the drive, but in practice it is not. With other words, the
operating system thinks that the file is written but in reality it is not. This means
that when you need to change some settings of the operating system, you need to
remove this “ Write Filter” temporary.
16.2.12.2 Drive Structure of VGOS
The flash disk of 256MB of the XII Series machines is separated into two drives; C:\
and D:\ drive. The C:\ drive is used for the Windows NT operating system and is the
boot drive. The D:\ drive is used for the application software VGOS. The machine
data, PCB data and so on are stored on this drive.
16.2.12.3 When do we Need to Disable the “ Write Filter”
In the following situations the “ write filter” needs to be disabled:
■ If a connecting must be set-up to connect the XII series machine to the
customer’s network system.
■ If a version up the system software (Windows NT) is needed.
■ When changes of the Windows NT system settings are needed.
16.2.12.4 Procedure to Disable the “ Write Filter”
1. Boot up the machine.
2. When the message “ Push Space Key” appears on the monitor, press the “ SPACE”
key till the display changes.
3. Select “ Disable Write Filter” by using the up/down arrow keys, than press the
“ ENTER” key. The system will continue booting up now with the “ write filter”
disabled.
4. In order to activate the “ write filter” again it is needed to shut down the
machine using the “ YShutdown” function located in the program directory. (is
also valid when VGOS on).
CAUTION
CAUTION: If you shut down the machine without selecting “ YShutdown” , the next
time the machine is not booting up correctly (passwords needed).
When you start the machine with the removed “ Write Filter” , some functions of
Windows are restricted (Control panel is disappeared, etc.). These restrictions
can be removed if the procedure “ login as Administrator” (see section 16.2.11) is
followed.

Machine Software
16.2.13 Change System.time

When the machine is shipped from the factory, the time that is displayed in
Windows and VGOS is the time at the factory. When the machine is installed, it is
necessary to change the “ Regional settings” and “ Time Zone” related to the area
(country) the machine is installed.
16.2.13.2 Changing the “ Regional Settings” Setting
1. Remove the “ Write Filter” (see 16.2.12) and boot up the machine as “Adminis-
trator login” (see 16.2.11).
2. Select “ Regional settings” in the “ Control panel” of “ Settings” , then click the
“ Regional settings” tab twice.
3. Select the “ language” regarding the language used at the customer site.
4. Check the other settings in the “ Regional settings” menu.
If the characters are not displayed correctly, select “ English (U.S.)”.
16.2.13.3 Change the “ Time Zone” Setting
1. Remove the “ Write Filter” and boot up the machine as “Administrator login”.
2. Select “ Date and Time” in the “ Control panel” of “ Settings”.
3. Check the current time and if this time is not correct, do not change the current
time in this mode. Change it in “ Time Zone”.
4. Select your time zone in “ Time Zone”.
5. If your time zone is available to select ”Automatically adjust clock for daylight
saving changes” , set it to available.
6. Select the “Apply” button to activate the adjustments
7. Check the time that is shown in “ Date & Time”.
8. If this is not correct after changing it in “ Time Zone” , it is needed to adjust it in
this mode.
NOTE: From the later NT versions (1.04 onwards) it is possible to change date and
time by only double clicking on the time indication (right bottom side of
Windows) and then adjust it.

Machine Software
16.2.14 Network Connection

The XII Series machine can be connected to other computer systems via a data
communication network. For this purpose the XII Series are equipped with a LAN
(local Area Network) card inside the MCX control box. Two possible connections can
be set-up. First there can be a stand-alone network between one or more PC’s and
one or more XII Series machines. The second possibility is an open network between
one or more PC’s and one or more XII Series machines using the customers own
network system.
To setup a network system, a number of actions need to be done on the XII Series
machine as well as the stand-alone PC(‘s). Below some procedures are given how to
build the network.
REMARK: When the PC’s and XII Series machine needs to be connected via an open
network, the customer should built this at their own responsibility.
Assembléon will not take any responsibility for any problems and/or faults
on the customer’s network.
16.2.14.2 The Network Connections
If you connect one stand-alone PC and one XII series machine, one single cross cable
(with UTP connector) can be used to establish this connection. Connect the cable
from the LAN connector on the system board in the MCX box to the LAN connector
on the network card in the off-line PC as indicated in figure 16-2.
CROSS CABLE
FIGURE 16-2
If you connect one stand-alone PC and several XII series machines, a straight cable
(with UTP connector) and hub port unit need to be used to establish the intercon-

Machine Software
nection. Route the various cables from the XII Series machines to the hub port and
from the hub port to the off-line PC, see figure 16-3.
OFF-LINE PC
STRAIGHT CABLE
HUB PORT STRAIGHT CABLE
XII MACHINES
FIGURE 16-3
It is possible to use several hub port units to create this interconnection (needed if
more PC’s need to be connected). This interconnection is called a “cascade
connection”. If you prepare a hub port for cascading, the straight cables are used
for connection between each hub port and between the hub port and PC (‘s), see
figure 16-4.

Machine Software
REMARK: ■ A cross cable is a cable where the input pin (1) at one side is connected
with the output pin (2) at the other side (lines are crossed).
■ A straight cable is a cable where the pin 1 or 2 or 3 at one side is connected
with the pin 1 or 2 or 3 at the other side (lines are not crossed but straight).
Each PC or XII Series machine connected to each other needs to have his own
unique IP (Internet Protocol) address.
STRAIGHT CABLE
STRAIGHT CABLE
FIGURE 16-4

Machine Software
16.2.14.3 Machine Setting

All machines shipped from the factory have the same “ IP network address” setting.
So if you connect the machines without changing the “ IP address” , communication
is not possible because of a collision of the “ IP address”. To prevent this problem,
you need to change the “ IP address” of each individual machine. This can be done
as follows:
1. Disable the “ Write (protect) Filter” by booting up the machine with “Adminis-
trator login”.
2. Select the "Window Mode" when the initial screen with the machine picture
appears.
3. Input the password for administrator, then select “ OK” button.
4. Select “ Network” settings in Control panel.
5. Select “ TCP/IP” in network protocol of “ Protocol” tab, then select “ Properties”.
6. The initial setting of the “ IP address” for the XII Series machines is “ 192. 168. 0. 0”.
If the “ IP address” of the PC connected to the machine is set to “ 192. 168. 0. 0.” ,
the first machine should be set as “ 192. 168. 0. 1” , the second machine should be
set as “ 192. 168. 0. 2” , etc. So each network interface on the PC and the XII Series
machine should have a different and unique “ IP address”. It is also possible to
change the IP address in VmSpec (sub window “ Communication Setting” ).
7. After the settings are made it is possible to test the network connection by
means of the PING command. Open for this purpose a DOS-window on the stand-
alone PC and type in the command: PING 192.168.0.1 (192.168.0.1 is the IP
address of the first XII Series machine). If the connection is Ok, a reply is shown
in the DOS window.
8. The same can be done on the XII Series machine but then typing in the DOS
window: PING 192.168.0.0 which is the address of the stand-alone PC.
9. To enable the write protect filter again the machine should be shut down with
the command “ Yshutdown” which can be found in the “ Program Files” directory.
16.2.14.4 Network Drive Setting
With the shared resources of the network it is possible to set a network drive. This
is convenient if it is difficult to find the computer name that is displayed on
network computer because there are many computer names, or the level of the
directory is too deep.
1. Select the “ Software setting” button in “ Setup”.
2. Select the “ Network setting” button.
3. Select the “ Connection” button.
4. “ Drive” is set to the network drive that you want to connect, and “ Path” is set to
the UNC name.
UNC is the name that is used in the network and is a combined computer name
and shared resource name.

Machine Software
The format of UNC name is: \\(network computer name)\(shared resource name)
For example, \\ASSEMBLEON\GEM means shared resource name is “ GEM” and
network computer name is “ASSEMBLEON”.
5. “ User name” is set to user name that login to off-line PC.
6. Select “ OK” to connect to network.
NOTE: The here selected folder is the default “ Board data” folder.
Now the machine is automatically connected to each network drive after rebooting
the machine. If you want to disconnect the network, select the “ Disconnect” button
in “ Network setting”.
16.2.14.5 How to Use Network
After the network connection is made, it is possible to load or access data files to
the machine directly from the stand-alone or off-line PC, and it is possible to use it
as a library function.
■ Edit PCB data from machine on an off-line PC.
It is possible to select and edit the PCB data from the machine that is saved on
an off-line PC.
Before executing this function, the following actions are needed:
1. Set the folder or directory with the saved PCB data on the off-line PC to “ shared
resources”.
2. Select the “ Folder” button in “ Board” (to select a special folder) or “ Network” in
“ Board” (to select the default set folder).
3. Search for the network computer name (UNC name) of the off-line PC in the tree
of network computer.
4. If the message to input the user name and password appears, insert the user
name and password that is needed to login on the off-line PC.
5. Access to the folder that is set in step 1 and select the target PCB data in that
folder.
With the procedure above it is possible to select and open the PCB data from the
machine in an off-line PC. But this PCB data is not copied to the machine, so if you
edit this PCB data, the original data that existed on the off-line PC is edited directly.
CAUTION
CAUTION: If the operating system of your off-line PC is Win95, Win98 or Windows-

Me, the user name for login to the off-line PC does not exist. In this case,
when you boot up the PC and login to the off-line PC, the user name for
login is “ Administrator” and the password for login is “ Administrator” .
Then when you access to off-line PC from machine, the message to input
the user name and password does not appear.

Machine Software
16.2.14.6 Network Connection Specifications

There are several kinds of network protocols. The XII Series machines use network
protocol as is shown below. Do not use other protocols, as they do not work. Also
given are the specification of the hardware network connection and the initial
settings of the TCP/IP protocol.
LAN interface Base on IEEE820.3u (100BASE-TX), Base on IEEE802.3 (10BASE-T)
Transfer speed 100Mbps(100BASE-TX), 10Mbps(10BASE-T)
Connector spec. RJ-45 type 8 points connector
TABLE 16-4 Hardware specification
■ Full/Half-Duplex type.
■ Category 5 UTP cable.
■ Max. communication cable length 100m (IEEE902.3(u)).
■ 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T Auto negotiation function.
Communication protocol:
■ TCP/IP
■ NetBEUI
IP address 192.168.0.0
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Gateway default setting 0.0.0.0
DHCP Not use
DNS Not use
TABLE 16-5 Initial setting of TCP/IP
16.2.15 Login Recovery Procedure

This procedure can be used when it is not possible to log into VGOS anymore (on the
highest level). This can e.g. happen when you have forgotten or set the wrong
password for the administrator user.
1. Logon into Windows NT
(See also 16.2.11 for this)
• Switch on power
• While the machine is booting up invoke the start-up procedure at the line:
‘Press spacebar to invoke hardware profile / Last known good menu’.
• Press <spacebar> and select Disable ’write filter’ and press <Enter>.

Machine Software
• After the blue screen changes into the green workspace, press <SHIFT>
button and hold for 5 seconds.
• The start-up procedure will be invoked and the Windows login dialog appears.
• Type as User Name: Administrator (with capital A) Type as Password: xxxx
and press <Enter>.
• After the Windows start up it starts automatically VGOS. Press <Windows
Mode> button within 3 sec as shown in picture below. Press the Ok button at
the administrator’s Password dialog and now you have full access to all
installed Windows NT programs.
SCREEN 16-30
2. Open Windows NT explorer and exchange files

• Go to Start ->Programs -> Windows NT Explorer
• Open the folder: D:\Machine\System
• Delete the file: VtOperatorDef.txt or rename it to VTOperatorDef_old.txt
• Copy the file VtOperatorDef.txt (ask your regional service center for this file)
to D:\Machine\System
3. Logout Windows NT
Go to Start - > Programs -> YShutDown. Next time you shut down and reboot the system
automatically VGOS will be started.
CAUTION
CAUTION: DO NOT SELECT Start -> Shut Down otherwise every next time you boot up
the system there will be asked for the Administrators password!!

Machine Software
16.3 PCB File Handling

This chapter describes the issues related to the PCB program files of VGOS.
The Board Explorer (working area of the Setup main menu) utility is the best tool to
handle the PCB program files.
SCREEN 16-31
With this utility programs easily can be copied from a certain directory on the flash
disk to an other directory or to a floppy disk (PCB program backup). Perform this as
follow:
1. Select the program to be copied in the left window (the program will mark blue)
SCREEN 16-32

Machine Software
2. Choose the correct directory (or disk drive) in the right window where the
program(s) have to be copied to. In the example this is A:\No1. This can be done
by selecting the ‘FD’ (Floppy) button.
SCREEN 16-33
3. Press the ‘L.to R.’ button to be sure that the selected programs are copied from
the left to the right window directory selection.
4. Press the copy button to copy the selected files, press the move button to move
the selected file (the selected files will be removed from the source). Confirm the
action at the next window.
SCREEN 16-34

Machine Software
16.4 Machine Configuration

The machine configuration list is located in the VmSpec application. Depending on
the configuration of the system it is possible to disable or enable parts and options
of the machine.
16.4.1 Machine Information

Press in the Main Area the ‘Machine’ button to display all machine configuration
parameters and machine data. A separate program is started to show all these data.
SCREEN 16-35
By selecting one of the machine sections in the system-tree (left window), in the
right window the relating parameters are displayed. In the next paragraph the
different main sections are described.
The machine information section exists of 3 parts and describes parameters relating
to the machine configuration (options, etc.). The hatched fields are the default
settings.

Machine Software
16.4.1.1 Option Setting:
SCREEN 16-36
3DUDPHWHU 6HOHFWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

0HVVDJH Japanese Japanese messages
English English messages
XXX Special other language (do not select if special language is
not installed). Only available with special software.
6LPSOH(GLWLRQ Full Itms All part information is shown
Primal Itms Some part information not shown
56&08 Ignore No communication
Normal Standard communication
With CMU report As with ‘Normal’ but condition reports are sent as well (for
PCS software)
3LFN3RV&RUUHFWLRQ Use Only possible for systems with No simultaneous pick-up
action (Emerald,Topaz).
None Used in XII machines
3URGXFWLRQ/RJ Use Records the machine logging and errors during running
None No production log created
Use (with flashrom) Records the machine logging and errors on flashrom during
running
&RQYH\RU6SHF Line If a production line exists
Manual Board stops at output sensor
Manual return Board stops at input sensor
Demo return Board is returned to entrance and back to mount position
Demo fixed Board is fixed on mounting position but released and
clamped. The board will not move.
&RQYH\RU$XWR:LGWK Exist Automatic width adjustment exists (XII Series)
None No automatic width adjustment exists
3UHFHGH3LFNVHQVRU Exist Precede pick sensors are available
None

Machine Software

0XOWLGHWHFWLRQ With Calib In FINE mode placements, spindle expenditure is included
in the correction algorithm (Remark: decreases system out-
put)
Standard Standard vision
$GMXVW0RGH None Setting during normal production
Adjust mode 1 Only for factory and calibration use (recognition of light chip
components)
Adjust mode 2 Only for factory and calibration use (recognition of glass
components)
Adjust mode 3 Not used
0DUN/LJKWLQJ&RQWURO None Fiducial lighting control
Exist
'XPSVWDWLRQ None No dump station installed
Exist Dump station attached on the feeder plate.
6SHFLDO)XQFWLRQ None
Type-A
Type-B
TABLE 16-6
16.4.1.2 Installation Setting:
SCREEN 16-37

Machine Software

6XE0DFKLQH7\SH Topaz-XII FNC
Topaz-XII SF
Topaz-XiII FNC
Topaz-XiII SF
Opal-XII
6HULDO1R - Serial number of machine (FF…….)
0DFKLQH,' - Identification number of the machine
8SSHUKDQGOLQJ Gate out
Smema
Advanced gate
/RZHUKDQGOLQJ Gate in
Smema
Advanced gate
3DUWV,QIRPRGH V2.0 Compatible Normal use
V3.0 Compatible Used during running AMF
0RXQW,QIRPRGH V2.0 Compatible Normal use
V3.0 Compatible Used during running AMF
&RQYH\RU:LGWK$[LV Normal Automatic width exists
Reverse Not applicable for X II machines.
&RQYH\RUGLUHFWLRQ L->R Left to right conveyor movement
R->L Right to left conveyor movement
([LVW6WRSSHU None The exit stopper does not exist in the machine
Exist The exit stopper exists in the machine
%XIIHU&RQY7\SH None No buffer conveyor
A-Type Buffer with external tray changer
B-Type Stand alone buffer conveyor
%XIIHU&RQY:LGWK$[LV None No buffer conveyor width “W” axis
Normal Front side fixed (fixed side is door side)
Reverse Rear side fixed (fixed side is door side)
7UD\FKDQJHUW\SH None No tray defined
Ext. TC-A External – TC for 50 pallets
Ext. TC-B External – TC for 32 pallets (small LCS)
Ext. TC-C External – TC with double shutter (for X II Series)
Auto. TC-A Automatic – TC for 27 pallets (ATS27)
Auto. TC-B Automatic – TC for 10 pallets (ATS20)
Auto. TC-C Automatic – TC for 20 pallets (ATS20)
Auto. TC-D Automatic – TC
Wafer TC-A
Magazine TC-A
Magazine TC-B
7UD\FKDQJHU7UY$[LV Normal Normal front right into main machine
Reverse
7UD\FKDQJHUSRVLWLRQ Front Normal position front right side
Rear
/DVHU$OLJQPHQW None No laser alignment module attached to the head
Exist Laser alignment attached to the head (only Eclipse and
Emerald)

Machine Software

1R]]OHVWDWLRQ None No nozzle station is available.
A Table exist Nozzle station is available.
B Table exist
AB table exist
6OLGH3ODWH)(6 None No FES20 installed
Non stop type ---- do not select ----
EMG type FES20 has been installed
&RSODQDULW\VHQVRU None No coplanarity checker is available.
A Table exist Coplanarity checker has been installed into the machine
(option).
B Table exist
AB table exist
'RWVWDWLRQ None
Exist Dot station has been installed into the machine. (Applica-
ble for the dispensers)
56H[WHQVLRQ None
Exist An external RS232 board is installed/
3URJUDPPDEOH3XVKXS Exist (Option)
None
'LVSHQVHGDWD Appear Show dispensing data (only applicable for the dispens-
ers)
Disappear
2SWLRQ(GLWLRQ Exist Some option configuration parameters (XY-Speed, Pick
sequence, datum angle and sequence (in Mark info))
cannot be changed
None
6FUHHQVDYHU None No screensaver will be activated
1 min. Screensaver will be activated after 1 minute
0XOWL0$&6 No Use Head markers are not checked
Multi MACS 1 Only head 1 marker is checked
Multi MACS 2 Only head 2 marker is checked
Multi MACS 1&2 Head 1 and 2 markers are checked
&RRUG0$&6 No use MACS adjustment coordinates are not used
Use MACS adjustment coordinates are used.
)HHGHUJURXS FV type When Full Vision feeders are used
CL Type When only CL feeder are used
)(6)LGXFLDO$OLJQPHQW Use When FES20Xi has been installed. Machine will check
fiducial on cart.
No use
/RFDWHSLQ Exist A locate pin has not been installed into the machine
None A locate pin has not been installed into the machine.
TABLE 16-7

Machine Software
16.4.1.3 Communication Setting

These screen describes several settings in regards to a possible ethernet connection
(see 16.2.14).
SCREEN 16-38
16.4.1.4 Special Settings

Not yet used, only in case of special software.
16.4.1.5 Default Settings
Not yet used.


SM Topaz Xii Opal Xii

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

SM Topaz Xii Opal Xii

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Service Manual

0$18$/7,7/( 0$18$/180%(5 3$180%(56

Assembléon Customer Services maintains a Subscribe first to access this information. So

4022 591 92064 Service Manual Topaz-XII Series/Opal-XII

4022 591 92064 Service Manual

Service Manual 4022 591 92064

4022 591 92064 Service Manual

Service Manual 4022 591 92064

4022 591 92064 Service Manual

Service Manual 4022 591 92064

4022 591 92064 Service Manual

Service Manual 4022 591 92064

4022 591 92064 Service Manual

Service Manual 4022 591 92064

4022 591 92064 Service Manual

Service Manual 4022 591 92064

4022 591 92064 Service Manual

Service Manual 4022 591 92064

4022 591 92064 Service Manual

Service Manual 4022 591 92064

4022 591 92064 Service Manual

Service Manual 4022 591 92064

4022 591 92064 Service Manual

1.2 General Introduction of the Service Manual

1.3 Chapter Overview

6DIHW\ This chapter gives specific information on all

6\VWHPFRQILJXUDWLRQ This chapter shows the tree of the machine

6\VWHPGHVFULSWLRQ This chapter gives an explanatory system

6\VWHPWURXEOHVKRRWLQJ This chapter deals with all information availa-

Service Manual 4022 591 92064

&KDSWHU 7LWOH &RQWHQWV

5HTXLUHGWRROVDQGPDWHULDOV This chapter lists all tools and materials

6SDUHSDUWVOLVW This chapter shows an overview of all spare

0RGXOHGHVFULSWLRQV These chapters give an overview of the different

4022 591 92064 Service Manual

1.4 Option Manuals

Service Manual 4022 591 92064

2.2 Basic Rules

2.3 Safety Standard

4022 591 92064 Service Manual

TABLE 2-2 Other applicable electrical safety standards

2.4 Cautionary Remarks

REFERENCE: Gives useful information related to the machine operation.

CAUTION: GIVES IMPORTANT INFORMATION TO PREVENT ANY DAMAGE TO THE MACHINE

EMERGENCY: Indicates to press first the emergency button before continuing.

Service Manual 4022 591 92064

2.5 Warning Stickers

'DQJHU Class I laser

'RQ·WWRXFK Very sensitive part, do not touch.

'DQJHU Do not enter because of moving parts.

2.6 ESD Precaution

2.7 Noise Level

4022 591 92064 Service Manual

2.9 Hazard Materials

Service Manual 4022 591 92064

2.9.3 NSK Grease No 1

MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET

1. Identification of the substance/preparation

l Harmful by inhalation and if swallowed.

Skin : Remove contaminated clothes as soon as possible. Remove residue

4022 591 92064 Service Manual

5. Fire fighting measures

Fire-extinguisher : carbon dioxide, extinguishing powder, water spray,

6\VWHPFRQILJXUDWLRQ This chapter shows the tree of the machine

6\VWHPGHVFULSWLRQ This chapter gives an explanatory system

5HTXLUHGWRROVDQGPDWHULDOV This chapter lists all tools and materials

'DQJHU Class I laser

'RQ·WWRXFK Very sensitive part, do not touch.

'DQJHU Do not enter because of moving parts.